
01ass_:: — I 



LATIN GRAMMAR, 

CONTAINING ; 

PART I. 

THE ETON GRAMMAR, 

REVISED AND CORRECTED ; 

PART II. 

A SECOND OR LARGER GRAMMAR, 

IN ENGLISH, 
FOR THE HIGHER CLASSES IN SCHOOLS, ETC. 



BY 

THE REV. J. T. WHITE, A.M. 

OF C. C. C. OXFORD, 

JUNIOR UPPER MASTER OF CHRIST'S HOSPITAL, LONDON; 
EDITOR OF XENOPHON'S ANABASIS, ETC. 



LONDON: 

LONGMAN, BROWN, GREEN, AND LONGMANS. 

1852. 















London : 

Spottiswoodes and Shwy, 

New-street- Sqmare. 



PREFACE. 



Those who are acquainted with the respective values 
of the various elementary works employed in this 
country for imparting a knowledge of the rudiments of 
Latin will not be backward in awarding a very high 
place to that form of Edward the Sixth's Grammar, 
i known as the Eton Latin Grammar. So great, 
; indeed, are its merits in many respects, that not a few 
of those engaged in tuition have long looked for such 
a revision of it as would render it more extensively 
serviceable. Their hopes, however, not having been 
hitherto realized, the Editor has betaken himself to the 
task, and has brought to its execution the results of the 
observations and convictions of a long course of teach- 
ing in a very large school. 

The object, then, proposed to himself by the Editor 
has been, so to remodel and extend the Eton Grammar 
as to produce a work adapted to the use of beginners, 
and, at the same time, calculated to meet the require- 
ments of boys who, having mastered the first principles 
of the language, need additional information for the 
guidance of their studies. It seemed to him that this 
would be best obtained by dividing it into two parts, 
each having reference to the especial case of those for 
whom it is designed, — yet so blended together, both in 
method and arrangement, as to form but one Grammar, 
Part I. is the Old Eton Grammar, revised and cor- 
A 2 



IV PREFACE. 

reeled throughout. In the Accidence clearer definitions 
have been given, and in many places a more lucid ar- 
rangement adopted. The Propria quce maiibus, Qua 
genus, As inprcesenti, and Prosody have also been altered, 
where it appeared either needful or desirable, in such 
a way that the main plan of the work remains un- 
changed, while it is hoped that here also a greater 
amount of perspicuity has been obtained. 

It is, however, in the Syntax that the principal altera- 
tions will be found. The Editor has, in past years, 
often observed the perplexity of beginners in entering 
upon this part of their studies. In many instances the 
rules were too long ; in some, the principle under state- 
ment was by no means clearly enunciated; while in 
the deviations from the main rules there was much 
utterly incomprehensible to a child, and which, if it 
had to be committed to the memory at the outset of his 
career, incumbered his mind with what he did not need 
at the time, and what, after all, was quite inadequate 
for his wants when he had made any progress. In 
order, therefore, to simplify this portion of the work, 
and to make it what it professes to be — an Introduction 
to the Latin Tongue — he has thrown out all that was 
net needed for direct parsing: from the remainder he 
has taken away what appeared to obscure rather than 
elucidate the matters treated of : while, further still, he 
has here and there introduced some new rule that was 
required, and occasionally corrected what were mani- 
festly wrong views of the structure of the language. 

Moreover, bearing in mind the wants of beginners he 
has added, at the close of the First Part, Directions for 
Construing and Parsing, and thrown together some 



PREFACE. V 

few of the principal points to be observed in writing 
Hexameters and Pentameters. 

Into Part IL, beyond a developement of the funda- 
mental rules given in Part L, many wholly new subjects 
have been introduced. What these are will be seen by 
a reference to the Table of Contents. Yet the Editor 
would invite attention to the information supplied re- 
specting the powers of the Moods, and the succession 
of Tenses ; and, also, to the very great enlargement of 
the Prosody. In the latter, the various metres in use 
among the Latin Poets have been so fully explained, 
that writing according to their correct prosodial struc- 
ture is rendered a matter not difficult of attainment. 

There is neither an attempt nor a desire to assert 
that, in what has thus been done, an explanation will 
be found for every individual idiomatic expression and 
every isolated peculiarity of the language. The very 
size of the book would alone refute the claim to a 
universal solution of difficulties, if it were put forth. 
Yet it is both hoped and believed, that sufficient ma- 
terials have been collected for enabling the student to 
read the works of the Latin writers with much critical 
accuracy, and with corresponding profit. 

Christ's Hospital, 
June, 1852. 



CONTENTS, 



PART I. 



Page 

Letters 1 
Parts of Speech 2 
Of a Noun, &c. - - -2 
Declensions of Nouns Substan- 
tive 3 
Declension of Nouns Adjective 1 
Comparison of Adjectives - 14 
Of a Pronoun - - - 1 7 
Of a Verb - 21 
Of the Moods - 22 
Of the Tenses - - . 23 
Of Gerunds and Supines - 23 
Of Participles - - - 24 
Of Numbers and Persons - 24 
The Verb Sum - 24 
Conjugation of Verbs Active - 27 
" Passive 41 
Deponent Verbs - - - 53 
Irregular do. - - - 54 
Defective do. - - - 73 
Impersonal do. - - 79 
Of an Adverb - - - 79 
Of a Conjunction - - - 79 
Of a Preposition - - - 79 
Of an Interjection - - 80 
Propria quje Mambus - 81 
Qu^e Genus - - - 87 
As in Prmsenti - - - 90 
Syntax - 101 
Nominative Case and Verb - 101 
Substantive and Adjective - 102 
Relative and Antecedent - 102 



Page 

Substantives - - - 103 

Adjectives — Genitive after - 104 

" Dative do. - 105 

" Accusative do. - 105 

" Ablative do. - 106 

Pronouns - - - - 107 

Verbs — Nominative after - 107 

" Genitive do. - - 108 

" Dative do. - - 109 

" Accusative do. - 1 1 1 

" Ablative do. - - 112 

Infinitive Mood - - - 1 14 

Gerunds and Supines - - 114 

Gerunds - - - - 115 

Supines - - - - 116 

Participles - - - - 116 

Impersonal Verbs - - 117 

Time 117 

Space of Place - - - 118 
Names of Places - - - 118 
Adverbs - - - - 119 
Conjunctions - 120 
Prepositions - - - 120 
Interjections - - - 121 
Prosody - - - - 123 
Propria quje Maribus con- 
strued - - - - 132 
Quje Genus do. - - - 141 
As in Prjesenti do. - - 146 
Syntax do. - - - - 161 
Prosody do. - - - 185 



PART II. 



Letters 
Syllables - 
Pronunciation 
Inflection 
Derivation - 



- 206 

- 206 

- 207 

- 207 

208 



Declension of Nouns Substan- 
tive - 208 

Irregular Nouns - - - 218 

Nouns with different meanings 
in singular and plural - 220 

Adjectives - - - - 221 



Numeral Adjectives - - 223 
Roman Numeral Figures - 224 
Fractions - - - - 225 
Pronouns - - - - 225 
Explanation of Terms used in 

Syntax - - - - 226 
Syntax - - - - 227 
Nominative Case and Verb - 227 
The Substantive and Adjective 229 
Relative and Demonstrative 

Pronouns - 233 



Vlll 



CONTENTS. 



Page 
Substantive, Genitive after the 236 
Apposition - - - - 238 
Genitive and Ablative of the 

Quality - 239 

Adjective — Genitive after the 239 
" Dative do. - - 241 

" Accusative do. - 243 

" Ablative do. - 243 

Pronouns - - - 246 

Verb — Genitive after the - 249 
" Dative do. - - 251 

" Accusative do. - - 254 
" Ablative do. - - 258 
Tenses - - - - 262 

Paraphrastic Conjugation - 264 
Tenses of Subjunctive Mood - 265 
Succession of Tenses in Depen- 
dent Clauses - - - 265 
Indicative Mood - - - 267 
Imperative Mood - - - 267 
" ne used with 269 

" Paraphrased 269 

Subjunctive Mood - - - 270 
Hypothetical and Conditional 
Clauses, and those contain- 
ing an Inference or Conclu- 
sion - 270 
Independent Clauses - - 271 
Dependent do. - - - 273 
Indirect Questions - - 276 
Relative Clauses - - - 276 
Infinitive Mood - - - 280 
" as subject - - - 280 
" without subject expressed 280 
" with subject expressed - 283 
" Historical - - - 287 
" in indirect Questions - 287 
" Verbs with Inf. and Subj. 288 
" Various Uses of Infinitive 290 
" Fore or futurum esse, ut - 292 
Gerunds and Gerundives - 293 
Supines - - . 295 
Participles - - - - 296 
Impersonal Verbs - - 298 

Time 300 

Space of Place - - - 301 
Names of Places - 302 

Adverbs - 303 

Particles of Time - 305 

" Interrogative - - 307 



/-. . . Pa s e 

Conjunctions - 309 

Prepositions - - - - 312 
Interjections - - ~ 313 

Explanation of Grammatical 

and Rhetorical Figures - 314 
Prosody, Divisions of - - 322 
Tone or Accent - - - 323 
Breathing - 323 

Time 323 

Feet 324 

" explained - 324 

Arsis and Thesis - - - 325 

Metre 325 

Prosodial Figures - - - 326 

Hexameter Verse - - - 327 

Pentameter do. - - - 330 

Other Dactylic Metres - - 330 

Anapaestic Verse - - - 331 

Cretic Verse - 332 

Bacchiac Verse - 333 

Iambic Verse - 333 

Choliambus or Scazon - - 336 

Trochaic Verse - - - 337 

Ionic a Majori - - - 337 

" a Minori - - - 337 

Choriambic Verse - - 338 

Compound Verses - - 338 

Versus Aristophanicus - - 339 

" Alcaicus decasyllabus - 339 

" Elegiambus - - 339 

" Archilochius Major - 339 

" Pherecrateus - - 340 

" PhcelcEcius - - 340 

" Glyconicus - - 340 

" Asclepiadeus Minor - 340 

" " Major - 340 

" Alcaicus hendecasyllabus 341 

" Iambelegus - - 341 

" Sapphicus hendecasyl- 

labus - - - 341 

" Sapphicus Major - 342 

" Galliambicus - - 342 

Horatian Metres - - 343 

Table of Reference to 345 

Roman Calendar - 346 

Mode of reckoning Days of 

Month - - - - 347 
Computation of Money - - 347 
Abbreviations in more common 
use - 348 



AN 

INTRODUCTION 

TO 

THE LATIN TONGUE. 



PART I. 



The Latin Letters are twenty-five in number, and are 
thus written : — 

Capitals. 
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVXYZ. 

Small, or Common. 
abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvxyz. 

Of these Letters, six are named Vowels ; a, e, i, o, u, 
and y in words derived from the Greek. 

The rest are called Consonants. 

A vowel makes a full and perfect sound of itself, as e. 

A consonant has no sound, unless joined with a vowel, 
as b-e, be. 

Consonants are divided into liquids, double consonants, 
and mutes. 

The liquids are I, m, n, r. 

The double consonants are x and z : x is formed of cs 
or gs ; and z of ds or ts. 

The remaining letters are called mutes. 

H, strictly speaking, is not a letter, but the mark of 
the asnirated or hard breathing. 

Y, Z, are found only in words originally Greek. 

A syllable is a distinct sound of one or more letters 
pronounced in a breath. 

A diphthong is the sound of two vowels in one syllable. 

Diphthongs are five in number ; au, eu, ei, ae, oe. 

The last two are commonly pronounced as the vowel 
e, and are often joined and written thus, JE a, CE os. 

B 



LATIN GRAMMAK. 



THE PAETS OF SPEECH. 

The Parts of Speech are Seven : 

1. Noun, Pronoun, Verb ; declined. 

2. Adverb, Conjunction, Preposition, Interjection; 
undeclined. 



OF A NOUN. 



A Noun is the name of a Being, a Place, a Thing, 
or a Quality. 

Nouns are of two kinds, Substantives and Adjectives. 

A noun substantive declares its own meaning, and re- 
quires not another word to be joined with it, to show its 
signification ; and has commonly in English, a, an, or 
the, before it : as, homo, a man ; angelus, an angel ; liber, 
the book. 

Nouns substantive are divided into Proper Nouns, 
and Appellative or Common Nouns. 

A proper noun, or proper name, points out some par- 
ticular person or thing to whom or which alone it be- 
longs : as, Augustus, Augustus ; Roma, Rome. 

An appellative, or common noun, points out one of a 
class or kind : as, rex, a king ; arbor, a tree. 

A noun adjective always requires to be joined with a 
substantive, of which it shows the nature or quality : as, 
bonus puer, a good boy ; malus puer, a naughty boy. 

NUMBERS OF NOUNS. 

Nouns have two numbers ; the Singular, and the 
Plural. 

The singular speaks of one only ; as, Pater, a Father. 

The plural speaks of more than one; as, Patres, 
Fathers. 



NOUNS. 



N.B. — Proper names are not declined in the plural 
number, if they speak of one person only. But when 
two or more persons have the same proper name in 
common, the plural number is used. 



CASES OF NOUNS. 

Nouns have six cases in each number : 
The Nominative, the Genitive, the Dative, the Accusa- 
tive, the Vocative, and the Ablative. 

The nominative case comes before the verb, and 
answers to the question, who ? or what ? as, who teaches ? 
Magister docet, the master teaches. 

The genitive case is known by the sign of*, and 
answers to the question, whose ? or, whereof? as, whose 
learning ? doctrina magistri, the learning of the master, 
or, the master's learning. 

The dative case is known by the signs to or for, and 
answers to the question to or for whom ? or to or for 
what ? as, To whom do I give the book ? Do librum 
magistro, I give the book to the master. 

The accusative case follows the verb, and answ T ers 
to the question, whom ? or what ? as, Whom do you love ? 
Amo magistrum, I love the master. 

The vocative case is known by calling, or speaking 
to ; as, 6 magister, o master. 

The ablative case is known by prepositions, expressed 
or understood, governing the ablative case : as, de ma- 
gistro, of the master ; coram magistro, before the master. 



* The Genitive Case in English is frequently expressed by the Letter 
s, with an Apostrophe, in this manner 's : as, my Father's Son ; that is, 
the Son of my Father. Also observe, that when of, signifies concerning, it 
is the sign of the Ablative case. 

B 2 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Also the prepositions in, with, from, by, and the word 
than after the comparative degree, are signs of the ab- 
lative case. 



THE GENDERS OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 

The Genders of nouns substantive are three : the 
masculine, the feminine, and the neuter. 

The masculine belongs to males : the feminine, to 
females : and the neuter (i. e. neither masculine nor 
feminine), to things without life. 

A noun substantive belonging to both the masculine 
and feminine genders, is called a noun of the common 
gender : as, parens, a parent ; which is masculine, when 
it speaks of a father ; feminine, when it speaks of a 
mother. 

A noun substantive which is found sometimes in the 
masculine, sometimes in the feminine gender, is called a 
noun of the doubtful gender : as, anguis, a snake ; dies, 
a day. 

A noun substantive, which under one gender denotes 
both sexes, is called a noun of the epicene gender: 
as, (feminine") aquila, an eagle ; and (masculine) passer, 
a sparrow; are used of both the male and female of 
those birds. 



A straight line (-) placed over a vowel, shows that it 
is to be made long in pronunciation : as, amare. 

A curved line ( u ) placed over a vowel shows that it 
is to be made short in pronunciation : as, regere. 

Two points ( . . ) placed over a vowel show that it is 
not to be joined to another vowel going before it, so 
as to form a diphthong with it, but is to be pronounced 
separately : as, aer (a-er), diet (di-e-i). 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE 

There are five declensions of substantives, distin- 
guished by the ending of the genitive case singular. 



THE FIRST DECLENSION. 

The first declension makes the genitive case singular 
to end in 02. 

Musa — feminine. 

Plural. 



Singular. 
N. Mus-a, a song, 
G. Mus-ae, of a song, 
D. Mus-ae, to a song, 
A. Mus-ani, a song, 
V. Mus-a, o song, 
A. Mus-£i, from a song. 



N. Mus-ae, songs, 
G. Mus-arum, of songs, 
D. Mus-is, to songs, 
A. Mus-as, songs, 
V. Mus-ae, o songs, 
A. Mus-is, from songs. 



N.B. — For those nouns which form the dative and 
ablative plural in abus, and also for Greek nouns be- 
longing to this declension, see Part II. 



THE SECOND DECLENSION. 



The second declension 
gular to end in L 



makes the genitive case sin- 





fuer — masculine. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


Pu-er, a boy, 


N. Pu-eri, boys, 


G. 


Pu-eri, of a boy, 


G. Pu-erorum, of boys 


D. 


Pu-ero, to a boy, 


D. Pu-er is, to boys, 


A. 


Pu-erum, a boy, 


A. Pu-eros, boys, 


V. 


Pu-er, o boy, 


V. Pu-eri, o boys, 


A. 


Pu-ero, from a boy. 


A. I* u-eris, from boys. 



B 3 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Magister — masculine. 



Singular. 
N. Magist-er, a master, 
G. Magist-ri, of a master, 
D. Magist-ro, to a master, 
A. Magist-rum, a master, 
V. Magist-er, o master, 
A. Magist-ro,/™?^ a master, 



Singular. 
N. Vir, a man, 
G. Vir-i, of a man, 
D. Vir-o, to a man, 
A. Vir-um, a man, 
V. Vir, o man, 
A. Viv-o, from a man 



Plural. 

N. Magist-ri, masters, 

G. Magist-rorum, of masters, 

D. Magist-ris, to masters, 

A. Magist-ros, masters, 

V. Magist-ri, o masters, 

A. Magist-ris. from masters. 

Vir — masculine. 

Plural. 
N. Vir-i, men, 
G. Vir-orum, of men, 
D. Vir- is, to men, 
A. Vir- os, men, 
V. Vir-i, o men, 
A. Ylv-is, from men. 

Obs. I. The nominative and vocative cases of nouns 
are for the most part alike in both numbers. But when 
the nominative case singular of the second declension 
ends in us, the vocative ends in e. 





Dominus — 


- masculine. 




Singular. 


Plural. 


N. 


Domm-us, a lord, 


N. Domin-i, lords, 


G. 


Domin-i, of a lord, 


G. Domm-orum, of lords. 


D. 


Domm-o, to a lord, 


D. Domin-is, to lords, 


A. 


Domm-um, a lord, 


A. Domin-os, lords, 


V. 


Domin-e, o lord, 


V. Domin-i, o lords, 


A. 


Domm-o, from a lord. 


A. T) omin-is, from lords. 



But Deus, God, makes Deus in the vocative case sin- 
In the plural number it is thus declined : 



gular, 

N. Dii and Di 

G. Deorum, 

D. Diis and Dis, 



A. Deos, 

V. Dii andT>i, 

A. Diis and Dis. 



Obs. II. Proper names in ius form the vocative in i ; 
as, Cornelius, Cornelius, Voc. Corneli. In like manner, 
jilius, a son, makes Jili ; and genius, a genius, geni. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 



But names in ius, derived from the Greek, form the 
vocative in e ; as, Artus, Arius, Voc. Arte ; Cynthius, 
Cynthius, a surname of Apollo, Voc. Cynthie. 

Obs. in. Nouns of the neuter gender are generally 
of the secoud or third declension, and make the no- 
minative, the accusative, and the vocative cases alike, in 
both numbers: in the plural number these cases end, 
all, in a. 

Regnum — neuter. 



Singular. 
N. Regn-um, a kingdom, 
G. Regn-i, of a kingdom, 
D. Regn-o, to a kingdom, 
A. Regn-um, a kingdom, 
V. Regn-um, o kingdom, 
A. Regn-o, from a kingdom. 



Plural. 

N. Regn-a, kingdoms, 

G. Regn-orum, of kingdoms, 

D. Regn-is, to kingdoms, 

A. Regn-a, kingdoms, 

V. Regn-a, o kingdoms, 

A. Regn-is, from kingdoms. 



N.B. — For Greek nouns of this declension, &c. 
Part II. 



see 



THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



The third declension makes the genitive case singular 
to end in is. 

Nubes — feminine. 



Singular. 
N. Nub-es, a cloud, 
G. Nub-is, of a cloud, 
D. Nub-i, to a cloud, 
A. Nub-em, a cloud, 
V. Nub-es, o cloud, 
A. Nub-e, from a cloud. 

Amnis ■ 
Singular. 
N. Amn-is, a stream, 
G. Amn-is, of a stream, 
D. Amn-i, to a stream, 
A. Amn-em, a stream, 
V. Amn-is, o stream, 
A. Arnn-e, from a stream. 



b 4 



Plural. 
N. Nub-es, clouds, 
G. Nub-ium, of clouds, 
D. Nub-ibus, to clouds, 
A. Nub-es, clouds, 
V. Nub-es, o clouds, 
A. Nub-ibus, from clouds. 

masculine. 

Plural. 
N. Amn-es, streams, 
Gr. Amn-ium, of streams, 
D. Amn-ibus, to streams, 
A. Amn-es, streams, 
V. Amn-es, o streams, 
A. Amn-ibus, from streams. 



LATIN GRAMMAR, 



Many nouns of this declension increase in the geni- 
tive case. 



Lapis - 
Singular. 
N. Lap -is, a stone, 
G. Lap-idis, of a stone, 
D. Lap-id i, to a stone, 
A. Lap-idem, a stone, 
V. Lap-is, o stone, 
A. Lap-ide, from a stone. 

Sermo — 
Singular. 
N. Serm-o, a discourse, 
G. Serm-onis, of a discourse, 
D. Serm-oni, to a discourse, 
A. Serui-oiiem ; a discourse, 
V. Serm-o, o discourse, 
A. Serm-one, from a dis- 
course. 

Opus — 
Singular. 
N. Op-us, a work, 
G. Op-eris, of a work, 
D. Op-eri, to a work, 
A. Op-us, a work, 
V. Op-us, o work, 
A. Op-ere, from a work. 

Parens — 
Singular. 
N. Par-ens, a parent, 
G. Par-entis, of a parent, 
D. Par-enti, to a parent, 
A. Par-entem, a parent, 
V. Par-ens, o parent, 
A. Par-ente, from a parent. 



masculine. 

Plural. 

N. Lap -ides, stones \ 

G. Lap-id urn, of stones, 

D. Lap-idibus, to stones, 

A. Lap- ides, stones, 

V. Lap-ides, o stones, 

A. L,3Lip'idibus, f^orn sto?ies. 

masculine. 

Plural. 
N. Serm-ones, discourses, 
G. Serm-onum, of discourses, 
D. Serm-onibus, to discourses, 
A. Serm-ones, discourses, 
V. Serm-ones, o discourses, 
A. Serm-onibus, from dis- 
courses. 

- neuter. 

Plural. 
N. Op -era, works, 
G. Op-erum, of works, 
D. Op-ertbus, to works, 
A. Op -era, works, 
V. Op- era, o works, 
A. Op-eribus., from works. 

common. 

Plural. 
N. Par-en tes, parents, [parents, 
G. Par-entlum and entum, of 
D. Par-entibus, to parents, 
A. Par-en tes, parents, 
V. Par-entes, o parents, 
A. 'Par-entlbus, from parents. 



Neuter nouns ending in al, ar, and e, for the most 
part make the ablative singular in i; the nominative, 
accusative, and vocative plural in ia, and the genitive 
plural in ium. See Part II. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 



Animal — neuter. 



Singular. 
N. Anim-al, an animal, 
G. Anim-alis, of an animal, 
D. Anim-ali, to an animal, 
A. Anim-al, an animal, 
V. Anim-al, o animal, 
A . Anim-ali, from an animal. 



Plural* 

N. Anim-alia, animals. 
G. Anim-alhim, of animals. 
D. Anim-alibus, to animals. 
A. Anim-alia, animals. 
V. Anim-alia, o animals. 
A. Anim-alibus, from animals. 



N.B. — For the rules respecting the formation of the 
genitive case plural, and for Greek nouns falling under 
this declension, &c. see Part II. 



THE FOURTH DECLENSION. 

The fourth declension makes the genitive case sin- 
gular to end in its : as, 



Gradus 



masculine. 

Plural. 
N. Grad-us, steps, 
G. Grad-uum, of steps, 
D. Grad-ibus, to steps, 
A. Grad-us, steps, 
V. Grad-us, o steps, 
A. Grad-ibus,yrom steps. 

Neuter nouns of this declension have all their cases 
alike in the singular number. 



Singular. 
N. Grad-iis, a step, 
G. Grad-us, of a step, 
D. Grad-ui, to a step, 
A. Grad-um, a step, 
V. Grad-us, o step, 
A. Gra.d-\i 9 from a step. 



Singular. 
N. Gen-u, a knee, 
G. Gen-u, of a knee, 
D. Gen-u, to a knee. 
A. Gen-u, a knee, 
V. Gen-u, o knee, 
A. Gen -u,from a knee. 



Genu — neuter* 

Plural. 
N. Gen-ua, knees, 
G. Gen-uum, of knees, 
D. Gen-ibus, to knees, 
A. Gen-ua, knees, 
V. Gen-ua, o knees, 
A. Gen-ihus, from knees. 



Domus, a house, is formed partly after the second, 
and partly after the fourth declension, and is thus de- 
clined : 

B 5 



10 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Domus — feminine. 



Singular, 
N. Dom-us, a house, 
Gr. Dom-i or us, of a house, 
D. Dom-ui, to a house, 
A. Dom-um, a house, 
V. Dom-us, o house, 
A. Doin-o, from a house. 



See Part II. 



Plural, 
N. Dom-us, houses, [houses, 
G. Dom-orum, or uum, of 
D. Dom-ibus, to houses, 
A. Dom-os, or us, houses, 
V. Dom-us, o houses, 
A. Dom-ibus,yro^ houses. 



THE FIFTH DECLENSION. 

The fifth declension makes the genitive case singu- 
lar to end in ei. 



Faeies 

Singular. 
N. Faci-es, a face, 
G. Faci-ei, of a face, 
D. Faci-ei, to a face, 
A. Faci-em, a face, 
V. Faci-es, o face, 
A. Faci-e, from a face. 



feminine. 

Plural. 

N. Faci-es, faces, 

G. Faci-erum, of faces, 

D. Faci-ebus, to faces, 

A. Faci-es, faces, 

V. Faci-es, o faces, 

A. Faci-ebus, from faces. 

See Part II. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 

Some adjectives have three terminations^ — the mas- 
culine, the feminine^ and the neuter : as, bonus, bona, 
bonum, good ; tener, tenera, tenerum, tender ; niger, ni- 
gra, nigrum, black ; — and are declined as in the following 
examples. 

Singular, 

M. F. N. 

N. Bon-us, bon-a, bon-um, 
G. Bon-i, bon-se, bou-i, 
D. Bon-o, bon-se, bon-o, 
A. Bon-um, bon-am, bon-um, 
V. Bon-e, bon-a, bon-um, 
A. Bon-o, bon-a, bono. 



Plural, 

M. F, N. 

N. Bon-i, bon-se, bon-a, 

G. Bon-orum, bon-arum,bon- 

D. Bon-is, [orum, 

A. Bon-os, bon-as, bon-a, 

V. Bon-i, bon-se, bon-a, 

A. Bon-is. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 



11 



Singular. 



M. F. N. 

N. Ten-er, ten-era, ten-erum, 

G. Ten-eri, ten-erae, ten-eri, 

D. Ten-ero, ten-erae, ten-ero, 
A. Ten-erum, ten-eram, ten-erum, 

V. Ten-er, ten-era, ten-erum, 

A. Ten-ero, ten-era, ten-ero. 



Plural. 

M. F. N. 

N. Ten-eri, ten-erae, ten-era, 

G. Ten-erorum, ten-erarura, ten-er- 

D. Ten-eris, [orum, 

A. Ten-Sros, ten-eras, ten-era, 

V. Ten-eri, ten-era?, ten-era, 
A. Ten-eris. 



Singular. 



Plural. 





M. 


F. 


N. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


N. 


Nig-er, 


nig-ra, 


nig-rum, 


N. 


Nig-ri, 


nig-ras, 


nig-ra, 


G. 


Nig-ri, 


nig-ras, 


nig-ri, 


G. 


Nig-ro rum, 


nig-rarum, 


nig-ro 


D. 


Nig-ro, 


nig-ra?, 


nig-ro, 


D. 


Nig-ris. 




[rum 


A. 


Nig-rum, 


nig-ram, 


nig-rum, 


A. 


Nig-ros, 


nig-ras, 


nig-ra, 


V. 


Nig-er, 


nig-ra, 


nigrum, 


V. 


Nig-ri 


nig-rae, 


nig-ra, 


A. 


Nig-ro, 


nig-ra, 


nig-ro. 


A. 


Nig-ris. 







Obs. The masculine and neuter genders of adjectives of 
three terminatio?is are declined, like nouns substantive of the 
second declension ; and the feminine gender ', like those of the 
first declension. 

Unus one ; solus alone ; totus the whole ; ullus any ; 
nullus none ; alter the other ; titer whether of the two ; 
and other adjectives, make the genitive case singular in 
iusy and the dative in i. 



M. 

N. Un-us, 
G. Un-Ius, 
D. Un-i, 
A. Un-um, 
V. Un-e, 
A. Un-o, 



Singular. 



F. 

un-a, 



N. 

un-um, 



un-am, un-um, 
un-a, un-um, 
un~a, un-o. 



Plural. 

M. F. 

N. Un-i, un-ae, 

G. Un-orum, -arum, 

D. Un-is, 

A. Un-os, un-as, 

V. Un-i, un-ae. 

A. Un-is. 



N. 

un-a, 
-orum, 

un-a, 
un-a, 



Unus has no plural number, unless it be joined to a 
noun that has not the singular number ; as unce Uteres, 
an epistle ; una mcenia, a wall. 

Alter, another, makes alterius in the genitive singular. 
In other respects it follows the foregoing example. 



B 6 



12 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



lake units also is declined alius another ; except that 
it makes allud in the neuter gender, singular number. 

Some adjectives have two terminations, — the first 
being common to the masculine and femiiine genders, 
the other being restricted to the neuter : as, tristis, 
triste, sad ; melior, melius, better. They are declined 
as follows : 



Singular, 





M. F. 


N. 


N. 


Trist-is, 


triste, 


G. 


Trist-is, 




D. 


Trist-i, 




A. 


Trist-em, 


triste, 


V. 

A. 


Trist-is, 
Trist-i. 


trist-e, 



Plural. 



M. F. 

Trist-es, 

Trist-ium, 

Trist-ibus, 

Trist-es, 

Trist-es, 

Trist-ibus. 



N. 

trist-ia, 



trist-ia, 
trist-ia, 



Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. Meli-or, meli-us, 

G. Meli-oris, 

D. Meli-ori, 

A. Meli-orem, meli-us, 

V. Meli-or, meli-us, 

A. Meli-ore, or meli-ori. 



I Plural 

M. F. 

N. Meli-ores, 
G. Mell-orum, 
D. Meli-oribus, 
A. Meli-ores, 
V. Meli-5res, 
A. Meli-dribus. 



N. 

meli-ora, 



meli-5ra, 
meli-ora, 



Obs. Adjectives of two terminations are declined like 
nouns substantive of the third declension. 

Some adjectives have but one termination, which is 
common to all three genders: &s,felix, happy; sapiens, 
wise. 





Singular. 




Plural. 




M. F. N. 




M. F. N* 


N. 


Fel-ix, 


N. 


Fel-Ices, fel-icia. 


G. 


Fel-Icis, 


G. 


Fel-Icium, 


D. 


Fel-ici, 


D. 


Fel-Tcibus, 


A. 


Fel-Tcem, fel-ix. 


A. 


Fel-Ices, fel-icia, 


V. 


Fel-ix, 


V. 


Fel-Ices, fel-icia, 


A- 


Fel-Ice, or, fel-Ici. 


A. 


Fel-icibus. 



DECLENSION OF NOUNS ADJECTIVE. 



13 



Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. Sapi-ens, 

G. Sapi-entis, 

D. Sapi-enti, 

A. Sapi-entem, sapi-ens, 

V. Sapi-ens, 

A. Sapi-ente or sapi-enti. 



Plural. 



M. F. 

N. Sapi-entes, 
G. Sapi-entium, 
D. Sapi-entibus, 
A. Sapi-entes, 
V. Sapi-entes, 
A. Sapi-entibus. 



N. 

sapi-entia, 



sapi-entia, 
sapi-entia, 



Obs. Adjectives of one termination are declined like 
nouns substantive of the third declension. 



Plus, more, 



Singular. 



is thus declined. 

Plural. 



M. F. 



N. 
G. 
D. 
A. 
V. 
A. 



N. 

plus, 
pluris, 



plus, 
plure. 



M. F. 

N. Plures, 

G. Plurium, 

D. Pluribus, 

A. Plures, 

V. Plures, 

A. Pluribus. 



N. 

plura, 



plura, 
plura, 



Some adjectives in er have a peculiar way of declin- 
ing ; as, celeber or Celebris, celebre, famous. 

Plural. 

M. F. N. 

N. Celeb-res, celeb-ria, 

G. Celeb-rium, or, rum, 

D. Celeb-ribus, 

A. Celeb-res, celeb-ria, 

V. Celeb-res, celeb-ria, 

A. Celeb-ribus. 

Of adjectives which follow this way of declining, the 
termination er is commonly masculine ; and that in is, 
commonly feminine, though sometimes masculine. 

Obs. Celer, ceteris, celer e, retains the e throughout its 
cases : thus, gen. cel-eris, dat. cel-eri, &c. 

Ambo, both, and duo, two, are nouns adjective of the 
plural number only, and are thus declined : — 





Singular. 






M. F. 


N. 


N. 


Celeb-er or -ris, 


celeb-re, 


G. 


Celeb-ris, 




D. 


Celeb-ri, 




A. 


Celeb-rem, 


celeb-re, 


V. 


Celeb-er or -ris, 


celeb-re, 


A- 


Celeb-ri. 





14 LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Nom. 


Amb-o, 


amb-ae, 


amb-o 


both. 


Gen. 


Amb-orum, 


amb-arum 


amb-orum 


of both. 


Dat. 


Amb-obus 


amb-abus, 


amb-obus, 


to both. 


Ace. 


Amb-os, 


amb-as, 


amb-o, 


both. 


Voc. 


Amb-o, 


amb-se, 


amb-o, 


both. 


Abl. 


Amb-obus 


amb-abus, 


amb-obus, 


with both. 



Ambo and duo are sometimes found in the accusative 
masculine. 

Tres, three, wants the singular number : in the plural 
it is declined like tristis. Numeral adjectives, from 
quaiuor, four, to centum, one hundred, both included, 
are undeclined. From centum, one hundred, to mille, 
a thousand, they have no singular number, but are de- 
clined in the plural like bonus : as, ducenti, ce, a, &c, 
two hundred. Mille, a thousand, used adjectively, is not 
declined : as, mille libras, a thousand pounds weight ; 
when used substantively, it is declined in the plural 
number only, like a neuter noun of the third declension : 
as, millia librarurru 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 

Adjectives have three degrees of signification, or 
comparison : 

I. The positive ; which denotes the quality of a thing 
absolutely ; as doctus learned, tristis sad. 

II. The comparative ; which increases, or lessens 
the quality ; as doctwr more learned, tristior sadder, 
or more sad : 

And it is formed from the first case of the positive .that 
ends in i 9 by adding or for the masculine and feminine 
genders, and us for the neuter : as, from 

Doctus, gen. docti, is formed doctwr, doctius, more 

learned : from 
Tristis, dat. tristi, is formed tristior, tristius, sadder, 

or more sad. 



COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 15 

III. The superlative ; which increases, or diminishes 
the signification, or comparison, to the greatest degree ; 
as doctissimus most learned; tristissimus saddest, or 
most sad : 

And it is formed, also, from the first case of the posi- 
tive that ends in z, by adding ssimus : as, from 

Gen. docti, is formed doctissimus, most learned : 

Dat. tristi, is formed tristissimus, saddest, or most 

sad. 
Note. Many Adjectives vary from these general rules, 
and form their comparisons irregularly : as, 

Sonus, good ; melior, better ; optimus, best. 
Dexter, on the right hand; dexterior more on the right 
hand ; dextimus, most on the right hand. 

Dives, rich ; ditior, more rich ; ditissimus, most rich. 

Externus, outward ; exterior, more outward ; extremus, or, 
extimus, outermost, or most outward. 

Frugi, frugal ; frugalior, more frugal ; frugalisshnus, most 
frugal. 

Inferus, low ; inferior, lower, or more low ; infimus, or, 
imus, lowest, or most low. 

Magnus, great ; major, greater ; maximus, greatest. 

Malus, bad ; pejor, worse ; pessimus, worst. 

Multus, much ; plus, more ; plurimus, most. 

Nequam, wicked ; nequior, more wicked ; nequissimus, most 
wicked. 

Parvus, little ; minor, less ; minimus, least. 
Posterus, late ; posterior, later ; postremus, latest, or last. 
Superus, high ; superior, higher, or more high ; supremus, 
or summus, highest, or most high. 

Some adjectives, frequently found in the comparative 
and superlative degrees, are formed from prepositions : 
thus, 

Citra, on this side ; citerior, nearer ; citimus, nearest. 



16 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Intra, within ; interior, more inward ; intimus, innermost, 

or most inward. 

Prce, before ; prior, former ; primus, first. 

Prope, near ; propior, nearer ; proximus, nearest, or, most 
near. 

Ultra, far ; ulterior, further ; ultimus, furthest, or, last . — 

With some others. 

The following have no positive degree : — 

Deterior, worse ; deterrimus, worst. 
Ocior, swifter; ocissimus, swiftest. 

Potior, preferable ; potissimus, most to be 

chosen. 
These want the superlative degree : — 

Adolescens, young; adolescentior, younger. 
Juvenis, young ; junior, younger. 
Senex, old; senior, older. 

Adjectives ending in er, form the superlative degree 
from the nominative case, by adding rimus : as, pul- 
cher fair, pulcher-rimus fairest, or, most fair. 

Adjectives ending in lis, form the superlative degree 
according to the general rule : as, from utilis useful, Dat. 
utili, is formed utili-ssimus most useful : 

Except the following, which change is into limus : as, 
Facil-is, easy ; facil-linius, easiest, or, most easy. 
Gracil-is, slender ; gracil-limus, slenderest, or, most slender. 
Humil-is, low ; humil-Umus lowest, or, most low. 
Simil-is, like ; simil-limus likest, or, most like. 

Also, If a vowel comes before us in the nominative 
case of an adjective, the comparison is made by magis 
more, and maxime most : as, 

Pius, godly ; magis pius, more godly ; maxime plus, most 
godly. 



PRONOUNS. 



17 



But with quus, pronounced as one syllable, the general 
rule is followed ; as, 

Antlquus, ancient ; antiquior, more ancient ; antiquissimus, 
most ancient. 

Also tenuis is compared thus : 
Tenuis, thin ; tenuior, thinner ; tenuisstmus, thinnest. 

Some adjectives have no comparison at all, because 
their signification cannot be increased or diminished : as 
omnis, all ; totus, the whole. Such also are adjectives 
compounded of per and pr<2, " very much : " except, 
however, pr '(Belarus, illustrious, which follows the general 
rule for adjectives in us : 

Prcecldrus, illustrious; prcsclarior, more illustrious; 
prceclarissimus, most illustrious. 



OF A PEONOUN. 

A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun. 

Some pronouns are called personal, or primitive, pro- 
nouns, and are used as substantives : others are called 
pronouns adjective, and are used as adjectives. 

The pronouns are : 



Personal or Primitive Pronouns. 
Ego, I, 

Tu, thou, or you, 
Sui 9 of himself, or themselves. 



Demonstrative Pronouns. 
Hie this, 
Ille, he, 
Ipse, oneself, 
Is, he, 
Iste, that, 
Idem, the same. 



Possessive Pronouns. 
Meus, mine, 
Tuus, thine, or your, 
Suus, his, 
Noster, our, 
Vester, your, 
Cujus, whose. 

Relative Pronouns. 
Qui, who ; and its compounds. 

Indefinite Pronoun. 
Quis, any one. 

Interrogative Pronoun. 
Quis ? who ? 



18 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 







Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. 


Ego, 


I, 


Nom. 


Nos, we, 


Gen. 


Mei, 


of me, 


Gen. 


Nostr-um, or-i, of us, 


Dat. 


Mihi, 


to me, 


Dat. 


Nobis, to us, 


Ace. 


Me, 


me, 


Ace. 


Nos, us, 


Voc. 


— 




Voc. 





Abl. 


Me, 


from me. 
Singular. 


Abl. 


N5bis, from us. 
Plural. 


Nom. 


Tu, 


thou, or, you, 


Nom. 


Vos, ye, or, you, 


Gen. 


Tui, 


of thee, or, you. 


Gen. 


Vestr-um, vel -i, of you, 


Dat. 


Tibi, 


to thee, or, you, 


Dat. 


Vobis, to you, 


Ace. 


Te, 


thee, or, you, 


Ace. 


Vos, you, 


Voc. 


Tu, 


o thou or, you, 


Voc. 


Vos, o ye, or, you* 


Abl. 


Te, 


from you. 


Abl. 


Vobis, from you. 



Sui, of himself, herself, themselves, itself, has no 
nominative or vocative case, and is thus declined : 

Singular and Plural. 
Gen. Sui, of himself, "1 

Dat. Sibi, to himself, | , 1Jt j7 7 
Ace. Se, himself, \ hersel f> themsehes > *«• 

Abl. Se, from himself,) 

Mens, tuus, situs, and cujus, are declined like bonus, 
except that meus makes mi in the vocative case mascu- 
line of the singular number ; and that tuus, suus, and 
cujus, have no vocative case. 

Noster and vester are declined like niger. 

Hie, hcec, hoc, this, is thus declined : 







Singular. 


Plural. 






M. 


F. N. 


M. F. 


N. 


N. 


Hie, 


heec, hoc, 


N. Hi, hae, 


heec, 


G. 


HujuSj 




G. Horum, harura, 


horum, 


D. 


Huic, 




D. His, 




A. 


Hunc, 


hanc, hoc 


A. Hos, has, 


hsec, 


V. 


— 




V. — 




A, 


Hoc. 


hac, hoc. 


A. His. 





DECLENSION OF PRONOUNS. 



19 



Ille he, ilia she, and illud that, is thus declined : 



Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. Ul-e, ill-a, ill-ud, 

G. Ill-Ins, 

D. Ill-i, 

A. Ill-um, ill-am, ill-ud, 

V. — 

A. Ill-o, ill-a, ill-o. 



Plural. 

M. F. N. 

N. Ill-i, ill-ae, ill-a, 

G. Ill-orum, ill-arum, ill-orum, 

D. Ill-is, 

A. Ill-os, ill-as, ill-a, 

V. — 

A. Ill-is. 



In like manner are also declined iste, that person, and 
ipse, he himself; except that the nominative and accu- 
sative cases singular of ipse make ipsum in the neuter 
gender. 

Is he, ea she, id that, is thus declined : 





Singular. 




Plural. 




M. 


F. 


N. 


M. F. 


N. 


N. Is, 


ea, 


id, 


N. Ii, eae, 


ea, 


G. Ejus, 






G. Eorum, earum, 


edrum, 


D. Ei, 






D. lis, or, eis, 




A. Eum, 


earn, 


id, 


A. Eos, eas, 


ea, 


V. — 






V. — 




A. Eo, 


ea, 


eo. 


A. lis, or, eis. 





In like manner also is declined its compound, idem the 
same ; as, Nom. idem, eddem, idem ; gen. ejusdem, &c. 

The relative pronoun Qui, quce, quod, who or which, 
is thus declined ; — 



Singular. 
M. F. n. 

N. Qui quae, quod, 

G. Cujus, 
D. Cui, 
A. Quern, quam, quod, 

A. Quo, qua, quo or qui. 



Plural. 

F. N. 

quae, quge, 



M. 

N. Qui, 

G. Quorum,quarum, quorum, 

D. Quibus, or, queis, 

A. Quos, quas, quae, 

V. — 

A. Quibus, or, queis. 



20 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



In like manner also are declined its compounds, 
quidam a certain one; quivis, whom one will; quilibet, 
whom one pleases ; quicunque, whosoever. 

Quis, quce, quid, or quod, who or what, is declined 
like qui; as are also aliquis, and other compounds 
of quis : these for the most part make the feminine 
gender of the nominative case singular, and the neuter 
of the nominative and accusative cases plural, in qua : 
as aliquis, allqua, aliquid, or, aliquod, some one, &c. 
siquis, siqua, siquid, or, siquod, if any one, &c. 

Quis que, each, is thus declined : — 



Singular. 

M. F. N. 

N. Quis-que, quae-que, quid- 
que, or quod-que, 
G. Cujus-que, 
D. Cui-que, 

A. Quem-que, quam-que, 
quid-que, or quod-que, 



V. 
A. 



Quo-que, qua-que, quo- 
que or qui-que. 



Plural. 

M. F. 

N. Qui-que, quae-que. 



N. 

quae- 
que, 

G. Quorum-que, quarum- 
que, quorum-que, 

D. Quibus-que or queis-que, 

A. Quos-que, quas-que, quae- 
que, 

V. — 

A. Quibus-que or queis-que. 



After the same manner are declined quispiam, any 
one ; quisquam, any one ; and the interrogative quis- 
nam, who ? 

Vnusquisque, each one, compounded of unus and quis- 
que, is declined partly like unus, partly like quisque : 
as, Nom. Unusquisque, unaquaque, unumquodque : gen. 
uniuscujusque : dat. unicuique, &c. 

Quisquis, whosoever, is thus declined : 

M. F. N. 

Nom. Quisquis, quidquid, or, quicquid, 

Ace. quidquid, or, quicquid, 

Abl. Quoquo, quaqua, quoquo. 



VERBS. 



OF A VERB. 



21 



A Verb is a word which expresses either the action 
or condition of the person or thing about which it speaks. 

Of Verbs there are two Voices, or modes of conju- 
gation : 
1. The Active, ending mo ; 2. The Passive, ending in or. 

Of Verbs ending in o, some are active, or, transitive : 
as, vinco, I conquer : some are neuter, or, intransitive : 
as, curro, I run. 

From transitive verbs ending in o, a new form, called 
the passive, is derived, by changing o into or : as, vincor, 
I am conquered. 

From intransitive verbs no passive is derived. 

There are also other verbs ending in or, called depo- 
nent Of these some have a transitive power : as, loquor, 
I speak ; some an intransitive : as, glorior, I boast. 

A verb is called active when the person or thing spoken 
of by the verb is represented as P doing " something 
to the noun following. The more correct way is to call 
it transitive, which term implies that the action " passes 
on" to such noun : as, vinco te, "I conquer you." 

A verb is called passive when the person or thing 
of whom it speaks is represented as " suffering," or, 
" having done to him" or "it" that action of which the 
" active" form speaks : as, amor, I am loved. 

A verb is called neuter, which is neither active nor 
passive. The more correct way is to call it intransitive, 
which term implies that the action does " not pass on" 
to a following noun : as, curro, I run. 

A verb is called deponent, because it " lays down," 
or throws aside its passive meaning : as, amplector, I 
embrace, is passive in form, but transitive in meaning. 



22 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

There are a few verbs called neuter-passives or semi- 
deponents ; these are intransitive in meaning ; and have 
an active form in all tenses except in the perfect and 
those derived from it ; as gaudeo, I am glad. 

Verbs that have different persons, are called verbs 
personal ; as, ego amo, I love ; tu amas, you love. 

Verbs that do not have different persons, are called 
verbs impersonal : as, tcedet, it irks ; oportet, it behoves. 

OF THE MOODS. 

There are four moods *, i. e. methods of represent- 
ing the action or condition of a verb : the Indicative, 
Imperative, Subjunctive, and Infinitive. 

1. The indicative^ mood "points out," or declares a 
thing as really existing : as, Ego amo, I love. 

2. The imperative % mood gives a "command:" as, 
Abi, be gone. 

3. The subjunctive § mood is used when a verb is 
" subjoined " to another verb in a preceding clause, and 
points out something not as a fact, but as a concep- 
tion of the mind : as something merely supposed : as, 
Rogo ut scribas, I beg that you write ; Nescio qualis sit, 
I know not what sort of person he is. 

N. B. — This mood is frequently called the Potential ||, 
that is, the mood signifying " power." But the potential 
is only one form of the subjunctive, and is known by 
the signs given in the following conjugations. For 
other uses of subjunctive mood, see Part II. 

4. The infinitive^ mood denotes the action or condi- 
tion of the verb in an " indefinite" or general way : 
as, scribere, to write. 

* Modi, " methods," or " manners." f Indico, " I point out." 

\ Impero, " I command." § Subjungo, " I subjoin." 

|| Potentia, " power." 
% Infinitum (or infinitlvus), " without bounds," and so " indefinite." 



VERBS. 23 



OF THE TENSES OF VERBS. 

In Verbs there are six tenses expressing the times of 
an action : the Present, the Imperfect, the Perfect, the 
Pluperfect, the Future, the Future-perfect 

1. The present tense speaks of a thing as present or 
in the course of taking place : as, amo, I love, or, am 
loving. 

2. The imperfect tense speaks of a thing that was 
being done in time past: as, amabam, I did love, or, 
was loving. 

3. The perfect tense speaks of a thing completed at 
the present time : as, amavi, I have loved. 

4. The pluperfect tense speaks of a thing completed 
in time past : as, amaveram, I had loved. 

5. The future tense speaks of a thing that will cer- 
tainly take place in time to come : as, amabo, I shall, or, 
will love. 

6. The future-perfect tense speaks of a thing that will 
be past at a certain future time : as, scripsero, I shall 
have written. 

OF GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 

Verbs have three gerunds, which end in di, do, dum : 
as, amandi, of loving ; amando, in loving ; amandum, 
to love. 

The Supines of verbs are two : 

The one ending in um, which signifies actively : as, 
Eo amatum, I go to love : 

The other ending in u, and having for the most part 
a passive signification : as, difficllis amatu, hard to be 
loved. 



24 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



OF PAETICIPLES. 
Verbs have four Participles : 1. the present-active, 
as amans, loving : 2. the future-active, as arnaturus, 
about to love : 3. the perfect-passive, as amdtus, having 
been loved : 4. the future-passive, as amandus, that 
must be loved. 

OF NUMBERS AND PERSONS. 
Verbs have two numbers, singular and plural ; and 
in each number three persons : as, 

Plur. Nos amdmus, We love ; 



Sing. Ego amo, I love ; 

Tu amas, thou lovest ; 
Ille amat, he loveth : 



Vos amdtis, ye love ; 
Illi amant, they love. 



The imperative mood has no first nor third person 
in the present, and no first person in the future tense. 

All nouns are of the third person, except ego, nos, 
tu, and vos : Also all nouns of the Vocative Case are 
of the second Person. 







THE VEKB SUM. 




Sum 


, es,fui, esse, futurus, to be 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
L. Present Tense. — am. 


Sing. 


Sum, 




I am. 




Es, 




thou art. 




Est, 




he is. 


Plur. 


Siimus, 




We are. 




Estis, 




ye are. 




Sunt, 




they are. 




2. 


Imperfect 


Tense. — was. 


Sing. 


firam, 




I was. 




Eras, 




thou wast. 




Erat, 




he was. 


Plur. 


Eramus, 




We were. 




Eratis, 




ye were. 




Erant, 




they were. 



THE VERB SUM. 



25 



3. Perfect Tense. — have. 



Sing. Fui, 

Fuisti, 

Fuit, 
Plur. Fuimus, 

Fuistis, 

Fuerunt or fuere, 



/ have been, 
thou hast been, 
he hath been. 
We have been, 
ye have been, 
they have been. 



4. Pluperfect Tense. — had. 



Sing. Fueram, 
Fueras, 
Fuerat, 

Plur. Fueramus, 
Fuerat is, 
Fuerant, 



/ had been, 
thou hadst been, 
he had been. 
We had been, 
ye had been, 
they had been. 



5. Future Tense. — shall, will. 

Sing. £ro, I shall, or, will be. 

Eris, thou shalt, or, wilt be. 

Erit, he shall, or, will be. 

Plur. Enmus, We shall, or, will be. 

Eritis ye shall, or, will be. 

Erunt, they shall, or, will be. 

6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or ivill have. 



Sing. Fuero, 

Fueris, 

Fuerit, 

Fuerlmus, 

Fu eritis, 

Fuerint, 



Plur. 



/ shall have been, 
thou shalt have been, 
he shall have been. 
We shall have been, 
ye shall have been, 
they shall have been. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. No first nor third person. 



Sing. Es, 
Plur. Este, 



Be thou. 
Be ye. 



26 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Future Tense. 



Sing. Esto, 
Esto, 

Plur. Estote 
Sunto, 



No first person. 
JBe thou, 
let him be. 
Be ye. 
let them be* 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense, — may, can, 8fc. (Potential Signs.) 

Sing. Sim. I may, or, can be. 

Sis, thou may 9 st or, canst be. 

Sit, he may, or, can be. 

Plur. Slmus, We may, or, can be. 

Sltis, ye may, or, can be. 

Sint, they may, or, can be. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. 

Sing. Essem or forenr, 

Esses or fores, 

Esset or foret, 
Plur. Essem us or foremus, 

Essetis or foretis, 

Essent or forent, 



I might, or, coidd be. 
thou might' st, or, couloVst be. 
he might, or, could be. 
We might, or, could be. 
ye might, or, could be. 
they might, or, could be. 



3. Perfect Tense. — may have. 

Sing. Fuerim, / may have been. 

Fueris, thou may st have been. 

Fuerit, he may have been. 

Plur. Fuerimus, We may have been. 

Fueritis, ye may have been. 

Fuerint, they may have been. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should 

have. 
Sing. Fuissem, I might, or, could have been. 

Fuisses, thou might st, or, could' st have been. 

Fuisset, he might, or, could have been. 

Plur. Fuissemus, We might, or, could have been. 

Fuissetis, ye might, or, could have been. 

Fuissent, they might, or, could have been. 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 27 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect Tense. 

Esse, to be. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, 

Fuisse, to have been. 

Future Tense, 

Fore, or, Futiirum esse, to be about to be. 

Participle of the future in rus, 
Futiirus, that must be. 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 

VERBS have four conjugations, which are known 
from their infinitive mood. 

1. The first has a long before re: as, amdre. 

2. The second has e long before re : as, monere. 

3. The third has e short before re : as, regere. 

4. The fourth has i long before re : as, audire. 



FIRST CONJUGATION. — Amo. 

Am-o, am-as, am-avi, am-are ; am-andi, am-ando, 
am-andum ; am-atum, am-atu ; am-ans, am-aturus : 

to love. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — do, am. 

Sing. Am-o, / love, do love, or, am loving. 

am-as, thou lovest, dost love, or art loving. 

am-at, he loveth, doth love, or, is loving. 

Plur. Am-amus, We love, do love, or, are loving. 

am-atis, ye love, do love, or, are loving. 

am-ant, they love, do love, or, are loving, 
c 2 



28 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — did, was. 

Sing. Am-abam, I did love, or, tvas loving. 

am-abas, thou didst love, or, wast loving. 

am-abat, he did love, or, tvas loving. 

Plur. Am-abamus, We did love, or, were loving. 

am-abatis, ye did love, or, were loving. 

am-abant, they did love, or, were loving. 

3. Perfect Tense. — have. 

Sing. Am-avi, I loved, or, have loved. 

am-avisti, thou lovedst, or, hast loved. 

am-avit, he loved, or, hath loved. 

Plur. Am-avmius, We loved, or, have loved. 

am-avistis, ye loved, or, have loved. 

arn-averunt, avere, they loved, or, have loved. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — had. 

Sing. Am-averam, I had loved. 

am-averas, thou hadst loved. 

am-averat, he had loved. 

Plur. Am-averam us, We had loved. 

am-averatis, ye had loved. 

am-averant, they had loved. 

5. Future Tense. — shall, will. 

Sing. Am-abo, / shall, or, will love. 

am-abis, thou shalt, or, wilt love. 

am-abit, he shall, or, will love. 

Plur. Am-abimus, We shall, or, will love. 

am-abitis, ye shall, or, will love. 

am-abunt, they shall, ox, will love. 

6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. 

Sing. Am-avero, i" shall have loved. 

am-averis, thou shalt have loved. 

am-averit, he shall have loved. 

Plur. Am-averlmus, We shall have loved. 

am-averltis; ye shall have loved. 

am-averint, they shall have loved. 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 29 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. No first nor third person. 

Sing. Am-a, Love thou, or, do thou love. 

Plur. Am-ate, Love ye, or, do ye love. 



Future Tense. No first person. 

Sing. Am-ato, Love thou, or, do thou love. 

am-ato, let him love. 

Plur. Am-atote, Love ye, or, do ye love. 

am-anto, let them love. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — may, can, Sfc. (Potential Signs.) 

Sing. Am-em, I may, or, can love. 

am-es, thou mayst, or, canst love, 

ain-et. he may, or, can love. 

Plur. Am-emus, We may, or, can love. 

aru-etis, ye may, or, can love. 

am-ent, they may, or, can love. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. 

Sing. Am-arem, / might, or, could love. 

am-ares, thou might 'st, or, could 3 st love. 

am-aret, he might, or, could love. 

Plur. Am-aremus, We might, or, could love. 

am-aretis, ye might, or, could love. 

ani-arent, they might, or, could love. 

3. Perfect Tense. — may have. 

Sing. Am-averim, I may have loved. 

am-averis, thou mayst have loved. 

am-averit, he may have loved. 

Plur. Am-averimus, We may have loved. 

am-averitis, ye may have loved. 

am-averint, they may have loved, 
c s 



30 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should 
have. 

Sing. Am-avissem, I might have loved. 

am-avisses, thou might' st have loved. 

am-avisset, he might have loved. 

Plur. Am-avisseinus, We might have loved. 

am-avissetis, ye might have loved. 

am-avissent, they might have loved. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect Tense, 
Am-are, to love. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense. 
Am-avisse, to have loved. 

Future Tense, 
Am-aturum esse, to be about to love. 

GERUNDS, 

Am-andi, of loving. 

Arn-ando, in loving. 

Am-andum, to love. 

SUPINES. 

Active, Passive. 

Am-atum, to love. Am-atu, to be loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present Tense, Future in rus. 

Am-ans, loving. Am-aturus, about to love. 

Obs. In Verbs, several tenses are formed from the 
perfect tense of the Indicative mood ; as, of am-avi are 
formed — 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 31 

1. The pluperfect of the same mood, amav-eram. 

2. The future-perfect tense of the same mood, amav-ero. 

3. The perfect of the subjunctive mood, amav-erim. 

4. The pluperfect of the same mood, amav-issem. 

5. The perfect tense of the infinitive mood, amav-isse. 



SECOND CONJUGATION.— Moneo. 

Mon-eo, mon-es, mon-iii, mon-ere ; mon-endi, mon- 
endo, mon-endum; mon-itum, mon-itu; mon-ens, 
mon-iturus, to advise. 

im)ICATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — do, am. 

Sing. Mon-eo, / advise, do advise, or, am advising. • 

mon-es thou advisest, dost advise, or,art advising. 

mon-et he adviseth, doth advise, or, is advising. 

Plur. Mon-emus, We advise, do advise, or, are advising. 

mon-etis, ye advise, do advise, or, are advising. 

mon-ent, they advise, do advise, or, are advising. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — did, teas. 

Sing. MSn-ebam, I did advise, or was advising. 

mon-ebas, thou didst advise, or wast advising. 

mon-ebat, he did advise, or was advising. 
Plur. Mbn-ebamus, We did advise, or, were advising. 

mon-ebatis, ye did advise, or, were advising. 

mon-ebant, they did advise, or, were advising. 

3. Perfect Tense. — have. 
Sing. Mbn-ui, I advised, or, have advised. 

mon-uisti, thou advisedst, or, hast advised. 

mon-uit, he advised, or, hath advised. 

Plur. Mon-uimus, We advised, or, have advised. 

mon-uistis, ye advised, or have advised. 

mon-uerunt ,or uere, they advised, or, have advised, 
c 4 



32 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



4. Pluperfect Tense. 

Sing. Mon-uerain, 

mon-ueras, 

mon-uerat, 
Plur. Mon-ueramus, 

mon-iieratis, 

mon-uerant. 



had. 



I had advised, 
thou hadst advised, 
he had advised. 
We had advised, 
ye had advised, 
they had advised. 



5. Future Tense. — shall, will. 



Sing. Mon-ebo, 
mon-ebis, 
nion-ebit, 

Plur. Mon-ebimus, 
mon-ebitis, 
mon-ebunt, 



/ shall, or, will advise, 
thou shalt, or, wilt advise, 
he shall, or, will advise. 
We shall, or, will advise, 
ye shall, or, will advise, 
they shall, or, will advise. 



6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. 



Sing. Mon-uero, 
mon-ueris, 
mon-uerit, 

Plur. Mon-uerlmus, 
mon-uerltisj 
mon-uerint, 



/ shall have advised, 
thou shalt have advised, 
he shall have advised. 
We shall have advised, 
ye shall have advised, 
they shall have advised. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD 



1. Present Tense. 



Sing. M6n-e, 
Plur. Mon-ete, 



No first nor third Person. 

Advise thou, or, do thou advise. 
Advise ye, or, do ye advise. 



2. Future Tense. No first Person. 



Sing. Mon-eto, 
mon-eto, 

Plur. Mon-etote, 
mon-ento, 



Advise thou, or, do thou advise, 
let him advise. 
Advise ye, or, do ye advise, 
let them advise. 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 



33 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



■ may, can, 8fc. (Potential Signs.) 

/ may, or, can advise, 
thou may' st or, canst advise, 
he may, or, can advise. 
We may, or, can advise, 
ye may, or, can advise, 
they may, or, can advise. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. 

I might, or, could advise, 
thou might st, or could' st advise. 
he might, or, could advise. 
We might, or, could advise, 
ye might, or, could advise, 
they might, or, could advise. 



1. Present Tense. 

Sing. Mon-eam, 

mon-eas, 

mon-eat, 
Plur. Mon-eamus, 

mon-eatis, 

mon-eant, 



Sing. Mon-erem, 
mon-eres, 
mon-eret, 

Plur. Mon-eremus, 
mon-eretis, 
mon-erent, 



3. Perfect Tense. — may have. 



Sing. Mon-uerim, 

mon-ueris, 

mon-uerit, 
Plur. Mon-uenmus, 

mon-iieritis, 

mon-uerint, 

4. Pluperfect Tense. 

Sing. Mon-uissem, 

mon-uisses, 

mon-uisset, 
Plur. Mon-uissemus, 

mon-uissetis, 

mon-iiissent, 



/ may have advised, 
thou mayst have advised, 
he may have advised. 
We may have advised, 
ye may have advised, 
they may have advised. 

— might, could, would, shoidd 
have. 

I might have advised, 
thou migMst have advised. 
he might have advised. 
We might have advised, 
ye might have advised, 
they might have advised. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect Tense, 

Mon-ere, to advise, 

c 5 



34 . LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Perfect, and Pluperfect Tense, 
Mon-uisse, to have advised. 

Future Tense, 
Mon-iturum esse, to be about to advise. 

GERUNDS. 

Mon-endi, of advising. 

Mon-endo, in advising. 

Mon-endum, to advise. 

SUPINES. 

Active Passive, 

Mon-itum, to advise. Mon-itu, to be advised. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present Tense, Future in rus, 

Mon-ens, advising. Mon-iturus, about to advise. 



THIKD CONJUGATION. — Kego. 

Reg-o, reg-is, rex-i, reg-ere ; reg-endi, reg-endo, reg- 
endum ; rec-tum, rec-tu ; reg-ens, rec-turus, to rule. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — do, am. 

Sing. Reg-o, I ride, do rule, or, am ruling. 

reg-is, thou rulest, dost ride, or, art ruling. 

reg-it, he ruleth, doth rule, or, is ruling. 

Plur. Reg-imus, We ride, do rule, or, are ruling. 

reg-itis, ye rule, do rule, or, are ruling. 

reg-unt, they rule, do rule, or, are ruling. 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VEKBS. 



35 



2. Imperfect Tense. — did, was. 



Sing. Rege-bam, 
rege-bas, • 
rege-bat, 

Plur. Rege-bamus, 
rege-batis, 
rege-bant, 



/ did rule, or, was ruling, 
thou didst rule, or, ivast riding, 
he did ride, or, was ruling. 
We did rule, or, were ruling, 
ye did rule, or, were ruling, 
they did rule, or. were ruling. 



3. Perfect Tense. — have. 

Sing. Rex-i, I ruled, or, have ruled. 

rex-isti, thou ruledst, or, hast ruled. 

rex-it, he ruled, or, hath ruled. 

Plur. Rex-imus, We ruled, or, have ruled. 

rex-istis, ye ruled, or, have ruled. 

rex-erunt, or, ere, they ruled, or, have ruled. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — had. 

Sing. Rex-eram, / had ruled. 

rex- eras, 

rex-erat, 
Plur. Rex-eramus, 

rex-eratis, 

rex-erant, 



thou hadst ruled, 
he had ruled. 
We had ruled, 
ye had ruled, 
they had ruled. 



5. Future Tense. — shall, will. 



Sing. Reg-am, 
reg-es, 
reg-et, 
Reg-emus, 
reg-etis, 
re^-ent, 



Plur. 



I shall, or, will rule, 
thou shalt, or, wilt rule, 
he shall, or, will rule. 
We shall, or, will rule, 
ye shall, or, tvill rule, 
they shall, or, will rule. 



6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. 



Sing. Rex-ero, 
rex-eris, 
rex-erit, 

Plur. Rex-enmus, 
rex-eritis, 
rex-erint, 



I shall have ruled, 
thou shalt have ruled, 
he shall have ruled. 
We shall have ruled, 
ye shall have ruled, 
they shall have ruled, 
c 6 



36 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — No first nor third Person. 

Sing. Reg-e, Rule thou, or, do thou rule. 

Plur. Reg-ite, Rule ye, or, do ye rule. 

Future Tense. — No first Person. 

Sing. Reg-ito, Rule thou, or, do thou ride. 

reg-ito, let him ride. 

Plur. Regitote, Rule ye, or, do ye rule. 

reg-unto, let them rule. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — may, can, fyc. (Potential Signs.) 

Sing. Reg-am, I may, or, can ride. 

reg-as, thou mayst, or, can'st rule. 

reg-at, he may, or, can rule. 

Plur. Reg-amus, We may, or, can rule. 

reg-atis, ye may, or, can rule. 

reg-ant, they may, or, can rule. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. 

Sing. Reg-erem, I might, or, could rule. 

reg-eres, thou mighfst, or, could 'st rule. 

reg-eret, he might, or, could rule. 

Piur. R.eg-eremus, We might, or, could rule. 

reg-eretis, ye might, or, coidd rule. 

reg-erent, they might, or, could rule. 

3. Perfect Tense. — may have. 

Sing. Rex- en m, / may have ruled. 

rex-eris, thou may'st have ruled. 

rex-erit, he may have ruled. 

Plur. Rex-erimus, We may have ruled. 

rex-eritis, ye may have ruled. 

rex-erint, they may have ruled, 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 37 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — mighty could, would, should have. 

Sing. Rex-issem, I might have ruled, 

rex-isses, thou might st have ruled. 

rex isset, he might have ruled. 

Plur. Rex-issemus, We might have ruled. 

rex-issetis, ye might have nded. 

rex-issent, they might have ruled. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect Tense, 

Reg- ere, to rule. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, 
Rex-isse, to have ruled. 

Future Tense, 
Rec-turum esse, to be about to rule. 

GERUNDS. 

Reg-endi, of ruling. 

Reg-endo, in ruling. 

Reg-en dum, to rule. 

SUPINES. 

Active, Passive, 

Rec-tum, to rule. Rec«tu, to be ruled. 

PARTICIPLES, 

Present Tense, Future in rus. 

Reg-ens, ruling. Rec-turus, about to rule. 

Note. Verbs of this conjugation that end in zo, insert i before the ter- 
minations given in the preceding form, in the present, imperfect, and 
future indicative, and in the present subjunctive; as also before the termi- 
nation of the third person plural of the imperative future. The indica- 
tive present is thus formed : — Sing, io, is, it. Plural, imus, itis, iunt. 



38 LATIN GRAMMAR. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. — Audio. 

Aud-io, aud-is, aud-ivi, aud-ire; aud-iendi, aud-iendo, 
aud-iendum ; aud-itum, aud-itu ; aud-iens, aud-iturus, 

to hear. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — do, am. 

Sing. x\ud-io, / hear, do hear, or, am hearing. 

aud-is, thouhearest, dost hear, or, art hearing. 

aud-it, he heareth, doth hear, or, is hearing. 

Plur. Aud-Imus, We hear, do hear, or, are hearing. 

aud-itis, ye hear, do hear-, or, are hearing. 

aud-iunt, they hear, do hear, or, are hearing. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — did, ivas. 

Sing. Aud-iebam, / did hear, or, ivas hearing. 

aud-iebas, thou didst hear, or, wast hearing. 

aud-iebat, he did hear, or, teas hearing. 

Plur. Aud-iebamus, We did hear, or, ivere hearing. 

aud-iebatis, ye did hear, or, ivere hearing. 

aud-iebant, they did hear, or, were hearing. 

3. Perfect Tense. — have. 

Sing. Aud-ivi, / heard, or, have heard. 

aud-ivisti, thou heard st, or, hast heard. 

aud-Ivit, he heard, or, hath heard. 

Plur. Aud-ivimus ? We heard, or, have heard. 

aud-ivistis, ye heard, or, have heard. 

aud-iverunt,or ere, they heard, or, have heard. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. ■ — had. 

Sing. Aud-Iveram, / had heard. 

aud-Iveras, thou hadst heard. 

aud-Iverat, he had heard. 

Plur. Aud-Iveramus, We had heard. 

aud-iveratis, ye had heard. 

aud-iverant, they had heard. 



CONJUGATION OF ACTIVE VERBS. 39 

5. Future Tense. — shall, will. 

Sing. Aud-iam, / shall, or, will hear. 

aud-ies, thou shalt, or, wilt hear. 

aud-iet, he shall, or, will hear. 

Plur. Aud-iemus, We shall, or, will hear. 

aud-ietis, ye shall, or, will hear. 

aud-ient, they shall, or, will hear. 

6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. 

Sing. Aud-Ivero, / shall have heard. 

aud-Iveris, thou shalt have heard. 

aud-Iverit, he shall have heard. 

Plur. Aud-Iverimus, We shall have heard. 

aud-iverltis, ye shall have heard. 

aud-Iverint, they shall have heard. 



IMPEEATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. 

Sing. Aud-I, Hear thou, or, do thou hear. 

Plur. Aud-ite, Hear ye, or, do ye hear. 

2. Future Tense. No first Person. 

Sing. Aud-Ito, Hear thou, or, do thou hear. 

aud-Ito, • let him hear. 

Plur. Aud-Itote, Hear ye, or, do ye hear. 

aud-iunto, let them hear. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — may, can, Sfc. (Potential Signs.) 

Sing. Aud-iam, / may, or, can hear. 

aud-ias, thou mayst, or, canst hear. 

aud-iat, he may, or, can hear. 
Plur. Aud-Tamus, We may, or, can hear. 

aud-iatis, ye may, or, can hear. 

aud-iant, they may, or, can hear. 



40 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should. 

I might, or, could hear, 
thou might st, or, could 'st hear, 
he might, or, could hear. 
We might, or, could hear, 
ye might, or, could hear, 
they might, or, could hear. 



Sing. Aud-irem, 
aud-ires, 
aud-iret, 

Plur. Aud-Iremus, 
aud-Iretis, 
aud-irent, 



3. Perfect Tense 



Sing. Aud-iverim, 
aud-iveris, 
aud-Iverit, 

Plur. Aud-Iverimus, 
aud-iveritis, 
aud-iverint, 



may have. 

I may have heard, 
thou mayst have heard, 
he may have heard. 
We may have heard, 
ye may have heard, 
they may have heard. 



4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should have. 



Sing. Aud-ivissem, 
aud-ivisses, 
aud-ivisset, 

Plur. Aud-ivissemus, 
aud-ivissetis, 
aud-ivissent, 



/ might have heard, 
thou might' st have heard, 
he might have heard. 
We might have heard, 
ye might have heard, 
they might have heard. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present and Imperfect Tense, 
Aud-Ire, to hear. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, 
Aud-ivisse, to have heard. 

Future Tense, 
Aud-iturum esse, to be about to hear. 

GERUNDS. 



Aud-iendi, 
aud-iendo, 
aud-iendum, 



of hearing, 
in hearing, 
to hear. 



CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
SUPINES. 



41 



Passive, 
Aud-Itu, to be heard. 



Active, 
Aud-itum,fo hear. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Present Tense, Future in rus, 

Aud-iens, hearing. Aud-itiirus, about to hear. 



CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 
FIRST CONJUGATION. — Amor. 



Am-or, arn-aris or am-are, 
am-ari ; am-atus, am-andus, 



am-atus 



sum or fui ; 
to be loved. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
1. Present Tense. — am. 



Sing. Am-or, 

am-aris, or, are, 

am-atur, 
Plur. Am-amur, 

am-amini, 

am-antur, 

2. Imperfect 

Sing. Am-abar, 

am-abaris, or abare, 

am-abatur, 
Plur. Am-abamur, 

am-abamini, 

am-abantur, 



I am loved, 
thou art loved, 
he is loved. 
We are loved, 
ye are loved, 
they are loved. 

Tense. — teas. 

I was loved, 
thou wast loved, 
he was loved. 
We were loved, 
ye were loved, 
they were loved. 



3. Perfect Tense. — 
Sing. Am-atus sum, or, fui, 

am-atus es, or, fuisti, 

am-atus est, or, fuit, 
Plur* Am-ati sumus, or, fuimus, 

am-ati estis, or, fuistis, 

am-ati sunt, fuerunt, or, ere, 



have been. 

I have been loved, 
thou hast been loved, 
he hath been loved. 
We have been loved, 
ye have been loved, 
they have been loved. 



42 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 

Sing. Am-atus eram, or, fueram, / had been loved. 

ani-atus eras, or, fueras, thou hadst been loved. 

am-atus erat, or, fuerat, he had been loved. 

Plur. Am-ati eramus, or, fueramus, We had been loved. 

am-ati eratis, or, fu eratis, ye had been loved. 

am-ati erant, or, fuerant, they had been loved. 

5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. 

Sing. Am-abor, / shall, or, will be loved. 

am-aberis, or, abere, thou shalt, or, wilt be loved. 

am-abitur, he shall, or, will be loved. 

Plur. Am-abimur, We shall, or, will be loved. 

am-abimini, ye shall, or will be loved. 

am-abuntur, they shall, or, will be loved. 

6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 

Sing. Am-atus ero, or, fuero, I shall have been loved. 

am-atus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been loved. 

am-atus erit, or, fuerit he shall have been loved. 

Plur. Am-ati erimus, or, fuerlmus, We shall have been loved. 

aon-ati eritis, or, fueritis, ye shall have been loved. 

am-ati erunt, or, fuerint, they shall have been loved. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. 

Sing. Am-are, Be thou loved. 

Plur. Am-ain^ni, Be ye loved. 

2. Future Tense. No first Person. 

Sing. Am-ator, Be thou loved. 

am-ator, let him be loved. 

Plur. Am-aminor, Be ye loved. 

am-antor, let them be loved. 



CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 43 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
1. Present Tense. — may, can be, Sfc. (Potential signs.) 

Sing. Am-er, / may, or, can be loved. 

am-eris, or, ere, thou mayst, or, canst be loved. 

am-etur, he may, or, can be loved. 
Plur. Am-emur, We may, or, can be loved. 

am-emini, ye may, or, can be loved. 

arn-entuv they may, or, can be loved. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should be. 

Sing. Am-arer, / might, or, could be loved. 

am-areris, or, arere, thou might' st, or, could 'st be loved. 

am-aretur, he might, or, could be loved. 

Plur. Am-aremur, We might, or, could be loved. 

am-aremini, ye might, or, could be loved. 

am-arentur, they might, or could be loved. 

3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. 

Sing. Am-atus sim, or, fuerim, / may have been loved. 

am-atus sis, or, fueris, thou mayst have been loved. 

am-atus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been loved. 
Plur. Am-ati simus, or, fuerimus, We may have been loved. 

am-ati sitis, or fueritis, ye may have been loved. 

am-ati sint, or, fuerint they may have been loved. 

4, Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should 
have been. 

Sing. Am-atus essem, or, fuissem, I might have been loved. 

am-atus esses, or, fuisses, thou might 'st have been loved. 

am-atus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been loved. 
Plur. Am-ati essemus, or, fuissemus, £Fe might have been loved. 

am-ati essetis, or, fuissetis, ye might have been loved. 

am-ati essent^or, fuissent, they might have been loved. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect Tense, 
Am-ari, to be loved. 



44 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, 
Am-atum esse, or, fuisse, to have been loved. 

Future Tense, 
Am-atum iri, to be about to be loved. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Perfect Tense, 
Am-atus, having been loved. 

Future in dus (or Participle of Necessity). 
Am-andus, that must be loved. 



SECOND CONJUGATION. — Moneor. 

Mon-eor, mon-eris or mon-ere, rnon-itus sum or fui ; 
mon-eri ; mon-itus, nion-endus, to be advised. 

mDICATTVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — am. 

Sing. Mon-eor, / am advised, 

mon-eris, or, ere, thou art advised. 

mon-etur, he is advised. 

Plur. Mon-emur, We are advised. 

mon-emini, ye are advised. 

mon-entur, they are advised. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — teas. 

Sing. Mon-ebar, I was advised. 

mon-ebaris, or, ebare, thou ivast advised. 

mon-ebatur, he was advised. 

Plur. Mon-ebamur, We were advised. 

mon-ebamini, ye were advised, 

mon-ebantur, they were advised. 



CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 45 

3. Perfect Tense. — have been. 

Sing. Mon-itus sum, or, fui, / have been advised. 

nion-itus es, or, fuisti, thou hast been advised. 

mon-itus est, or, fuit, he hath been advised. 

Piur. Mon-iti sumus, or, fuimus, We have been advised. 

mon-iti estis, or, fuistis, ye have been advised. 

mon-iti sunt, fuerunt, or, fuere, they have been advised. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 

Sing. Mon-itus erara, or, fueram, I had been advised. 

mon-itus eras, or, fueras, thou hadst been advised. 

mon-itus erat, or, fuerat, he had been advised. 
Plur.Mon-itieramus,or, fueramus, We had been advised. 

mon-iti eratis, or, fueratis, ye had been advised. 

mon-iti erant, or, fuerant, they had been advised. 

5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. 

Sing. Mon-ebor, / shall, or, will be advised. 

mon-eberis, or, ebere, thou shah, or, wilt be advised. 

mon-ebitur, he shall, or, will be advised. 

Piur. Mon-ebimur, We shall, or, will be advised. 

mon-eblmini, ye shall, or, will be advised. 

mon-ebuntur, they shall, or, will be advised. 

6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 

Sing. Mon-itus, ero, or, fuero, I shall have been advised. 

mon-itus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been advised. 

mon-itus erit, or, fuerit, he shall have been advised. 
Piur. Mon-iti erimus,or,fuerImus, We shall have been advised. 

mon-iti erltis, or, fueritis, ye shall have been advised. 

mon-iti erunt, or, fuerint, they shall have been advised. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. 

Sing. Mon-ere, Be thou advised. 

Piur. Mon-emini, Be ye advised. 



46 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

2. Future Tense. No first Person. 

Sing. Mon-etor, Be thou advised. 

mon -e tor, let him be advised. 

Plur. Mon-enrinor, Be ye advised. 

mon-entor, let them be advised. 

SUBJUXCTIYE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — may, can be, fyc. (Potential signs.) 

Sing.Mon-ear, / may, or, can be advised. 

mon-earis, or. eare, thou may'st, or, canst be advised. 

rnon-eatur, he may, or, can be advised. 

Plur.Mon-eamur, We may, or, can be advised. 

rnon-eammi, ye may, or, can be advised, 

nion-eantur, they may, or, can be advised. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — wight, could, would, should be. 

Sing. Mon-erer, I might, or, could be advised. 

mon-ereris, or, -erere, thou might st,OT, could 'st be advised. 

mon-eretur, he might, or, could be advised. 

Plur. Mon-eremur, We might, or, could be advised. 

rnon-eremini, ye might, or, could be advised. 

mon-erentur, they might, or, could be advised. 

3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. 

Smg. Mon-itus sini,0?*,fuerim, I may have been advised. 

mon-itus sis, or, fueris, thou may'st have been advised. 

mon-itus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been advised. 
Plur. Mon-iti simus,or,fuerimus, We may have been advised. 

mon-iti sitis, or, fueritis, ye may have been advised 

mon-iti sint, or, fuerint, they may have been advised. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should 
have been. 
S. Mon-itus essem^orjfaissem,/ might have been advised. 
mon-itus esses, or, fuisses, thou might* st have been advised. 
mon-itus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been advised. 
PL Mon-iti essemus,or,fuissemus, We might have been advised. 
mon-iti essetis, or, fuissetis, ye might have been advised. 
mon-iti essent, or, fuissent, they might have been advised. 



CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 47 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Present and Imperfect Tense, 
Mon-eri, to be advised. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, 
Mon-itum esse, or, fuisse, to have been advised. 

Future Tense, 
Mon-itum iri, to be about to be advised. 

Participles. 

Perfect Tense, 
Mon-itus, having been advised. 

Future in dus (or Participle of Necessity). 
Mon-endus, that must be advised. 



THIED CONJUGATION. — Eegor. 

Peg-or, reg-eris or reg-ere, rec-tus sum or fui ; 
reg-i ; rec-tus, reg-endus, to be ruled. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — am. 

Sing. Reg-or, I am ruled. 

reg-eris, or, ere, thou art ruled. 

reg-Ttur, he is ruled. 

Plur. Reg-imur, We are ruled. 

reg-imi'ni, ye are ruled. 

reg-untur, they are ruled. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — was. 

Sing. Reg-ebar, I was ruled. 

reg-ebaris, or, ebare, thou wast ruled. 

reg-ebatur, he was ruled. 

Plur. Reg-ebamur, We tvere ruled. 

reg-ebamini, ye were ruled. 

reg-ebantur, they were ruled. 



48 



LATIN" GRAMMAR. 



3. Perfect Tense. — have been. 



Sing. Rec-tus sum, or, fui, 
rec-tus es, or, fuisti, 
rec-tus est, or, fuit, 

Plur. Rec-ti sumus, or, fuTmus, 
rec-ti estis, or, fuistis, 



/ have been ruled, 
thou hast been ruled, 
he hath been ruled. 
We have been ruled, 
ye have been ruled. 



rec-ti sunt, fuerunt, or, fuere, they have been mded. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 

I had been ruled, 
thou hadst been ruled, 
he had been mded. 
We had been mded. 
ye had been ruled, 
they had been ruled. 



Sing. Rec-tus eram, or, fueram, 
rec-tus eras, or, fueras, 
rec-tus erat, or, fuerat, 

Piur. Rec-ti eranius, or, fueramus, 
rec-ti eratis, or, fu eratis, 
rec-ti erant, or, fuerant, 



5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. 



Sing. Reg-ar 

reg-eris, or, ere, 

reg-etur, 
Plur. Reg-emur, 

reg-emmi, 

reg-entur 



/ shall, or, will be ruled, 
thou shalt, or wilt be ruled, 
he shall, or, will be ruled. 
We shall, or, will be ruled, 
ye shall, or, will be ruled, 
they shall, or, will be ruled. 



6. Future Perfect Tense. — sJiall or will have been. 

Sing. Rec-tus ero, or, fuero, I shall have been ruled. 

rec-tus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been ruled. 

rec-tus erit, or, fuerit, he shall have been ruled. 
Plur. Rec-ti erimuSjOrjfuerlmus^Fe shall have been ruled. 

rec-ti eritis, or, fuerltis, ye shall have been ruled. 

rec-ti eruntj or, fuerint, they shall have been ruled. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
1. Present Tense. No first nor third Person. 



Sing. Reg-ere, 
Plur. Reg-imini, 



Be thou ruled. 
Be ye ruled. 



CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 49 

2. Future Tense. No first Person, 

Sing. Reg-itor, Be thou ruled. 

reg-itor, let him be ruled. 

Plur. Reg-iminor, Be ye ruled. 

reg-untor, let them be ruled. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — may, can be, Sfc. (Potential signs). 

Sing. Reg-ar, / may, or, can be ruled. 

reg-aris, or, are, thou may'st, or, canst be ruled. 

reg-atur, he may, or, can be ruled. 

Plur. Reg-amur, We may, or, can be ruled. 

reg-amini, ye may, or, cari be ruled. 

reg-antur, they may, or, can be ruled. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — mighty could, would, should be. 

Sing. Reg-erer, / might, or, could be ruled. 

reg-ereris, or, erere, thou mightst,or,couldst be ruled. 

reg-eretur, he might, or, could be ruled. 

Plur. Reg-eremur, We might, or, could be ruled. 

reg-eremini, ye might, or, could be ruled. 

reg-erentur, they might, or, coidd be ruled. 

3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. 

Sing. Rec-tus sim, or, fuerim, / may have been ruled. 

rec-tus sis, or, fueris, thou mayst have been mded. 

rec-tus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been ruled. 
Plur. Rec-ti simus,or,fuerimus, We may have been ruled. 

rec-ti sitis, or, fueritis, ye may have been ruled. 

rec-ti sint, or, fuerint, they may have been ruled. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should 
have been. 

Sing. Rec-tus essem,or,fuissem,7 might have been ruled. 

rec-tus esses, or, fuisses, thou migMst have been ruled. 

rec-tus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been ruled. 
Plur. Rec-ti essemus,or,fuissemus, We might have been ruled. 

rec-ti essetis,0/*,fuissetis,?/e might have been ruled. 

rec-ti essent, or, fuissent, they might have been ruled. 
D 



50 LATIN GRAMMAR. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Present and Imperfect Tense, 
Reg-i, to be ruled. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, 
Rec-tum esse, or, fuisse, to have been ruled. 

Future Tense, 
Rec-tum iri, to be about to be ruled. 

Participle of the Perfect Tense, 
Rec-tus, having been ruled. 

Participle of the Future in dus (or Participle of 
necessity). 

Reg-endus, that must be ruled. 

Note. Verbs of this conjugation that end in lor, insert i before the 
terminations given in the preceding form in the present, imperfect and 
future indicative, and in the present subjunctive ; as also before the third 
person plural of the imperative future. The indicative present is thus 
formed : — Sing, tor, eris or ere, itur. Plur. tmur, imlni, iuntur. 



FOURTH CONJUGATION. — Audior. 

Aud-ior, aud-iris or aud-ire, aud-itus sum or fui, 
aud-iri ; aud-itus, aud-iendus, to be heard. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. — am. 

Sing. Aud-ior, lam heard. 

aud-iris, or, ire, thou art heard. 

aud-Itur, he is heard. 

Plur. Aud-Imur, We are heard. 

aud-Imini., ye are heard. 

aud-iuntur, they are heard. 



CONJUGATION OF PASSIVE VERBS. 51 

2. Imperfect Tense. — was. 

Sing. Aud-iebar, I was heard. 

aud-iebaris, or, lebare, thou wast heard. 

aud-iebatur, he was heard. 

Plur. Aud-iebamur, We were heard. 

aud-iebamini, ye were heard. 

aud-iebantur, they were heard. 

3. Perfect Tense. — have been. 

Sing. Aud-Itus sum, or, fui, / have been heard. 

aud-Itus es, or, fuisti, thou hast been heard. 

aud-Itus est, or, fuit, he hath been heard. 

Plur. Aud-Iti sumus, or, fuimus, We have been heard. 

aud-Iti estis, or, fuistis, ye have been heard. 

aud-Iti sunt, fuerunt, or, fuere, they have been heard. 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 

Sing. Aud-Itus eram, or, fueram, / had been heard. 

aud-Itus eras, or, fueras, thou hadst been heard. 

aud-Itus erat, or, fuerat, he had been heard. 

Plur. Aud-Iti eramus, or, fu eramus, We had been heard. 

aud-Iti eratis, or, fueratis, ye had, been heard. 

aud-Iti erant, or, fuerant, they had been heard. 

5. Future Tense. — shall or will be. 

Sing. Aud-iar, i" shall, or, will be heard. 

aud-ieris, or, iere, thou shalt, or, wilt be heard. 

aud-ietur, he shall, or, will be heard. 

Plur. Aud-iemur, We shall, or, will be heard. 

aud-iemini, ye shall, or, will be heard. 

aud-ientur, they shall, or, will be heard. 

6. Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 

Sing. Aud-Itus ero, or, fuero, I shall have been heard. 

aud-Itus eris, or, fueris, thou shalt have been heard. 

aud-Itus erit, or, fuerit, he shall have been heard. 

Plur. Aud-Iti erimus, or, fuerlmus, We shall have been heard. 

aud-Iti eritis, or, fuerltis, ye shall have been heard. 

aud-Iti-erunt, or, fuerint, they shall have been heard. 
d 2 



52 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

1. Present Tense. Nojirst nor third Person. 

Sing. Aud-ire, Be thou heard. 

Plur. Aud-Iniini, Be ye heard. 

2. Future Tense. No first Person. 

Sing. Aud-itor 3 Be thou heard. 

aud-Itor, let him be heard. 

Plur. Aud-Iminor, Be ye heard. 

aud-iuntor, let them be heard. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
1. Present Tense. — may, can be, 8fc. (Potential signs). 

Sing. Aud-iar, / may, or, can be heard. 

aud-iaris, or, iare, thou mayst, or, canst be heard. 

aud-iatur, he may, or, can be heard. 

Piur. Aud-iamur, * We may, or, can be heard. 

aud-iamini, ye may, or, can be heard. 

aud-iantur, they may, or, can be heard. 

2. Imperfect Tense. — might, could, would, should be. 

Sing. Aud-Irer, I might, or, could be heard. 

aud-Ireris, or, Irere, thou might st, or, could st be heard. 

aud-Iretur, he might, or, could be heard. 
Plur. Aud-Iremur, We might, or, could be heard. 

aud-Iremini, ye might, or, could be heard. 

aud-Irentur, they might, or, could be heard. 

3. Perfect Tense. — may have been. 

Sing. Aud-itus sim, or, fuerim, I may have been heard. 

aud-itus sis, or, fueris, thou may'st have been heard. 

aud-itus sit, or, fuerit, he may have been heard. 
Plur. Aud-iti simus, or, fuerimus, We may have been heard. 

aud-iti sitis, or, fueritis, ye may have been heard. 

aud-iti sint, or, fuerint, they may have been heard. 



CONJUGATION OF DEPONENT VEEBS. 53 

4. Pluperfect Tense. — might, could, tvould, should 
have been. 
Sing. Aud-itusessem,0r,fuissem,/?m#A£ have been heard. 

aud-Itus esses, or, fuisses, thou might' st have been heard. 
aud-itus esset, or, fuisset, he might have been heard, 
Plur. Aud-iti essemus, or, fuissemus, We might have been heard. 
aud-iti essetis, or, fuissetis, ye might have been heard. 
aud-iti essent, or, fuissent, they might have been heard. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect Tense, 

Aud-iri, to be heard. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense, 
Aud-itum esse, or, fuisse, to have been heard. 

Future Tense, 
Aud-itum iri, to be about to be heard. 

Pakticiple of the Perfect Tense, 
Aud-Itus, having been heard. 

Participle of the Future in dus (or Participle of 

necessity). 

Aud-iendus, that must be heard. 



VERBS DEPONENT. 



Verbs deponent are formed partly like an active and 
partly like a passive verb ; but are conjugated altogether 
in their tenses like passive verbs. 

1. Moder-or, moder-aris or moder-are, moder-atus 
sum or fui, moder-ari ; moder-andi, moder-ando, moder- 
andum; moder-atum, moder-atu; moder-ans, moder- 
atiirus ; moder-atus, moder-andus, to rule. 

2. Pollic-eor, pollic-eris or pollic-ere, pollic-itus sum 
or fui, pollic-eri ; pollic-endi, pollic-endo, pollic-endum ; 
pollic-itum, pollic-itu ; pollic-ens, pollic-iturus ; pollic- 
itus, pollic-endus, to promise. 

D 3 



54 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

3. Amplect-or, amplect-eris or amplect~ere, amplex- 
us sum or fui, amplect-i; amplect-endi, amplect-endo, 
amplect-endum ; amplex-um, amplex-u ; amplect-ens, 
amplex-urus ; amplex-us, ainplect-endus, to embrace. 

4. Larg-ior, larg-iris or larg-ire, larg-itus sura or 
fui, larg-iri ; larg-iendi, larg-iendo, larg-iendum ; larg- 
Itum, larg-itu; larg-iens, larg-iturus; larg-itus, larg- 
iendus, to bestow freely. 

VERBS NEUTER PASSIVE. 

A neuter- passive verb Is formed partly like an active, 
partly like a passive verb. In the perfect and the 
tenses derived from it, it is formed and conjugated like 
a passive verb ; in the remaining tenses like an active 
verb ; as, 

Gaudeo, gaudes, gavisus sum or fui, gaudere ; gaud- 
endi, gaudendo, gaudendum; gavisum, gavisu; gaud- 
ens, gavlsiirus ; gavisus, to rejoice. 



CONJUGATION OF VEEBS IEEEGULAE. 

Possum, Volo, Nolo, Malo, Edo, Fero,^ Feror, Fio, 
are verbs irregular, and are conjugated as follows : — 

Possum, potes, potui, posse, potens, to be able. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — am. 

Sing. Possum, I Hur. Possumus, 

potes, potestis, 

potest. I possunt. 

Imperfect Tense. — was. 

Plur. Poteramus, 
poteratis. 



Sing. Poteram, 
poteras, 
poterat. 






poterant. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS, 55 



Perfect Tense 


. — have been. 


Sing. Potiii, 
potuisti, 
potuit. 


Plur. Potuimus, 
potuistis, 
potuerunt or ere, 


Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 


Sing. Potueram, 
potueras, 
potuerat. 


Plur. Potueramus, 
potueratis, 
potuerant, 


Future Tense. — shall or will be. 


Sing. Potero, 
poteris, 
poterit. 


Plur. Poterimus, 
poteritis, 
poterunt. 


Future Perfect Tense, — shall or will have been 


Sing. Potuero, 
potueris, 
potuerit. 


Plur. Potuerlmus, 
potuerltis, 
potuerint. 



The Imperative Mood is not found 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — may be, &c. (Potential signs). 
Sing. Possim, Plur. Posslmus, 



possis, 
possit. 


possltis, 
possint. 


Imperfect Tense. — might be, &c 


Sing. Possen, 
posses, 
posset. 


Plur. Possemus, 
possetis, 
possent. 


Perfect Tense. — may have been. 


Sing. Potuerim, 
potueris, 
potuerit. 

D 


Plur. Potuerimus, 
potuerltis, 
potuerint. 
4 



56 LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, fyc. 



Sing. Potuissem, 
potuisses, 
potuisset. 



Plur. Potuissemus, 
potuissetis, 
potuissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. 

Posse. Potuisse. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Pres. Potens (used only as adjective), powerful. 



Volo, vis, volui, velle; volendi, volendo; volens, 

to be willing. 

ESTDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. — am. 



Sing. Volo, 
vis, 
vult. 


Plur. VolumuSj 
vultis, 
volunt. 


Imperfect Tense. — was. 


Sing. Volebam, 
volebas, 
volebat. 


Plur. Volebamus, 
volebatis, 
volebant. 


Perfect Tense — have been. 


Sing. Volui, I Plur. Volmmus, 
voluisti, voluistis, 
voluit. voluerunt, or ere. 


Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 


Sing. Volueram, 
volueras, 
voluerat. 


Plur. Volueramus, 
volueratis, 
voluerant. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



57 



Future Tense. — shall or will be. 



Sing. Volam, 
voles, 
volet. 



Plur. Volemus, 
voletis, 
volent. 



Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 



Sing. Voluero, 
volueris, 
voluerit. 



Plur. Voluerlmus, 
voluerltis, 
voluerint. 



The Imperative Mood is not found. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. — may be, 8fc. (Potential signs). 

Sing. Velim, Plur. Vellmus, 

velis, velltis, 

velit. I velint. 

Imperfect Tense. — might be. 

Sing. Vellem, Plur. Vellemus, 

velles, velletis, 

vellet. vellent. 



Perfect Tense. 



Sing. Voluerim, 
volueris, 
voluerit. 



may have been. 

Plur. Voluerimus, 
voluerltis, 
voluerint. 



Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, 8fc. 



Sing. Voluissem, 
voluisses, 
voluisset. 



Plur. Voluissemus, 
voluissetis, 
voluissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Pres. and Imperf. 
Velle. 



Perf. and Pluperf. 
Voluisse. 



D 5 



58 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

GERUNDS. 
Volendi, Volendo. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Pres. Volens. 



Nolo, nonvis, noliii, nolle ; nolendi; nolens, 

to be unwilling. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — am. 

Sing. Nolo, Plur. Nolumus, 

nonvis, nonvultis, 

nonvult. nolunt. 

Imperfect Tense. — was. 

Sing. Nolebam. Plur. Nolebamus, 

nolebas, nolebatis, 

nolebat. nolebant. 

Perfect Tense. — have been. 

Sing. Nolui, Plur. Noluimus, 

noluisti, noluistis, 

noluit. noluerunt or ere. 



Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 



Sing. Nolueram, 
nolueras, 
noluerat. 



Plur. Nolueramus, 
nolueratis 
noluerant. 



Future Tense. — shall or will be. 






Sing. Nolam, 
noles, 
nolet. 



-Plur. Nolemus, 
noletis, 
nolent. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



59 



Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 

Sing. Noluero, I Plur. Noluerlmus, 

nolueris, nolueritis, 

noluerit. I noluerint. 





IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




Present Tense. 


Sing. Noli. 


| Plur. Nolite. 




Future Tense. 


Sing. Nollto, 
nolito. 


I Plur. Nolltote, 
nolunto. 




SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 


Present Tense. — may be, Sfc. (Potential signs), 


Sing. Nolim, 
nolis, 
nolit. 




Plur. Nollmue, 
nolltis, 
nolint. 


Imperfect Tense. — might be, 8fc. 


Sing. Nollem. 
nolles, 
nollet. 




Plur. Nollemus, 
nolletis, 
nollent. 


Perfect Tense. — may have been. 


Sing. Noluerim, 
nolueris, 
noluerit. 




Plur. Noluerimus, 
nolueritis, 
noluerint. 


Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, 8fc. 


Sing. Noluissem, 
noluisses, 
noluisset. 




Plur. Noluissemus, 
noluissetis, 
noluissent. 



D 6 



60 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pres. and Iniperf. Perf. and Pluperf. 

Nolle. Noluisse. 

GERUND. 
Nolendi. 

PARTICIPLE. 
Pres. Nolens. 



Malo, mavis, maliii, malle ; to be more willing, or to 

have rather. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — am. 



Sing. Malo, 
mavis, 
mavult. 



Sing. Malebani, 
malebas, 
malebat. 



Plur. Malumus, 
mavultis, 
malunt. 

Imperfect Tense. — was. 

Plur. Malebamus, 
malebatis, 
malebant. 



Perfect Tense. — have been. 

Sing. Malui, j Plur. Maliiimus, 

maluisti? maluistis, 

maliiit. maluerunt or ere. 



Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 



Sing. Malueram, 
malueras, 
maluerat. 



Plur. Malueramus, 
malueratis, 
maluerant. 



Future Tense. — shall or will be. 

Sing. Malam, Plur. Malemus, 

males, maletis. 

malet. malent. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 61 

Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 



Sing. Maluero, 
m aliieris, 
maluerit. 



Plur. Maluerimus, 
maluerltis, 
maluerint. 



The Imperative Mood is not found. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 
Present Tense. — may be, 8fc. (Potential signs). 



Sing. Malim, 
malis, 
malit. 


Plur. Mallmus, 
malltis, 
malint. 


Imperfect Tense. — might be, 8fc. 


Sing. Mallem, 
malles, 
mallet. 


Plur. Mallemus, 
malletis, 
mallent. 


Perfect Tense. — may have been. 


Sing. Maluerim, 
malueris, 
maluerit. 


Plur. Maluerimus, 
malueritis, 
maluerint. 


Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, fyc. 


Sing. Maluissem, 
maluisses, 
maluisset. 


Plur. Maluissemus, 
maluissetis, 
maluissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. 

Malle. Maluisse. 



62 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Edo, edis or es, edi, edere or esse ; edendi, edendo, 
edendum ; esum, esu ; edens, esurus, to eat. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — do, am. 
Sing. Edo, Plur. Edimus, 

edis, or, es, editis, or, estis, 

edit, or, est. edunt. 

Imperfect Tense — did, was. 

Sing. Edebam, Plur. Edebamus, 

edebas, edebatis, 

edebat. edebant. 



Sing. Edi, 
edisti, 
edit. 



Sing. Ederam, 
ederas, 
ederat. 



Perfect Tense. — have. 

Plur. Edimus, 
edistis, 
ederunt, or, ere. 

Pluperfect Tense. — had. 

Plur. Ederamus, 
ederatis, 
ederant. 



Future Tense. — shall, will. 

Sing. Edam, I Plur. Edemus, 

edes, edetis, 

edet. I edent. 

Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 



Sing. Edero, 
ederis, 
ederit. 



Plur. Ederimus, 
ederltis, 
ederint. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 
Sing. Ede, es. Plur. EdTte, este. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 63 



Future Tense, 

Sing. Edito, esto, 1 Plur. Editote, estote, 

edito, esto. edunto. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — may, can (Potential signs). 

Sing. Edam, Plur. Edamus, 

edas, edatis, 

edat. edant. 

Imperfect Tense. — might, could, fyc. 

Sing. Ederem, or, essem, I Plur. Ederemus, or, essemus, 
ederes, or, esses, ederetis, or, essetis, 

ederet ? or r esset. ederent, or, essent. 

Perfect Tense. — may have. 



Sing. Ederim, 
ederis, 
ederit. 



Plur. Ederimus, 
ederitis, 
ederint. 



Pluperfect Tense. — might have, fyc. 



Sing. Edissem, 
edisses, 
edisset. 



Plur. Edissemus, 
edissetis, 
edissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. 

Edere, or, esse. Edisse. 

Future Tense, 
Esurum esse. 

GERUNDS. 
Edendi. Edendo. Edendum. 



64 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

SUPINES. 
Esum, Esu. 

PARTICIPLES. 
Pres. Edens. Fut. Esurus. 

N.B. — In the same way are conjugated the com- 
pounds of Edo. 





Fero, fers, tiili, ferre ; f erendi, f erendo, f erendum ; 
latum, latu ; f erens, laturus, to bear or suffer. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. — do, am. 



Sing. Fero, 
fers, 
fert. 




Plur. Ferimus, 
fertis, 
ferunt. 


Imperfect Tense. — did, was. 


Sing. Ferebam, 
ferebas, 
ferebat. 




Plur. Ferebamus, 
ferebatis, 
ferebant. 




Perfect Tense. — have. 


Sing. Tiili, 
tulisti, 
tiilit. 




Plur. Tiilimus, 
tulistis, 
tiilerunt, or, ere 


Sing. Tuleram, 
tuleras, 
tulerat. 


Pluperfect 1 


^ense. — had. 

Plur. Tuleramus, 
tuleratis, 
tulerant. 



Future Tense. — shall, will. 
Sing. Feram, j Plur. Feremus, 

feres, i feretis, 

feret. ferent. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 65 

Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have 
Sing. Tulero, Plur. Tulerlmus, 

tuleris, tulerltis, 

tulerit. tulerint. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 

Sing. Fer. Plur. Ferte. 

Future Tense, 

Sing. Ferto, Plur. Fertote, 

Ferto, Ferunto. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 



Present Tense. — may, can (Potential signs). 

Plur. Feramus, 
feratis, 



Sing. Feram 
feras, 
ferat. 



ferant. 

Imperfect Tense. — might, could, fyc. 
Sing. Ferrem, 



ferres, 
ferret. 



Plur. Ferremus, 
ferretis, 
ferrent. 

Perfect Tense. — may have. 

Sing. Tulerim, Plur. Tulerimus, 

tuleris, tuleritis, 

tulerit. tulerint. 

Pluperfect Tense. — might have, fyc. 



Sing. Tulissem, 
tulisses, 
tulisset. 



Plur. Tulissemus, 
tulissetis, 
tulissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 



Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. 

Ferre. Tulisse. 



66 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 





Future Tense, 








Laturum esse. 








GERUNDS. 






Ferendi, 


Ferendo, 
SUPINES. 




Ferendum 


Latum, 


PARTICIPLES. 




Latu. 


Pres. Ferens. 




Fut. 


Laturus. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Feror, ferris or ferre, latus sum or fui, ferri ; latus, 
ferendus, to be borne, or suffered. 

Present Tense. — am. 
Sing. Feror, Plur. FerTmur, 

fer-ris, or, re, ferimini, 

fertur. feruntur. 



Sing. Ferebar, 

fere-baris, or, bare 
ferebatur. 



Imperfect Tense. — was. 

Plur. Ferebamur, 
ferebamini, 
ferebantur. 



Perfect Tense. — have been. 



Sing. Latus sum, or, fui, 
latus es, or, fuisti, 
latus est, or, fuit. 



PI. Lati sumus, or, fuimus, 
lati estis, or, fuistis, [fuere. 
lati sunt, or, fuerunt, or 



Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 

Sing. Latus eram, or, fueram, 1P1. Lati eramus, or, fueramus, 
latus eras, or, fueras, lati eratis, or, fueratis, 

latus erat, or, fuerat. lati erant, or, fuerant. 

Future Tense. — shall or will be. 



Sing. Ferar, 

fer-eris, or, ere, 
feretur. 



Plur. Feremur, 
feremini, 
ferentur. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



67 



Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 



Sing. Latus ero, or, fuero, 
latus eris, or, fueris, 
latus erit, or, fuerit, 



P. Lati erimus, or, fuerlmus, 
lati eritis, or, fueritis, 
lati erunt, or, fuerint. 



Sing. Ferre. 



Sing. Fertor, 
fertor. 



IMPEKATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 

Plur. Ferimini. 

Future Tense, 

Plur. Feriminor, 
feruntor. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. — may be, Sfc. (Potential signs). 



Sing. Ferar, 

fer-aris, or, are, 
feratur. 



Plur. Feramur, 
feramini, 
ferantur. 



Imperfect Tense. 
Sing. Ferrer, 

fer-reris, or, rere, 
ferretur. 



— might be, fyc. 

Plur. Ferremur, 
ferremini, 
ferrentur. 



Perfect Tense. — may have been. 



Sing. Latus sim, or, fuerim, 
latus sis, or, fueris, 
latus sit, or, fuerit. 



PI. Lati simus, or, fuerlmus, 
lati sitis, or, fueritis, 
lati sint, or, fuerint. 



Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, 8fc. 



S. Latus essem, or, fuissem, 
latus esses, or, fuisses, 
latus esset, or, fuisset. 



P.Lati essemus, or, fuissemus, 
lati essetis, or, fuissetis, 
lati essent, or, fuissent. 



68 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. 

Ferri. Latum esse, or, fuisse. 

Future Tense, 
Latum iri. 



PARTICIPLES. 



Perf. Latus. 



Fut. Ferendus. 



Flo, fis, factus sum or fui, fieri; factus, faciendus, 

to be made or done. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. — am. 



Sing. Fio, 
fis, 
fit. 




Plur. Fimus, 
fitis, 
fiunt. 




Imperfect T 


ense. — was. 


Sing. Fiebam 
fiebas, 
fiebat. 


> 


Plur. Fiebamus, 
fiebatis, 
fiebant. 




Perfect Tense 


. — have been. 


Sing. Factus sum, or, fui, 
Factus es, or, fuisti, 
Factus est, or, fuit. 


PI. Facti sumus, or, fuimus, 
facti estis, or, fuistis, [fuere 
Facti sunt, or, fuerunt, or 



Pluperfect Tense. — had been. 



Sing. Factus eram, or, fueram. 
factus eras, or, fueras, 
Cactus erat, or 9 fuerat, 



PI. Facti e ramus, or, fueramus, 
facti eratis, or, fueratis, 
facti erant, or, fuerant. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



69 



Future Tense. — shall or will be. 

Sing. Fiam, Plur. Fiemus. 

fies, fietis, 

fiet. fient. 

Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have been. 



Sing. Factus ero, or, fuero, 
factus eris, or 3 fueris, 
factus erit, or, fuerit. 



PL Facti erimus, or, fu erimus, 
facti eritis, or, fuerltis, 
facti erunt, or, fuerint. 



Sing. Fi. 



Sing. Fito, 
fito. 



IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense, 

| Plur. Fite. 

Future Tense, 

Plur. Fitote, 
fiunto. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — may be, Sfc. (Potential signs). 

Sing. Fiam, Plur. Fiamus, 

fias, fiatis, 

fiat. fiant. 

Imperfect Tense. — might be, Sfc. 



Sing. Fierem, 
fieres, 
fieret. 



Plur. Fieremus, 
fieretis, 
fierent. 



Perfect Tense. — may have been. 



Sing. Factus sim, or, fuerim, 
factus sis, or, fueris, 
factus sit, or, fuerit. 



PL Facti simus, or, fu erimus, 

facti sitis, or, fu eritis, 

facti sink, or, fuerint. 



70 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Pluperfect Tense. — might have been, Sfc. 
Sing. Factus essem,or, fuisseni,!P. Facti essemus, or, fuissemus, 



Factus esses, or, fuisses, 
Factus esset, or, fuisset. 



facti essetis, or, fuissetis, 
facti essent, or, fuissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Pres. and Imperf. Perf. and Pluperf. 

Fieri. Factum esse, or, fuisse. 

Future Tense, 
Factum iri, 

PARTICIPLES. 
Perf. Factus. Fut. Faciendus. 



EO, to go, is also a verb irregular. 
Eo, is, ivi, ire ; eundi, eundo, eundum ; itum, itu ; 
iens, iturus. 

INDICATIVE MOOD. 



Sing. Eo, 
is, 
it. 



Sing. Ibam, 
ibas, 
ibat. 



Sing. Ivi, 
ivisti, 
ivit. 



Present Tense. — do, am. 

Plur. Imus, 
itis, 
eunt. 

Imperfect Tense. — did, was. 

Plur. Ibamus, 
ibatis, 
ibant. 



Perfect Tense. — have. 

Plur. Ivimus, 
ivistis, 
iverunt, or, ere. 



CONJUGATION OF IRREGULAR VERBS. 



71 



Sing. Iveram, 
iveras, 
iverat. 


Pluperfect Tense. — had. 

Plur. Iveramus, 
iveratis, 
iverant. 




Future Tense. — shall, will. 


Sing. Ibo, 
ibis, 
ibit. 




Plur. Ibimus, 
ibitis, 
ibunt. 


Future Perfect Tense. — shall or will have. 


Sing. Ivero, 
iveris, 
iverit. 




Plur. Iverlmus, 
iveritis, 
iverint. 




IMPERATIVE MOOD. 




Present Tense. 


Sing. I, 


| Plur. Ite. 




Future Tense. 


Sing. Ito, 
ito, 




Plur. Itote, 
eunto. 



Sing. Earn, 
eas, 
eat. 



SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. — may, can. 

Plur. Eamus, 
eatis, 
eant. 



Imperfect Tense. — might, could, fyc 



Sing. Irem, 
ires, 
iret. 



Plur. Iremus, 
iretis, 
irent. 



72 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Perfect Tense. — may have. 

Sing. Iverim, Plur. Iverimus, 

iveris, iveritis, 

iverit. iverint. 

Pluperfect Tense. — might have, 8fc. 



Sing. Ivissem, 
ivisses, 
ivisset. 



Plur. Ivissemus, 
ivissetis, 
ivissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present and Imperfect Tense. 
Ire. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense. 
Ivisse. 

Future Tense. 
Iturum esse. 

GERUNDS 
Eundi, Eundo, Eundum. 

SUPINES. 
Itum, Itu. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Present Tense. Future in rus. 

lens, Iturus. 

Gen. Euntis. 

Obs. In like manner are the compounds of Eo con- 
jugated, except Ambio ; also Queo to be able, Nequeo 
to be unable. The two last, however, have neither 
Imperative mood, future Participle, nor Gerund. 






DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



73 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 

Verbs are called Defective, that are without some of 
their tenses or moods. Such are Aio, 1 sag : Ausim, 
1 dare : Ave, Hail ! Cedo, Give me : Coepi, / begin : 
Faxo, or Faxim, / mag or will do : Infit, he begins : 
Inquio, or Inquam, / sag : Memmi, I remember : Novi, 
/ know : Odi, I hate : Quaeso, Iprag : Salve, Save gou. 



Sing. Aio, 
ai's, 
a'it. 



Sing. Aiebam, 
aiebas, 
aiebat. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Plur. 



aiunt. 



Sing. 



aias, 
aiat. 



Imperfect Tense. 

Plur. Aiebamus, 
aiebatis, 
aiebant. 

Perfect Tense. 
Sing. Ait. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

Plur. 

aiant. 

Participle, Present Tense. 
Aiens. 



INDICATIVE and SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 

Plur. 



Sing. Ausim, 
ausis, 
ausit. 



ausint. 



74 LATIN GKRAMMAR. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 
Sing. Ave. Plur. Avete. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. A veto. Plur. Avetote. 

INFINITIVE MOOD. 
Avere. 







IMPERATIVE MOOD. 


Sing 


Cedo. 


Plur. Cette. 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 






Future Tense. 


Sing. 


Faxo, 
faxis, 
faxit. 




Plur. Faximus, 
faxitis, 
faxint. 






SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 






Present Tense. 


Sing. 


Faxim, 

faxis, 

faxit. 




Plur. Faximus, 
faxitis, 
faxint. 




INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 






Sing. Infit. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 
Present Tense. 



Sing. Inquio, or, inquam, 
inquis, 
inquit. 



Plur. Inquimus, 
iniquitis, 
inquiunt. 



Imperfect Tense. 
Sing. Inquiebat. 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 75 

Perfect Tense. 

Sing. ■ 

inquisti, 
inquit. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. 

inquies, 

inquiet. 

IMPEEATIYE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Inque. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Inquito. 

PARTICIPLE. 

Inquiens. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 
Sing. Quaeso. Plur. Quaesumus. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Salvebis. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Sing. Salve. Plur. Salvete. 

Future Tense. 

Sing. Salveto. 

ESTTIOTTIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Salvere. 
£ 2 



76 LATIN GRAMMAR. 



Sing. Memin-i*, 
memin-isti, 
memin-it. 



Sing. Memin-eram, 
memin-eras, 
memm-erat. 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Perfect Tense. 

Plur. Memin-imus, 
meimn-istis, 
memin-erunt or ere. 

Pluperfect Tense. 

Plur. Memm-eramus, 
memin-eratis, 



memin-erant. 
Future Perfect Tense. 



Sing. Memin-ero, 
memin-eris, 
memin-erit. 



Plur. Memm-erlmus, 
memm-erltis, 
meuiin-erint. 



IMPEKATIVE MOOD. 

Future Tense. 
Sing. Memento. Plur. Mementate. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. 
Perfect Tense. 



Sing. Memin-erim, 
memin-eris, 
memm-erit. 



Plur. Memin-erimus^ 
memin-eritis, 
memin-erint. 



Pluperfect Tense. 



Sing. Memin-issem, 
memin-isses, 
memin-isset. 



Plur. Memin-issemus, 
memin-issetis, 
memin-issent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Perfect and Pluperfect Tense. 

Meminisse. 



* In this and the three following verbs, the perfect has the significa- 
tion of the present ; the pluperfect of the imperfect ; the future perfect 
of the future ; and the imperative future of the imperative present. 



DEFECTIVE VERBS. 



77 



Coepi, i" begin ; Novi, / know ; Odi, I hate ; are 
formed like memini, except that they have no imperative 
mood. Also, Ccepi has the participle of the future 
active, Coepturus, about to begin; and of the perfect 
passive, Coeptus, having been begun. Odi has the parti- 
ciple of the future active, Osurus, about to hate. 

Fari, to speak, is an irregular deponent verb, of the 
first conjugation. 

, fatus sum or fui, fari: fandi, fando : fatu : 

fans, fatus, fandus. 

N.B. The words in italics are found only in one of the compound 
forms, affSri f effdri, pr&fdri, and profdri. 



Sing. 



faris, 
fatur. 



Sing. Fabar, 



INDICATIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Plur. Famur, 
famtni, 
fantur. 

Imperfect Tense. 

Plur. 



fabantur. 



Perfect Tense. 



Sing. Fatus sum, or fui, 
fatus es, or, fuisti, 
fatus est, or, fuit. 



Plur. Fati sumus, or, fuimus, 
fati estis, or, fuistis, 
fati sunt, fuerunt, or ere. 



Pluperfect Tense. 
Sing. Fatus eranx, or, fueram,! PI. Fati eramus or, fu eramus, 



Fatus eras, or, fueras, 
Fatus erat, or, fuerat. 



fati eratis, or, fueratis, 
fati erant, or, fuerant. 



Sing. Fabor, 

faberis, or ere, 
fabltur. 



Future Tense. 

Plur. Fabtmur, 



E 3 



78 



LATIN GRAMMAR, 



Future Perfect Tense. 
Sing. Fatus fuero. 

IMPERATIVE MOOD.* 
Sing. Fare. 

SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD 

Imperfect Tense. 
Sing. Farer, Plur. Faremur, 

fareris, or ere, fare/mini, 

faretur. farentur. 



Sing. Fatus sirn, or, fuerim, 
fatus sis, or, fueris, 
fatus sit, or, fuerit. 



Perfect Tense. 

Plur. Fati simus, or, fuerimus 
fati sitis, or, fueritis, 
fati sint, or, fuerint. 



Sing. Fatus essem, or, fuissem, 
fatus esses, or, fuisses, 
fatus esset, or, fuisset. 



Pluperfect Tense. 



PI. Fati essemuS; or, fuissemus, 
fati essetis, or, fuissetis^ 
fati essent, or, fuissent. 



INFINITIVE MOOD. 

Present Tense. 

Fari. 



Fandi 



Present. 
Fans. 



GERUNDS. 

SUPINE. 

Fatu. 

PARTICIPLES. 

Perfect. 
Fatus. 



Fando. 



Future. 
Fandus. 



* One old writer also uses prcefato for prcefator ; and prcBfamini for 
prcefaminor ; the second persons singular and plural of the future tense. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS, ETC. 79 

IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

Verbs expressed generally, and in English taking 
the word It before them, are called Impersonals : as, 

Delectat, it delights ; Decet, it becomes ; Pugnatur, 
it is fought ; Videtur, it seems. 



OF AN ADVERB. 



An Adverb is a part of speech joined to verbs, 
adjectives, and nouns, to declare some circumstance of 
time, place, order, quality, or manner : as, scribit bene, 
he writes well. 

Adverbs derived from adjectives take the compara- 
tive and superlative degrees formed from the corre- 
sponding degrees of their adjectives ; as from doctus, 
learned, and bonus, good, are formed 

Docte, doetius, doctissimfc. 

Bene, melius, optime. 



OF A CONJUNCTION. 



A Conjunction is a part of speech that joins 
words and sentences together ; as, Pater et Mater, my 
Father and Mother. 



OF A PREPOSITION. 

A Preposition is a part of speech most commonly 
set before another word, and expresses the relations of 
substantives to each other, or to verbs : as, oppidum in 
Italia, a town in Italy ; venit ad me, he came to me. 

E 4 



80 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



These Prepositions have an Accusative Case after 
them : — 



Ad, 


to or at. 


Juxta, 


beside, or nigh to 


Adversus, 
Adversum 


> against. 


Ob, 

Penes, 


for or before, 
in the power of 


Ante, 


before. 


Per, 


by, or through. 


Apud, 


at, or near. 


Pone, 


behind. 


Circa, 


} 


Post, 


after. 


Circum, 


> about. 


Praeter, 


beside, or except. 


Circiter, 


S 


Prope, 


nigh. 


Cis, 
Citra, 


J- on this side. 


Propter, for, or because of. 
Secundum, according to. 


Contra, 


against. 


Secus, 


by, or along. 


Erga, 


toward. 


Supra, 


above. 


Extra, 


without. 


Trans, 


on the further side. 


Infra, 


beneath. 


Versus, 


toward. 


Inter, 


between, or among. 


Ultra, 


beyond. 


Intra, 


within. 


Usque, 


until. 


These Prepositions have an 


Ablative 


Case after them : 


A, ab, abs 


, from, or by. 


Palam, 


in the presence of 


Absque, 


without. 


Pra>, 


before. 


Coram, 


before. 


Pro, 


for. 


Cum, 


ivith. 


Sine, 


without. 


De, 


of or from. 


Tenus, 


up to, or as far as. 


E, ex, 


of from, or out of 







These Prepositions have either an Ablative or an Accu- 
sative Case after them : 



Clam, unknown to. 


Sub, 


under, 


In, signifying in, an abl. 


Subter, 


under, 


into, an ace. 


Super, 


above. 



OF AN INTEKJECTION. 

An Interjection is a word thrown among the 
words of a sentence to betoken a sudden emotion of the 
mind, be it grief, or joy, or any other passion. 



81 



THE GENDERS OF NOUNS. 



I. SUBSTANTIVES. 

Proper Names. 

Masculine. 



PR OPRIA, qua maribus tribuuntur, mascula dicas ; 
Ut sunt Divorum ; Mars, Bacchus, Apollo : Virorum ; 
Ut, Cato, Virgilius : Ventorum; ut, Libs, Notus, Auster; 
Mensium : ut, October. Fluviorum pleraque, ut Hebrus, 
Mascula : Montlum item, tit Parnassus, Caucasus ; at sunt 
Quce neutrum genus, et quce fcemineum sibi poscant : 
Crustumium, Styx, hoc monstrant ; hoc Pelion, ^Etna. 

Feminine. 

PR OPRIA foemineum referentia nomina sexum, 
Fozmineo genem tribuuntur : sive Dearum 
Sunt ; ut, Juno, Venus : Muliebria ; ut Anna, Philotis : 
Urbium ; ut, Elis, Opus : Regionum ; ut, Grgecia, Persis : 
Insula item nomen ; ceu, Creta, Britannia, Cyprus. 

Excipienda tamen quondam sunt urbium ; ut ista 
Mascula; Sulmo, Agragas: qucedam neutralia; ut.Ar^os, 
Tibur, Praeneste ; et genus Anxur quod dat utrumque. 
Insula Duiichium neutrum ; Pontus, regio, est mas. 

Nouns Appellative. 
Masculine. 

MASCULA sunt qucBcunque virilem nomina sexum 
Significant ; deus ut; vir, rex, pater, et leo, taurus. 

E 5 



82 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Feminine. 

FCEMINEUM est quicquid muliebria munera signat; 
Ut dea ; sic mulier, soror, uxor, vacca, leaena. 

Appellativa arborum erunt muliebria ; ut, alnus, 
Laurus et ilex. Pinaster mas, mas oleaster. 
JHcbc stmt neutra, siler, suber ; sic, robur, zcerque. 

Gemmarum potiics muliebria; mascula verb 
Nonnunquam : monstrant illud sapphirus, iaspis ; 
Hoc adaraas, opalus^z/e. Incerta sraaragdus, onjxque. 

Epicene. 

SUNT qucedam Volucrum ; ceu passer, hirundo : 
Ferarum, 
Ut tigris, vulpes : et Piscium ; ut, ostrea, cetus ; 
Dicta epicozna : quibus vox ipsa genus feret aptum. 

Neuter. 

OMNE quod exit in urn, aut in on aut es origine 
Grcecd, 
Est neutrale genus : sic invariabile nomen. 



Nouns not increasing. 
Feminine. 

NOMEN non crescens genitivo — ceu, caro carnis, 
Capra caprse, nubes nubis — genus est muliebre. 

Nouns Masculine excepted. 

MASCULA Grcecorum quot declinatio prima 
Fundit in as, et in es ; quibus adde cometa, planeta. 



GENDERS OF NOUNS. 83 

Mascula item, natalis, aqualis : Ab asse creata, 
Ut centussis, semissis : conjunge lienis, 
Orbis, caulis, follis, collis, mensis, et ensis, 
Sic fustis, funis, panis, sic crinis, et ignis ; 
Cassis, fascis, torris, sentis, piscis, et unguis, 
Et vermis, vectis, postis ; sic amnis et axis. 

Mascula in er ; ceu venter : in us quoque mascula, ut 
annus. 
Fozminei verb generis domus, alvus, humusg'we, 
Porticus et manus, et colus : idus, ficus, acusj'we, 
Et tribus et vannus : qucedam quoque Grceca per us ; ceu, 
Antidotus, costus, diphthongus, byssus, abyssus, 
Sic pharus, et methodus, dialectus, lecythus, arctus, 
Cum multis aliis, qu(B nunc perscribere longum est. 

Nouns Neuter excepted. 

NE UTR UM nomen in e, si gignit is ; ut mare, 
rete; 
Sic virus, pelagus : neutrum modo, mas modo, vulgus. 

Nouns of the Doubtful Gender excepted. 

INCERTI generis sunt talpa et dama, canalis, 
Et cytisus, balanus, clunis, finis^we penus^we, 
Pampmus, et corbis, linter, torquis, specus, anguis, 
Pro morbo ficus, fici dans, atque phaselus, 
Et grossus ; sic callis item ; quels barbitus adde. 

Nouns of the Common of two Genders excepted. 

COMPOSITUM a verbo dans a, est commune 
duorum ; 
Grajugena a gigno, agricola a colo, id advena monstrant 
A venio. Adde senex, auriga, et verna, sodalis, 
Vates, extorris, patruelis, jerque duellis, 
Affinis, juvenis, testis, civis, canis, hostis. 



84 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Wtt &ccon& &ptriai mule. 

Nouns increasing long. 

Feminine. 

NO MEN — crescentis penultima si genitivi 
Syllaba acuta* sonat, velut hcec, pietas pietatis, 
Virtus virtutis, monstrant — genus est muliebre. 

Nouns Masculine excepted. 

MASCULA dicuntur monosyllaba nomina qucedam: 
Sal, sol, ren, et splen ; sic pes, et vas vadis, as, prres, 
Mos, flos, ros, et glis ; gryps, dens, mons, pons, simul et 
fons. 

Mascula in o vel in njinita ; ut, scipio, sermo, 
Senio, ternio, curculio ; delphinyz/e, lien^e. 

Mascula in er ; ceu crater : atque in or, ut timor, ardor. 
Adde bidens instrumentum, cum pluribus in dens. 
His etiam adjungas qua componuntur ab asse ; 
Ut dodrans. Addas oriens, torrens, elephas§7^. 
Jungantur magnes^e, lebesj^e, tapes^z/e ; meridi- 
es nomen quiutce ; thorax, hydrops quoque, spadix. 

Nouns Neuter excepted. 

SUNT neutralia et hcec monosyllaba nomina ; mel, fel, 
Lac, far, ver, aes, cor, vas vasis, os ossis, et oris, 
Rus, thus, jus, crus, pus : et in al polysyllaba in arque, 
Ut, capital, laquear. Neutrum al-ec, -ex muliebre. 

Nouns of the Doubtful Gender excepted. 

SUNT dubii generis, scrobs, serpens, bubo, rudens, 
grus, 
Perdix, lynx, lirnax, stirps pro trunco, pedis et calx : 
Adde dies, numero tantum mas esto secundo. 

* See Prosody, Part II. 



GENDERS OF NOUNS. 85 

Nouns of the Common of two Genders excepted. 

SUNT commune, parens, zuoXorque, infans, adolescens, 
Dux, illex, haeres, exlex: a f route creata, 
Ut, bifrons ; custos, bos, fur, sus, atque sacerdos. 



*&§* ®|)trii special 2Ruk. 
Nouns increasing short. 
Masculine. 

NOMEN — crescentis penultima si genitivi 
Sit gravis*, ut sanguis genitivo sanguinis — est mas. 

Nouns Feminine excepted. 

FCE MINE I generis sit hyper dissyllabon in do, 
Quod dinis, atque in go, quod dat ginis, in genitivo. 
Id tibi dulcedo faciens dulcedinis, idque 
Monstrat compago compaginis. Adjice Grceca in 
As vel in isjinita; ut lampas, cuspis et aspis. 
Junge pecus formans pecudis ; sindon, etiam icon, 
Grando, fides, etiam teges, et seges, arbor, kyemsque, 
Et forfexj pellex, carex, simul atque supellex, 
Et chlamys, appendix, coxendix, adde ftWxque. 

Nouns Neuter excepted. 

EST neutrale genus signans rem non animatam 
Nomen in a, ut problema ; en, ut omen ; ar, ut jubar ; 

ur dans, 
Ut jecur ; us, ut onus; put, ut occiput. Attamen ex his 
Mascula sunt, pecten, furfur. Sunt neutra cadaver, 
Verber, tuber, et uber, et sequor, marmor, ador^we ; 
Sic iter atque laser, cicer, et piper, atque papaver, 
Et siser ; adde pecus faciens pecoris genitivo. 



See Prosody, Part II. 



86 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Nouns of the doubtful Gender excepted. 
SUNT dubii generis, cardo, margo, cinis, objex, 
Forceps, pumex, imbrex, cortex, pulvis, adeps^we ; 
Quels etiam conjunge culex, imtrixque, silexque ; 
Quamvis hcec melius vult mascula dicier usus. 

Nouns Common excepted. 

COMMUNIS generis sunt ista ; vigil, pugil, exul, 
Praesul, homo, nemo, martyr, Ligur, augur, et Areas, 
Antistes, miles, pedes, interpres, comes, hospes ; 
Sic ales, prseses, princeps, auceps, eques, obses : 
Atque alia a verbis qua nomina multa creantur ; 
Ut, conjux, judex, vindex, opifex, et aruspex. 



H. ADJECTIVES. 



ADJECTIVA unam duntaxat habentia vocem ; 
Ut, felix, audax ; retinent genus omne sub una. 
Sub gemind si voce cadant, velut omnis et omne, 
Vox commune duiim -prior est, vox altera neutrum. 
At si tres variant voces ; sacer ut, sacra, sacrum ; 
Vox prima est mas, altera fozmina, iertia neutrum. 

Obs. 1. At sunt qucejlexu prope substantiva vocares, 
Adjectiva tamen naturd usuque reperta. 
Talia sunt, pauper, puber, cum degener, uber ; 
Et dives, lociiples, sospes, conjunge superstes : 
Cum paucis aliis, qua lectio justa docebit 

Obs. 2. Hcec proprium quendam sibijlexum adsciscere 
gaudent : 
Campester, voliicer, celeber, celer, atque saluber : 
Junge pedester, equester, et acer : junge paluster, 
Atque alacer, Sylvester. At hcec tu sic variabis ; 
Sit rectus triplex ; celer et celeris, celere : aut sic ; 
Sit commune duiim celeris, celere et tibi neutrum. 



87 



NOUNS HETEROCLITE, OE IRREGULAR. 



Qnce genus autfiexum variant, qucecungue novato 
Ritu dejiciunt superantve, HETEROCLITA dices. 

Nouns changing their Gender and Declining. 

HJEC genus, ac Jlexum, partim variantia cernis. 
Pergamus in numero plurali Pergama gignit 
Dal prior his numerus neutrum genus, alter utrumque ; 
Rastrum cum freno, filum simul atque capistrum. 
Argos item et coelurn sunt singula neutra : sed audi, 
Mascula duntaxat ccelos vocitabis et Argos : 
Frena sed et frenos ; quo pacto et ccetera formant 

Pluralis numerus genus his solet adder e utrumque ; 
Sibilus, atque jocus, locus. — His quoque plurima jungas. 

Nouns defective. 
Q UjE sequitur, manca est casu numerove, propago. 

Aptotes ; or, Nouns undeclined. 

Q UJEnidlum variant casum — -ut, fas, nil, nihil, instar: 
Et pondo, mane, et nequam, semis quoque, cepe ; 
Multa et in u, simul i ; veluti cornuque gemique ; 
Et gummi, frugi : sic Tempe, tot, quot, et omnes 
A tribus ad centum numeros — Aptota vocabis. 

Monoptotes ; or, Nouns declined with one Case. 

EST QUE MonoptSton nomen, cui vox cadit una: 
Ceu, noctu, natu, jussu, injussu, simul astu, 
Promptu, permissu, nauci, dicis, inficiasywe ; 
Integra et in plurali, ambage et compede, fauce. 

Diptotes ; or, Nouns declined with two Cases. 

SUNT Diptota, quibus duplex Jlexura remansit: 
Ut, fors forte dabit sexto, spontis quoque sponte ; 



88 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Jugeris et sexto dat jugere ; verberis autem 
Verbere : suppetiae quarto quoque suppetias dant ; 
Sic repetundarum repetundis : vespere vesper, 
Viscere visceris, impetis impete. Verbere totum 
Pluralem numerum cum viscere, jugere, servant, 

Triptotes ; or, Nouns declined with three Cases. 

TRES quibus infiectis casus, Triptota vocantur : 
Sic opis est nostra, fer opem, legis, atque ope dignus : 
Flecte preci, atque precem, et prece; sic vicis et vice 

format, 
Atque vicem. His numerus semper datur omnibus alter. 
Tantundem, primum, quartum, recipitque secundum. 
Et grates, primum, quartum, quintumque reposcit. 

Tetraptotes and Pentaptotes ; or Nouns declined 
with four and five Cases. 

Hcec primo quintoque carent, frugis, ditionis ; 
Plus quoque pluris habet, plus quarto, plure^e sexto : 
Integra vox vis est, nisi de sit forte dativus ; 
Attamen hcec tibi plurali sunt integra semper. 
Integra sunt noster, vester ; necnon meus et tu ; 
Cetera cuncta carent quinto pronomina casu. 

Nouns defective in the Plural Number. 

PROPRIA cuncta notes fieri plur alia nolle. 
Quin alia abjiciunt numerum non pauca secundum 
Ex sensu aut usu ; quce maxima norma loquendi est. 

Nouns defective in the Singular Number. 

MASCULA sunt tantum numero contenta secundo, 
Manes, majores, cancelli, liberi, et antes, 
Lendes, et lemures, fasti simul, atque minores, 
Quum genus assignant natales ; adde penates, 



GENDERS OF NOUNS. 89 

Et loca plurali, quales Qn\mque, Jjocnque, 
Et qucecunque legas passim similis rationis. 

Hcec sunt fceminei generis, numerique secundi : 
Deliciaa, exuviae, phaleraag^e, maniibiaa *, et idus, 
Antiaa, et induciaa ; simul insidiaa^we, minxque, 
Excubiaa, nonaa, nugaa, tricaa^we, calendaa, 
Quisquiliaa, thermaa, cunaa, diraa, exequiaa^we, 
Feriaa, et inferiaa ; sic primitiaa^we, plagaa^we 
Retia signantes, et valvaa, divitiaa^z/e, 
Nuptiaa item, et lactes : addantur Thebaa et Athenaa , 
Quod genus invenias et nomina plura locorum. 

Rariics hcec primo pluralia neutra leguntur ; 
Moania, cum tesquis, praacordia, lustra ferarum, 
Arma, mapalia ; sic bellaria, munia, castra : 
Funus justa petit, petit et sponsalia virgo ; 
Rostra disertus amat, puerique crepundia gestant 9 
Infantesque colunt cunabiila : consulit exta 
Augur, et absolvens superis effata recantat: 
Festa deum poterunt, ceu Bacchanalia, jungi: 
Quodsi plura leges, licet hdc quoque classe reponas. 



Nouns declined after both the second and fourth 
Declension. 

H^EC simul et quarti fiexus sunt, atque secundi ; 
Laurus enim l&uvifacit et laurus genitivo ; 
Sic quercus, pinus, pro fructu ac arbore ficus, 
Sic colus, atque penus ; cornus quando arbor habetur ; 
Sic lacus, atque domus ; licet hcec nee ubique recurrant 
His quoque plura leges, quce priscis jure relinquas. 



* The u is properly short ; but a licence is here assumed of lengthen- 
ing it for the purpose of bringing it into the verse. 



90 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

THE PERFECT TENSE AND 
SUPINES OF VERBS. 



I. The Perfect Tense of simple Verbs. 



The First Conjugation. 
As avi. 

AS in prcesenti perfectum format in avi: 
Ut no nas navi, vocito voeitas vocitavi. 

Excipias plico quod -plicuif acit, atque plicavi; 
Et neco quod necui raro> sed scepe necavi. 
Sic seco quod secui, mico quod miciii, frico verbum 
Quod fricui, domo quod domui, tono quod toniii dot. 
Sic sonui sono, sic vetui veto, sic crepo uijit ; 
Atque cubo cubui ; lavo dat lavi, et juvo juvi. 
Do das rite dedi, sto stas formare steti vult 



The Second Conjugation. 
Es ui. 

Es in prcesenti perfectum format ui dans : 
Sic mon-eo, es, monui, necnon tum-eo, es, tumiii dat. 

Hcec se-deo, vi-deo, cum pran-deo, stri-deo—dant di. 

Quatuor his infra gerninatur syllaba prima : 
Pendeo namque pependi, mordeo vultque momordi, 
Spondeo habere spopondi, tondeo vultque totondi. 

L vel r ante geo si stet, geo vertitur in si : 
Urgeo ut ursi, mulgeo mulsi, fulgeo fulsi. 

Prceteritum per si dant ar-deo, tor-queo, mul-ceo. 
Hae-reo, sua-deo, ri-deo item et man-eo ; ju-beo, ssi, 



PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 91 

Sorbeo sorbui habet, sorpsi quoque ; luceo luxi, 
Frigeo frixi, lugeo luxi, habet augeo et auxi. 

Dat fleo fles flevi, pleo pies plevi, neo nevi. 
Antiquum leo compositis format sibi levi. 

Fit veo vi ; ut moveo movi, foveo quoque fovi. 
Niveo habet nivi et nixi, vieoque vievi. 



The Third Conjugation, 
TER TIA prceteritum formabit ut hie manifestum. 

Bo fit bi : ut lambo Iambi. Scribo excipe scripsi, 
Et nubo nupsi. Antiquum cumbo cubui dat 

Co fit ci : ut vinco vici. Vult parco peperci, 
Vix parsi : dico dixi, duco quoque duxi. 

Do fit di : ut mando mandi : sed scindo scidi dat, 
Findo fidi, fundo fudi, tundo tutudique. 
Dat rii-do, divi ; pendo pependi, tendo tetendi 
Cedo facit cessi, cecidi cado, caedo cecidi. 

Vado, rado, laedo, ludo, divido, trudo, 
Claudo, plaudo, rodo, ex do semper faciunt si. 

Go fit xi : ut jungo junxi : sed r ante go vult si, 
Ut spargo spar si, lego legi, et ago facit egi. 
Dat tango tetigi, pungo pupiigi tibi reddit. 
Dat frango fregi, pepigi vult pango paciscor ; 
Pango etiam pegi, sed panxi maluit usus. 

Ho fit xi : traho eeu traxi docet, et veho vexi, 

Lo fit ui : colo ceu colui, molo ceu molui dat, 
Sal-lo facit Y\, sic psal-lo. Velio tibi velli 
Et vulsi, pello pepiili dat, fallo fefelli. 

M.ofit ui, ut vomo. Sed dat emo emi, dat premo pressi. 



92 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

N o fit vi : sino ceu sivi. Temno excipe tempsi; 
Dat sterno stravi, sperno sprevi, lino levi 
Inter dum et livi, jungas cerno quoque crevi. 
Gigno, pono, cano ; genui, posui, cecini, dant. 

To fit psi : ut scalpo scalpsi, carpo quoque carpsi. 
Excipias rurnpo rupi> strepo quod strepui dat 

Quo fit qui : ut linquo natis liqui : at coquo coxi. 

Roj#£vi: sero ceu, pro planto et semino, sevi; 
Quod seriii melius semper dabit, ordino signans. 
Vult verro verri, vult uro ussi, gero gessi, 
Qusero quaesivi, tero trivi, curro cucurri. 

So format sivi : velut arcesso arcessivi. 
Viso at visi, pinso pinsui habet, quoque pinsi. 

Sco fit vi: ut pasco pavi; atque quiesco quievi. 
Sed didici disco formabit, posco poposci. 

To fit ti: ut verto verti: sed sisto stiti dat. 
Dat mitto misi, peto vult formare petivi ; 
Sterto stertui habet, meto messui. — Ab ecto fit exi ; 
Ut flecto flexi. Necto dat nexui, habetque 
Nexi ; etiam pecto dat pexui, habet quoque pexi. 

Yofit vi: ut volvo volvi: vivo excipe vixi. 

ILofit ui : ut monstrat texo, quod texui habebit 

Fit cio ci : ut facio feci, jacio quoque jeci : 
Antiquum lacio lexi, specio quoque spexi. 

Fit dio di : ut fodio fodi. — Gio, ceu fugio, gi. 

Fit pio pi : ut capio cepi : cu-pio excipe pivi, 
2?£ rapio rapui, sapio sapui atque sapivi. 

Fit rio ri : ut pario peperi. — Tio ssi, ut tibi reddent 
Composita a quatio ; quassi haud reperitur in usu. 



PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 93 

Denique uo fit ui : ut statuo statui. Pluo pluvi 
Format sive plui ; struo sed struxi, fluo fluxi. 



The Fourth Conjugation. 
Is ivi. 

Q UAR TA dat is ivi : ut monstrat scio scis tibi scivi. 

Veneo venivi format, vemo quoque veni. 
Raucio rausi, farcio farsi, sarcio sarsi, 
Sepio sepsi, sentio sensi, fulcio fulsi, 
Haurio item hausi, sancio sanxi, vincio vinxi. 
Prceteritum per uiformans amicire notetur ; 
Pro salto salio saliii, salii, atque salivi. 



II. The Perfect Tense of compound Verbs. 

PRJETERITUM dat idem simplex et compositivum: 
Ut docui edocui monstrat Sed syllaba, semper 
Quam simplex geminat, composto non geminatur ; 
Attamen excurro cum prsecurro excipiantur, 
Atque a do, disco, sto, posco, rite creata. 

A plico compositum cum sub vel nomine — ut ista 9 
Supplico, multiplico — gaudet formare plicavi ; 
Applico, complico, replico, et explico, ui quoque formant. 

Quamvis vult oleo simplex olui, tamen inde 
Quodvis compositum melius formabit olevi ; 
Simplicis at formam redolet sequitur, suboletj'we. 

Composita a pungo formabunt omnia punxi : 
Vult unum pupugi, interdum punxi^&e, repungo. 

Ex natis ab emo vult comofingere compsi, 
Demo dempsi, promo prompsi, sumoque sumpsi. 

Natum a do, quando est inflexio tertia, ut addo, 
Credo, edo, dedo, reddo, perdo, abdo, vel obdo, 



94 LATIN GXtAMMAK. 

Condo, indo, trado, prodo, vendo, didi ; at unum 
Abscondo abscondi. Natum a sto stas, stiti habebit. 

Compound Verbs which change the first Vowel into e. 

VERBA hcec simplicia prcesentis prceteritique, 
Si componantur, vocalem primam in e mutant : 
Damno, lacto, sacro, fallo, areeo, tracto, fatiscor, 
Cando vetus, cap to, jacto, patior, gv&dior que, 
Partio, carpo, patro, scando, spargo ; ip&rioque ; 
Cujus nata per i duo, comperit et reperit, dant ; 
Ccetera sed per ui : velut hcec aperire, operire. 

Prceterea a pasco pavi composta noteniur 
Hcec duo, compeseo, dispesco, pesciii habere : 
At sibi depasco servabit simplicis usum. 

Compound Verbs which change the first Vowel into i. 

HJEC, habeo, lateo, salio, statuo, cado, laedo, 
Et tango, atque cano, sic quaero, csedo cecidi, 
Sic egeo, teneo, taceo, sapio, rapio^e, 
Si componantur, vocalem primam in i mutant : 
Ut rapio rapui, eripio eripui. A cano natum 
Prceteritum per ui, ceu concino concinui, dat. 
A placeo sic displiceo ; sed simplicis usum 
Hcec duo, complaceo cum perplaceo, bene servant. 

Composita a verbis calco, salto, a per u mutant : 
Id tibi demonstrant, conculco, inculco, resulto. 

Composita a claudo, quatio, lavo, rejiciunt a : 
Id docet a claudo, occludo, excludo ; a quatio^e, 
Percutio, excutio ; a lavo, proluo> diluo, nata. 

Compound Verbs which change the first Vowel of the 
Present Tense into i, but not of the Perfect Tense. 

HJEC si componas, ago, emo, sedeo, rego, frango, 
Et capio, jacio, lacio, specio, premo, pango, 



PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 95 

Vocalem primam presentis in i sibi mutant 9 
Pr&teriti nunquam : ceu frango, refringo refregi ; 
A capio, incipio incepi. Sed pauca notentur ; 
Namque suum simplex perago sequitur, satago§^e ; 
Atque ab ago, dego dat degi, cogo coegi ; 
A rego, sic pergo perrexi ; vult quoque surgo 
Surrexi ; media prcesentis syllaba ademptd. 
A lacio, elicio eliciii ; dant ccetera lexL 

Composita a pango retinent a quatuor ista : 
Depango, oppango, circumpango, atque repango. 

JVil variat facio, nisi proeposito prceeunte : 
Id docet olfacio, cum calfacio, m&cioque. 

A lego nata, re, per, prae, sub, trans, ad, prceeunte, 
Prcesentis servant vocalem : in i ccetera mutant ; 
Be quibus hcec, intelligo, diligo, negligo, tantum 
Prceteritum lexifaciunt; reliqua omnia legi. 



The Supines of simple Verbs. 

NUNC ex prceterito discas formare supinum. 

Bi sibi turn sumit: sic namque bibi bibitumj#£. 

Ci Jit ctum : ut vici victum testatur, et ici 
Dans ictum, feci factum, jeci quoque jactum. 
Sed parsum sibi, parcitum item, vult parco peperci. 

Dijfit sum : ut vidi visum. Qucedam geminant s ; 
Ut pandi passum, sedi sessum, adde scidi, quod 
Dat scissum, atque fidi fissum, fodi quoque fossum. 

Syllaba prceteriti geminatur scepe, supinis 
Non autem : format tensum tentumque tetendi : 
Dat tutudi tunsum, cecidi casum, atque cecidi 
Csesuin; junge dedi datum habens, morsum<p6 momordi. 



96 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Gi fit ctum : ut, legi lectum : pegi pepigi^we 
Dant pactum, fregi fractura, tetigi quoque tactuni, 
Egi actum, pupugi punctum : fugi fugitum dat 

JAfit sum, ut pepuli pulsum ; cuijunge fefelli 
Dans falsum, velli vulsum. At tuli habet sibi latum. 

Mi, ni, pi, qui, turn formant, velut hie manifestum: 
Emi emptum, veni ventum, cecini a cano cantum, 
Et cepi captum, antiquis coepi quoque coeptum, 
Et rupi ruptum ; in natis liqui quoque lictum. 

Hi fit sum : ut verri versum, Peperi excipe partum. 

Si^ sum : ut visi visum. Tamen s geminato, 
Misi formabit missum. Fulsi excipe fultum, 
Hausi haustum, sarsi sartum, farsi quoque fartum, 
Ussi ustum, gessi gestum ; torsi quoque tortum 
Postulat ; indulsi sic indultum sibi qucerit 

Psi fit ptum : ut scripsi scriptum; sculpsi quoque 
sculptum. 

Ti fit turn : a sto namque steti, a sistoque stiti, dant 
Ambo rite statum. Verti tamen excipe versum. 

Yifit turn: ut flavi flatum : pavi excipe pastum. 
Dat lavi lotum, interdum lautum atque lavatum, 
Potavi potum, interdum facit et potatum; 
Sed favi fautum, cavi cautum. A sero sevi 
Formes rite satum, livi levique litum dant ; 
Solvi a solvo solutum, volvi a volvo volutum ; 
Vult singultivi singultum, veneo venis 
Venivi venum, sepellvi rite sepultum. 

Quod dat ui dat itum : ut domui domitum. Excipe 
quodvis 
Verbum in uo, quia semper ui formabit in utum ; 
Exiii ut exutum : a ruo deme rui ruitum dans. 



PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 97 

Vult secui sectum, necui nectum, fricui^we 
Frictum, miscui item mistum, et amicui dat amictum ; 
Torrui habet tostum, docui doctum, temiique 
Tentuin, consului consultuin, alui altum alitumgwe ; 
Sic salui saltum, colui occului quoque cultum ; 
Pinsui habet pinsum et pistum ; rapui sibi raptum 
Vult, serui sertuni ; sic texui habet quoque textum. 

Censui habet censum, sic messui habet quoque messxxm; 
Nexui item nexum, pexuni sic pexiii habebit 

^Kijftt ctum : ut vinxi vinctum. Quinque abjiciunt n; 
Ut finxi fictum 3 minxi mictum, adjice pinxi 
Dans pictum, strinxi stricturn, rinxi quoque rictum. 
Sancitum et sanctum for?nabit sancio sanxi. 

Xum, flexi, plexi, fixi, dant ; et fluo fluxum. 



Supines of Compound Verbs. 

COMPOSITUM ut simplex formatur quodque su- 
pinum, 
Quamvis non eadem stet syllaba semper utrique. 

Composita a tunsum, demptd n, tusum : a rmtum Jit, 
I media demptd, rutum ; et a saltum quoque sultum. 
A sero, quando satum format, composta situm dant. 

Hcec, captum, factum, jactum, raptum, a per e mutant: 
Et cantum, partum, sparsum, carptum quoque, fartum. 

Verbum edo compositum non estum, sedfacit esum ; 
Unum duntaxat comedo formabit utrumque. 

A nosco tantum duo, cognitum et agnitum, habentur : 
Ccetera dant notum : nullo est jam noscitum in usu. 



Perfect Tense of Verbs in Or. 

VERBA in or admittunt ex posteriore supino 
Pr&teritum, verso u per us, et sum consociato 



98 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Vel fui : ut a lectu, lectus sum vel fui. At horum 
Nunc est deponens, nunc est commune notandum. 
Dat labor lapsus ; patior dat passus, at ejus 
Natum, per-petior pessus ; fassus fateor dat, 
Sed confessus confiteor : gressus gradior vult 9 
Sic digressus digredior : jungas quoque defe- 
tiscor ssus sum, mensus metior, utor et usus. 

Orditus raro, sed sczpius ordior orsus. 
Nitor nisus vel nixus sum, ulciscor et ultus, 
Irascor simul iratus, reor atque ratus sum, 
Obliviscor- vult oblitus sum, fruor optat 
Fructus vel fruitus : misereri junge miser-tus 
Atque -ltus. Antiquum tuor, et tueor tuitus sum. 
A loquor adde locutus, et a sequor adde secutus. 
Experior facit expertus sum ; sed tus et ltus 
Reddens opper-ior legitur : formare paciscor 
Gaudet pactus sum, nanciscor nactus, apiscor, 
, Quod vetus est verbum, aptus sum ; unde adipiscor 
adeptus. 

Junge queror questus, pr 'oficiscor junge profectus, 
Expergiscor sum experrectus ; et hcec quoque, commi- 
niscor commentus, nascor natus, moriorque 
Mortuus ; atque orior, quod prceteritum facit ortus. 



V"erbs which make the Perfect Tense in both the 
active and passive form. 

PRJETJERITUM activce et passives vocis habent haec: 
Xubo nupsi nuptag'we sum ; placeo placui dat 
Et placitus : licet et liciiit, licitum : libet adde 
Quod libiiit, libitum; atque piidet puduit puditum?we; 
Tredet ta^diiit, at pertgesum scepius ; atque 
Junge piget, tibi quod format pigtt.it pigitum^we. 



PERFECT TENSE AND SUPINES. 99 

Perfect Tense of Verbs Neuter-passive. 

NEUTRO-passivum sic prceteritum tibi format: — 
Gaudeo gavisus sum, fido fisus, et audeo 
Ausus sum, fio factus, soleo solitus sum. 



Verbs which borrow their Perfect Tense from 
other Verbs. 

QUJED AM prceteritum verba accipiunt aliunde. 
Inceptivum in sco stans pro primario adoptat 
Prceteritum ejus : vult tepui formare tepesco. 

Ferveo ferbui, et insanivi dat furo : tollo 
Sustiili habet : ferio percussi postulate ictus 
Sum ferior ; vescor vult edi ; meio minxi : 
Sisto steti fit: sum fui habet: fero rite tuli dat. 



Verbs which want the Perfect Tense. 

PRCETERITUM fugiunt meditativa omnia proztev 
Parturio, esurio : atque inceptiva, ut puerasco : 
Et passiva, quibus caruere activa supinis, 
Ut timeor, poscor. Fugiunt etiam hisco, fatisco ; 
Adde renideo, calveo, caneo, flaveo, glisco, 
Humeo, fceteo, liveo, mcereo, polleo, vergo, 
Squaleo ; sic aveo fugit, immineo, clueoque ; 
Ambigo ; sic hebeo, scateo, vegeo, cieoque ; 
Sic fugiunt salio, sale condio, frendeo, frendo. 
Queis etiam jungas, medeor, liquor, reminiscor. 



Verbs which seldom admit a Supine. 

PRJE TERITO qucecunque carent sunt cassa supinis. 
Sed frendo fressum ; salio salsum atque salitum. 

Hcec rarb aut nunquam retinebunt verba supinum : 
Lambo, mico, sapio, rudo, fulgeo, turgeo, sterto, 

F 2 



100 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Dispesco, posco, compesco, sternuo, disco, 

Dego, ango, scabo, item pra-, ante-, ex-cello, satagoywe, 

Psallo, volo, nolo, malo, tremo, strideo, strido, 

Incesso, ningo, conniveo, ferveo, fervo ; 

A nuo composita ; ut renuo : a cado ; ut accido : prater 

Occido, quodfacit occasum, recido^^e recasum : 

Quels etiam incasum conjungas incido for mans : 

Respuo, item linquo, faro, sic luo, frigeo, possum, 

Et paveo, timeo : sic luceo ; et arceo, cujus 

Composita ercitum habent : sic ingrdo, congruo ; verba 

Et qucecunque in ui formantur neutra secundcB : 

Excipias oleo, doleo, placeo, t&ceoque, 

Pareo, item careo, noceo, jaceo, l&teoque, 

Et valeo, caleo ; gaudent kcec namque supino. 



101 



SYNTAX, 



OR 



THE CONSTRUCTION OF GRAMMAR. 



N. B. In the examples, the words printed in Roman letters show the 
application of the Rule, 



THE FIKST CONCOED. 

The Nominative Case and the Verb. 

1. Verbum personale concordat cum nominativo nu- 
mero et persona : ut, 

Sera nunquam est ad bonos mores via. Sen. 

2. Nominativus pronominum plerumque omittitur ; 
ut, 

Fertur atrocia fiagitia designdsse : ille omittitur. 

quum vero exprimitur, distinctionem aut emphasin 
denotat ; ut, 

Vos damndstis : i. e. vos et non alii. 

Tu es patronus, tu parens, si deseris tu, periimus ; i. e. 
prcecipue et prce aliis tu, 8fc. 

3. Verbum infinitum aut oratio est aliquando verbo 
nominativus ; ut, 

Non est mentiri meum. Ter. 

Parum in eo putabatur esse animi. Cic. 

4. Verbum inter duos nominativos diversorum nu- 
merorum positum cum alteriitro concordare potest : ut, 

Amantium irae amoris integratio est. Ter. 
Pectus quoque robora fiunt. Ovid. 

F 3 



102 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

5. Nonien multitudinis singulare quandoque verbo 
plurali jungitur : ut, 

Pars abiere. Uterque deluduntur dolis. 



THE SECOND CONCORD. 

The Substantive and the Adjective, fyc. 

6. Adjectiva, participia, et pronoinina cum sub- 
stantivis genere, numero, et casu concordant : ut, 

Rara avis in terris, mgxoque simillima eygno. Juv. 

7. Aliquando oratio supplet locum substantivi, ad- 
jectivo * in neutro genere posito : ut, 

Absolvitor, comperto ficta esse crimina. Tac. 

8» Noraini multitudinis singulari adjectivum plurale, 
interdum di verso genere, aliquando conjungitur ; ut, 
Hie manus ob patriam pugnando vulnera passi. Virg. 

9. Adjectiva sine substantivis posita pro substantivis 
liabentur; ut, 

Boni bonos diligunt Cic. Multa tulit fecitque puer. Hor. 



THE THIRD CONCOED. 

The Relative and the Antecedent 

10. Relativum cum antecedente concordat genere, 
numero, et persona : ut, 

Vir bonus est quis ? 
Qui consulta patrum, qui leges juraque servat. Hor. 

* Rules 7, 8, 9 apply also to participles and pronouns adjective. 



SYNTAX. 103 

11. Aliquando oratio ponitur pro antecedente : ut, 
In tempore ad earn veni, quod rerum omnium est pri- 

rnum. Ter. 

12. Relativum inter duo substantiva diversorum ge- 
nerum vel numerorum collocatum interdum cum pos- 
teriore concordat : ut, 

Homines tuentur ilium globum, quae terra dicitur. Cic. 

13. Aliquando relativum concordat cum primitivo, 
quod in possessivo subauditur : ut, 

Omnes laudare fortunas meas, 
Qui gnatum haberem tali ingenio prceditum. Ter. 



SUBSTANTIVES. 



14. Quum duo substantiva diversae significationis 
concurrunt, posterius in genitivo ponitur : ut, 

Crescit amor nummi, quantum ipsa pecunia crescit 

Juv. 

15. Posterius substantivum in dativo reperitur, quum 
relatio ad aliquid denotatur : ut, 

Urbi pater est, urbique maritus. Lucan. 

16. Adjectivum in neutro genere sine substantivo 
positum aliquando genitivum postulat : ut, 

Paululum pecuniae. 

17. Ponitur interdum genitivus tantum, priore sub- 
stantivo per ellipsin subaudito : ut, 

Ubi ad Dianae veneris, ito ad dextram. Ter. 
(Subauditur templum.) 

18. Duo substantiva rei ejusdem in eodem casu 
ponuntur: ut, 

Effodiuntur opes, irritamenta malorum. Ov. 

F 4 



104 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

1 9. Qualitas rei ponitur in ablativo, etiam genitive : 
ut, 

Vir nulla fide. 

Ingenui vultus puer, ingenuig'&e pudoris. Juv. 

20. Opus et us us ablativum exigunt : ut, 

Auctoritate tud nobis opus est Cic. 
Pecuniam, qua nihil sibi esset usus, ab iis non accepit 

Gell. 



ADJECTIVES. 

The Genitive Case after the Adjective. 

21. Adjectiva plurima, quae affectionem animi de~ 
notant, genitivum exigunt : ut, 

Est natura hominum novitatis avida. Plin. 

Mens futuri pra3scia. 

Memor esto brevis aavi. Irnmemor beneficii. 

Imperitus rerum. Rudis belli. 

Tirmdus Deorum. Ovid. Impavidus sui. Claud. 

22. Adjectiva verbalia in ax genitivum exigunt : ut, 
Audax ingenii. Tempus edax rerum. Ov. 

23. Partitiva, numeralia, interrogativa, comparativa, 
et superlativa, et quasdam partitive posita genitivum 
exigunt pluralem : ut, 

Utrum horum mavis accipe. 

Sum paulo infirmior, unus 

Multorum. Hor. Quis mortalium ? Sail. 

Manuum fortior est dextra. 
Digitorum medius est longissimus. 
Sequimur te, sancte deorum. 



SYNTAX. 105 

The Dative Case after the Adjective. 

24. Adjectiva, quae relationem ad rem quampiam 
denotant, dativum exigunt; ut, 

Fortuna nunc mihi, nunc alii benigna. Hor. 
Sifacis ut patriae sit idoneus, utilis agris. Juv. 
Turba gravis paci, placidceque inimica quieti. Mart. 
Patri similis. Cic. Jucundus amicis. Mart. 

25. Qusedam, quse similitudinem significant, etiam 
genitivo junguntur ; ut, 

Quern metuis, par hujus erat. Lucan. 
Domini similis es. Ter. 

26. Communis, alienus, immunis > genitivo et dativo 
junguntur : ut, 

Commune animantium omnium est Cic. 
Mors omnibus est communis. Cic. 
Non aliena consilii. Sail. Alienus ambitioni. Sen. 
Vobis immunibus hujus Esse mali dabitur. Ovid. 
Caprificus omnibus immunis est. Plin. 

27. Verbalia in bllis accepta passive dativum postu- 
lant: ut, 

Nulli penetrabilis astro Lucus iners. Stat. 



The Accusative Case after the Adjective. 

28. Magnitudinis mensura subjicitur adjectivis in 
accusativo, ablativo, et genitivo : ut, 

Turris centum pedes alta. 
Fons latus pedibus tribus. 
Area lata pedum deniim. 

29. Accusativus aliquando subjicitur adjectivis et 
participiis, more Grseco : ut, 

Os humerosgwe Deo similis. Vir£. Vultum deinissus. 
Nee animum mitior anguibus. Hor. 

F 5 



106 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

The Ablative Case after the Adjective. 

30. Adjectiva, quas ad copiam egestatemve perti- 
nent, interdum ablativum, interdum genitivum exigunt : 
ut, 

Longa senectus Plena malis. Juv. 
Dives equuin, dives pictdi vestis et auri. Virg. 
Amor et melle et felle est foecundissimus. Plaut. 
Vis consilii expers mole ruit sua. Hor. 

31. Adjectiva et substantiva regunt ablativum signi- 
ficantem causam vel formam vel modum rei : ut, 

Pallidus ira. 

Nomine grammaticus, re barbarus. 

Trojanus origine Caesar. Virg. 

32. Dignus, indignus, prceditus, captus, contentus, ex- 
torris ? fretus, liber, cum adjectivis pretium significanti- 
bus, ablativum exigunt : ut, 

Dignus es odio. Ter. 

Qui gnatum haberem tali ingenio prseditum. Ter. 

Oculis capti fodere cubilia talpce. Virg. 

Sorte tud contentus abi. 

Ext orris patria et domo. Sail. 

Fretus conscientia officii mei. Cic. 

Terrore liber animus. Liv. Gemmis venale. Hor. 

33. Dignus, indignus, extorris, et liber aliquando 
genitivum aclmittunt: ut, 

Carmina digna dese. Indignus avorum. Virg. 
Extorris regni. Stat. Liber laborum. Hor. 

34. Comparatita ablativum admittunt ejus rei vel 
personae, cui aliquid comparatur : ut, 

Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. Hor. 

35. Comparativis et superlativis ablativi quidam ad- 
duntur, qui mensuram excessus significant : ut, 



SYNTAX. 107 



Tanto pessimus omnium poeta. 
Quanto tu optimus omnium patronus. 
Quo plus habent, eo plus cupiunt. 



PEONOUNS. 



36. Meiy tui, sui, nostril vestri, genitivi primitivorum, 
ponuntur, quum persona significatur : ut, 

Languet desiderio tui. 

Pars^we tui lateat corpore clausa meo. Ovid. 

Imago nostri. 

37. Mens, tuus, suus, noster, vester, ponuntur, quum 
actio vel possessio rei significatur : ut, 

Favet desiderio tuo. 

Imago nostra : i. e., quam nos possidemus. 



VEEBS. 

The Nominative Case after the Verb. 

38. Verba substantiva; ut sum, for em, fio, exsisto ; 
verba vocandi passiva ; ut nominor, appellor, dicor, vocor, 
nuncupor ; et iis similia; ut videor, habeor, existimor ; 
utrinque nominativum habent : ut, 

Deus est summum bonum. 

Perpusilli vocantur nani. 

Fides religionis nostrce fundamentum habetur. 

Infinitum horum utrinque eosdem casus habet; ut, 

Cato malebat esse quam videri bonus. Sail. 
Principem se esse mavult, quam videri. Cic. 
Natura beatis Omnibus esse dedit Claud. 
f 6 



I OS LATIN GRAMMAR. 

39. Item omnia fere verba post se adjectivum ad- 
mittunt, quod cum nominativo verbi casu, genere, et 
nuinero, concordat: ut, 

Nihil est amabilius virtute. Cic. 

Yict&jacet pietas. Ov. 



The Genitive Case after the Verb. 

40. Sum genitivum postulate quoties possessionem, 
officium, aut signum denotat : ut, 

Pecus est Meliboei. Virg. 

Adolescentis est majores natu revereri. Cic. 

Est fortis non perturbari in rebus asperis. Cic. 

41. Verba accusandi, datnnandi, absolvendi, monendi, 
et similia, genitivum postulant, qui crimen significat : ut, 

Qui alterum accusat probri, eum ipsum se intueri opor- 

tet Plant. 
Sceleris condemnat generum suum. Cic. 
Judex absolvit injuriarum eum. Cic. 
Admoneto ilium pristince fortunse. 

42. Satago, misereor, et miseresco, genitivum postu- 
lant : ut, 

Is rerum suarum satagit. Ter. 

— Oro miserere labor am 
Tantorum, miserere anim^e non digna ferentis. Virg. 
Et generis miseresce tui. Stat. 

43. Reminiscor, obliviscor, memzni, recordor 3 genitivum 
aut accusativum admittunt : ut, 

VatcB fidei reminiscitur. 

Oblivisci nihil soles nisi injurias. Cic. 

Proprium est stultitioz aliorum vitia cernere, oblivisci 

suorum. Cic. 
Faciam ut hujus loci semper memineris. Ter. 



SYNTAX. 109 

Haec olim meminisse juvabit. Virg. 
Hujus meriti in me recordor. Cic. 
Si rite audita recordor. 

44. Potior aut genitivo aut ablativo jungitur: ut 9 

Romani signorum et armorum potiti sunt. Sallust. 
Egressi optatd potiuntur Troes arena. Virg. 



The Dative Case after the Verb. 

45. Omnia verba regunt dativum qui relationem 
denotat : ut, 

Non solum nobis nati sumus. Cic. 

To this rule belong the following hinds of Verbs : 

46. Verba significantia commodum aut incommodum 
regunt dativum : ut, 

Non potes mihi commodare, nee incommodare. 

47. Ex his juvo, Icedo, delecto, et alia quasdam, accusatiyum 
exigunt: ut, 

Fessum quies plurimum juvat. 

48. Verba comparandi regunt dativum : ut, 
Sic parvis componere magna solebam. Virg. 

49. Verba dandi et reddendi regunt dativum : ut, 

For tuna multis dat nimis, satis nulli. Mart. 
Ingratus est, qui gratiam bene merenti non reponit. 

50. Verba promittendi ac solvendi regunt dativum: 
ut, 

Quce tibi promitto, ac recipio sanctissime esse obser- 

vaturum. Cic. 
JEs alienum mihi numeravit. Cic. 



110 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

51. Verba imperandi et nuntiandi regunt dativum: 
ut, 

Imperat 3 aut servit, collecta pecunia cuique. Hor. 
Quid de quo que viro et cui dicas, s&pe videto. Hor. 

52. Excipe rego et guberno, quae accusativum habent ; temper o 
et moderor, qua3 nunc dativum, nunc accusativum habent : ut, 

Luna regit menses. — Orbem Deus ipse gubernat. 
Temperat ipse sibi. — Sol temperat omnia luce. 
Hie moderatur equos. — Qui non moderabitur irse. 

53. Verba fidendi et diffidendi dativum regunt : ut, 

Vacuis committere venis 
Nil nisi lene decet Hor. 
Video?* prudentise tuce difndere. Cic. 

54. Verba obsequendi et repugnandi dativum regunt : 
ut, 

Semper obtemperat pius films patri. 
Ignavis precibus /br^raa repugnat. 

55. Verba minandi et irascendi regunt dativum : ut, 

Utrique mortem est minitatus. Cic. 
Adolescenti nihil est quod succenseam. Ter 

56. Sum cum compositis, prgeter possum, regit dati- 
vum: ut, 

Rex pius est reipublicae ornamentum. 
Mini nee obest, nee prodest. 

57. Verba composita cum quibusvis fere prapositi- 
onibus, et cum adverbiis bene, satis, male, regunt dati- 
vum : ut, 

Dii tibi benefaciant. Ter. 

Iniquissimam pacem justissimo bello antefero. Cic. 



SYNTAX. Ill 

58. Non pauca ex his aliquoties regunt accusativum : 
ut, 

Prasstat ingenio alius alium. Quinct. 

59. Est, pro habeo, regit dativum: ut, 

Est mihi namque domi pater, est injusta noverca. Virg. 

60. Sum, cum multis aliis, admittit dativum personae 
cum dativo rei : ut, 

Exitio est avidis mare nautis. Hor. 

Speras tibi laudi fore, quod mihi vitio vertis ? 



The Accusative Case after the Verb. 

61. Verba transitiva exigunt accusativum : ut, 

Percontat5rem fugito, nam garrulus idem est Hor. 
Aper agros depopulatur. 

62. Verba intransitiva accusativum non admittunt: 
ut, 

Pueri ludunt. 

63. Intransitiva verba nonnunauam transitive usurp- 
antur : ut, 

Bonum civem ludit. Cic. 

Duram servit servitutem. 

Longam incomitata videtur Ire viam. Virg. 

Nee vox hominem sonat ; O dea certe. Virg. 

64. Verba rogandi et docendi, item celo, fere duplicem 
regunt accusativum : ut, 

Tu modo posce deos veniam. Virg. 
Dedocebo te istos mores. 
Ridiculum est te istuc me admonere. Ter. 
Ea ne me celet, consuefeci Jilium. Ter. 



112 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

65. Hujusmodi verba etiam in passive, voce accusa- 
tivum post se habent : ut 3 

Posceris exta bovis. 



The Ablative Case after the Verb. 






66. Quodvis verbum admittit ablativum significan- 
tem instrumentum, aut causam, ant nioduin actionis: 
ut, 

Hi jaculis, illi certant defendere saxis. Virg. 
Vehementer ira excanduit. 
Mir a celeritate rem peregit. 

67. Quibusdam verbis subjicitur nomen pretii in ab- 
lativo casu : ut, 

Teruncio seu vitiosd nnce non emerim. 
Multorum sanguine ac vulneribus ea Pcenis victoria 
stetit. Liv. 

68. Excipiuntur hi genitivi sine subs tan ti vis positi; 
tanti, quanti, pluris, minoris, tantidem, quantivis, quan- 
tilibet, quanticunque, &c. ut, 

Tanti eris aliis y quanti tibi fueris. Cic. 

69. Flocci, nauci, nihili, pili, assis, hujus, teruncii, 
verbis aestimandi peculiariter adduntur : ut 5 

Ego ilium flocci pendo ; nee hujus facio, qui me pili 
gestiinat. 

70. Verba abundandi, implendi, onerandi, et his di- 
versa, ablativo junguntur : ut, 

Amore abundas, Aniipho. Ter. 

Sylla omnes suos divitiis explevit. Sail. 

Te quibus mendaeiis homines levissimi onerarunt. Cic. 

Nulla vitce pars vacare officio potest. Cic. 



SYNTAX. 113 

71. Ex quibus quaedam nonnunquam genitivum re- 
gunt: ut, 

Implentur veteris Bacchi pinguisque ferinae. Virg. 
Non tarn artis indigent, quam laboris. Ter. 

72. Fung or, fruor, utor, vescor, pascor, dignor, muto, 
nitor, super sedeo, ablativo j unguntur : ut, 

Qui adipisci veram gloriam volet, justitice fungatur 

officiis. Cic. 
Optimum est aliend frui insania. 
In re mala, animo si bono utare, juvat. 
Vescor carnibus. 

Maleficio et scelere pascuntur. Cic. 
Haud equidem tali me dignor honore. Virg. 
Diruit, cedificat, mutat quadrdta rotundis. Hor. 
Quod ita ortum est e terra, ut stirpibus suis nitatur. 

Cic. 
Verborum multitudme supersedendum est. 

73. Verbis, quae vim comparationis obtineut, additur 
ablativus significans mensuram excessus : ut, 

Incredibile est quanto herum anteeo sapientid. Ter. 



74. Verbis, vel potius orationibus, interdum additur 
ablativus absolute sumptus : ut, 

Imperante Augusto natus est Christus ; imperante 

Tiberio, crucifixus. 
Me duce, tutus eris. Ovid. 

75. Verbis intransitivis et passivis saepe additur ab- 
lativus partis affectae, et poetice accusativus : ut, 

.ZEgrotat animo magis quam corpore. 
Nee vultum sermone movetur. Virg. 



114 LATIX GRAMMAR. 

76. Passivis additur ablativus agentis, sed antece- 
dente a vel ab praepositione ; et interdum dativus : ut, 
Laudatur ab his, culpatur ab illis. Hor. 
Honesta bonis viris, nan occulta, quseruntur. 



THE INFINITIVE MOOD. 

77. Verbis quibusdam 3 participiis, et adjectivis, ad- 
duntur verba infinita : at, 

Dicere qua pudtiit, scribere jussit amor. Ovid. 
Jussus confxm&ere fcedus. Virg. 
Erat turn dio-nus amari. Vira 

78. Ponuntur interdum sola verba infinita* pro im- 
perfecta indicative : at, 

Qua pergebaL agros yastare, prcedas agere. Sail. 
{Pro vastabat., agebat.) 

Hinc spargere voces 
In valgum ambiguas, et quserere conscius arma. Virg. 
{Pro spargebat, quasrebat.) 

79. Verba infinita frequenter accusativum ante se 
statuunt : at, 

Te rediisse incolumem gaudeo. 



GERUNDS AND SUPINES. 

80. Gerundia et Supina regunt casus suorum ver- 
borum : ut, 

Efferor studio patres vestros videndi. Cic. 

Scitatum oracula Phcebi 

Mittimus. — Viig. 

* This is called the Historical infinitive. 






SYNTAX. 115 

Gerunds. 

81. Gerundia in di eandem cum genitivis construc- 
tionem habent, et pendent a quibusdam turn substan- 
tivise turn adjectivis : ut, 

Cecropias inndtus apes amor urget habendi. Virg. 
JEneas celsd in puppijam certus eundi. Virg. 

82. Pro gerundiis in di verba infinita nonnunquam 
usurpantur: ut, 

Tempus abire tihi est. Hor. 

83. Gerundia in do eandem cum dativis et ablativis 
constructionem obtinent : ut, 

Simul aptat habendo ensem. Virg. 

Hominis mens discendo alitur et cogitando. Cic. 

Scribendi ratio conjuncta cum loquendo est Quinct. 

84. Gerundia in dum pro accusativis usurpantur, 
prsecedente prsepositione : ut, 

Breve tempus cetatis satis longum est ad bene koneste- 

que vivendum. Cic. 
Inter spoliandum corpus hostis veruto percussus est. 

Liv. 

85. Vertuntur etiam gerundia in nomina adjectiva, 
quae Gerundiva vocantur : ut, 

Ad accusandos homines dud prcemio, proximum latro- 
cinio est. 

86. Quum significatur necessitas usurpantur gerun- 
diva cum verbo substantivo : ut, 

Ager colendus est, utfrugesferat. Cic. 
Est calcanda semel via let hi. Hor. 
Video rem omittendam esse. Cic. 

87. Gerundiva in dum cum verbo substantivo pro 
verbis impersonalibus nonnunquam usurpantur : ut, 

Utendum est estate, cito pede prceterit oetas. 
Obliviscendum tibi injuriarum esse censeo. 



116 LATIN GRAMMAK. 

Supines. 

88. Supinum in um active significat, et sequitur ver- 
bum aut participium significans niotuni ad locum : ut, 

Spectatum veniunt, veniunt spectentur ut ipsce. Ovid. 
Millies sunt missi speculatum arcem. 

89. Supinum in u passive significat, et sequitur 
nomina adjectiva: ut, 

Quod factu foedum est, idem est et dictu turpe. 



PAETICIPLES. 



90. Participia regunt casus verborum a quibus 
derivantur : ut, 

Duplices tendens ad sidera palmas, 
Talia voce refert. — Virg. 

91. Participiis passive vocis, praesertim quum exeunt 
in dus, dativus agentis aliquando additur : ut, 

Magnus civis obit, et formidatus OthSni. Juv. 
O ! mihi post nullos, Juli, memorande soddles. 

92. Participia, pro adjectivis posita, genitivum exi- 
gunt: ut, 

Alieni appetens, sui profusus. Sail. 

93. Exosus, perosus, pertcesus, activd significantia, 
accusativum exigunt : ut, 

Astronomus exosus ad unam mulieres. 
Immundam segnitiem perSsas. 
Pertaesus ignaviam suam. Suet. 

94. Exosus et perosus, passive significantia, cum da- 
tivo leguntur : ut, 



SYNTAX. 117 

Exosus Deo et Sanctis. 
Germdni Romanis perosi sunt. 

95. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creatus, ortus, 
editus, ablativum exigunt : ut, 

Bona bonis prognata parentibus. 

Sate sanguine divum ! Virg. 

Quo sanguine cretus. Virg. 

Venus orta mari mare prcestat eunti. Ovid. 

Terra editus. 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 

96. Impersonalia nominativum non habent : ut, 
Juvat ire sub umbras. 

97. His impersonalibus subjicitur accusativus per- 
sonam cum genitivo rei, — poenitet, tcedet, miseret, mise- 
rescit, pudet, piget : ut, 

Si ad centesimum vixisset annum, senectutis eum suce 

non poeniteret. Cic. 
Miseret me tui. Te miserescat mei. Ter. 

98. Verbum impersonate passivae vocis pro singulis 
personis utriusque numeri eleganter accipi potest : ut, 

Quid agitur ? Statur. Ter. 



TIME AND PLACE. 
I. Time. 



99. Qum significant partem temporis, in ablativo fre- 
quentius ponuntur : ut, 

Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit. Plin. 



118 LATIN GKAMMAR. 

100. Quae durationem temporis significant, in accusa- 
tive fere ponuntur, rarius in ablativo : ut, 

Hie jam ter centum totos regnabitur annos. Virg. 
Quatuordecim annis exsilium toleravit. Tac. 

II. The Space of a Place. 

101. Spatium loci in accusative) ponitur, interdum 
et in ablativo : ut, 

Jam mille passus processeram. 

Abest ab urbe quingentis millibus passuum, 

III. The Names of Places. 

102. Omne verbum admittit genitivum oppidi no- 
minis, in quo fit actio, modo primas vel secundse decli- 
nationis et singularis numeri sit : ut, 

Quid Roinae faciam ? mentlri nescio. Juv. 

103. Hi genitivi, humi, domi, militice, belli, propriorum 
sequuntur forinam : ut, 

Parvi sunt f oris arma, nisi est consilium domi. Cic. 
Una semper militias et domi fuimus. Ter. 

104. Verum si oppidi nomen pluralis duntaxat nu- 
meri aut tertiae declinationis erit, in ablativo ponitur : 
ut, 

Colchus an Assyrius ; Thebis nutritus, an Argis 

Hor 
Romce Tibur amem, ventosus ; Tibiire Romam Hor. 

105. Sic utimur ruri vel rure in ablativo : ut, 
Eure ego viventem, tu dicis in urbe beatum. Hor. 

106. Verbis significantibus motum ad locum fere ad- 
ditur nomen oppidi in accusativo sine praepositione : ut, 

Carthagmem rediit. Cic. 



SYNTAX. 119 

107. Ad hunc modum utimur domus et rus : ut, 

Ite domum, satiirce, venit Hesperus; ite, capellce. 

Virg. 
Ego rus ibo. 

108. Verbis significantibus motum a loco fere additur 
nomen oppidi in ablativo sine praepositione : ut, 

Nisi ante Roma profectus esses, nunc earn relinqueres. 

109. Ad eundem modum usurpantur domus et rus: 



ut, 



Nuper exiit domo. Ter. 

Metuo patrem, ne rure redierit. Ter. 



ADVERBS. 



110. Qiledam adverbia loci, temporis, et quanti- 
tatis, item ergo pro causa, genitivum admittunt ; ut, 

Ubi gentium ? 

Nihil tunc temporis amplius quamfiere poteram. 
Satis eloquentise, sapientiae parum. Sail. 
Donari virtiitis ergo. Cic. 

111. Qusedam casus admittunt nominum unde de- 
ducta sunt : ut, 

Sibi inutiliter vivit 

Proxime Hispaniam Mauri sunt Sail. 
Melius vel optime omnium. Cic. 
Amplius opinione morabdtur. Sail. 



120 LATIN GRAMMAR. 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

112. Conjunctiones copulative et disjunctive si- 
miles casus, modos, et tempora fere conjungunt : ut, 

Socrates docuit Xenopliontem et Platonem. 
Recto stat corpore, despicitque terras. 
Nee scribit, nee legit. 

113. Aliquoties connectunt diversos casus et diversa 
tempora : ut, 

Emi librum centussi et pluris. 

Vixi Rome et Venetiis. 

Nisi me lactasses amantem et falsa spe produceres. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



114. Pr^positio subaudita interdum facit ut ad- 
datur ablativus : ut, 

Habeo te loco parentis : i. e. in loco. 

115. Prepositio in compositione eunaem nonnun- 
quani casum regit, quern et extra compositionem rege- 
bat: ut, 

Detriidunt naves scopiilo : i. e. trudunt de. 
Pretereo te insalutatum : i. e. eo preter. 

116. Prepositiones, quum casum amittunt, fiunt ad- 
verbia: ut, 

Longo post tempore venit. Virg. 



SYNTAX. 121 



INTERJECTIONS. 

117. Inter jectiones non raro absolute, hoc est, 
sine casu ponuntur : ut, 

Spem gregis, ah ! sillce in nudd connixa reliquit. Virg. 

118. En et ecce nominativo frequentius junguntur, 
accusativo rarius : ut, 

En Priamus. Virg. 

Ecce tibi status noste?\ Cic. 

En quatuor aras : 
Ecce duas tibi, Daphni; ^L\xoque altaria Phcebo. Virg. 

119. O, exclamantis, nominativo^ accusativo, et voca- 
tivo, jungitur : ut, 

O festus dies hominis ! Ter. 

O fortunatos nimium agricolas ! Virg. 

O formose puer ! Virg. 

120. Heu et proh nunc nominativo, nunc accusativo, 
junguntur; item proh vocativo ; ut, 

Heu pietas, heu prisca fides. Virg. 
Heu stirpem invisam. Virg. 
Proh Jupiter ! Ter. 
* Proh deum atqae hominum fidem ! Ter. 
Proh sancte Jupiter ! Cic. 

121. Hei et vce dativo junguntur : ut, 
Hei mihi. Ovid. 

Va3 misero mihi ! Ter. 



122 



PEOSODY. 



Pkosodia est pars Grammatical quae quantitatem 
syllabarum docet. 



Time. 

Tempus est syllabae proferendae mensura. 

Syllaba brevis unius est temporis, longa vero duorum. 

Tempus breve curva linea notatur (" ) ; longum autem 
recta linea ( " ). 

Ex syllabis justo ordine dispositis fiunt pedes. 

Est autem pes duarum syllabarum pluriumve consti- 
tute ex certa Temporum observatione. 

Syllabae duae longae sponcleum efficiunt : ut, virtus. 

Syllabae duae breves, longa praecedente, dactylum effi- 
ciunt : ut, scribere. 

Porro pedes justo numero atque ordine concinnati 
versuni constituunt. 



Scanning. 



Scansio est legitima versus in singulos pedes com- 
mensuratio. 

Scansioni accidunt figurae, Synaloepha, Ecthlipsis, 
Synceresis, Diaeresis, et Ccesura. 

Synaloepha est elisio vocalis in fine dictionis, ante 
alteram in initio sequentis : ut, 

Sera ni\mis vif\ est\\ crastina\ viv 1 hddt\e.\ Mart, 
pro vita, vive* 

At heu et 6 nunquam intercipiuntur. 



PROSODY. 123 

Ecthlipsis est quoties m cum sua vocali perimitur, 
proxima dictione a vocali exorsa : ut, 

Mdnstr* hor\rend\ in\form\ in\gens, cui\ lumen 
ad\ emptum. Virg. 
pro monstrum korrendum, informe. 

Synceresis est duarum syllabarum in unam contractio : 
lit, 

Sett len\to fue\rint al\vFarw\ vimine\ texta. Virg. 
quasi scrip turn esset ale aria. 

Diaresis est, ubi ex una syllaba dissecta fiunt duae : 

Debue\rantfu\sos\\ evolu\isse su\os. Ovid. 
evoluisse pro evolvisse. 

CcBsura est quaedam versus in duas partes distri- 
bute *: ut, 

Et jam | finis erat — quum \ Jupiter | cethere \ summo 
Despici\ens mdre\ vellvo\lum — ter\rasque jd\ce?ites. 

Virg. 



Hexameter or Heroic Verse. 

Versus Hexameter constat ex sex pedibus ; quint us 
locus dactylum postulat, sextus spondeurn ; reliqui pedes 
vel spondeos vel dactylos admittunt : ut, 

Tityre\ tu patu\la> recic\bans sub\ tegmine\ fdgl. Virg. 

Repent ur aliquando spondeus etiam in quinto loco : 
ut, 

Card De\um sobo\les mag\num Jovis\ mcre\mentum, 

Virg. 
Ultima cujuscunque versus syllaba habetur communis. 

* See Prosody, Part II. 

g a 



124 latin grammar. 

Pentameter Verse. 

Versus Pentameter e duabus constat partibus ; qua- 
rum prior duos pedes, vel spondeos vel dactylos, com- 
prehendit, cum syllaba longa ; altera etiam duos pedes, 
omnlno dactylos, item cum syllaba longa : ut, 

Res est\ sollic?\ti^ plena ti\moris a\mor\\. Ovid. Epist. 



QUANTITY OF FORMER SYLLABLES. 
Position. 

Vocalis ante duas consonantes, aut duplicem in eadem 
dietione, ubique positione longa est : ut, ventus, axis, 
patrizo. 

Quod si consonans priorem dictionem claudat, se- 
quente item a consonante inchoante, vocalis praecedens 
etiam positione longa erit : ut, 

Major | sum quam | cut pos\sit for\tuna no\cere. 
Syllable Jor, sum, quam, et sit, positione longse sunt. 

At si prior dictio in vocalem brevem exeat, sequente 
a duabus consonantibus sc, sp, vel st incipiente, plerum- 
que producitur : ut, 

Occul\ta spoil | a, et plu\res de | pace tri | umphos. Juv. 

Syllaba ta positione longa est. 

Vocalis brevis ante mutam, sequente liquida, com- 
munis redditur : ut, patris, volucris. Longa vero non 
mutatur: ut, aratrum, simulacrum. 



Vowel before a Vowel. 

Vocalis ante alteram in eadem dictione ubique brevis 
est : ut ,I)eus, meus, tuus, plus. 



PROSODY. 125 

Excipias genitivos in ius pronominum inflexionem 
habentes : ut, unius illius, &c, ubi i communis repe- 
ritur : in alterius yero semper est brevis, in alius sem- 
per longa. 

Solius, utrius, neutrius, vix leguntur penultima brevi. 

Excipiendi sunt etiam genltivi et dativi quintae decli- 
nationis, ubi e inter geminum i longa fit : ut, faciei : 
alioqui non : ut, rei 9 spei, Jidei. 

Fi etiam mjio longa est, nisi sequuntur e et r simul: 
ut, fierem, fieri. 

Omnia\jdm fl\unt fie\ri qude\ posse ne\gdbam. 

Dius primam syllabam habet longam, Diana com- 
munem. 

Ohe, interjectio, priorem syllabam communem habet. 

Vocalis ante alteram in substantivis Grascis subinde 
longa fit : ut, Pierides, Laerten ; et in possessivis Graecis : 
ut, JErie'ia nutrix ; Rhodopeius Orpheus. 

Diphthong. 

Omnis diphthongus apud Latinos longa est : ut, au- 
rum, neuter, musa> : nisi sequente vocali : ut, pr&ire, 
prceustus, prceamplus. 

Derivation. 

Derivativa eandem fere cum primitivis quantitatem 
sortiuntur : ut, amator, amicus, amabilis, prima brevi 
ab amo. 

Excipiuntur tamen pauca, quae & brevibus deducta 
primam syllabam producunt : ut, 

G 3 



126 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



covin comis, a coma, 
fames, f omentum, a foveo, 

humanus, ab homo, 
jucundus, kjuvo, 
jumentum, kjuvo, 
junior, kjicvenis, 

later na, a lateo, 

lex legis, a lego, 



mobilis, a moveo, 
nonus, a novem, 
rex regis, regina, a rego, 
sedes, a sedeo, 
tegula, a tego, 
tragula, a trdho, 
vomer, a vomo, 
vox vocis, a voco. 



^ Sunt et contra, quae, a longis deducta, primam corri- 
piunt : ut, 



arena, arista, arundo, ab 

areo, 
druspex, ab ar#, 
dicax, a g?zc#, 
rfi^'o, a ditis, 
disertus, a dissero, 
dux, duds, a <fwco, 
fides, kfido, 



frag or 9 frdgilis, a frango, 
genui, a gigno, 
lucerna, a luceo, 
noto, notas, a 7,wta, 
posui, a pono, 
potui, a possum, 
stilus, a sdlvus, 
sopor, a s£p20. 

Et alia nonnulla ex utroque genere, quse relinquuntur 
inter legendum observanda. 



Composition. 

Composita siniplicium quantitatem sequuntur : ut a 
lego legis, perlego ; lego legas, allego ; a potens, impotens ; 
a solor, consolor. 

Excipiuntur tamen hasc brevia a longis enata : dejero, 
pejtro, kjuro ; innuba, pronuba, a nubo. 



Rules for Perfect Tenses. 

Omne prasteritum dissyllabuui prioreni habet longam : 
ut 5 legi, emi, movL 

Excipias tamen bibi, dedi, scidi, steti, sfiti, tiffi, et 
fidi kfindo. 



PROSODY. 127 



Primam praeteriti geminantia primain brevem ha- 
bent : ut, cecidi a cado ; cecidi a ccedo ; didici, fefelli, 
momordi, pependi, pupugi, tetendi, tetigi, totondi, tutudi. 

Rules for Supines. 

Supinum dissyllabum priorem habet longam : ut, 
visum, latum, lotum, motum. 

Excipe datum, itum, litum, quitum, ratum, rutum, Sa- 
turn, situm, statum ; et citum a cieo cies ; nam titum a 
cio cis, quartan priorem habet longam. 



QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 

I. A finita producuntur : ut. ama, contra, erga. 

Sed itd, quid, putd, ejd, brevia sunt. 

Corripiuntur item oranes casus in a, pragter voca- 
tivos a Grascis in as, et ablativos, primag deelinationis : 
ut, Musd, regnd ; o JEnea ; Musd, bond, 8fc. 

Numeralia in ginta finalem habent communem, sed 
frequentius longam : ut, triginta. 

II. In B, D, T, desinentia brevia sunt : ut, db, ad, 
caput. 

III. In C desinentia producuntur: ut, etc, sic, et hie 
adverbium. 

Sed duo in c corripiuntur ; nee et donee. 

Tria sunt commuma ; fac, pronomen hie et neutrum 
ejus hoc, modo non sit ablativi casus, 

IV. E finita brevia sunt : ut. mare, pene, lege, scribe. 

G 4 



128 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Producuntur autem omnes voces quintaa iuflexionis 
in e ; ut,Jide, die, una cum particiilis inde enatis ; ut, 
hodie, quotidie, pridie, postridie ; his adde fame a fames 
tertian inflexionis ; item quare, et similia. 

Producuntur secundaa personae singulares imperativi 
secundaa conjugationis : ut, doce, move. 

Producuntur monosyllaba in e : ut, me, te, se : sed 
que, ne, ve, conjunctiones encliticaa, corripiuntur. 

Adverbia in e, ab adjectivis secundaa declinationis 
deducta, e longum habent: ut, pulchre, docte, valde 
pro valide. Quibus accedunt ferme, fere : bene tamen 
et male corripiuntur omnino. 

Postremo, quaa a Graacis per 77 scribuntur, natura 
producuntur: ut, Lethe, Anckise, cete, Tempe. 

V. / finita longa sunt : ut, domini, magistri, amdri. 

Mihl, tibi, sib z, ubi, et ibl, sunt communia. Nisi et 
quasi corripiuntur. 

Corripiuntur etiam dativi et vocativi Graacorum, quo- 
rum genitlvus singularis in 09 breve exit : ut, dativi 
Minoidi, Palladi, Pliyllidi ; vocativi Alexi, Amarylli, 
Daphni. 

VI. L finita corripiuntur : ut, animal, Hannibal, mel, 
pugil, consul. 

Longa sunt nil (contractum a nihil), sal, et sol: et 
Hebraaa quaadam in el: ut, Michael, Gabriel, Raphael, 
Daniel. 

VII. N finita corripiuntur: ut an, Iphigenian, tamen, 
crimen, viden\ in, Ilion, Ityn. 

Producuntur non, quin, sin ; et Graaca in av, rjv, Iv, 
cov ; ut Pcedn, Hymen, splen, delphin, daemon, Xenophon. 



PROSODY. 129 

VIII. O finita communia sunt, sed frequentius lcnga : 
ut, died, virgd, porrd : sic docendo, legendo, et alia ge- 
rundia in do. 

Sed obliqui casus in o semper producuntur : ut, da- 
tivi domino, servo; ablativi templo, damnd. 

Producuntur adverbia ab adjectivis derivata: tanto, 
quanto, liquido, falso, primo, manifesto, &c. Sed sedulof 
mutud, crebro, sunt communia : modi) et quomodo semper 
corripiuntur. 

Cito quoque, ut et ambo, duo, ego, atque homo, item 
verba scio, nescio, puto, void, vix leguntur producta. 

Monosyllaba in o producuntur : ut, do, sto. 

Producuntur item Grasca per co, cujusmodi fuerint 
casus: ut, nominativi, Sappho, Dido; genitivi, Androged, 
Apollo; accusative Atho, Apollo : sic et ergoipro causa. 

IX. R finita corripiuntur: ut, Ccesdr, per, vir, uxor, 
tujticr. 

Producuntur autem, far, Lar, Nar, ver, fur, cur ; par 
quoque cum compositis, ut compar, impdr, dispar. 

Longa sunt Grasca etiam in er, quas Grascis in rjp de- 
sinunt : ut, aer, crater, character, ather, sdter : praeter 
pater et mater, quae apud Latinos ultimam brevem ha- 
bent. 

X. S finita pares cum numero vocalium habent ter- 
minationes : nempe, as, es, is, os, us, ys. 

1 . As finita producuntur : ut, amds, musas, majestds, 
bonitds. 

Brevia sunt Grseca, quorum gemtivus singularis in 
dos exit : ut, Artds, lampas ; genitivo Arcados, lampa- 
dos. 

Corripiuntur accusativi plurales nominum crescen- 

G 5 



130 LATIN GRAMMAS. 

tiuni : ut, heros heroos, Phyllis Phyllidus ; accusativi 
plurales, herods, Phyllidds. 

2. Es finita longa sunt ; ut, AncMses, sedes, doces, 
patres. 

Corripiuntur nomina in es tertise inflexionis, quas 
penultimara genitivi crescentis corripiunt : ut, miles, 
seges, dives. Sed aries, abies, paries, Ceres, et pes una 
cum compositis — ut bipes, tripes — longa sunt. 

Es quoque a sum, una cum compositis, corripitur : 
ut, potes, ades, prodes, obes : quibus penes adjungi potest. 

Brevia sunt neutra in es, et nominativi plurales 
Graecorum : ut, hippomdnes, cacoethes, Cyclopes, Nai- 
ades. 

3. Is finita brevia sunt : ut, Paris, pariis, tristis, hi- 
laris. 

Obliqui vero casus plurales in is producuntur : ut, mu- 
sts, mensis a mensa, domims, templis ; et quis pro quibus. 

Longa sunt producentia penultimam genitivi cres- 
centis: ut, Samnis, Sal amis ; genitivo Samriitis, Sala- 
minis. 

Longa item sunt quae in is contracta ex eis desi- 
nunt, sive Graeca sive Latina : ut, Simois, Pyrois, partis, 
omnis ; e Simoeis, Pyroeis, part eis, omneis. 

Monosyllaba omnia in is producuntur ; ut, vis, lis : 
praater is et quis nominativos, et Ms apud Ovidium. 

Producuntur item secundaa personae singulares verbo- 
rum in 25, quorum secundae personas plurales desinunt 
in itis, penultima producta; ut, audis, mils, dederis ; 
plurali, auditis, velltis, dederitis. 

4. Os finita producuntur : ut, honos, nepos, dominos, 
servos. 



PROSODY. 131 

Brevia sunt compos, impos, et os ossis : et Graeca per 
o parvum : ut, Delos, Chads, Pallddos, Phyllidos. 

5. Us finita corripiuntur : ut, famulus, regius, tern pics, 
amdmiis. 

Longa sunt autem producentia penultimam genitivi 
crescentis : ut, salus, tellus ; genitivo salutis, telluris. 

Longae sunt etiam omnes voces quartae inflexionis in 
us, praster nominativum et vocativum singulares: ut, 
genitivus singularis, manus ; nominativus, accusativus, 
vocativus plurales, manus. 

Longa sunt etiam monosyllaba in us : ut, crus, thus, 
mus, sus : et Graeca item per ovs diphthongum : ut, no- 
minativus, Panthus, Melampus ; genitivus, Sapphus, 
Clius. 

Atque pus cunctis venerandum nomen IE SUS. 

6. Ys finita corripiuntur : ut, Chelys, Othrys. 

XL U finita producuntur: ut, manu, genu, amatu, 
diu. 

XII. Postremo Y finita corripiuntur : ut, moly. 



g 3 



132 



THE GENDERS OF NOUNS 

CONSTRUED. 



PROPRIA proper names, quas which tribuuntur are 
assigned maribus to the male kind, dicas you may call 
mascula masculines ; ut as, sunt are Divorum the names 
of the Gods ; Mars the God of war, Bacchus the God 
of wine, Apollo the God of wisdom : Virorum the names 
of men ; ut as, Cato a noble Roman, Virgilius the Poet 
Virgil : Ventorum the names of winds ; ut as, Libs the 
south-west wind, Notus the south wind, Auster the south 
wind: Mensium the names of months ; ut as, October 
the month October. Pleraque most names Fluviorum of 
rivers Mascula are masculines ; ut as, Hebrus a river 
of Thrace : item likewise, Montium the names of moun- 
tains ; ut as, Parnassus a mountain of Phocis, Caucasus 
a mountain of Asia ; at but sunt there are {some names 
of rivers and mountains) qua3 which poscant sibi require 
for themselves neutrum genus the neuter gender, et and 
qua3 some which require foemineum the feminine : Crus- 
tumium a river of Umbria, Styx a river of Hades, 
monstrant show hoc this; Pelion a mountain of Thessaly, 
xEtna a mountain of Sicily, hoc show this. 

Propria nornina proper names referentia denoting 
foemineum sexum the female sex tribuuntur are assigned 
foemineo generi to the feminine gender ; sive ivhether sunt 
they are Dearum the names of Goddesses ; ut as, Juno 
Jupiter's wife, Venus the Goddess of beauty : Muliebria 
the names of women*; ut as, Anna, Anna, Philotis Philote ; 



THE GENDERS OF NOUNS CONSTRUED. 133 

Urbium the names of cities ; ut as, Elis a city of Pelo- 
ponnesus, Opus a city of Locris : Regionum the names of 
countries; ut as, Graecia Greece, Persis Persia: Item 
also nomen the name insulas of an island ; ceu as, Creta 
Crete, Britannia Britain, Cyprus Cyprus. 

Tamen hut quaadam some names urbium of cities sunt 
are excipienda to he excepted: ut as, ista mascula those 
masculines ; Sulmo a town in Italy, Agragas a town in 
Sicily : quasdam neutralia some neuters ; ut as, Argos 
a city in Peloponnesus, Tibur a city in Italy, Prasneste 
a city in Italy ; et also Anxur a city in Italy, quod 
which dat gives utrumque genus both the masculine and 
neuter gender. Dulichium, insula an island {in the 
Ionian Sea), neutrum is of the neuter gender: Pontus, 
regio a country (of Asia Minor), est is mas of the mas- 
culine gender. 



Qu^ECUNQUE nomina whatever nouns significant sig- 
nify virilem sexum the male sex sunt are mascula mas- 
culines : ut as, Deus a god, vir a man, rex a king, pater 
a father, et and leo a lion, taurus a hull. 

Quicquid whatever noun signat denotes muliebria mu- 
nera the offices of the female sex est is foemineum feminine : 
ut as, dea a goddess; sic so, mulier a woman, soror a sister, 
uxor a wife, vacca a cow, leaana a lioness. 

Appellatiya the common names Arborum of trees 
erunt will he muliebria feminines : ut as, alnus an alder- 
tree, laurus a laurel et and ilex a scarlet oak. Pinaster a 
wild pine-tree mas is masculine, oleaster a wild olive-tree 
mas is masculine. Hasc these nouns sunt are neutra of 
the neuter gender : siler a withy-tree, suber a cork-tree ; 
sic so, robur an oak, que and acer a maple-tree. 

Gemmarum the names of jewels potius are rather 
muliebria feminine ; vero hut nonnunquam sometimes 
mascula masculine: sapphirus a sapphire, iaspis a jasper, 
monstrant show illud the former : adamas a diamond, 



134 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

que and opalus an opal, hoc show the latter. Smaragdus 
an emerald que and onyx an onyx incerta are of the 
doubtful gender. 

Qu^edam some names Volucrum of birds; eeu as, 
passer a sparrow, hirundo a swallow : Ferarum of wild 
beasts ; ut as, tigris a tiger, vulpes a fox : et and Pis- 
cium of fishes; ut as, ostrea an oyster, cetus a ivhale, 
sunt are dicta called epicoena nouns of the epicene gender ; 
quibus to ivhich vox ipsa the termination itself feret will 
give genus aptum the right gender. 

Omne every noun quod which exit in um ends in urn, 
aut in on or in on aut es or in es origine Gra3ca of Greek 
derivation, est is neutrale genus of the neuter gender : sic 
also nomen a noun invariabile undeclined. 



Nomen a noun non crescens not increasing genitivo 
in the genitive case — ceu as, caro carnis flesh, capra 
capra3 a she-goat, nubes nubis a cloud — est is genus mu- 
liebre of the feminine gender. 

Quot as many nouns as declinatio prima the first de- 
clension Graecorum of the Greeks fundit in as makes to end 
in as et in es and in es, mascula are masculines : quibus 
to which adde add cometa a comet, planeta a planet 
Item also mascula these are of the masculine gender, 
natalis one's birth day, aqualis an ewer: creata nouns 
derived ab asse of as (a Roman coin or pound) ; ut as, 
centussis an hundred asses, semissis half an as: con- 
junge join to these lienis the spleen, orbis any round thing, 
caulis a stalk, follis bellows, collis a hill, mensis a month, 
et and ensis a sword; sic so fustis a club, funis a rope, 
panis bread, sic so crinis hair, et and ignis fire ; cassis 
a toil or net, fascis a faggot, torris a fire-brand, sentis 
a thorn, piscis a fish, et and unguis a man's nail; et also 
vermis a worm, vectis a lever, postis a door-post; sic so, 
amnis a stream et and axis an axle-tree. 

In er nouns ending in er mascula are mascidines ; 






THE GENDERS OF NOUNS CONSTRUED. 135 

ceu as, venter the belli/, quoque also in us ivords ending 
in us inascula are masculines; ut as, annus a year. 
Vero but foeminei generis these nouns are of the feminine 
gender: domus a house, alvus a belly, que and humus 
the ground, porticus a porch, et and manus a hand, et 
and colus a distaff; idus the ides of a month, ficus a fig, 
que and acus a needle, et and tribus a tribe, et and van- 
nus a winnowing fan ; quoque also quaedam Graeca some 
Greek words per us formed in us ; ceu as, antidotus, an 
antidote, costus spikenard, diphthongus a diphthong, 
by ssus, ^zze linen, abyssus a bottomless pit ; sic so pharus 
a light-house, et and method us a method, dialectus a 
dialect, lecythus an oil-cruse, Arctus a set of stars called 
the Bear ; cum with multis aliis many other nouns, quae 
which nunc at this time perscribere to write at large 
Ion gum est is tedious. 

jSTomen a noun in e ending in e, neutrum is neuter si 
if gignit is it makes is in the genitive case ; ut as, mare 
the sea, rete a net: sic so virus poison, pelagus the sea : 
vulgus the common people modo sometimes neutrum is 
neuter, modo sometimes mas is masculine. 

Sunt these nouns are incerti generis of the doubtful 
gender: talpa a mole, et and dama a deer, canalis a chan- 
nel, et and cytisus a kind of clover, balanus the fruit of 
the palm-tree, clunis a buttock, que and finis an end or 
limit, que and pen us provisions, pampinus a vine leaf 
et and corbis a basket, linter a bark, torquis a twisted 
collar for the neck, specus a cave, anguis a snake ; ficus, 
pro morbo for a disease, dans making fici in the genitive 
case, atque and phaselus a pinnace, et and grossus a 
green fig ; sic thus item likewise, cailis a mountain path ; 
queis to which adde add barbitus a harp or lute. 

Compositum a noun compounded a verbo of a verb 
dans a ending in a, est is commune duorum the common 
of two genders; Grajugena a Grecian born a from gigno 



136 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

to beget; agricola a farmer hfrom colo to till; ad vena a 
stranger a from venio to come, monstrant show id that. 
Adde add senex an old man or woman, auriga a cha- 
rioteer, et and verna a slave by birth, sodalis a companion, 
vates a prophet, extorris a banished man or woman, 
patruelis a cousin-german, que and perduellis an open 
enemy in war, affinis one allied by marriage, juvenis 
a young person, testis a witness, civis a citizen, canis a 
dog or bitch, hostis an enemy. 



Nomen a noun est is genus muliebre of the feminine 
gender, si if penultima syllaba the last syllable but one 
genitivi of the genitive case crescentis increasing sonat 
acuta sounds sharp (i, e. has the acute accent); velut 
as hsec these nouns, pietas pietatis piety, virtus virtutis 
virtue, monstrant show. 

Nomina quasdam certain nouns monosyllaba of one 
syllable dicuntur are called mascula masculines ; sal salt, 
sol the sun, ren a kidney, et and splen the spleen, sic thus 
pes afoot, et and vas vadis a surety, as a pound iveight, 
prses a surety for money, mos a manner, flos a flower, 
ros dew, et and glis a dormouse, gryps a griffin, dens a 
tooth, mons a mountain, pons a bridge, et and simul also 
fons a fountain. 

Finita words that end in o in o, vel in n or in n, mas- 
cula are masculines ; ut as, scipio a staff, sermo a dis- 
course, senio the number six on dice, ternio the number 
three on dice, curculio a weevil or corn-worm ; que and 
delphin a dolphin, que and lien the spleen. 

In er nouns ending in er mascula are masculines; 
ceu as, crater a bowl; atque and in or words ending 
in or ; ut as timor fear, ardor burning heat. Adde add 
bidens instrumentum a fork with two spikes, cum pluri- 
bus with many nouns in dens ending in dens. His to 
these etiam also adjungas you may add quae those words 
which componuntur are compounded ab asse with as 
(a pound)', ut as dodrans nine ounces. Addas you 



THE GENDERS OF NOUNS CONSTRUED. 137 

may add orlens the East, torrens a torrent, que and 
elephas an elephant. Jungantur let there he joined que 
both magnes a loadstone, que and lebes a caldron, que 
and tapes tapestry ; meridies mid-day, nomen a noun 
quinta3 of the fifth declension, thorax a breast-plate, quo- 
que also hydrops the dropsy, spadix a palm-branch. 

Et also hasc nomina these nouns monosyllaba of one 
syllable sunt are neutralia neuters ; mel honey, fel gall, 
lac milk, far bread-corn, ver the spring, ses brass, cor the 
heart, vas vasis a vessel, os ossis a bone, et and os oris 
a mouth, rus the country, thus frankincense, jus right, 
crus the leg, pus corruption, et #tzg? polysyllaba nouns 
of many syllables in al ending in al, que aftd ar end- 
ing in ar ; ut as, capital a covering for the head (u,sed 
at sacrifices) ; laquear an ornamented roof or ceiling. 
Alec a sharp pickle neutrum is neuter, alex a kind offish 
muliebre is feminine. 

Sunt these nouns are dubii generis of the doubtful 
gender, scrobs a ditch, serpens a serpent, bubo an owl, 
rudens a cable, grus a crane, perdix a partridge, lynx Hie 
lynx, limax a snail, stirps pro for trunco the body of a. 
tree, et and calx the heel pedis of the foot. Adde add 
dies a day, tantum only esto let it be mas masculine 
numero secundo in the plural number. 

Sunt these nouns are commune of the common of two 
genders, parens a father or mother, que and auctor an 
author, infans an infant, adolescens a young person, dux a 
leader, illex a decoy or lure, haeres an heir, exlex an 
outlaw; creata nouns compounded a of fronte the word 
irons; ut as, bifrons one with two faces ; custos a keeper, 
bos an ox, bull, or cow, fur a thief, sus a swine 9 atque 
and sacerdos a priest or priestess. 



Nomen a noun est is mas of the masculine gender, si 
if penultima the last syllable but one genitivi of the geni- 



138 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

tive case crescentis increasing sit gravis be grave (i. e. re* 
ceive the grave accent), ut as, sanguis blood, genitivo in 
the genitive case sanguinis. 

Hyperdisstllabon let a noun of more than two 
syllables in do ending in do, quod which dat dinis makes 
dinis in the genitive case, sit be fceniinei generis of the 
feminine gender : atque also in go a noun ending in go, 
quod ginis which makes ginis in genitivo in the genitive 
case : dulcedo sweetness faciens making dulcedinis mon- 
strat shows id that tibi to you, que and compago compa- 
ginis a joint id shows it. Adjice add Grasca words of 
Greek origin finita that end in as in as, vel in is or in is : 
ut as, lampas a torch, cuspis Hie point of a weapon, et 
and aspis a shield : junge join pecus cattle formans form- 
ing pecudis; sindon^/z/ze linen, etiam also ic5n an image, 
grando hail, fides faith, etiam likewise teges a mat or 
covering, et and seges standing corn, arbor a tree, que 
and hyems winter, et and forfex shears, pellex a mistress, 
carex sedge, simul atque at the same time also supellex 
household goods, et and cblarnys a cloak, appendix an 
appendage, coxendix the hip, que and adde add filix 
fern. 

Nomen a noun in a ending in a, signans signifying 
rem a thing non animatam without life, est is neutrale 
genus of the neuter gender ; ut as, problema a problem : 
en a noun ending in en, ut as, omen an omen: ar a 
noun ending in ar, ut as, jubar a sun-beam : ur dans a 
noun ending in ur, ut as, jecur the liver: us a noun in us, 
ut as, onus a burthen : put a noun in put, ut as, occiput 
the hinder -part of the head. Attamen but ex his of these 
pecten a comb, furfur bran, sunt are mascula masculines. 
Sunt these nouns are neutra of the neuter gender, ca- 
daver a carcase, verber a stripe, tuber a mushroom, et 
and uber a teat, et and sequor a smooth surface, marmor 
marble, que and ador spelt; sic thus iter a journey, at- 
que and laser assafostida, cicer a vetch, et and piper 



THE GENDERS OF NOUNS CONSTRUED. 139 

pepper atque and papaver a poppy, et and siser a parsnip : 
adcle add pecus cattle, faciens when making pecoris geni- 
tivo pecoris in the genitive case. 

Sunt these nouns are dubii generis of the doubtful 
gender, carclo a hinge, margo the brink or brim of a thing, 
cirris ashes, objex a bolt, forceps a pair of tongs, pumex 
a pumice stone, imbrex a gutter-tile, cortex the rind or 
bark of a tree, pulvis dust, que and adeps/af. Queis 
and to these etiam also conjunge join culex a gnat, que 
and natrix a water serpent, que and silex a flint: quamvis 
although usus custom vult will have haec these nouns 
melius rather dicier be called mascula masculines. 

Ista these nouns sunt are communis generis of the 
common of two genders : vigil a sentinel, pugil a boxer, 
exul a banished man or woman, praesul a prelate, homo a 
man or woman, nemo nobody, martyr a martyr, Ligur a 
Ligurian, augur a soothsayer, et and Areas an Arcadian, 
antistes a chief priest or priestess, miles a soldier, pedes a 
foot-man or woman, interpres an interpreter, comes a com- 
panion, hospes a guest or host: sic so al^s any great 
bird, prseses a president, princeps a prince or princess, 
auceps a fowler, eques a horse-man or woman, obses a 
hostage ; atque and alia multa nomina many other nouns 
quae which creantur are formed a verbis from verbs: ut 
as, conjux a husband or wife, judex a judge, vinclex an 
avenger, opifex a workman, et and aruspex a diviner. 



Adjectiva adjectives habentia having duntaxat only 
unam vocem one termination, ut as, felix happy, audax 
bold, retinent keep genus omne every gender sub una 
under one ending. Si z^cadant they fall sub under gemina 
voce a double termination, velut as, omnis et and omne 
all, vox prior the former word est is commune duum the 
common of two genders, vox altera the second word neu- 
trum is neuter. At but si if variant they vary tres voces 
the three endings ; ut as, sacer, sacra, sacrum sacred : 



140 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

vox prima the first word est is mas masculine, altera the 
second foemina is feminine, tertia the third neutrum is 
neuter. 

Obs. 1. At but sunt there are some adjectives, quse 
which vocares you may call prope almost substantiva 
substantives flexu by their declining ; tamen yet reperta 
they are found to be adjectiva adjectives natura by nature 
uie and usu by custom. Talia such sunt are pauper 
poor, puber ripe of age, cum with degener degenerate, 
uber fruitful, et and dives rich, locuples ivealthy, sospes 
safe, conjunge join superstes surviving, cum with pau- 
cis aliis a few others quee which lectio justa a due read- 
ing docebit will teach. 

Obs. 2. Haec these adjectives gaudent like adsciscere 
to take sibi to themselves proprium quendam flexum a 
certain peculiar ivay of declining ; campester champaign, 
voliicer swift, celeber famous, celer speedy, atque and 
saluber wholesome : junge join pedester belonging to a 
footman, equester belonging to a horseman, et and acer 
sharp : junge join paluster marshy, atque and alacer 
cheerful, Sylvester woody. At but tu you variabis shall 
decline hsec these adjectives sic thus : Rectus let the nomi- 
native case sit be triplex threefold, celer (masculine), et 
and celeris {feminine), celere {neuter) : aut or sic thus, 
celeris let celeris sit be commune duum the common of 
two genders, et and celere let celere be neutrum neuter 
tibi/or you. 



141 



NOUNS HETEROCLITE, OR IRREGULAR, 
CONSTRUED. 



QU^E those nouns which variant change genus their 
gender aut or fiexum declension, qusecunque and whatso- 
ever nouns novato ritu after a new manner deficiunt fall 
short ve or superant exceed in declining, dices you shall 
call Heteroclita Heteroclites, or nouns irregular. 

Cernis you see hasc these nouns variantia varying 
partim in part genus their gender ac and fiexum their 
declining. Pergamus the city of Troy gignit makes Per- 
gama, in plurali numero in the plural number. Prior 
numerus the singular number dat gives his to these nouns 
neutrum genus the neuter gender, alter the -plural utrum- 
que both masculine and neuter ; rastrum a rake, cum 
with freno the bit of a bridle, filum a thread, simul 
atque at the same time also capistrum a halter. Item 
also Argos a town in Greece, et and coelum heaven, 
sunt are neutra neuters singula in the singular number ; 
sed but audi observe, vocitabis you shall say coclos et 
and Argos in the plural number mascula are masculines 
duntaxat only : sed but frena neuter et and frenos mas- 
culine ; quo pacto after which manner formant they 
form et also cetera the rest. 

Pluralis numerus the plural number solet is wont ad- 
dere to add his to these genus utrumque both genders ; 
sibilus a hissing, atque and jocus sport, locus a place. 
Jungas you may join his to these quoque also plurima 
very many nouns. 



142 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Propago the stocky qure which sequitur follows, est 25 
manca defective casu in case, ve or numero in number. 

QjJM nouns whic h variant vary nullum casum no case — 
ut as, fas divine law, nil nothing, nihil nothing, instar 
likeness ; et and pondo a pound weight, mane the morn- 
ing, et and nequam worthless, quoque also semis a half 
cepe an onion; et and multa many nouns in u ending 
in \x, simul also in i ; veluti as, que both cornu a horn 
que and genu a knee ; et and gummi gum, frugi thrifty ; 
sic so Tempe a pleasant vale in Thessaly, tot so many, 
quot how many, et and omnes numeros all nouns of 
number a tribus from three ad centum to a hundred, 
— vocabis you shall call Aptota Aptotes. 

Que and nomen a noun cui to which vox una a single 
case cadit falls, est is Monoptoton a Monoptote ; ceu as, 
noctu by night, natu by birth, jussu by order, injussu 
without order, simul also astu by craft, promptu in 
readiness, permissu with leave, nauci a thing of no value, 
dicis for form's sake, que and inficias a denial ; et and 
ambage a winding, compede a fetter, fauce the jaw, integra 
which are complete plurali in the plural number. 

Sunt those nouns are called Diptota Diptotes, quibus 
to vihich duplex flexura two cases remansit have re- 
mained ; ut as, fors chance dabit will make forte sexto in 
the ablative case, quoque also spontis of choice sponte ; 
et and jugeris an acre dat makes jugere sexto in the 
ablative case ; autem and verberis a stripe verbere : 
quoque also suppetiaB aid dant makes suppetias quarto 
in the accusative case; sic so repetundarum illegal ex- 
actions repetundis : vesper the evening vespere, visceris 
the entrails viscere, impetis an assault impete. Verbere 
cum with viscere, jugere, servant retain totum pluralem 
numerum the plural number entire. 



NOUNS IRREGULAR CONSTRUED. 143 

VoCANTUR nouns are called Triptota Triptotes, qui- 
bus in toliich inflectis you decline tres casus three cases : 
sic so est it is opis nostras in our poicer, legis you read 
fer opem bring assistance, at que and dignus worthy ope 
of help : flecte decline preci prayer, atque and precem, 
et and prece : sic so, vicis a turn, format forms et both 
vice atque and vicem. Numerus alter the plural number 
semper datur is always given omnibus his to all these 
nouns. Tantundem just so much recipit takes primum 
the nominative, quartum the accusative, que and secun- 
dum the genitive : et and grates thanks reposcit demands 
primum the nominative, quartum the accusative, que and 
quintum the vocative. 

H^C these nouns carent are without primo the nomi- 
native, que and quinto the vocative, frugis fruit, ditionis 
ride : quoque also plus more habet has pluris in the geni- 
tive, plus, quarto in the accusative, que and plure, sexto 
in the ablative : vox the word vis force est is integra 
entire, nisi unless forte perhaps dativus the dative case 
desit be wanting ; attamen but haac these nouns semper 
always sunt are integra entire plurali in the plural 
tibi for you. Sunt these are integra entire, noster our, 
vester your ; necnon also meus mine et and tu you ; 
cetera cuncta pronomina all the other pronouns carent 
are without quinto casu the vocative case. 

Notes you may observe propria cuncta that all proper 
names nolle fieri are not made pluralia of the plural 
number. Quin moreover alia non pauca several other 
words abjiciunt reject numerum secundum the plural 
number ex sensu from their meaning aut or usu from 
custom ; quae which est is maxima norma the principal 
rule loquendi of speaking. 

Mascula these masculines sunt are contenta confined 



144 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

nuinero secundo to the plural number tantum only ; 
manes ghosts, majores ancestors, cancelli lattices, liberi 
children, et and antes the rows of vines, lendes nits, 
et and lemiires spectres, simul also fasti annals, atque 
and minores posterity, natales cum when assignant it 
signifies genus an extraction : adde add penates house- 
hold gods, et and loca names of places pluraii of the plural 
number, quales as que both Gabii a city in Italy que and 
Locri a city of Italy, et and quaecunque whatever nouns 
similis rationis of like nature legas you may read passim 
in various places. 

Haec these nouns sunt are fceminei generis of the 
feminine gender, que and numeri secundi of the plural 
number ; deliciae delight, exuviae any thing stript off from 
the body que and phalerae horse-trappings, manubiae the 
spoils of war, et and idus the ides of a month, antiae a 
fore-lock, et and indueiae a truce, simul also que both 
insidiae an ambush, que and niinaa threats, excubiae watch 
by day or night, nonae the nones of a month, nugae trifles, 
que and tricae toys, calendar the calends of a month, 
quisquiliae the sweepings or refuse of any thing, thermae 
a hot bath, cunae a cradle, dirae curses, que and exequiae 
funeral rites, feriae holidays, et and inferiae sacrifices 
performed to the dead, sic so que both primitiae the first 
fruits of the year, que and plagae, signantes signifying 
retia nets, et and valvse folding doors, que and divitiae 
riches, item also nuptiae a marriage, et and lactes the 
small guts : Thebae Thebes et and Athenae Athens ad- 
dantur may be added ; quod genus of which sort invenias 
you may find et also nomina plura more names locorum 
of places, 

Haec neutra these nouns neuter pluralia of the plural 
number leguntur are read rarius very seldom primo in the 
singular ; mcenia the walls of a city, cum with tesquis 
rough and desert places, praecordia the midriff of the 
body, lustra the dens ferarum of wild beasts, arma arms, 
mapalia Numidian cottages, sic so bellaria sweetmeats, 
munia an office or charge, castra a camp ; funus a funeral 



NOUNS IRREGULAR CONSTRUED. 145 

petit requires just a solemnities, et and virgo a virgin 
petit requires sponsalia espousals ; disertus an eloquent 
man amat loves rostra the pulpit, que and pueri children 
gestant carry crepundia rattles, que and infantes infants 
colunt cunabula lie in cradles ; augur a soothsayer con- 
sulit consults exta the entrails, et and absolvensfi?iishing 
his sacrifice superis to the gods above recantat chants over 
effata their decrees : festa the feasts deum of the gods, 
ceu as Bacchanalia feasts dedicated to Bacchus, poterunt 
will be able jungi to be joined ; quodsi and if leges 
you shall read pltira more, licet reponas you may place 
them quoque also hac classe in this class. 

IL&C these nouns sunt are simul at the same time et 
both quarti of the fourth atque and secundi flexus the 
second declension ; enim for laurus a laurel, facit makes 
genitivo in the genitive case lauri, et and laurus : sic so 
quercus an oak, pinus a pine-tree, ficus, pro for fructu a 
fig ac and arbore the tree, sic so colus a distaff, atque and 
penus provisions, cornus quando when habetur it signifies 
arbor a tree ; sic so lacus a lake, atque and domus a 
house: licet although hsec these nee recurrant are not 
found ubique in every case. Leges you will read quoque 
also plura more his than these, quae which jure relinquas 
you may well leave priscis to the ancients. 



H 



146 

THE RULES FOR VERBS 

CONSTRUED. 



As in prsesenti a verb making as in the present tense 
format forms perfectum the preterperfect tense in avi : 
ut as, no nas to swim navi, vocito vocitas to call often 
vocitavi. 

Excipias except plico to fold, quod which facit makes 
plicui atque and plicavi ; et and neco to slay, quod 
which raro seldom makes necui 3 sed but s^epe often necavi. 
Sic so seco to cut, quod which dat makes secui, mico 
to glitter, quod which makes micui, verbum the verb frico 
to rub, quod which makes fricui, domo to tame, quod 
which makes domui, tono to thunder, quod which makes 
tonui. Sic so sono to sound sonui, sic so veto to forbid 
vetui, sic so crepo to crackle fit is made crepui, atque and 
cubo to lie along cubui : lavo to wash dat makes lavi, et 
tfwdjuvo to help juvi. Do das to give vult wz7Z formare 
form rite 5y custom dedi, sto stas to stand steti. 



Es in prsesenti # verb making es hi £Ae present tense 
format forms perfectum the preterperfect fans making ui: 
sic so moneo mones to advise dat makes monui ; necnon 
also tumeo tumes to swell tumiii. 

Haec these verbs sedeo to sit, video to see, cum with 
prandeo to eftrae, strideo to creak, dant ???«£e di. 

Syllaba prima the first syllable his quatuor 0/* these four 
infra, following geminatur is doubled: nam que /br pendeo 
to Aaray rfo^w vult will habere have pependi, que and 
mordeo to bite momordi, spondeo to betroth vult toiH 
have spopondi, que and tondeo to clip totondi. 



RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 147 

Si if 1 vel or r stet stand ante before geo> geo vertitur 
is changed in si into si ; ut as, urgeo to urge ursi, mul- 
geo to milk mulsi, fulgeo to shine falsi. 

Ardeo to burn, torqueo to twist, mulceo to stroke, 
h^ereo to stick, suadeo to advise, item also rideo to laugh , 
et and maneo to remain, dant make prceteritum the 
preterperfect tense per si by si ; jubeo to command makes 
jussi. 

Sorbeo to sup up habet has sorbui, quoque also sorpsi ; 
luceo to shine habet has luxi, frigeo to be cold frixi, lugeo 
to bewail luxi, et and augeo to increase auxi. 

Fleo fles to weep dat makes flevi, pleo pies to fill 
plevi, neo to spin nevi. Antiquum the obsolete verb leo to 
anoint format forms sibi for itself compositis in its com- 
pounds levi. 

Veo fit is made vi: ut as, moveo to move movi, 
quoque also foveo to cherish fovi. Niveo to blink with 
the eyes habet has nivi et and nixi, que and vieo to bind 
vievi. 



Tertia the third conjugation formabit will form 
prseteritum the preterperfect tense ut as manifestum is 
shown hie here. 

Bo fit is made bi : ut as, lambo to lick Iambi. Exeipe 
except scribo to write scripsi, et and nubo to be married 
nupsi. Antiquum the old verb cumbo to lie down dat 
makes cubui. 

Co fit is made ci : ut as, vinco to overcome vici. Parco 
to spare vult will have peperci, vix seldom parsi ; dico to 
say dixi, quoque also duco to lead duxi. 

Do fit is made di : ut as, mando to eat mandi : sed 
but scindo to cut dat makes scidi, findo to cleave fidi, 
fundo to pour out fudi, que and tundo to pound tutiidi. 
Rudo to bray like an ass dat makes rudivi ; pendo to 
weigh, facit makes pependi, tendo to bend tetendi, cedo 
to yield cessi, cado to fall cecidi, caedo to cut or slay 
eecidi. Vado to go, rado to shave, lredo to hurt, ludo 

H 2 



148 LATIN GKAMMAR. 

to play, divido to divide, trudo to thrust, claudo to shut, 
plaudo to clap hands, rodo to gnaw, ex do from do 
semper faciunt always make si. 

Go fit is made xi : ut as jungo to join junxi : sed hut 
r the letter r ante before go, vult will have si; ut as, 
spargo to sprinkle sparsi ; lego to read legi, et and ago 
to act facit makes egi. Tanox> to touch dat makes tetigi. 
pungo to prick reddit gives tibi to you pupiigi. Frango 
to break dat makes fregi, pango for paciscor to covenant 
yult will have pepigi ; etiam also pango to fasten pegi, 
sed but usus custom maluit had rather form panxi. 

Ho fit is made xi : ceu as, traho to draw traxi docet 
shows, et and veho to carry vexi. 

Lo fit is made ui : ceu as, colo to till dat makes colui ; 
ceu as molo to grind in a mill molui. Sallo to season 
with salt facit makes salli, sic so psallo to play on an 
instrument makes psalli. Velio to pluck dat tibi makes 
for you velli et and vulsi ; pello to drive away pepiili, 
fallo to deceive fefelli. 

Mo fit is made ui : ut as, vomo to vomit. Sed but 
emo to buy dat makes emi 5 premo to press dat makes 
pressi. 

No fit is made vi : ceu as, sino to suffer sivi. 
Excipe except temno to contemn tempsi ; sterno to strew 
dat makes stravi, sperno to despise sprevi, lino to smear 
over levi, et and, interdum sometimes livi ; jungas you 
may join quoque also cerno to decree crevi. Gigno to 
beget, pono to put, cano to sing, dant make geniii 5 posui^ 
cecini. 

Po fit is made psi : ut as scalpo to scratch scalpsi ; 
quoque also carpo to pluck carpsi. Excipias you ?nay 
except ruinpo to break rupi ; strepo to make a noise, 
quod which dat makes strepui. 

Quo fit is made qui : ut as linquo to leave natis in its 
derivatives liqui ; at but coquo to cook or dress meat 
coxi. 

Ro fit is made vi : ceu as sero, pro for planto to plant 
et and semino to sow, sevi, quod which signans signifying 



RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 149 

ordmo to set in order dabit will make semper always me- 
lius rather serui. Verro to brush vult icill have verri, 
uro to burn vult will have ussi, gero to bear gessi, quaero 
to seek quaesivi, tero to rub or bruise trivi, curro'fo run 
cucurri. 

So format forms sivi, velut as arcesso to send for 
arcessivi. At but viso to go to see habet has visi, pinso 
to pound pinsuij quoque also pinsi. 

Sco fit is made vi, ut as pasco to feed cattle pavi, 
atque and quiesco to rest quievi. Sed but disco to learn 
formabit will form didici 5 posco to require poposci. 

To fit is made ti : ut as verto to turn verti ; sed but 
sisto to make to stand, dat makes stiti. Mitto to send dat 
makes misi, peto to ask vult will formare form petivi ; 
sterto to snore habet has stertiii, meto to mow messui. 
Exi fit is made ab from eeto : ut as flecto to bend flexi. 
Necto to knit dat makes nexui, habetque and also has 
nexi ; etiam also pecto to comb dat makes pexiii, habet 
it has quoque also pexi. 

Vo fit is made vi : ut as volvo to roll volvi : excipe 
except vivo to live vixi. 

Xo fit is made ui : ut as texo to weave, quod which 
habebit will have texui, monstrat shews. 

Cio fit is made ci : ut as facio to do feci ; quoque als^ 
jacio to cast jeci: antiquum the obsolete verb lacio to 
allure lexi, quoque also specio to behold spexi. 

Dio fit is made di : ut as fodio to dig fodi. 

Gio is made gi : ceu as fugio to flee fugi. 

Pio fit is made pi : ut as capio £0 fale cepi ; excipe 
except cupio to desire cuplvi, et and rapio to snatch rapui 3 
sapio to savour or taste sapui, atque and sapivi. 

Rio fit is made ri : ut as pario to bring forth young 
peperi. 

Tio is made ssi, ut as composita the compounds kfrom 
quatio to shake reddent will form tibi for you : quassi, 
haud reperitur is not found usu in use. 

Denique finally uo, fit is made ui : ut as statuo to 

H 3 



150 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

erect statui. Pluo to rain format forms pluvi, sive or 
plui ; sed but struo to build makes struxi, fluo to flow 
fluxi. 



Quarta the fourth conjugation dat is makes is in the 
present tense, ivi in the perfect : ut as scio scis to know 
scivi, monstrat tibi shews you. Veneo to be sold format 
forms venivij quoque also venio to come veni : raucio to 
be hoarse rausi, farcio to stuff farsi, sarcio to patch sarsi, 
sepio to hedge sepsi, sentio to perceive sensi, fulcio to 
prop falsi, item also haurio to draw hausi, sancio to es- 
tablish sanxi, vincio to bind vinxi. Amicire let amicio 
to clothe notetur be marked formans forming praeteritum 
the perfect tense per ui in ui. Salio, pro for salto to 
leap, gives salui, salii, atque and salivi. 



Simplex the simple verb et and compositivum its 
compound dat makes idem prasterituni the same preter- 
perfect tense : ut as docui / have taught, edocui i" have 
taught perfectly monstrat shews. Sed but syllaba the 
syllable, quam which simplex the simple verb semper al- 
ways geminat doubles, non geminatur is not doubled 
composto in the compound; attamen yet excipiantur 
let there be excepted, excurro to run out, cum with prae- 
curro to run before, atque and rite creata verbs rightly 
formed, a from do to give, disco to learn, sto to stand, posco 
to require. 

Compositum a verb compounded a of plico to fold cum 
with sub, vel or nomine a noun, ut as ista these, supplico 
to beseech, multiplico to multiply, gaudet will formare 
form plicavi ; applico to apply, complico to fold up, re- 
plico to fold back, or lay open, et and explico to unfold, 
formant make quoque also ui. 

Quamvis although simplex the simple verb oleo to 
smell of\\At will have o\\x\, tamen yet quodvis composi- 
tum every compound verb inde thereof formabit will form 



RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 151 

melius rather olevi ; at but redolet to cast a scent sequi- 
tur follows formam the form simplicis of the simple verb, 
que and subolet to smell a little. 

Omnia composita all verbs compounded a of pungo 
to prick formabunt will form punxi ; unum one repungo 
to prick again vult will have repupiigi, interdumque and 
sometimes repunxi. 

Ex natis of verbs derived ab from emo, como to dress 
the hair vult will fingere form compsi, demo to take 
away dempsi, promo to draw forth prompsi, que and 
sumo to take sumpsi. 

Natum a compound a of do to give, quando when est 
it is inflexio tertia the third conjugation — ut as addo to 
add, credo to believe, edo to set forth, dedo to yield up, 
reddo to restore, perdo to lose, abdo to hide, vel or obdo 
to set against, condo to build, indo to put in, trado to de- 
liver, prodo to betray, vendo to sell — makes didi : at but 
unum one, abscondo to hide makes abscondi. Natum a 
compound a of sto stas to stand habebit will have stiti. 



Verba haec simplieia these simple verbs, si if compo- 
nantur they are compounded, mutant change vocalem pri- 
mam the first vowel prassentis of the present tense que 
and prseteriti of the preterperfect tense, in e into e ; damno 
to condemn, lacto to suckle, sacro to dedicate, fallo to de- 
ceive, arceo to drive away, tracto to handle, fatiscor to be 
weary, vetus the old word cando to burn, capto to catch 
at, jacto to throw, patior to suffer, que and gradior to 
step, partio to divide, carpo to crop, patro to achieve or 
finish, scando to climb, spargo to sprinkle ; que and pario 
to bring forth young ; cujus duo nata whose two com- 
pounds, comperit to know for certain et and reperit to 
find, dant make the preterperfect tense per i i n i ; sed but 
csetera the rest per ui in ui ; velut as haec these, aperire 
to open, operire to cover. 

Praeterea besides hsec duo composta let these two com- 

H 4 



152 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

pounds a o/pasco pavi to feed cattle, compesco to pasture 
together, dispesco to drive from pasture, notentur be ob- 
served habere to make tantum only pescui ; at but depasco 
to feed down, servabit ivill keep sibi for itself usum the 
use simplicis of the simple verb. 



H^c these verbs, habeo to have, lateo to lie hid, salio 
to leap, statuo to erect, cado to fall, lsedo to hurt, et and 
tango to touch, atque and cano to sing, sic so qusero to 
seek, casdo cecidi to cut or slay, sic so egeo to want, teneo 
to hold, taceo to be silent, sapio to savour, que and rapio 
to snatch, si if componantur they are compounded, mutant 
change vocalem primarn the first vowel in i into i ; ut as, 
rapio to snatch rapui, eripio to snatch away from eripui. 
Natum a compound a of cano to sing dat makes prseteri- 
tum the preterperfect tense per ui in ui ; ceu as, concmo 
to sing in concert concinui. Sic so displiceo to dis- 
please a from placeo to please : sed but haec duo these 
two compounds, complaceo to please cum with perplaceo 
to please very much, bene servant always keep usum the 
usage simplicis of the simple verb. 

Composita the compounds a of verbis the verbs calco 
to tread, salto to leap or dance, mutant change a per u, a 
into u ; conculco to tread upon, inculco to tread in, re- 
sulto to rebound, demonstrant shew id that tibi to you. 

Composita the compounds a of claudo to shut, quatio 
to shake, lavo to wash, rejiciunt a cast away a : occludo 
to shut against, excludo to shut out, a from claudo to 
shut, docet teaches id that ; que and percutio to strike, 
excutio to strike out, a from quatio to shake ; a from lavo 
to wash, nata the compounds proluo to wash out, diluo to 
wash away. 

Si if componas you compound hsec these verbs, ago to 
act, emo to take, sedeo to sit, rego to ride, frango to 
break, et and capio to take, jacio to cast, lacio to allure, 
specio to behold, premo to press, pango to fasten, mutant 



RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 153 

they change sibi for themselves vocalem primam the first 
vowel praesentis of the 'present tense in i into i, nunquam 
never praeteriti of the perfect tense : ceu as of frango to 
break, refringo to break open makes refregi ; incipio to 
begin incepi, a of capio to take. Sed but pauca let a few 
notentur be marked ; namque for perago to finish sequi- 
tur follows suuni simplex its simple verb, que and satago 
to be busy about ; atque and ab from ago to act, dego 
to live dat makes degi, cogo to bring together coegi; 
sic so a from rego to rule, pergo to go forward makes 
perrexi ; quoque also surgo to rise vult will have surrexi ; 
media syllaba the middle syllable praesentis of the present 
tense adempta being taken away. A from lacio, elicio to 
entice forth elicui is the perfect tense : caetera the rest 
dant form lexi. 

Ista quatuor composita these four compound verbs a 
o/*pango to fix or fasten retinent a keep a; depango to fix 
in the ground, oppango to fasten against, circumpango to 
fasten about, atque and repango to fasten again. 

Facio to do variat changes nil nothing, nisi unless prae- 
posito praeeunte a preposition goes before : olfacio to 
smell out docet teaches id that, cum with calfacio to make 
hot, que and inficio to infect. 

Nata the compounds a of lego to read, re, per, pra?, 
sub, trans, ad, praeeunte going before, servant keep vo- 
calem the vowel praesentis of the present tense ; caetera 
the rest mutant change it in i into i; de quibus of 
which haec these tantum only, intelligo to understand, 
diligo to love, negligo to neglect, faciunt make praeteritum 
their preterperfect tense lexi ; reliqua omnia all the rest 
legi. 



Nunc now discas you may learn formare to form su- 
pinum the supine ex praeterito jfrom the perfect tense. 

Bi sumit takes sibi to itself turn : namque for sic so 
bibi to drink fit is made bibitum. 



154 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Ci fit is made ctum : ut as vici to conquer victum 
testatur shews, et and ici to strike dans making ictum, 
feci to do factum, quoque also jeci to cast j actum. Sed 
but parco peperci to spare vult will have sibi for itself 
parsum, item also parcitum. 

Di fit is made sum : ut as vidi to see visum. Quaa- 
dam some geminant s double s ; ut as pandi to open pas- 
sum, sedi to sit sessum, adde add scidi to cut quod which 
dat makes scissum, atque and fidi to cleave fissum, quo- 
que also fodi to dig fossum. 

Syllaba the {first) syllable praeteriti of the perfect tense 
saepe geminatur is often doubled, autem but non not supi- 
nis in the supines : tetendi to bend format forms tensum 
que and tentum, tutudi to bruise or pound tunsum, cecidi 
to fall casum, atque and cecidi to cut or slay csesum ; junge 
join dedi to give habens having datum, que and momordi 
to bite morsum. 

Gi fit is made ctum : ut as legi to read lectum ; pegi 
to fasten que and pepigi to covenant dant make pactum, 
fregi to break fractum, quoque also tetigi to touch tac- 
tum, egi to act actum, pupiigi to prick punctum ; fugi 
to flee dat makes fugitum. 

Li fit is made sum : ut as pepuli to drive away pul- 
sum, cui to which junge join fefelli to deceive dans mak- 
ing falsum, velli to pluck vulsum. At but tuli to bear 
habet has sibi for itself latum. 

Mi, ni, pi, qui, formant form turn, velut as manifes- 
tum is manifest hie here : emi to buy emptum, veni to 
come ventum, cecini a from cano to sing cantum, et and 
cepi to take captum, quoque also coepi to begin antiquis 
with the ancients coeptum ; et and rupi to break makes 
ruptum ; quoque also liqui to leave in natis in its com- 
pounds lictum. 

Ei fit is made sum : ut as verri to brush versum. Ex- 
cipe except peperi to bring forth young partum. 

Si fit is made sum : ut as visi to go to see visum. 
Tamen but misi to send formabit will form missum, s 
geminato s being doubled. Excipe except fulsi to prop 



RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 155 

fultum, hausi to draw haustum, sarsi to patch sartum, 
quoque also farsi to stuff fartum, ussi to burn ustum, 
gessi to bear gestum ; quoque also torsi to twist postulat 
requires tortum ; sic so indulsi to indulge quserit seeks 
sibi for itself indultum. 

Psi, fit is made ptum : ut as scripsi to write scriptum : 
quoque also sculpsi to engrave sculptum. 

Ti, fit is made turn: namque/or steti, a from sto to 
stand, que and stiti, a from sisto to make to stand, ambo 
both rite correctly dant make statum. Tamen yet ex- 
cipe except verti to turn versum. 

Vi, fit is made turn : ut as flavi to blow flatum : ex- 
cipe except pavi to feed cattle pastum. Lavi to wash dat 
makes lotum, interdum sometimes lautum, atque and la- 
vatum ; potavi to drink facit makes potum, interdum 
sometimes et also potatum ; sed but favi to favour makes 
fautum, cavi to beware cautum. A from sero sevi to sow 
rite formes you may form correctly satum, livi que and, 
levi to besmear dant make litum ; solvi a from solvo to 
loosen solutum, volvi a from volvo to roll volutum ; sin- 
gultivi to sob vult will have singultum, veneo venis 
venivi to be sold venum, sepelivi to bury rite correctly 
sepultum. 

Quod a verb that dat makes m, dat makes itum ; ut 
as domui to tame domitum. Excipe except quodvis ver- 
bum every verb in uo, quia because semper formabit it 
will always make ui in utum, ui into utum : ut as exiii to 
put off exiitum : deme except rui, a from ruo to rush, 
dans making ruitum. Secui to cut vult will have sectum, 
necui to slay nectum, que and fricui to rub frictum, item 
also miscui to mingle mistum, et and amicui to clothe dat 
makes amictum ; torrui to roast habet has tostum, do- 
cui to teach doctum, que and tenui to hold tentum, eon- 
sului to consult consultum, alui to feed altum, que and 
alitum ; sic so salui to leap saltum, colui to till quoque 
also occului to hide, cultum ; pinsui to pound or grind 
habet has pinsum et and pistum ; rapui to snatch vult 
will have sibi /or itself raptum, serui to set in order ser- 
n 6 



156 X^ATIN GBAMMAR. 

turn, sic so quoque also texui to weave habet has tex- 
tum. 

Censui to judge habet has eensum, sic so messui to 
mow habet has quoque also messum ; item also nexui to 
fasten nexum, sic so pexui to comb habebit will have 
pexum. 

Xi fit is made ctuni : ut as vinxi to bind vinctum. 
Quinque jive abjiciunt n cast away n ; ut as finxi to 
form or fashion fictum, minxi to make water mictuin, ad- 
jice add pinxi to paint dans giving pictum, strinxi to 
bind fast strictum, quoque also rinxi tb grin rictum. 
Sancio sanxi to establish formabit will form sancitum et 
and sanctum. 

Flexi to bend, plexi to twist, fixi to fasten, dant make 
xum ; et and fluo to flow fluxum. 



Quodqtie compositum supinum every compound su- 
pine formatur is formed ut as simplex the simple supine, 
quanrvis although eadem syllaba the same syllable non 
stet does not continue semper always utrique to them both. 

Composita the compounds a of tunsum to pound, n 
dempta the letter n being taken away, make tusum; a of rui- 
tum to rush, i media the middle letter i dempta being taken 
away, fit is made rutum ; et and quoque also a of saltum 
to leap sultum. Composta the compounds a of sero 
(to sow), quando when format it forms saturm dant make 
situm. 

Hsec these supines, cap turn to take, factum to do, j ac- 
tum to cast, raptum to snatch, mutant a per e change a 
into e ; et and cantum to sing, partum to bring forth 
young, sparsum to scatter, quoque also carptum to crop, 
fartum to stuff. 

Verbum the verb edo to eat compositum being com- 
pounded non facit does not make estum, sed but esum ; 
unum one duntaxat only, comedo to eat up, formabit will 
form utrumque both. 

A. from nosco to know duo these two compounds tantum 
only, cognitum to know et and agnitum to acknowledge, 



RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 157 

habentur are found; caetera the rest dant make notum : 
noscitura, jam now est is nullo in usu not in use. 



Verba in or verhs ending in or admittunt take pras- 
teritum their perfect tense ex posteriore supino from 
the latter supine, u verso u being turned per us into us, 
et and sum, vel or fui, consociato being added ; ut as a 
of lectu to be read lectus sum, vel or fui, I have been 
read. At but horum of these verbs nunc sometimes est 
there is deponens a deponent, nunc sometimes est there is 
commune a common one notandum to be noted. 

Labor to glide dat makes lapsus ; patior to suffer dat 
makes passu s ; at but ejus natum its compound perpetior 
to endure perpessus ; fateor to own dat makes fassus, sed 
but confiteor to confess confessus ; gradior to step vult 
will have gressus, sic so digredior to step aside digressus ; 
jungas you may join quoque also defetiscor to be wearied 
out defessus sum, metior to measure mensus, et and utor 
to use usus. 

Ordior to begin raro seldom makes orditus, sed but sgepius 
very often orsus. Nitor to strive nisus, vel or nixus sum, 
et and ulciscor to avenge ultus, simul also irascor to be 
angry iratus, atque and reor to suppose ratus sum, obli- 
viscor to forget vult will have oblitus sum, fruor to enjoy 
optat chooses fructus vel or fruitus ; junge add mise- 
reri to have pity misertus atque and miseritus. Anti- 
quum the obsolete verb tuor to defend, et and tueor 
to defend make tuitus sum. Adde add locutus a from 
loquor to speak, et and adde add secutus a from sequor 
to follow. Experior to try facit makes expertus sum ; 
sed but opperior to wait for legitur is read reddens 
forming oppertus et and opperitus ; paciscor to make a 
bargain gaudet will formare form pactus sum, nanciscor 
to get nactus, apiscor to obtain, quod which est is vetus 
verbum an obsolete verb, aptus sum, unde from whence 
adipiscor to get adeptus. 



158 LATIN GRAMMAR, 

Junge add queror to complain questus, junge add 
proficiscor to set out profectus, expergiscor to awaken 
experrectus sum ; et and quoque also hasc these, com- 
miniscor to devise commentus, nascor to be horn natus, 
que and morior to die mortuus, atque and orior to rise, 
quod which facit makes praeteritum its preterperfect tense 
ortus. 



ELec these verbs habent have prseteritum a perfect 
tense active of the active et and passivse vocis of the 
passive form : nubo to be married nupsi, que and nupta 
sum, placeo to please dat makes placui, et and placitus ; 
et and licet it is lawful makes licuit, licitum ; adde add 
libet it pleases, quod which makes libiiit, libitum ; atque 
and pudet it shames puduit, que and puditum : ta^det it 
wearies makes tsediiit, at but ssspius more frequently per- 
taesurn, atque and junge join piget it grieves quod which 
tibi format forms for you piguit, que and pigitum. 



Neutro-PASSIVUM a neuter-passive verb format tibi 
forms for you praeteritum its perfect tense sic thus ; gau- 
deo to be glad gavisus sum, fido to trust fisus, et and 
audeo to dare ausus sum, fio to be made factus, soleo to 
be wont solitus sum. 



Qusedam verba some verbs accipiunt take praeteritum 
their perfect tense aliunde from another source. Incep- 
tivum a verb inceptive in sco, stans standing pro prima- 
rio for its primitive, adoptat takes praeteritum the perfect 
tense ejus of it : tepesco to begin to be warm vult will for- 
maxeform tepui. 

Ferveo to be hot dat makes ferbui, et and furo to rage 
insanivi ; tollo to lift up habet has sustiili ; ferio to 
strike postulat requires percussi ; ferior to be struck, 
ictus sum ; vescor to eat, vult will have edi ; meio to 



RULES FOR VERBS CONSTRUED. 159 

make water minxi ; sisto to stand fit is made steti ; sum 
to be habet has fui; fero to bear rite by custom dat makes 
tuli. 

Meditativa omnia all meditatives fugiunt want prceteri- 
tum the perfect tense, praeter except parturio to be in labour, 
esurio to be hungry: atque and inceptiva inceptives, ut as 
puerasco to grow toward childhood ; et and passiva verbs 
passive quibus activa whose actives caruere were without 
supinis supines, ut as timeor to be feared, poscor to be 
required. Etiam also fugiunt these want it : — hisco to 
gape, fatisco to chink ; adde add renideo to glitter, calveo 
to be bald, caneo to be grey, flaveo to be yellow, glisco to 
grow up, humeo to be damp, fceteo to stink, liveo to be 
black and blue, moereo to be sad, polleo to be powerful, 
vergo to bend, squaleo to be dirty ; sic so aveo to desire 
fugit wants a perfect, immineo to overhang, que and 
clueo to be called; ambigo to doubt ; sic so hebeo to be 
dull, scateo to gush forth, yegeo to be lively, que and cieo 
to rouse : sic so fugiunt these want the perfect : — salio 
meaning sale condio to season with salt, frendeo, frendo 
to gnash the teeth. Queis and to these jungas you may 
add, etiam also, medeor to heal, liquor to be melted, remi- 
niscor to remember. 



Qusecunque whatever verbs carent are without prsete- 
rito a perfect tense sunt are cassa without supinis supines. 
Sed but frendo to gnash the teeth makes fressum ; salio to 
salt salsum, atque and salitum. 

Hasc verba these verbs raro seldom aut or nunquma 
never retinebunt will have supinum a supine : lambo to 
lick, mico to glitter, sapio to taste, rudo to bray like an 
ass, fulgeo to glitter, turgeo to swell, sterto to snore, dis- 
pesco to drive from pasture, posco to require, compesco 
to restrain, sternuo to sneeze, disco to learn, dego to live, 
ango to throttle, scabo to scratch, item likewise preecello 
to surpass, antecello to surpass, excello to surpass, que 



160 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

and satago to be busy about, psallo to -play on an instru- 
ment, volo to be witting, nolo to be unwilling, roalo to be 
more willing, tremo to tremble, strideo strido to creak, 
incesso to attack, ningo to snow, conniveo to wink, fer- 
veo fervo to be hot: coniposita compounds a ofmio to 
nod: at as, renuo to refuse: a of cado to fall; ut as 
accido to fall upon ; prater except occido to fall down, 
quod which facit makes oceasurm que and recido to 
fall back recasum, queis to which etiam also conjun- 
gas you may join incido to fall into fornians forming in- 
easuin : respuo to refuse, item likewise linquo to leave, 
furo to be mad, sic so, luo to wash, frigeo to be cold, pos- 
sum to be able, et and, paveo to dread, timeo to fear : sic 
so luceo to shine; et and arceo to drive away, cujus 
composita whose compounds habent have ercitum ; sic so 
ingruo to rush upon, congruo to accord; et and qusecunque 
neutra verba whatever neuter verbs secundse of the second 
conjugation formantur are formed in ui in ui: excipias j/<9& 
may except, oleo to smell of doleo to be in pain, placeo to 
please, que and taceo to be silent, pareo to obey, item 
also careo to be without, noceo to hurt, jaceo to lie down, 
que and lateo to lie hid, et also valeo to be strong, caleo 
to be hot; namque for hsec these verbs gaudent supino 
have the supine. 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 161 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 



1. Verbum personale a verb personal concordat agrees 
cum nominativo with its nominative case numero in 
number et and persona in person : ut as, Via the way ad 
bonos mores to good manners est is nunquam never sera 
too late. 

2. Nominativus the nominative case pronominum of 
pronouns plerumque/br the most -part omittitur is omitted: 
ut as, Fertur he is reported designasse to have committed 
atrocia flagitia horrid crimes : ille he omittitur is omitted. 

Vero but quum when exprimitur it is expressed deno- 
tat it signifies distinctionem distinction aut or emphasin 
emphasis : ut as, Vos you damnastis have condemned me : 
id est that is, vos you, et and non alii not others. Tu 
you es are patronus our patron, tu you parens our father, 
si if tu deseris you forsake us, periimus we are undone : 
id est that is, praecipue especially, et and prse aliis be- 
yond others tu you are, Sfc. 

3. Verbum infinitum a verb of the infinitive mood aut 
or oratio a number of words est is aliquando sometimes 
nominativus the nominative case verbo to a verb; ut as, 
Mentiri to lie non est is not meum my custom. Parum 
animi little spirit putabatur was supposed esse to be in eo 
in him. 

4. Verbum a verb positum placed inter between 
duos nominativos two nominative cases diversorum nu- 
merorum of different numbers potest may concordare 
agree cum with alterutro either of them ; ut as, Irse 
the quarrels amantium of lovers est is integratio the re- 



162 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

newal amoris of love. Pectus her breast quoque also 
fiunt becomes robora oak. 

5. Nomen a noun multitudinis of multitude singulare 
of the singular number quandoque sometimes jungitur is 
joined verbo plurali to a plural verb : ut as, Pars part 
{of them) abiere are gone away. Uterque both delu- 
duntur are deceived dolis with tricks. 



6. Ad JECTIVA adjectives, participia participles, et and 
pronomina pronouns concordant agree cum with sub- 
stantivis their substantives genere in gender, numero in 
number, et and casu in case : ut as, Para avis an un- 
common bird in terris in the world, que and simillima 
very like nigro cygno a black sican. 

7. Aliquando sometimes oratio a sentence supplet 
supplies locum the place substantivi of a substantive, ad- 
jectivo the adjective posito being put in neutro genere in 
the neuter gender : ut as, Absolvitur he is acquitted, com- 
perto it having been ascertained crimina that the charges 
esse ficta were invented. 

8. Adjectivum an adjective plurale of the plural 
number, interdum sometimes diverso genere of a different 
gender, aliquando conjungitur is occasionally joined with 
nomini a noun multitudinis of multitude singulari of the 
singular number ; ut as, Hie here manus a band passi 
having suffered vulnera wounds pugnando by fighting ob 
patriam in behalf of {their) fatherland. 

9. Adjectiva adjectives posita when put sine substan- 
tivis without substantives habentur are accounted pro 
substantias as substantives : ut as, Boni the good dili- 
gunt love bonos the good. Puer a boy tulit is wont to 
bear que and fecit do multa many things. 



10. RELATIVUM a relative concordat agrees cum with 
antecedente its antecedent genere in gender, numero 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 163 

number, et and persona person : ut as, Quis who est is 
vir bonus a good man ? Qui he who servat keeps con- 
sulta the decrees patrum of the senators ; qui he who 
keeps leges the laws juraque and ordinances. 

11. Aliquando sometimes oratio a sentence ponitur is 
put pro for antecedente the antecedent: ut as, Veni 1" 
came ad earn to her in tempore in season, quod which est 
is rerum omnium primum the first of all matters. 

12. Relativum a relative collocatum placed inter be- 
tween duo substantiva two substantives diversorum gene- 
rum of different genders vel or numerorum numbers 
interdum sometimes concordat agrees cum with pos- 
teriore the latter substantive : ut as, Homines men tu- 
entur regard ilium globum that globe, quae which dicitur 
is called terra the earth. 

13. Aliquando sometimes relativum a relative con- 
cordat agrees cum with primitivo the primitive pronoun, 
quod which subauditur is understood in possessivo in the 
possessive pronoun : ut as, Omnes all men laudare ex- 
tolled meas fortunas my fortune, qui haberem who had 
gnatum a son praedltum endued tali ingenio with such a 
disposition. 



14. Quum when duo substantiva two substantives di- 
verse significationis of a different signification concur- 
runt meet together, posterius the latter ponitur is put 
in genitivo in the genitive case: ut as, Amor the love 
nummi of money crescit increases quantum as much as 
ipsa pecunia the money itself crescit increases. 

15- Posterius substantivum the latter substantive re- 
peritur is found in dativo in the dative case, quum when 
relatio a reference ad aliquid to something denotatur is 
signified ; ut as, Est he is pater the father urbi of the 
city, que and maritus the husband urbi of the city. 

16. Adjectivum an adjective in neutro genere of the 
neuter gender positum put sine substantivo without a sub- 
stantive postulat requires aliquando sometimes genitivum 



164 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

a genitive case : ut as, Pauiulum pecuniae a very little 
money. 

17. Interdum sometimes genitivus a genitive case po- 
nitur tantum is set alone, priore substantivo the former 
substantive subaudito being understood per ellipsin by the 

figure ellipsis : ut as, Ubi when veneris you are come ad 
Dianae to Diana's, ito go ad dextram to the right hand. 
Templum the word templum " temple " subauditur is 
understood. 

18. Duo substantiva two substantives ejusdem rei re- 
specting the same thing ponuntur are put in eodem casu 
in the same case ; ut as, Opes riches, irritamenta ma- 
lorum the incentives to evils effodiuntur are dug out {of 
the eartK). 

1 9. Qualitas the quality rei of a thing ponitur is put 
in ablativo in the ablative case, etiam also genitivo the 
genitive : ut as, Vir a man nulla fide of no integrity. 
Puer a boy ingenui vultus of an ingenuous countenance, 
que and ingenui pudoris ingenuous modesty. 

20. Opus need et and usus need exigunt require abla- 
tivuni an ablative case : ut as, Opus est nobis we have 
need auctoritate tua of your authority. Non accepit he 
did not receive ab iis from them pecuniam money, qua of 
which nihil sibi esset there was not to him usus need. 



21. Adjectiva plurima very many adjectives quae 
which denotant signify affectionem a feeling or passion 
animi of the mind exigunt require genitivum a genitive 
case: ut as, Natura the nature hominum of men est is 
avida eager for novitatis novelty. Mens a mind prsescia 
foreknowing futuri what is to come. Esto be thou memor 
mindful brevis aevi of a short life. Immemor unmindful 
beneficii of a kindness. Imperitus rerum unskilled 
in matters. Rudis belli ignorant of tear. Timidus 
deorum fearing the gods. Impavidus sui fearless of 
himself 

22. Adjectiva adjectives, in ax ending in ax, verbalia 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 165 

derived from verbs exigunt require genitivum a genitive 
case : ut as, Audax bold ingenii of disposition. Tempus 
time edax consuming rerum things. 

23. Partitiva nouns partitive, numeralia nouns of num- 
ber, interrogativa nouns that ask a question, comparativa 
nouns comparative et and superlativa superlative, et and 
quaedam some posita put partitive partitively, exigunt re- 
quire genitivum pluralem a genitive case plural : ut as, 
Accipe take utrum horum which of these two mavis you 
had rather. Sum I am paulo infirmior somewhat more 
weak ; unus one multorum of the many. Quis what one 
mortalium of human beings ? Dextra the right est is for- 
tior the stronger manuum of the hands. Medius the 
middle est is longissimus the longest digitorum of the 
fingers. Sancte deorum O sacred one of the deities ! 
sequimur we follow te you. 

24. Adjectiva adjectives qua3 which denotant signify 
relationem a reference ad rem quampiam to any thing 
exigunt require dativum a dative case : ut as, Fortuna 

fortune benigna kind nunc now mihi to me, nunc now 
alii to another. Si if facis you bring it about ut that sit 
he be idoneus serviceable patriae to his country, utilis use- 
ful agris to the lands. Turba a multitude gravis trouble- 
some paci to peace, que and inimica averse placida3 quieti 
to gentle ease. Similis like patri his father. J ucundus 
pleasant amicis to his friends. 

25. Quasdam some adjectives, quaa which significant 
signify similitudinem likeness, junguntur are joined etiam 
also genitivo to a genitive case ; ut as, Quern he whom 
metuis you fear erat was par like hujus this man. Es 
you are similis like dommi your master. 

26. Communis common, alienus strange, immunis free 
from, junguntur are joined genitivo to a genitive case, et 

and dativo to a dative : ut as, Est it is commune common 
animantium omnium to all living creatures. Mors death 
communis est is common omnibus to all. Non aliena 
not unfit for consilii the design. Alienus ambitioni 
averse to ambition. Dabitur it shall be granted vobis to 



166 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

you esse to be immunibus free from hujus mali this ca- 
lamity. Caprificus the wild fig-tree est is immxmis free 
omnibus to all. 

27. Verbalia in bilis adjectives in bilis derived from 
verbs accepta taken passive passively, postulant require 
dativum a dative case : ut as, Lucus iners a sluggish 
grove penetrabilis penetrable nulli astro by no star. 



28. Mensura the measure magnitudinis of quantity 
subjieitur is put after adjectivis adjectives in accusativo 
in the accusative case, ablativo the ablative, et and geni- 
tivo the genitive case : ut as, Turris a tower alta high 
centum pedes an hwidred feet Fons a fountain latus 
wide pedibus tribus three feet Axes, a floor lata broad 
pedum denum ten feet 

29. Accusativus an accusative case aliquando some- 
times subjieitur is put after adjectivis adjectives et and 
participiis participles, more Graeco according to the Greek 
custom : ut as, Similis like deo to a god os as to his coun- 
tenance que and humeros his shoulders. Demissus cast 
down vultum as to his look. Nee and not mitior more 
mild animum in mind anguibus than snakes. 



30. Adjectiva adjectives, quse which pertinent re- 
late ad copiam to plenty ve or egestatem want, exigunt 
require interdum sometimes ablativum an ablative, inter- 
dum sometimes genitivum a genitive case : ut as, Longa 
senectus a long old age plena is full malis of ills. Dives 
rich equum in horses, dives rich pictai vestis in an em- 
broidered garment et and auri gold. Amor love est is 
foecundissimus very fruitful et both melle of honey et and 
felle gall. Vis strength expers devoid consilii of ivisdom 
ruit falls to ruin mole sua by its own weight 

31. Adjectiva adjectives et and substantiva substan- 
tives regunt govern ablativum an ablative case signifi- 
cantem signifying causam the cause, vel or formam the 
form, vel or modum the manner rei of a thing : ut as, 






SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 167 

Pallidus pale ira with anger. Grammaticus a gramma- 
rian nomine in name, re in reality barbanis a barbarian, 
Caesar Casar, Trojanus a Trojan origine by descent. 

32. Dignus worthy, indignus unworthy, prasditus en- 
dued with, captus deprived of, contentus content, extorris 
banished, fretus relying upon, liber free, cum icith adjec- 
tivis adjectives significantibus signifying pretium price 9 
exigunt require ablativum an ablative case : ut as, Es you 
are dignus zvorthy odio of hatred. Qui haberem 1 who 
had gnatum a son praeditum endued with tali ingenio such 
a disposition. Talpae the moles capti deprived of oculis 
eyes fodere have dug cubilia their holes. Abi go your 
way contentus contented sorte tua with your lot. Ex- 
torris banished patria from country et and domo home. 
Fretus relying on conscientia the consciousness officii mei 
of my duty. Animus a mind liber free terrore from 
fear. Venale to be purchased gemmis with jewels. 

33. Dignus icorthy, indignus unworthy, extorris ba- 
nished et and liber free, admittunt admit aliquando some- 
times genitivum a genitive case : ut as, Carmina verses 
digna worthy of dese a goddess. Indignus unworthy avo- 
rum of ancestors. Extorris banished regni the kingdom. 
Liber free laborum/rom toils. 

34. Comparativa comparatives admittunt receive abla- 
tivum an ablative case ejus rei of that thing vel or per- 
sons person cui with which alicjuid any thing comparatur 
is compared: ut as, Argentum silver est is vilius of 
less value auro than gold, aurum gold virtutibus than 
virtues. 

35. Ablativi quidam certain ablative cases, qui which 
significant signify mensuram the measure excessus of 
exceeding, adduntur are put after comparativis compara- 
tives et and superlativis superlatives ; ut, as, Tanto by 
so much pessimus poeta the worst poet omnium of all, 
quanto by hoio much tu you are optimus patronus the 
lest patron omnium of all. Quo by how much plus the 
more habent they have, eo by so much plus the more 
cupiunt they desire. 



168 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

36. Mei of me, tui of thee or you, sui of himself , nos- 
tri of us, vestri of you, genitivi the genitive cases primi- 
tivorum of the primitives, ponuntur are used quum 
when persona a person significatur is signified : ut as, 
LaDguet she languishes desiderio with regret tui of you. 
Que and pars part tui of you lateat may lie clausa shut 
up corpore meo in my body. Imago nostri the picture of 
us, i. e. of our person, 

37. Meus mine, tuus thine, suus his, noster our, 
vester your, ponuntur are used quum when actio an 
action, vel or possessio the possession rei of a thing signi- 
ficatur is signified: ut as, Favet he favours desiderio 
tuo your desire. Imago nostra our picture : id est that 
is, quam which nos we possidemus possess. 



38. Verba substantiva verbs substantive ; ut as, sum 
I am, forem I might be, fio / am made, exsisto I am; 
verba passiva verbs passive vocandi of calling ; ut as, 
nominor I am named, appellor I am called, dicor I am 
said, vocor I am called, nunciipor / am named ; et and 
similia the like iis to them : ut as, videor I seem, habeor 
I am accounted, existimor I am thought ; habent have 
nominativum a nominative case utrinque on both sides : 
ut as, Deus God est is summum bonum the chief good. 
Perpusilli very little persons vocantur are called nani 
dwarfs. Fides faith habetur is accounted fundamentum 
the foundation religionis nostras of our religion. 

Infinitum the infinitive mood liorum of these habet 
has eosdem casus the same cases utrinque on both sides : 
ut as, Cato Cato malebat was more desirous esse to be 
quum than videri to seem bonus good. Natura Nature 
declit has given omnibus to all esse to be beatis happy. 

39. Item likewise omnia verba all verbs fere in a 
manner admittunt admit post se after them adjectivum 
an adjective, quod which concordat agrees cum with no- 
minativo the nominative case verbi of the verb casu in 
case, genere gender, et and numero number ; ut as, Nihil 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 169 

Nothing est is amabilius more lovely virtute than virtue. 
Pietas piety jacet lies victa conquered. 



40. Sum, postulat requires genitivum a genitive case 
quoties as often as denotat it signifies possessionem pos- 
session, officium duty, aut or signum a sign : ut as, 
Pecus the cattle est is Meliboei Melibozutfs. Est it is the 
duty adolescentis of a young man revereri to reverence 
majores natu his elders. Est it is the mark fortis of a 
brave man non perturbari not to be agitated rebus as- 
peris by adverse circumstances. 

41. Verba verbs accusandi of accusing, damnandi of 
condemning, absolvendi of acquitting, monendi of warn- 
ing, et and similia the like, postulant require genitivum 
a genitive case, qui which significat signifies crimen the 
charge : ut as, Oportet it is fit, eum that he, qui who 
accusat accuses alterum another probri of dishonesty, in- 
tueri should look into se ipsum himself Condemnat he 
condemns generum suum his son-in-law sceleris of wick- 
edness. Judex the judge absolvit acquitted eum him in- 
juriarum of the injuries. Admoneto ilium remind him 
pristmae fortune of his former condition. 

42. Satago to be busy about a thing, misereor et and 
miseresco to pity, postulant require genitivum a genitive 
case : ut as, Is he satagit is busy about rerum suarum 
his own business. Oro I pray you miserere pity laborum 
tantorum so great distresses ; miserere pity animse a soul 
ferentis suffering non digna things undeserved. Et and 
miseresce pity generis tui your family. 

43. Eeminiscor to remember, obliviscor to forget, me- 
mini to remember, recordor to call to mind, admittunt 
admit genitivum a genitive case, aut or accusativum an 
accusative : ut as, Reminiscitur he remembers datas fidei 
his promise given. Soles you are accustomed oblivisci to 
forget nihil nothing nisi except injurias injuries. Est it 
is proprium the property stultitiae of folly cernere to dis- 
cern aliorum vitia other men's faults, oblivisci to forget 

I 



170 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

suorum its own. Faciam i" will give you cause ut memi- 
neris to remember hujus loci this place semper always. 
Juvabit it will be a pleasure olim hereafter meoiinisse to 
remember hsec these things* Recordor / call to mind 
hujus meriti this favour in me towards me. Si if re- 
corder / recollect rite well audita the things heard. 

44. Potior to gain or enjoy jungitur is joined aut 
either genitivo to a genitive case, aut or ablativo to an 
ablative : ut as, Romani the Romans potiti sunt gained 
possession of signorum the standards et and armorum the 
arms. Troes the Trojans egressi having disembarked 
potiuntur enjoy optata arena the wished-for shore. 






45. Omnia verba all verbs regunt govern dativum a 
dative case qui which denotat denotes relationem refer- 
ence: ut as, Nati sumus we are born non solum nobis 
not for ourselves alone. 

46. Verba verbs significantia signifying commodum 
advantage, aut or incommodum disadvantage, regunt 
govern dativum a dative case : ut as, Non potes you are 
unable commodare to serve nee or incommodare disserve 
mihi me. 

47. Ex his of these, juvo to help, lsedo to hurt, delecto 
to delight, et and alia qusedam some other verbs, exigunt 
inquire accusativum an accusative case; ut as, Quies 
rest plurimum juvat very much helps fessum a wearied 
man. 

48. Verba verbs comparandi of comparing regunt go- 
vern dativum a dative case : ut as, Sic thus solebam I 
was used componere to compare magna great things 
parvis to small. 

49. Verba verbs dandi of giving et and reddendi of 
giving bach regunt govern dativum a dative case : ut as, 
Fortuna fortune dat gives nimis too much multis to 
many, satis enough nulli to nobody. Est he is ingratus 
ungrateful, qui who non reponit does not return gratiam 
thanks bene merenti to one deserving well {of him.) 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 171 

50. Verba verbs promittendi of promising, ac and sol- 
vendi of paying, regunt govern dativum a dative case : 
ut as, Quae which things promitto I promise tibi to you, 
ac and recipio engage, esse observaturum that I will ob- 
serve sanctissime most religiously. Numeravit he paid 
mihi me aes alienum the debt. 

5h Verba verbs imperandi of commanding, et and 
nuntiandi of telling, regunt govern dativum a dative 
case : ut as, Pecunia money collecta gathered together 
imperat commands aut or servit serves cuique every man. 
Saepe often videto take care quid dicas what you say 
de quoque viro of each man, et and cui to whom {you 
say it). 

52. Excipe except rego to rule et and guberno to govern, 
qua3 which verbs habent have accusativum an accusative 
case ; tempero to rule, et and moderor to rule, qua3 which 
nunc sometimes habent have dativum a dative case, nunc 
sometimes accusativum an accusative case : ut as, Luna 
the moon regit rules menses the months. Deus ipse God 
himself gubernat governs orb em the world. Ipse he 
temperat sibi has the command of himself Sol the sun 
temperat orders omnia all things luce by (its) light Hie 
this man moderatur manages equos his horses, qui who 
non moderabitur will not govern ine his passion. 

53. Verba verbs fidendi of trusting et and diffidendi 
of mistrusting, regunt govern dativum a dative case : ut 
as, Decet it is fit committere to commit nil nothing nisi 
but lene what is soft vacuis venis to empty veins. Videor 
I seem diffidere to mistrust prudential tuae your prudence. 

54. Verba verbs obsequendi of complying with, et and 
repugnandi of opposing, regunt govern dativum a dative 
case: ut as, Pius filius a dutiful son semper always 
obtemperat obeys patri his father. Fortuna fortune 
repugnat opposes ignavis precibus the prayers of the 
slothful. 

55. Verba verbs minandi of threatening, et and iras- 
cendi of being angry, regunt govern dativum a dative 
case: ut as, Minitatus est he threatened mortem death 

i 2 



172 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

utrique to each one. Nihil est there is no reason quod 
succenseam why I should be angry adolescenti with the 
young man. 

56. Sum, cum compositis with its compounds, praeter 
except possum, regit governs dativum a dative case : ut 
as, Rex pius a pious king est is ornamentum an orna- 
ment reipublicse to the state. Nee obest it neither hurts 
nee prodest nor profits mihi me. 

57. Verba verbs composita compounded cum quibus- 
vis fere praepositionibus toith almost any prepositions, 
et and cum adverbiis with the adverbs, bene well, satis 
enough, male ill, regunt govern dativum a dative case: 
ut as, Dii may the gods benefaciant do good tibi to you. 
Antefero I prefer iniquissimam pacem the most unequal 
peace justissimo bello to the most just war. 

58. Non pauca not a few ex his of these aliquoties 
sometimes regunt govern accusativum an accusative case : 
ut as, Alius one prsestat exceeds alium another ingenio 
in ability. 

59. Est, pro for habeo to have, regit governs dativum 
a dative case: ut as, Nam que for est mihi I have pater 
a father domi at home ; est / have injusta noverca a 
severe step-mother. 

60. Sum, cum multis aliis with many others, admittit 
admits dativum a dative case persons of the person cum 
loith dativo a dative case rei of the thing : ut, as, 
Mare the sea est is exitio a destruction avidis nautis to 
greedy sailors. Speras do you expect fore that that ivill 
be laudi a credit tibi to yourself, quod which vertis you 
impute vitio as a fault mihi to me? 



61. Verba transitiva verbs transitive exigunt require 
accusativum an accusative case: ut as, Fugito avoid 
percontatorem an inquisitive person, nam for idem the 
same est is garriilus a blab. Aper the wild boar depo- 
pulatur lays waste agros the fields. 

62. Verba in transitiva intransitive verbs non admit- 
tunt do not take accusativum an accusative case: ut as, 
Pueri boys ludunt play. 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 173 

63. Verba intransitiva intransitive verbs nonnun- 
quam usurpantur are sometimes used transitive transi- 
tively : ut as, Ludit he plays bonum civein the good 
citizen ; i. e. he imitates, §•<?. Servit he serves duram 
servitutem a hard servitude. Videtur she seems ire to 
go longam viam a long way incomitata unattended. Nee 
nor vox does your voice sonat sound hominem like a 
human creature ; o dea o a goddess, certe doubtless. 

64. Verba verbs rogandi of asking et and docendi of 
teaching, item likewise celo to conceal, fere commonly re- 
gunt govern duplicem accusativura two accusative cases : 
ut as, Tu modd do you only posce ask veniam pardon 
deos of the gods. Dedocebo / will unteach te you istos 
mores those manners. Bidiciilum est it is a jest tefor 
you admonere me to remind me istuc of that. Consuefeci 
/ have accustomed filium my son ne celet not to conceal 
ea those things me from me. 

65. Verba verbs hujusmodi of this sort habent have 
post se after them accusativum an accusative case etiam 
even in passiva voce in the passive voice : ut as, Posceris 
you are required (to sacrifice) exta the entrails bovis of a 
heifer. 



66. Quod vis verbum any verb admittit admits ab- 
lativum an ablative case significantem signifying instru- 
mentum the instrument, aut or causam the cause, aut or 
modum the manner actionis of an action : ut as, Hi these 
certant endeavour defendere to defend themselves jaculis 
with darts, illi they saxis with stories. Vehementer ex- 
canduit he turned excessively pale ira with anger. Per- 
egit he performed rem the matter mira celeritate with 
wonderful dispatch. 

67. Nomen pretii a noun of price subjicitur is put 
after quibusdam verbis any verbs in ablativo casu in 
the ablative case : ut as, Non emerim / would not pur- 
chase it teruncio at a farthing, seu or vitiosa nuce a 
rotten nut Ea victoria that victory stetit cost Poenis 

I 3 



174 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

the Carthaginians sanguine the blood ac and vulneribus 
wounds multorum of many. 

68. Hi genitivi these genitive cases positi put sine sub- 
stantivis without substantives excipiuntur are excepted ; 
tanti of so much, quanti of how much, pluris of more, 
minSris of less, tantidem of just so much, quantivis, 
quantilibet, of as much as you please, quanticunque/br 
how much soever: ut as, Eris you will be tanti of so 
much value aliis to others quanti as fueris you shall have 
been tibi to yourself 

69. Floeci of a loch of wool, nauci of a nutshell, nihili 
of nothing, pili of a hair, assis of an as, hujus of this, 
teruncii of a farthing, adduntur are added peculiariter 
especially verbis to verbs asstimandi of valuing : ut as, 
Ego Jpendo estimate ilium him flocei at a lock of wool, 
nee not faeio do I esteem him hujus at this, qui who ses- 
tiniat values me me pili at a hair. 

70. Verba verbs abundandi of abounding, implendi of 
filling, onerandi of loading, et and his diversa the con- 
traries to these, junguntur are joined ablativo to an abla- 
tive case : ut as, Antipho, abundas, you abound amore 
with what you love. Sylla explevit filled omnes suos all 
his army divitiis with riches. Quibus mendaciis with 
what lies homines levissimi have the most trifling men 
onerarunt loaded te you ? Nulla pars no part vitas of life 
potest can vacare be free officio from duty. 

71. Ex quibus of which verbs quaadam some nonnun- 
quam sometimes regunt govern genitivum a genitive case : 
ut as, Implentur they are filled veteris Bacchi with old 
tvine, que and pinguis ferine fat venison. Non turn in- 
digent they do not so much need artis skill quam as la- 
boris labour. 

72. Fungor to discharge, fruor to enjoy, utor to use, 
vescor to live upon, pascor to feed upon, dignor to think 
one^s self worthy, muto to change, nit or to lean upon, 
supersedeo to pass by, junguntur are joined ablativo to 
an ablative case : ut as, Qui he who volet shall desire 
adipisci to get veram gloriam true glory fungatur should 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 175 

discharge officiis the duties justitiae of justice. Est it is 
optimum a very excellent thing frui to profit by aliena 
msania the madness of others. Jurat it is of service si 
if utare you employ animo bono a good courage in re 
mala in a bad matter. Vescor Hive upon carnibus^esA. 
Pascuntur they feed maleficio on evil actions et and 
scelere guilt. Equidem I, indeed, haud dignor me do not 
think myself worthy tali honore of such honour. Diruit 
he pulls down, aedificat he builds, mutat he changes quad- 
rata square things rotundis for round. Quod which 
ortum est sprang e terra from the earth ita in such a way, 
ut nitatur as that it leans upon stirpibus suis its own 
roots. Supersedendum est we must forbear multitudine 
a multitude verborum of words. 

73. Ablativus an ablative case significans signifying 
mensuram the measure excessus of exceeding additur is 
put after verbis verbs quae which obtinent possess vim 
the force comparationis of comparison : ut as, Incredibile 
est it is not to be believed quanto by how much anteeo I 
surpass herum my master sapientia in wisdom. 

74. Ablativus an ablative case sumptus taken abso- 
lute independently interdum additur is sometimes put 
after verbis verbs, vel or potius rather orationibus 
sentences : ut as, Christus Christ natus est was born im- 
perante Augusto when Augustus was Emperor ; cruci- 
fixus was crucified imperante Tiberio when Tiberius 
was Emperor. Me duce I being your guide eris you will 
be tutus safe. 

75. Ablativus an ablative case partis of the part af- 
fectae affected, et and poetice by the poets accusativus an 
accusative, saepe additur is often added verbis intransitivis 
to intransitive verbs et and passivis verbs passive : ut as, 
JEgrotat he is sick animo in mind magis more quam than 
corpore in body. Nee nor movetur is she moved vultum, 
as to her countenance sermone by his conversation. 

76. Ablativus an ablative case agentis of the doer 
additur is added passivis to verbs passive, sed but praepo- 
sitione the preposition a, vel or ab, antecedente going 

I 4 



176 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

before ; et and also interdum sometimes dativus a dative 
case : ut as, Laudatur he is praised ab his by these, cul- 
patur he is blamed ab illis by those. Honesta things 
honourable, non occulta not hidden things, quaeruntur are 
sought bonis viris by good men. 



77. Verba infinita verbs of the infinitive mood ad- 
duntur are put after quibusdam verbis some verbs, par- 
ticipiis participles, et and adjectivis adjectives: ut as, 
Amor love jussit commanded me scribere to write quse 
what things puduit it shamed me dicere to speak. Jussus 
being ordered confundere foedus to violate the treaty. 
Erat he was turn then dignus worthy amari to be loved. 

78. Verba infinita verbs of the irifinitive mood inter- 
dum sometimes ponuntur are put sola alone pro imper- 
fecto indicativo instead of the imperfect indicative : ut as, 
Qua where pergebat he proceeded, vastare he kept laying 
ivaste agros the country, agere he kept driving off pras- 
das plunder (pro for vastabat^ agebat). Hinc after 
this spargere in vulgum he kept scattering abroad voces 
ambiguas doubtful sayings ; et and conscius knowing 
himself guilty quasrere kept seeking arma means to destroy 
me (pro for spargebat, quasrebat). 

79. Verba infinita verbs of the irifinitive mood fre- 
quenter fregue?itly statuunt set accusativum an accusative 
case ante se before thein: ut as, Gaudeo I am glad te 
that you rediisse have returned incolumem safe. 



80. Gerundia gerunds, et and supina supines regunt 
govern casus the cases suorum verborum of their own 
verbs : ut as, Efferor / am transported studio with desire 
videndi of seeing patres vestros your fathers. Mittimus 
we send scitatum to consult oracula the oracle Phoebi of 
Apollo. 



81. Gerundia in di gerunds in di habent have ean- 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED, 177 

dem constructionem the same construction cum with 
genitivis genitive cases, et and pendent depend turn both 
a quibusdam substantivis on certain substantives, turn 
and also adjectivis adjectives : ut as, Innatus amor an 
inborn desire habendi of getting (honey) urget excites 
Cecropias apes the Attic bees. .zEneas, celsa in puppi in 
his tall ship jam certus already determined eundi to go. 

82. Verba infinita verbs of the infinitive mood non- 
nunquam usurpantur are sometimes put pro gerundiis in 
di instead of gerunds in di : ut as, Est tibi there is for 
you tempus a time abire to depart, i. e. of departing. 

83. Gerundia in do gerunds in do obtinent have ean- 
dem constructionem the same construction cum with da- 
tivis dative cases et and ablativis ablative cases : ut as, 
Simul at the same time aptat he prepares ensem his sword 
habendo for using. Mens the mind hominis of a man 
alitur is fostered discendo by learning et and cogitando 
by meditating. Ratio the means scribendi of writing 
conjuncta est is joined cum loquendo with speaking. 

84. Gerundia in dum gerunds in dum usurpantur are 
used pro accusativis for accusative cases, praspositione a 
preposition praecedente going before them : ut as, Breve 
tempus the short season astatis of life est is satis longum 
sufficiently long ad vivendum for living bene well que 
and honeste honourably. Inter spoliandum during the 
spoiling of corpus the body hostis of the enemy percussus 
est he was struck veruto with a javelin. 

85. Gerundia gerunds etiam also vertuntur are 
changed in nomina adjectiva into nouns adjective, quas 
which vocantur are called gerundiva gerundive or ge- 
rundial: ut as, Duci to be induced praemio by a bribe 
ad accusandos homines to accuse men, est is proximum 
very near latrocinio to robbery. 

86. Quum when necessitas necessity significatur is 
signified gerundiva gerundive adjectives usurpantur are 
used cum verbo substantivo in conjunction with the verb 
substantive : ut as, Ager afield colendus est must be tilled 

I 5 



178 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

ut in order that ferat it may bear fruges fruit. Via the 
way lethi of death semel est calcanda must once be trodden. 
Video / see rem that the matter oinittendam esse must be 
given over. 

87. Gerundiva gerundive adjectives in dum ending in 
dum cum yerbo substantivo in conjunction with the verb 
substantive nonnunquani usurpantur are sometimes used 
pro verbis impersonalibus as impersonal verbs: ut as, 
Utendum est one must make use of aetate life : aetas life 
preterit is passing by cito pede with swift foot. Censeo 
I am of opinion obliviscendum tibi esse that you must 
forget injuriarum the injuries. 



88. Supinum in um the supine in um significat sig- 
Jies active actively, et and sequitur follows verbum a 

verb, aut or participium a participle, significans signi- 
fying rnotum motion ad locum to a place : ut as, Ve- 
niunt they come spectatum to see; veniunt they come 
ut that ipsse they themselves spectentur may be seen. 
Milites soldiers missi sunt were sent speculatum to re- 
connoitre arcem the citadel. 

89. Supinum in u the supine in u significat signifies 
passive passively, et and sequitur follows nomina ad- 
jectiva nouns adjective: ut as, Quod that which est is 
ibedum foul factu to be done, idem the same est is et also 
turpe shameful dictu to be spoken. 



90. Participia participles regunt govern casus the 
cases verborum of the verbs a quibus from which deri- 
vantur they are derived : ut, as, Tendens spreading du- 
plices palmas both his hands ad sidera to the stars., refert 
he utters talia such things voce with his voice. 

91, Dativus a dative case agentis of the doer ali- 
quando sometimes additur is put after participiis parti- 
ciples passive vocis of the passive voice, praesertim espe- 
cially quum when exeunt in dus they end in dus : ut as, 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 179 

Magnus civis a mighty citizen obiit died, et and formi- 
datus dreaded Othoni by Otho. O Juli O Julius, me- 
morande to be called to mind mihi by me post nullos 
sodales after no companions. 

92. Participia participles, posita when put pro ad- 
jectivis as adjectives^ exigunt require genitivum a geni- 
tive case : ut as, Appetens greedy alieni of another man's, 
profusus lavish sui of his own. 

93. Exosus hating, perosus utterly hating, pertaesus 
weary vf significantia signifying active actively, exigunt 
require accusativum an accusative case: ut as, Astro- 
nomus an astronomer exosus hating mulieres women ad 
unam in general. Perosae utterly hating immundam seg- 
nitiem filthy idleness. Pertaesus weary of ignaviam suam 
his own sluggishness. 

94. Exosus hated, et and perosus utterly hated, sig- 
nificantia signifying passive passively, leguntur are read 
cum dativo with a dative case : ut as, Exosus hated Deo 
of God et and Sanctis the saints. Gerraani the Ger- 
mans perosi sunt are utterly hated R-oinanis by the 
Romans. 

95. Natus born, prognatus born, satus sprung, cretus 
descended, creatus produced, ortus risen, editus brought 

forth, exigunt require ablativum an ablative case : ut as, 
Bona a virtuous woman prognata born bonis parentibus of 
good parents. Sate O thou ivho art sprung sanguine 
from the blood divum of the gods ! Quo sanguine from 
what blood cretus descended. Venus, orta sprung mari 
from the sea praestat mare becomes surety for the sea 
enntifor one going (upon it). Terra editus sprung from 
the earth. 



96. Impersonalia verbs impersonal non habent 
have not nominativum a nominative case : ut as, Juvat 
it is pleasant ire to go sub umbras under the shade. 

97. Accusativus an accusative case personae of the 

i 6 



180 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

person cum genitivo with a genitive rei of the thing sub- 
jicitur is put after his impersonalibus these impersonal 
verbs ; poenitet it repents, taadet it wearies, miseret, 
miserescit it pities, pudet it shames, piget it grieves : ut 
as, Si zfvixisset he had lived ad centesimum annum 
to the hundredth year, non poeniteret it would not repent 
eum him senectutis suas of his old age. Miseret me tui 
I pity you. Miserescat te mei may you pity me. 

98. Verbum impersonale a verb impersonal passivaa 
vocis of the passive voice potest may accipi be taken pro 
singulis personis for each person utriusque numeri of 
both numbers eleganter elegantly : ut as, Quid agitur ? 
What is being done ? Statur, it is stood. 



99. QlLE nouns which significant signify partem a 
part temporis of time, ponuntur are put frequentius more 
commonly in ablativo in the ablative case : ut as, Nemo 
mortalium no mortal man sapit is wise omnibus horis at 
all hours. 

100. Quae nouns which significant signify durationem 
the duration temporis of time, ponuntur are put fere 
commonly in accusativo in the accusative case, rarius 
very seldom in ablativo in the ablative : ut as, Hie here 
jam from this time regnabitur kings shall reign ter 
centum totos annos three hundred full years. Toleravit 
he endured exsilium banishment quatuordecim annis 
during fourteen years. 

101. Spatium the space loci of a place ponitur is put 
in accusativo in the accusative case, et and interdum 
sometimes in ablativo in the ablative : ut as, Jam now 
processeram I had advanced mille passus a thousand 
paces, i. e. a mile. Abest he is distant quingentis milli- 
bus passuum^e hundred miles ab urbe from the city. 



102. Omne vevbum every verb admittit admits geniti- 



SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 181 

vum a genitive case nominis of the name oppidi of a city 
or town in quo in which actio fit any thing is done, modo 
so that sit it be primge of the first vel or secundas decli- 
nationis of the second declension, et and singularis nu- 
meri of the singular number : ut as, Quid faciam what 
shall I do Romae at Rome? nescio / know not how 
mentiri to lie. 

103. Hi genitivi these genitive cases, humi upon the 
ground, domi at home, militiae in the field, belli in war, 
sequuntur follow formam the construction propriorum of 
proper names : ut as, Arma arms sunt are parvi of little 
worth foris abroad, nisi unless est there is consilium wis- 
dom domi at home. Fuimus we were semper always una 
together militiae in the field et and domi at home. 

104. Verum but si zfnomen the name oppidi of a city 
or town erit shall be pluralis numeri of the plural number 
duntaxat only, aut or tertiae declinationis of the third 
declension, ponitur it is put in ablativo in the ablative case : 
ut as, Colchus a Colchian, an or Assyrius an Assyrian ; 
nutritus brought up Thebis at Thebes, an or Argis at 
Argos. Ventosus being inconstant, Romae at Rome 
amem I love Tibur Tibur ; Tibure at Tibur Romam / 
love Rome. 

105. Sic thus utimur we use ruri, vel or rure in the 
country, in ablativo in the ablative case: ut as, Ego 
I call viventem one living rure in the country, tu you 
dicis call one living in urbe in the city beatum happy. 

106. Nomen the name oppidi of a city or town fere 
commonly additur is put in accusativo in the accusative 
case sine praepositione without a preposition verbis after 
verbs significantibus signifying motum motion ad locum 
to a place : ut as, Rediit he returned Carthaginem to 
Carthage. 

107. Ad hunc modum after this manner utimur we use 
domus a house et and rus the country : ut as, Capellae 
ye she-goats, saturae being full, ite go domum home, Hes- 
perus the evening venit approaches, ite go. Ego I, ibo 
will go rus into the country. 



182 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

108. Nomen the name oppidi of a city or town fere 
commonly additur is put in ablativo in the ablative case 
sine pr^epositione without a preposition verbis after verbs 
significantibus signifying niotum motion a loco from a 
place : ut as, Nisi profectus esses if you had not set out 
Rorna from Rome ante before, relinqueres you would 
leave earn it nunc now. 

109. Ad eundem modum after the same manner do- 
mus a house et and rus the country usurpantur are used: 
ut as, Nuper exiit he recently went out domo from the 
house. Metuo I fear patrem my father, ne redierit that 
he will have returned rure from the country. 



110. Qiledam adverbia certain adverbs loci of place, 
temporis of time, et and quantitatis of quantity, item 
likewise ergo, pro in the place of causa for the sake of 
admittunt admit genitivum a genitive case : ut as, Ubi 
gentium ? where in the world ? Tunc temporis at that 
time poteram / was able to do nihil amplius nothing fur- 
ther quam than flere weep. Satis eloquentiae eloquence 
enough, sapientias parum little wisdom. Donari to be 
rewarded virtutis ergo on account of virtue. 

111. QuaBdam some adverbs admittunt admit casus 
the cases nominum of the nouns adjective unde from 
zvhich- deducta sunt they are derived: ut as, Vivit he 
lives inutiliter unprofitably sibi for himself Mauri the 
Moors sunt are proxime Hispaniam next to Spain. 
Melius better than vel or optime in the best way omnium 
of all. Morabatur he staid amplius opinione longer than 
expectation : i. e. than was expected. 



112. Conjunctioxes copulative conjunctions copu- 
lative et and disjunctive disjunctive fere for the most 
part conjungunt couple similes casus the like cases, 
modos moods, et and tempora tenses : ut as, Socrates 
docuit taught Xenophontem Xenophon et and Platonem 






SYNTAX CONSTRUED. 183 

Plato. Stat he stands corpore with his body recto up- 
right, que and despicit looks down upon terras the earth. 
Nee scribit he neither writes nee legit nor reads. 

113. Aliquoties oftentimes connectunt they join to- 
gether diversos casus different cases et and diversa tern- 
pora different tenses : ut as, Emi I bought librum a book 
centussi for a hundred asses et and pluris more. Vixi I 
lived Komse at Rome et and Venetiis at Venice. Nisi 
unless lactasses you had beguiled me amantem in love, et 
and produceres were drawing me on falsa spe with false 
hope. 

114. PfkEPOSlTio a preposition subaudita understood 
interdum sometimes facit makes ut that ablativus an ab- 
lative case addatur be added : ut as, Habeo / hold te 
you loco in the place parentis of a parent : id est that is, 
in loco. 

115. Praepositio a preposition in compositione in com- 
position nonnunquam sometimes regit governs eundem 
ca3um the same case quern which regebat it governed et 
also extra compositionem out of composition : ut as, 
Detrudont they thrust off naves the ships scoipulo from 
the rock : id est that is, trudunt de. Praetereo I pass by 
te you insalutatum unsaluted : id est that is, eo praeter. 

116. Prsepositiones prepositions, quum when amittunt 
they lose casum their case, fiunt become adverbia ad- 
verbs : ut as, Venit he came longo tempore a long time 
post afterwards. 

117. Inter jectiones interjections non raro ponun- 
tur are often put absolute absolutely, hoc est that is, sine 
casu without a case : ut as, Connixa having yeaned re- 
liquit she left spem gregis the hope of the flock, ah alas ! 
silice in nuda upon the bare flint stones. 

118. En, et and ecce, junguntur are joined frequen- 
tius most commonly nominativo to a nominative case ; 
accusativo to an accusative rarius very seldom : ut as, En 
see Priamus Priam. Ecce tibi behold for you status 



184 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

noster our condition. En behold quatuor ar&sfour altars. 
Ecce see there duas two tibi for you, Daphni Daphnis, 
que and duo altaria tico altars Phoebo for Phoebus. 

119. O, exclamantis of one exclaiming, jungitur is 
joined nominativo to a nominative case, accusativo an ac- 
cusative, et and vocativo a vocative : ut as, O festus dies 
O the joyful day hominis of man ! O nimium fortu- 
natos agricolas O too fortunate husbandmen! O formose 
puer O beautiful boy ! 

120. Heu et and proh ah! or alas! junguntur are 
joined nunc sometimes nominativo to a nominative case, 
nunc sometimes accusativo to an accusative: item also 
proh, vocativo to a vocative case : ut as, Heu pietas ah 
piety! heu prisca fides ah the ancient integrity! Heu 
stirpem invisam ah the odious stock ! Proh Jupiter ah 
Jupiter ! Proh fidem alas the help deum of gods at que 
and hominum of men ! Proh sancte Jupiter O sacred 
Jupiter ! 

121. Hei et and vae woe or alas, junguntur are joined 
dativo to a dative case : ut as, Hei mihi woe is me. Vse 
misero mihi alas ! wretched me. 



185 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 



Prosodia prosody est is pars the part Grammaticae of 
Grammar, quae which docet teaches quantitatem the 
quantity (or due sound) syllabarum of syllables. 



Tempus time est is mensura the measure syllabae 
proferendae of a syllable to be uttered (or, of the pro- 
nouncing a syllable). 

Syllaba brevis a short time est consists unius temporis 
of one time ; vero but longa a long one duorum of two. 

Tempus breve a short time notatur is distinguished 
curva Hnea by a curved line (-) ; autem but longum a 
long time recta linea by a straight line (-). 

Ex syllabis of syllables positis placed justo ordlne in 
due order pedes feet fiunt are made. 

Autem now pes a foot est is constitutio the placing 
together duarum syllabarum of two syllables pluriumve 
or of more ex certa observatione according to a certain 
observation temporum of the times (or measures of the 
syllables). 

Syllabae duae longse two long syllables efficiunt make 
up spondaeum a spondee : ut as, virtus. 

Syllabae duae breves two short syllables, longa a long 
syllable precedente preceding them, efficiunt make up 
dactylum a dactyl: ut as, scribere. 

Porro moreover pedes feet concinnati when duly ar- 
ranged justo numero in their proper number atque and 
ordine order constituunt form versum a verse. 



Scansio scanning est is legitima commensuratio the 
measuring according to rule versus of a verse in singulos 
pedes into every one (or each one) of the feet. 

Scansioni to scanning (a verse) accidunt there belong 



186 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

figurae the figures (called) Synalcepha, Ecthlipsis, Synae- 
resis, Diaeresis, et and Caesura. 

Synalcepha, est is elisio the striking out vocalis of a 
vowel in fine at the end dietionis of a word ante alteram 
before another vowel in initio at the beginning sequentis 
of the following word : ut as, Crastina vita to-morrow's 
life est is nimis sera too late, vive live hodie to-day. 
Vit' viv' are here put pro for vita vive. 

At but lieu, et and 6, nunquam intercipiuntur are 
never struck out (or cut off). 

Ecthlipsis, est is quoties as often as m the letter m pe- 
rimitur is cut off curn sua vocali with its vowel, proxima 
dictione the next word exorsa having begun a vocali with 
a vowel : ut as, Monstrurn a monster, horrendum hor- 
rible, informe mis-shapen, ingens vast, cui whose lumen 
eye ademptum had been taken away. Monstr', horrend', 
inform' pro for monstrurn, horrendum, informe. 

Synaeresis, est is contractio the contraction duarum 
syllabarum of two syllables in unam into one : ut as, 
Seu or whether alvearia the hives texta fuerint shall have 
been woven lento vimine of the limber osier ; alvearia is 
pronounced quasi scriptum esset as if it had been written 
alvaria. 

Diaeresis, est is ubi when ex una syllaba of one syl- 
lable dissecta being divided (or the letters separated) 
duae two syllables fiunt are made: ut as, Debuerant 
they ought evoluisse to have unwound suos fusos their 
spindles ; evoluisse pro for evolvisse. 

Caesura, est is quaedam distributio a certain division 
versus of a verse in duas partes into two parts : ut as, 
Et and jam now finis erat there was an end, quum when 
Jupiter Jupiter despiciens looking down aethere summo 
from the highest heaven mare on the sea velivolum 
(covered) with sails, terrasque and the lands jacentes 
lying (below him). 

Versus hexameter an hexameter verse constat consists 
ex sex pedibus of six feet ; quintus locus the fifth place 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 187 

postulat requires dactylum a dactyl, sextus the sixth 
spondasum a spondee ; reliqui pedes the remaining feet 
admittunt admit vel either spondaeos spondees vel or 
dactylos dactyls : ut as, Tityre o Tityrus, tu you recu- 
bans reclining sub tegnrine under the covering patulae 
fagi of a wide- spreading beech-tree. 

Spondaeus a spondee aliquando sometimes reperitur is 
found etiam even in quinto loco in the fifth place : ut 
as, Cara soboles thou dear offspring deum of the gods, 
magnum incrementum thou illustrious progeny Jovis of 
Jupiter ! 

Ultima syllaba the last syllable cujuscunque versus of 
every verse habetur is accounted communis common. 



Versus pentameter a pentameter verse constat con- 
sists e duabus partibus of two parts ; quarum prior the 
former of which comprehendit contains duos pedes two 
feet, vel either spondaeos spondees vel or dactylos dac- 
tyls, cum syllaba longa with a long syllable : altera the 
other etiam contains also duos pedes two feet, sed but 
omnino dactylos always (or altogether) dactyls, item 
likewise cum syllaba longa with a long syllable : ut as, 
Amor love est is res a thing plena full solliciti timoris of 
anxious fear. 



Vocalis a vowel ante duas consonantes before two con- 
sonants, aut or duplicem a double consonant in eaclem 
dictione in the same word, est is ubique longa every 
where long positione by position : ut as (in the words) 
ventus the wind, axis an axle-tree, patrizo to do like his 
father. 

Quod si but if consonans a consonant claudat ends 
priorem dictionem the former word, sequente the follow- 
ing word item likewise inchoante beginning a consonante 
with a consonant vocalis praacedens the vowel going before 



188 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

etiam longa erit will also be long positione by position : 
ut as, Major sum lam greater quam than cui one whom 
fortuna fortune possit can nocere hurt Syllable the 
syllables jor, sum, quam, et and sit, longae sunt are long 
positione by position. 

At si but if prior dictio the former word exeat ends in 
vocalem brevem in a short vowel, sequente the following 
word incipiente beginning a duabus consonantibus with 
the two consonants, sc, sp, vel or st, plerumque for the 
most part producitur it is made long : ut as. Occulta 
spolia {they brought away) the secret spoils et and plures 
triumphos many triumphs de pace from peace. Syllaba 
ta the syllable ta est is longa long positione by position. 

Vocalis brevis a short voivel ante mutam before a 
mute, sequente liquida a liquid following, redditur is 
rendered communis common ; ut as (in the words) patris 
of a father, volucris of a bird. Vero but longa a long 
vowel non mutatur is not changed; ut as (in the words) 
aratrum a plough, simulacrum an image. 



VOCALIS a vowel ante alteram before another vowel 
in eadem dictione in the same word est is ubique brevis 
every where short ; ut as (in the words) Deus God, meus 
mine, tuus your, pius pious. 

Excipias you may except genitivos the genitive cases in 
ius ending in ius, habentes having inflexionem the de- 
clension pronominum of pronouns ; ut as, unius of one, 
illius of him, &c. ; ubi where (or in which words) i the 
vowel i reperitur is found communis common; vero but 
in alterius in the word alterius of another semper est it 
is always brevis short; in alius in the word alius of 
another semper longa it is always long. 

Solms of one alone, utrius of either, neutrius of neither, vix le- 
guntur are seldom read, penultima with the last syllable but one, 
brevi short 

Excipiendi sunt etiam there are likewise to be excepted 
genitivi the genitive et and dativi the dative cases quintse 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 189 

declinationis of the fifth declension, ubi e where {the 
vowel) e inter geminum i between two fs fit is made 
longa long ; ut as (in the word) faciei of a face : alioqui 
non otherwise not, ut as (in the words) rei of a thing, 
spei of hope, fidei of faith. 

Etiam also fi (the syllable) fi in fio in (the verb) fio to 
be made or done est is longa long ; nisi unless e et r (the 
letters) e and r sequuntur follow simul together : ut as 
(in the words) fierem, fieri : Jam now omnia all things 
fiunt are done, quae which negabam posse / used to say 
were unable fieri to be done. 

Dius heavenly habet has primam syllabam the first 
syllable Ion gam long ; Diana (the goddess) Diana com- 
munem (has the first syllable) common. 

Interjectio the interjection ohe ho ! habet has priorem 
syllabam the former syllable communem common. 

Vocalis a vowel ante alteram before another in Graecis 
substantivis in Greek substantives subinde now and then fit 
is made longa long : ut as, Pierides O Muses : Laerten 
Laertes ; et and also in Graecis possessivis in Greek pos- 
sessives: ut as, ^Eneia nutrix JEneas^s nurse ; Rhodo- 
peius Orpheus Orpheus of Rhodope. 



Omnis diphthongus every diphthong est is longa long 
apud Latinos with the Latins; ut as, aurnm gold, 
neuter neither, musae of a song, or songs : nisi except 
sequent e vocali when a vowel follows ; ut as, praeire to go 
before, praeustus burnt at the point, praeamplus very large. 



Derivativa derivatives (or words derived from others) 
fere commonly sortiuntur obtain eandem quantitatem the 
same quantity cum primitivis with their primitives (or 
the words from which they are derived): ut as, amator a 
lover, amicus a friend, amabilis amiable ; prima brevi 
the first syllable being short ab amo (as being derived) 
from (the verb) amo / love. 



190 LATIN GRAMMAE. 

Excipiuntur tamen there are excepted however pauca a 
few words quae tohich deducta being derived a brevibus 
from primitives with a short syllable, producunt make long 
primam syllabam the first syllable; ut as, corao conns to 
comb or adorn the hair, a coma derived from coma the 
hair ; fomes touch-wood, fomentum a fomentation, kfrom 
foveo to cherish ; humanus human, or humane, ab homo 
from homo a man or woman ; jucundus pleasant, a from 
juvo to delight ; jumentum a beast of burthen, a from 
juvo to help ; junior younger, a from juvenis young ; 
laterna a lantern, a from lateo to lie hid ; lex legis a law, 
kfrom lego to read ; mobilis moveable, a from moveo to 
move ; nonus the ninth, a from novem nine ; rex regis a 
king, regina a queen, a from rego to rule ; sedes a seat, 
a from sedeo to sit ; tegula a tile, a from tego to cover ; 
tragiila a javelin {also a drag-net), a from traho to draiv ; 
vomer a plough-share, a from vomo to cast up ; vox 
vocis a voice, a, from voco to call. 

Et and contra on the other hand sunt there are some 
ivords qua3 which deducta though derived a longis from 
primitives with a long syllable, corripiunt make short pri- 
mam the first syllable : ut as, arena sand, arista the beard 
of corn, arundo a reed, ab derived from areo to be dry ; 
aruspex a soothsayer, ab from ara an altar ; dicaxjes^- 
ing, a from dico to speak; ditio power, a, from ditis rich; 
disertus eloquent, a from dissero to dispute ; dux ducis a 
leader, a from duco to lead ; fides faith, a from fido to 
trust ; fragor a crash, fragilis frail, a from frango to 
break ; geniii / have begotten, a from gigno to beget ; 
lucerna a candle, a from luceo to shine ; noto notas to 
mark, a from notu to be known; posui I have put, a from 
pono to put; potui I have been able, a, from possum to be 
able ; salus safety, a from salvus safe; sopor a sound 
sleep, a from sopio to lay asleep. 

Et and alia nonnulla some other words ex utroque 
genere of either sort, quae which relinquuntur are left 
observanda to be observed inter legendum in reading. 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 191 

COMPOSITA compound words sequuntur follow quan- 
titatem the quantity simplicium of their simple words: 
ut as, a from lego legis to read, comes perlego to read 
through ; lego legas to send as an ambassador, allego 
to allege or accuse by messengers ; a from potens power- 
ful, impotens weak ; a from solor to cheer, consolor to 
comfort. 

Tamen however hasc brevia these ivords having short 
syllables, enata though derived a longis from long syllables 
excipiuntur are excepted : ut as, dejero to swear a great 
oath, pejero to forswear, a from juro to swear ; inniiba 
unmarried, proiriiba a bride-maid, a from nubo to be 
married. 



Omne praeteritum every preterperfect tense dissylla- 
bum of two syllables habet has priorem the former syl- 
lable longam long : ut as, legi I have read, emi / have 
bought, raovi / have moved. 

Tamen yet excipias you may except (the words) bibi 
/ have drunk, dedi / have given, scidi / have cut, steti / 
have stood, stiti / have stayed, tuli / have borne or suf- 
fered, et and fidi, &from findo to cleave. 

Geminantia ivords that double primam the first syl- 
lable prgeteriti of the preterperfect tense habent have 
primam the first syllable brevem short; ut as, cecidi 
/ have fallen, a from cado to fall : cecidi / have cut 
or slain, a from casdo to cut, &c. ; didici / have learned, 
fefelli I have deceived, momordi / have bitten, pependi I 
have iceighed, pupiigi / have pricked, tetendi I have 
stretched, tetigi / have touched, totondi I have sheared, 
tutudi I have beaten. 



Supinum dissyllabum a supine of two syllables habet 
has priorem the former syllable longam long : ut as, 
visum to see, latum to bear or suffer, lotum to wash, 
motum to move. 

Excipe except datum to give, itum to go, litum to 



192 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

daub, quitum to be able, ratum to suppose, rutum to rush, 
satum to sow, situm to suffer , statum to stop, et and 
citunij a from cieo cies to stir up ; nam for citum, a 
from cio cis to make to go, quartse of the fourth conju- 
gation, habet has priorem the former syllable longam 
long. 

A FINITA words ending in a producimtur are made 
long : ut as, ama love thou, contra against, erga towards. 

Sed but ita so, quia because, puta suppose, eja ah ! 
sunt are brevia short. 

Item likewise omnes casus all cases in a ending in a 
corripiuntur are made short praster except vocativos the 
vocative cases a Grascis formed from Greek words in as 
ending in as, et and ablativos ablative cases, primae de- 
clinationis of the first declension ; ut as, musa a song; 
regna kingdoms; o .zEnea o JEiieas; musa by a song, bona 
good. 

Numeralia nouns of number in ginta ending in ginta 
habent have finalem the last syllable communem common, 
sed but frequentius more frequently longam long ; ut as, 
triginta thirty. 

II. Desinentia words ending in B, D, T, brevia sunt 
are short : ut as, ab from, ad to, caput the head. 

III. Desinentia words ending in C, producuntur are 
made long : ut as, ac and, sic so, et and adverbium the 
adverb hie here. 

Sed but duo in c two ending in c corripiuntur are 
made short ; nee neither, et and donee until. 

Tria sunt there are three communia common ; fac do 
thou, pronomen hie the pronoun hie this, et and neutrum 
ejus its neuter hoc, modo so that non sit it be not ablativi 
casus of the ablative case. 

IV. E finita words ending in e brevia sunt are short: 
ut as, mare the sea, pene almost, lege read thou, scribe 
write thou. . 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 193 

Autem but omnes voces all words quintae inflexionis 
of the fifth declension in e ending in e producuntur are 
made long : ut as, fide the ablative case of fides faith, 
die the ablative case of dies, a day, una cum particulis 
together with the particles inde enatis that are derived 
of it: ut as, hodie to-day, quotidie daily, pridie the day 
before, postridie the day after : his to these adde add 
fame the ablative case a of fames hunger, tertiae in- 
flexionis of the third declension : item also quare where- 
fore, et and similia the like. 

Secundae personam singulares the second persons sin- 
gular imperativi of the imperative mood secundae conju- 
gations of the second conjugation producuntur are made 
long ; ut as, doce teach, move move. 

Monosyllaba monosyllables in e ending in e producun- 
tur are made long ; ut as, me me, te you, se himself or 
themselves : sed but conjunctiones encliticae the enclitical 
conjunctions, que and, ne whether, ve or, corripiuntur 
are made short 

Adverbia adverbs in e ending in e, deducta derived ab 
adjectivis from adjectives secundse declinationis of the 
second declension, habent have e the letter e longum long : 
ut as, pulchre beautifully, docte learnedly, valde pro for 
valide mightily. Quibus to which the adverbs ferme 5 
fere, almost accedunt are added: tamen yet bene well, 
et and male ill, omnino corripiuntur are always made 
short. 

Postremo lastly, quae such words as scribuntur are 
written a Graecis by the Greeks per rj with the letter ij 
(or long e) producuntur are long natura by nature : ut 
as, Lethe the river Lethe, Anchise the vocative case of 
Anchises, Anchlses, cete whales, Tempe Tempe, the 
name of a pleasant valley in Thessaly. 

V. I finita words ending in i longa sunt are long : 
ut as, domini lords, magistri masters, amari to be loved. 

Mihi to me, tibi to you, sibi to himself or themselves, 
ubi where, et and ibi there sunt are communia common. 

K 



194 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

Nisi except, et and quasi as if, corripiuntur are made 
short. 

Etiam likewise, dativi the dative et and vocativi the 
vocative cases Grraecorum of Greek words, quorum geni- 
tivus singularis the genitive case singular of which exit 
ends in os breve in os with a short termination, corri- 
piuntur are made short : ut as, dativi the dative cases, 
Minoidi from Minois a daughter of Minos ; Palladi 
from Pallas, Minerva ; Phyllidi from Phyllis, Phyllis : 
vocativi the vocative cases, Alexi from Alexis, Alexis ; 
Amarylli from Amaryllis, Amaryllis ; Daphni from 
Daphnis, Daphnis. 

VI. L finita words ending in I corripiuntur are made 
short: ut as, aniinal an animal, Hannibal Hannibal, 
mel honey, pugil a champion, consul a consul. 

Nil, contractum contracted a from nihil nothing, sal 
salt, et and sol the sun, sunt are longa long : et and 
Hebrsea qusedam certain Hebrew words in el ending in 
el; ut as, Michael Michael, Gabriel Gabriel, Raphael 
Raphael, Daniel Daniel. 

VII. N finita words ending in n corripiuntur are made 
short: ut as, an or, Iphigenian (the accusative case of 
Iphigenia), Iphigenia, tamen nevertheless, crimen a crime, 
viden' see you ? in in or into, Ilion Ilium, Ityn (the ac- 
cusative case ofYtjs), Itys. % 

Non not, quin that not, sin but if, producuntur are 
made long : et and Grseca icords of Greek origin in civ, 
t]v, Iv, coy ending in an, en, in, on : ut as, Psean, a hymn 
to Apollo, Hymen Hymen, splen the spleen, delphin a 
dolphin, daemon a spirit, Xenophon Xenophon. 

VIII. O finita words ending in o communia sunt are 
common, sed but frequentius more frequently longa long : 
ut as, dico I say, virgo cz virgin, porro moreover: Sic so 
docendo in teaching, legendo in reading, et alia gerundia 
and other gerunds in do ending in do. 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 195 

Sed but obliqui casus oblique cases in o ending in o 
semper always producuntur are made long : ut as, dativi 
the dative cases, domino to a lord or master, servo to a 
servant: ablativi the ablative cases, templo from the 
temple, damno with loss. 

Adverbia adverbs derivata derived ab abjectivis from 
adjectives producuntur are made long : tantd by so much, 
quanto by how much, liquido clearly, falso falsely, prim 6 
firstly, manifesto manifestly, &c. ; sed but sedulo dili- 
gently, mutuo mutually, crebro frequently, sunt are com- 
munia common : modo now or only et and quomodo how 
semper always corripiuntur are made short 

Quo que likewise, cito soon, ut as et also ambo both, 
duo two, ego I, atque and homo a man or woman, item 
likewise verba the verbs scio / know, nescio I know not, 
puto / think, volo i" wish, vix leguntur producta are 
scarcely ever read long. 

Monosyllaba monosyllables in o ending in o produ- 
cuntur are made long : ut as, do I give, sto I stand. 

Item also Grasca Greek words per co with great o, 
cujusmodi fuerint casus of whatever case they are, pro- 
ducuntur are made long: ut as, nominativi the nomi- 
native cases, Sappho Sappho, Dido Dido ; genitivi the 
genitive cases, Androgeo of Androgeos, Apollo of Apollo ; 
accusativi the accusative cases, Atho Athos, Apollo 
Apollo. Sic et and so likewise ergo (when put) pro for 
causa for the sake of. 

IX. R finita words ending in r corripiuntur are made 
short: ut as, Caesar Ccesar, per by, vir a man, uxor a 
wife, turtur a turtle. 

Autem but these words producuntur are made long ; 
far bread-corn, Lar an household god, Nar the river Nar, 
ver the spring, fur a thief, cur why ; quoque also par 
equal to or like cum compositis with its compounds ; ut 
as, compar a companion, impar unequal, dispar unlike. 

Graeca etiam also Greek words in er ending in er, quae 
which Graecis among the Greeks desinunt end in rip in 

K 2 



196 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

the long e before r, sunt are longa long : ut as, aer the 
air, crater a cup, character a mark or sign, aether the 
shy, soter a deliverer : praster except pater a father et 
and mater a mother, quas which apud Latinos with Latin 
authors habent have ultknam the last syllable brevem 
short 

X. S flnita tcords ending in s habent have pares ter- 
minationes the like terminations cum numero with the 
number vocalium of the vowels ; nempe namely, as, es, is, 
os, us, ys. 

1. As Finita words ending in as producuntur are made 
long : ut as, amas you love, Musas the Muses, majestas 
majesty, bonitas goodness. 

Gr^eca Greek tcords, quorum genitivus singularis whose 
genitive case singular exit in dos ends in dos, sunt are 
brevia short : ut as, Areas an Arcadian, lampas a lamp ; 
genitivo in the genitive case Arcados, lampados. 

Accusativi plurales^Ae accusative cases plural nominum 
crescentium of nouns increasing, corripiuntur are made 
short : ut as, heros heroos an hero, Phyllis Phyllidos, 
Phyllis; accusativi plurales the accusatives plural, heroas, 
Phyllidas. 

2. Es flnita ivords ending in es longa sunt are long : 
ut as, Anchises Anchises, sedes you sit, doces you teach, 
patres fathers. 

Xornina in es nouns ending in es tertias inflexionis of 
the third declension, quse which nouns corripiunt make 
short penultimam the last syllable save one genitivi cres- 
centis of the genitive case increasing, corripiuntur are 
made short ; ut as, miles a soldier, seges standing corn, 
dives rich. Sed but aries a ram, abies a Jir-tree, paries 
the wall of a house, Ceres Ceres, et and pes a foot, una 
cum compositis together with its compounds, ut as, bipes 
having two feet, tripes having three, longa sunt are long. 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 197 

Quoque also es you are, a from sum / am, una cum 
compositis together with its compounds, corripitur is 
made short: ut as, potes you are able, ades you are 
present, prodes you profit, obes you hinder : quibus to 
which penes in the power of potest may adjungi be 
added. 

Neutra words of the neuter gender in es ending in es, 
et and nominativi plurales the nominative cases plural 
Graecorum of Greek words sunt are brevia short : ut as, 
hippomanes a raging humour in mares, cacoethes an ill 
habit, Cyclopes the Cyclops, Naiades the Naiads. 

3. Is finita icords ending in is brevia sunt are short : 
ut as, Paris Paris, the son of Priam, panis bread, tristis 
sorrowful, hilaris merry. 

Vero but obliqui casus plurales the oblique cases 
plural in is ending in is, producuntur are made long : 
ut as, musis the dative and ablative cases plural a of 
musa a muse or song; mensis the dative and ablative 
cases plural a of mensa a table ; dominis the dative and 
ablative cases plural of dominus a lord ; templis the 
dative and ablative cases plural of templum a temple; et 
and quis, pro for quibus whom. 

Producentia such words as make long penultimam the 
last syllable save one genitivi crescentis of the genitive 
case increasing, sunt are longa long : ut as, Samnis a 
Samnite, Salamis an island near Athens ; genitivo in 
the genitive case, Samnitis, Salaminis. 

Qua3 such words as desinunt in is end in is, contracta 
being contracted ex eis from the diphthong eis, sive 
Grseca whether they be Greek, sive or Latina Latin, sunt 
are item likewise longa long: ut as, Simois the river 
Simois, Pyrois Pyrois, one of the horses of the sun, partis 
parts, omnis all ; e, from the words Symoeis, Pyroeis, 
parteis, omneis. 

Omnia monosyllaba all monosyllables in is ending in 
is producuntur are made long ; ut as, vis strength, lis 
strife : praeter except is he et and quis who nominativos 

K 3 



198 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

in the nominative case, et and bis twice apud Ovidium in 
Ovid. 

Secundse persons singulares the second persons sin- 
gular verboruin of verbs in is ending in is, quorum 
secundae persons plurales whose second persons plural 
desinunt in itis end in itis, penultima the last syllable 
save one producta being made long, producuntur item 
are also made long ; ut as, audis you hear, velis you may 
be ivilling, dederis you shall have given : plurali in the 
plural number, auditis, velitis, dederitis. 

4. Os finita tvords ending in os producuntur are 
made long : ut as, honos honour, nepos a grandson, do- 
minos lords, servos servants. 

Compos he that has ability or power in something, 
impos that is unable, or not having power, et and os 
ossis a bone, sunt are brevia short ; et and also Gra^ea 
Greek words per o parvum with little o : ut as, Delos 
Delos, an island in the JEgean sea, Chaos a confused 
heap of all things, Pallados the genitive case of Pallas 
Minerva, Phyllidos the genitive case of Phyllis Phyllis. 

5. Us finita tvords ending in us corripiuntur are made 
short : ut as, famulus a man-servant, regius royal, 
tempus time, amamus we love. 

Autem and producentia words that make long penul- 
timam the last syllable but one genitivi crescentis of the 
genitive case increasing sunt are longa long : ut as, salus 
health, tellus the earth ; genitivp in the genitive case 
salutisj telluris. 

Etiam also omnes voces all words quartae inflexionis 
of the fourth declension in us ending in us sunt longae 
are long, prceter except nominativum the nominative et 
and vocativum the vocative case singulares in the singular 
number : ut as, genitivus singularis the genitive case 
singular manias of a hand; nominativus, accusativus, 
vocativus plurales the nominative, accusative, and voca- 
tive cases plural manus hands. 



PROSODY CONSTRUED. 199 

Etiam also monosyllaba monosyllables in us ending in 
us sunt are longa long : ut as, cms the leg from the knee 
to the ancle, thus frankincense, mus a mouse, sus a sow: 
et and item also Graeca Greek words per ov$ diphthon- 
gum ending with the diphthong ous : ut as, nominativus 
the nominative case Panthus Panthus, Melampus Me- 
lampus ; genitivus the genitive case, Sapphus of Sappho, 
Clius of Clio. 

Atque and nomen the name Iesus Jesus venerandum 
to be reverenced piis cunctis by all godly people. 

6. Ys finita words ending in ys corripiuntur are made 
short ; ut as, chelys a lyre, Othrys Othrys. 

XL IT finita words ending in u producuntur are 
made long : ut as, manu the ablative case of manus a 
hand, genu a knee, amatu to be loved, diu a long time. 

XII. Postremo lastly y finita words ending in y cor- 
ripiuntur are made short : ut as, Coty the vocative case 
of Cotys, Cotys ; moly the plant moly. 



k 4 



200 LATIN GRAMMAR. 



DIRECTIONS FOR TAKING WORDS EST CON- 
STRUING. 

The words most commonly found in a sentence are the nomi- 
native case, the verb, the accusative case of the object, the dative 
case of the person or thing, the ablative case of the instrument or 
cause, or manner. 

1= In the first place look for the verb, and ascertain its number 
and person. 

2. In the second place look for the nominative case, which will 
be of the same number and person as its verb. 

Obs. 1. The nominative must be construed before the verb. 

Obs. 2. The pronouns ego, tu; Me, ilia, Mud; nos, vos ; Mi, illce, 
Ma, are not expressed before a verb, unless it is intended that they 
should strongly mark out the person, &c. whom, &c. they represent. 

3. Next proceed to observe the nature of the verb. If it be 
transitive, it will be followed by an accusative case ; but if it be 
intransitive, it cannot properly take an accusative. 

Obs. Some verbs are followed by an infinitive mood, either 
standing alone or preceded by an accusative case. See Part II. 

4. After the accusative of the object, take the dative of the 
person, if one be used ; and after this 

5. The ablative of the instrument, &c, if it be used. 

6. An ablative case absolute is sometimes used in such a con- 
nection with the sentence as is pointed out in the Syntax. 

7. When any substantive or pronoun- substantive occurs, see if 
it has any adjective, or participle, or pronoun -adjective, in con- 
cord with it ; and if it has, also see if these last have any word 
dependent on them. Further, also, see if the substantive, or pro- 
noun-substantive, has another word in apposition with it. 

8. Words governed by prepositions must be taken with such 
prepositions in that part of the sentence where their force will be 
greatest. 

9. An adverb is usually, though not always, to be taken with 
the verb. 

10. When a relative occurs, it should be taken first of the sen- 
tence, whatever be its case. 

N.B. The foregoing are the principal matters to be observed by 
beginners : others must be learned by practice, and by a strict 
attention to the rules of syntax. 



DIRECTIONS FOR PARSING. 20l 

DIRECTIONS FOR PARSING. 
The Substantive. 

is a noun-substantive of the gender and declen- 
sion. It is of the number, case, before [or after] . 

{Give the rule and decline the substantive.) 

The Adjective. 

is a noun- adjective of terminations. It is of the 

gender, number, and case, agreeing with its substantive 

. {Give the ride for the concord of the adjective and substantive. 

Decline the adjective. Give the degrees of comparison.) 

Obs. Sometimes the substantive to which the adjective belongs is 
understood. When this is so, proceed as far as mentioning the case ; 
then go on as follows : agreeing with its substantive under- 
stood {give the rule for the adjective being used as a substantive), 

and the case, before [or after] . {Give the rule for the 

word being in its particular case. Decline it. Give the degrees of 
comparison.) 

N.B. In the case mentioned in the foregoing observation the 
adjective is the representative of the substantive which is under- 
stood ; hence it requires the same rule as its substantive would 
have if it were expressed. 

The Pronoun-Personad. 

is a pronoun-personal. It is of the number, case, 

before [or after] . {Give the rule. Decline the pronoun.) 

The Pronoun-Adjective. 

is a pronoun-adjective. It is of the gender, 

number, and case, agreeing with its substantive . {Give 

the rule for the concord of the pronoun with its substantive. Decline 
the pronoun.) 

Obs. Sometimes the substantive to which the pronoun -adjective 
belongs is understood. When this is so, proceed as in Obs. on 
adjective. Here, however, of course, there are no degrees of com- 
parison. 

The Pronoun-Relative. 

is a pronoun-relative. It is of the gender, 

number, person, relating to its antecedent {give the rule 

for the relative and antecedent)* and the case before [or after] 

k 5 



202 LATIN GEAMMAE. 

. (Give the rule for the word being in its particular case. 

Decline the relative.) 

The Verb. 

The Finite Verb, i. e. not of the Infinitive Mood. 

is a verb (transitive, intransitive, passive, or deponent, as the 

case may be) of the conjugation. It is of the mood, 

tense, number, person, agreeing with its nominative 

case . (Give the ride. Conjugate "the verb. Go through the 

tense.) 

The Verb of the Infinitive Mood. 

is a verb (transitive, intransitive, passive, or deponent, as the 

case may be) of the conjugation. It is of the infinitive mood, 

tense, the latter of two verbs of which is the former, 

[or depending on the participle, adjective, or substantive , 

or taking the accusative case before it]. (Give the rule. 

Conjugate the verb.) 

The Participle. 

— — is a participle of the tense, from -, a verb (transitive, 

intransitive, passive, or deponent, as the case may be) of the 

conjugation. It is of the gender, number, and 

case, agreeing with its substantive . (Give the rule for the 

concord of the participle with the substantive. Conjugate the verb. 
Decline the participle.) 

Obs. Sometimes the substantive to which the participle belongs is 
wider stood. When this is so, proceed as in Obs. on the adjective, 
only here there will not be any degrees of comparison. 

The Gerunds. 
The Gerund in di. 

is a gerund in di, from , a verb (transitive, intransitive, 

or deponent, as the case may be) of the conjugation. It is used 

as the genitive case, the latter of two substantives, of which ■ 

is the former [oris governed by the adjective ■]. (Give the 

rule. Conjugate the vei^b). 

The Gerund in do. 

is a gerund in do, from , a verb (transitive, intransitive, 

or deponent, as the case may be) of the conjugation. It is used 

as the dative (or ablative) case, and is governed by . (Give 

the rule, Conjugate the verb.) 



DIRECTIONS FOR PARSING. 203 



The Gerund in dum. 

is a gerund in dum, from , a verb (transitive, intransitive, 

or deponent, as the case may be) of the conjugation. It is 

used as the accusative case, and is governed by the preposition 

, or is taken before the infinitive ]. (Give the rule. Con- 

jugate the verb.) 

The Supines. 

The Supine in um. 

is a supine in um, from , a verb (transitive, intransitive, 

or deponent, as the case may be) of the conjugation, and is de- 
pendent on a verb [or participle] of motion towards a place. 

(Give the ride. Conjugate the verb.) 



The Supine in u. 

is a supine in u, from a verb (transitive, intransitive, 

or deponent, as the case may be) of the conjugation, and is 

dependent on the adjective . (Give the rule. Conjugate the 

verb.) 

The Adverb. 

■ is an adverb. (If it be compared, compare it. If it govern 
a case, state what that case is, and what the particular word in the 
text is, and give the rule.) 



The Conjunction. 
is a conjunction, coupling to . (Give the rule.) 

The Preposition. 

is a preposition governing the case. (State what the 

particular word in the text is.) 

The Interjection. 

is an interjection. (If a case depends on the interjection, 

state what that case is^ and what the particular word in the text is, and 
give the rule.) 

k 6 



204 LATIN GRAMMAS. 



DIRECTIONS AND CAUTIONS FOR THOSE BEGINNING 
TO WRITE HEXAMETERS AND PENTAMETERS. 

1. Be careful to attend to the grammatical construction of your 
words, and also not to place them in a way that is forbidden by 
the ordinary rules of the language. For instance ; no part of one 
clause should be mixed up with another clause : nor must que be 
placed between the words it connects, but after the last of them, 
unless, indeed, this last has an adjective in concord with it, in which 
case que may be joined to the adjective, &e. Also when que con- 
nects clauses it may be attached to any word in the second clause. 

2. Do not load your substantives with unnecessary epithets : 
a judicious use of adjectives, in order to mark out some particular 
quality, is not allowable only, but even requisite in poetry. 
NTever use them, however, unless they add force or beauty to the 
idea. 

3. Observe well the commencement of each word, and see if the 
preceding word will be elided, or a short syllable be lengthened 
by it. 

N\B. A short vowel at the end of a word is almost always 
lengthened before sc, sp, st ; but very rarely in any other case. 
This should be carefully remembered. 

4. Let the Caesura in Hexameters occur at the right place: viz. 
— at the first syllable of the third or fourth foot. Remember, 
also, that when it occurs at the first syllable of the fourth foot, 
there should also be one at the first syllable of the second foot as 
well. (See Part II. § 207.) 

5. If a monosyllable occurs at the close of an hexameter, it 
should be preceded by another monosyllable, except in those cases 
where the closing monosyllable elides the preceding word. (See 
Part II. § 207.) 

6. Let there be a judicious admixture of spondees and dactyls. 
A verse consisting mainly of dactyls runs rapidly: mainly of 
spondees runs slowly. An observance of this is necessary to good 
verse. Occasionally, however, a greater number of either one or 
the other may be used according to the nature of the subject : — 
for from what is above said it will be seen that a preponderance of 
dactyls will suit a lively or animated subject; of spondees, one of 
a slow, solemn, or majestic nature. (See Part II. § 207. N\B.) 

7. At the commencement of an Hexameter a monosyllable 
should not be used unless it is intended to call especial attention 



DIRECTIONS FOR HEXAMETERS, ETC. 205 

to something : thus, in me miserum the attention is to be called to 
me ; and this is in a great measure effected by the emphasis that 
naturally attaches to the pronunciation of a monosyllabic word. 

8. As the last syllable of a verse is long in consequence of its 
position, it may naturally be short. Avoid as far as possible 
having a vowel at the close of a verse, if the next verse begins 
with one. 

9. In a Pentameter verse, the first penthemimer must end with 
a word ; it is not allowable to carry on any part of a word into 
the second penthemimer. The two whole feet of the first penthe- 
mimer may be either dactyls or spondees. Observe also that the 
single syllable must be always long either by nature or position. 

10. The second penthemimer must always contain two dactyls 
and a long syllable. The last two words ought to be dissyllables. 
A monosyllable beginning with a vowel may be used at the close 
after a dissyllable ending with a vowel, inasmuch as by the elision 
the two form, as it were, but one word. A trisyllable is very 
rarely used by the poets on account of the harshness with which it 
falls on the ear. A beginner should never employ it, neither 
should he employ a word of four syllables at the close ; for though 
more frequently found than a trisyllable, still its use must be 
regarded as an exception to the strict rules of versification. The 
last syllable may be naturally short, for its position at the end of 
the line makes it long. (See Part II. § 208.) 



206 
PAST II. 

LETTERS. 

§ 1. The Latin Letters are considered to have had a He- 
brew or a Phoenician origin. The language itself belongs 
to the Indo-Germanic or Japhetic stem. 

The number and classification of the letters have been already 
given in Part I. Some further remarks respecting them are here 
made. 

The names assigned to the vowels are mere arbitrary repre- 
sentations of their sounds, and not positive and direct words like 
the alpha, eta, &c. of the Greek alphabet. 

The Liquids, Z, m, n, r, to which f may be added, are sometimes 
called semi- vowels, as having in themselves a sound partaking 
of the character of a vowel ; a vowel necessarily entering into 
their pronunciation. To these, also, the letter s may be added ; 
which is further denominated the sibilant or hissing letter — 
liter a sibilans. 

The remaining consonants are further distinguished not only by 
the general name of mutes, but also by terms descriptive of the 
organ by which they are generated. Thus b, p, v, to which f may 
be added, are called Labials, because pronounced by the lips — 
labia ; c, g, k, q, Palatals, because formed by the palate or roof of 
the mouth — palatum; d, t, Dentals, because sounded by pressure 
of the tongue against the teeth — denies. 

In the ancient Latin language a great similarity of sound, per- 
haps of form also, appears to have attached to r and s. Livy (iii. 4.) 
says, Furios Fusios scripsere quidam. This, also, further appears 
from the double form still obtaining in some words ; as arbor and 
arbos ; honor and honos. 

In words of Greek origin, the Greek ei is expressed by I before 
a consonant ; by i or e before a vowel ; and sometimes by i and e 
indifferently in the same word; as Heraclltus, IphigeniayJEneas, 
Alexandria, and Alexandria, 



SYLLABLES. 



§ 2. As a Syllable implies what is taken together, i. e. pro- 
nounced at one breath, a vowel or a diphthong may form a 
syllable. 

But a syllable is more commonly formed by the combination of a 
consonant or consonants with a vowel or diphthong. 






§ 3, 4.] PKONUNCIATION, ETC. 207 

No other combination of consonants is found at the beginning 
of real Latin words than that of a mute with I or r ; or than that 
of s, with c, p, or t ; or of sc, sp, or st, with I or r ; thus, clausus, 
crassus ; scando, sperno, stemo; scloppus, scribo ; splendidus, spretus; 
stlata, stratus. 

In the middle of words, a consonant between two vowels belongs 
to the last ; as mu-sa. 

When two or more consonants come together, the last, or, if 
they can begin a word, the last two, belong to the following vowel, 
the other or others to the preceding ; as mag~nus, pa-tris ; sump-tus, 
emp-tus. 

X is generally written with the former vowel ; as ex-emplum. 

In compound words the several parts should be kept distinct and 
separate, uninfluenced by the preceding observations : thus, ab-eo, 
sub-actus. Where, also, a consonant is introduced for euphony, it 
belongs to the preceding vowel ; as prod-est, red-eo. 

In some works words are found divided according to the way 
in which they begin in Greek, as well as in Latin; as o-mnis 
(nvaofiai) ; mi-psi ($aipaj) ; i-gnis (jvtiQi), &c. This, however, 
is a method which it appears not desirable to imitate. 

Only two consonants can stand at the end of a word, except in 
those cases where the last is s ; as amant; urbs. 



PRONUNCIATION. 



§ 3. What was the Pronunciation of Latin when spoken 
as a living language cannot now be decided with certainty* 
Each nation that uses it subjects it to its own idiomatic 
rules. 

It should be observed, however, that it is generally held that c 
was pronounced hard, like £, in every collocation. By us it is pro- 
nounced soft, or like s, before e, i, y, ae, oe ; before the other 
vowels and consonants like k. 

Ti, short, obtains the sound of ski before a vowel ; but it has 
its own natural power in the following instances: — 1. When 
naturally long, as totius ; 2. In words of Greek origin, as Mil' 
Hades, JEgyptius ; 3. When preceded by £, s, or #, as Bruttium, 
vastior, admixtio ; 4. When er is added to the infinitive in i, as 
patter. 



INFLECTION. 

§ 4. Inflection — which includes both the declension of 
nouns and the conjugation of verbs — takes place only in the 



208 LATIN GRAMMAE. [§ 5, 6. 

last part of a word, and denotes the respective relations of the 
several parts of the inflected word to one another ; as musa, 
a song ; musce, of a song ; scribo, I write ; scribis, you write. 

That part of a word which remains unchanged after the various 
inflections have been removed is called the theme (themd), as mus-a, 
mus-ce : scrib-o, scrib-is. 



DERIVATION. 



§ 5. Many Latin words have a Greek origin, and chiefly 
through the iEolic dialect. , 

In some instances the change is very perceptible ; as from dvtiiog 
yevog, deiica), SSfiog, Xsojv, furjTrjp, 7rarrjp, x"P T7 Ki to animus, genus, 
dico, domus, leo, mater, pater, charta. 

In other cases where the dialect intervenes, the derivation is not 
so soon seen; as from r Koir\ry]g, iEolic 7:or\Tr]g, is formed po'eta; av, 
JEolic rv, tu. 

Some are obtained by changing the Greek aspirate into s ; as 
from «{, viz* p, vg, come sex, super, sus ; or by substituting v where 
the digamma was anciently used, as rjp, ver ; ic, vis ; olicog, vicus ; 
or by a combination of the two preceding modes, as v\rj, sylva. 



DECLENSION" OF NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 
The First Declension. 

§ 6. The First Declension has four terminations ; a, be- 
longing to Latin nouns ; as musa, a song ; and e, as, es, 
confined to words of Greek origin ; as aloe, an aloe ; JEneas, 
-ZEneas ; dynastes, & prince. 

An old form of the genitive singular was as instead of m. This 
is still found in the words compounded offamilia and pater, mater, 
Miusovfilia; as paterfamilias, &c. 

Another old form of the genitive singular was ai. Thus Virgil 
has aulai, aural, pictai, for aulce, aura, pictai. 

The poets sometimes used um instead of drum, in the genitive 
case plural of patronymics, and words compounded in part of 
colo or gigno ; as, 2Eneadum for 2Eneaddrum ; agricolum for agri- 
coldrum ; Grajugenum for Grajugendrum. 

Anima, the soul ; asina, a female ass ; domma, a mistress ; equa, 
a mare ; famula, a female servant ; filia, a daughter ; nata, a 
daughter ; serva, a female slave ; socia, a female companion, make 
the dative and ablative cases plural in dbus as well as in is. But 



§7.] 



THE SECOND DECLENSION. 



209 



dea, a goddess ; liberta, a, freed woman ; mula, a female mule, in 
dbus only. 

Greek words in e, as, and es, are inflected in the plural number 
(where it is used) after the regular manner : the singular is as 
follows : — 



Fern. 
tf. Alo-e, 
G. Alo-es, 
D. Alo-8e, 
A. Alo-en, 
V. Alo-e, 
A. A16-e. 



Masc. 
N. iEne-as, 
G. iEne-93, 
D. iEne-ae, 
A. JEne-an or am, 
V. ^Ene-a, 
A. iEne-a. 



Masc. 
N. Dynast-es, 
G. Dynast-se, 
D. Dynast-se, 
A. Dynast-en or am. 
V. Dynast- e, a, or a, 
A. Dynast- e or &. 



Of those words which end in as, the Greek form an is usually 
employed in poetry ; the Latin form am in prose. 

Satrdpes, a satrap, makes satrapis in the genitive singular. In 
other respects it follows the inflection of the first declension. 

Nouns in a and e are of the feminine, those in as and es of the 
masculine gender. Except, however, such nouns in a as denote 
the male sex, which are necessarily masculine ; as nauta, a sailor ; 
poeta, a poet, &c. 



The Second Declension. 

§ 7. The Second Declension has eight terminations : four 
of Latin nouns, viz. er, ir, us, um ; as puer, a boy ; vir, 
a man ; dominus, a lord ; regnum, a kingdom : and four of 
Greek nouns, viz. on, eus diphthong, os, and os ; as Pelion, 
Mount Pelium ; Perseus, Perseus ; scorpws, a scorpion ; 
Athos, Mount Athos. These latter are thus inflected in the 
singular number : — 

Neut. Masc. 



N. Peli-on, 
G. Peli-i, 
D. Peli-o, 
A. Peli-on, 
V. Peli-on, 
A. Peli-o. 

Masc. 
N. Scorpi-os, 
G. Scorpi-i, 
D. Scorpi-o, 
A. Scorpi-on or um, 
V. Scorpi-e, 
A. Scorpi-o. 



1ST. Pers-eus, 

G. Pers-eos, ei, i, 

D. Pers-ei, ei, eo, 

A. Pers-ea or eum, 

V. Pers-eu, 

A. Pers-eo. 

Masc, 
N. Ath-os, 
G. Ath-o or i, 
D. Ath-o, 

A. Ath-on, o, or ona, 
V. Ath-os, 
A. Ath-o. 



210 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[§8. 



Panthus or Panthous, Panthus, makes the vocative Panthu ; in 
the other cases it follows dominus. 

The genitive plural is sometimes written urn for drum in this 
declension ; as deum, virum, for deorum, virorum. 

The adjective satur must also be referred to this declension for 
its masculine and neuter genders. 



The Third Declension. 



§ 8. The Third Declension 
tions, and comprises nouns of 

Words Make 

in a atis ; poem-a, dtis; a poem. 

e Is ; mar-e, is ; the sea. 

i Is; sinap-i, is; mustard. 

— itis; oxymel-i, ftz's; oxymel. 
o nis ; car-o, nis ; flesh. 

— inis ; imdg-o, inis ; an image. 

— onis ; Maced-o, onis ; a 

Macedonian. 

— onis ; carb-o, onis ; a live 

coal. 

yos ; mol-y, yos ; the herb 
moly. 

abis ; tr-abs, tr-abis ; abeam. 

actis; l-ac, actis ; milk. 

sedis ; pr-ces, cedis ; a surety. 

Eeris ; <es, arts ; bronze. 

aecis ; f-cex, cecis ; the dregs. 

alis; Hannib-aU alis ; Han- 
nibal. 

alis; anim-dl, alis; animal. 

alcis; c-alx, aids ; the heel. 

anis ; Tit-an, anis; Titan. 

andis ; gl-ans, andis ; an 
acorn. 
i — antis; dodr-ans, antis; nine- 
twelfths or three-fourths 
of an as. 
anx ancis; Uanx^ancis; a dish. 

— angis ; phal-a?ix, angis ; a 
phalanx. 

aps apis ; d-aps, apis ; a feast. 
ar aris ; L-ar. avis ; a house- 
hold god. 

— aris ; calc-ar, aris ; a spur. 

— arris ; /-ar, arris ; bread- 
corn. 



y 

abs 



aex 
al 



alx 
an 

ans 



has very numerous termina- 
every gender, 

Words Make 

in ar atis ; hep-ar, dtis ; the liver, 

ars artis ; p-ars, artis ; a part, 

as adis ; lamp-as, ddis ; a torch. 

— ados ; Tro-as, ados ; a Tro- 

jan woman. 
— - anis ; Mel-as, anis; the river 
Melas. 

— antis ; eleph-as, antis ; an 

elephant. 

— aris ; m-as, aris ; a male. 

— asis ; v-as, asis ; a vessel. 

— assis ; as, assis ; an as. 

— atis ; an-as ; dtis ; a duck. 

— atis ; cest-as, atis ; summer, 
aus audis; fr-aus, audis; deceit. 

ax acis ; p-ax, acis ; peace. 

— acis ; f-ax, acis ; a torch. 
— - actis ; Astyan-ax, actis ; 

Astyanax. 

ibis ; ccel-ebs, ibis ; a single 
person. 

ebis ; pl-ebs, ebis ; the com- 
mons. 

ecis; al-ec, ecis ; fish -brine. 

el lis ; m-el, ellis ; honey. 

emis ; hi-ems, emis ; winter. 

enis ; li-en, enis ; the spleen. 

enis ; Thilopozm-en, enis ; Phi- 
lopcemen. 

inis ; nom-en, inis ; a name. 

endis; hens, endis ; a nit. 

entis ; cli-ens, entis ; a client. 

ipis ; princ-eps, ipis ; a chief 

— upis; auc-eps,upis ; a fowler. 

— ipitis ; prcec • eps, ipitis ; a steep 
place. 



ebs 



el 

ems 



eps 



THE THIKD DECLENSION. 



211 



inx 
irps 



Make 

ris ; vent-er, ris ; the belly. 

eris ; verb-er, eris ; a blow. 

eris ; v-er, eris ; spring. 

ineris ; it-er, ineris ; a jour- 
ney. 

Sells ; p-es, edis ; a foot. 

edis; merc-es, edis; a reward. 

eris ; Cer-es, eris ; Ceres. 

essis ; b-es, essis ; two-thirds 
of an as. 

etis ; pari-es, etis ; a wall. 

etis ; qui-es, etis ; rest. 

is ; nub-es, is ; a cloud. 

idis ; obs-es, Idis ; a hostage. 

itis ; mil-es, itis ; a soldier. 

ecis; fenis-ex, ecis ; a hay- 
cutter. 

ecis ; al-ex, ecis ; fish-brine. 

egis ; gr-ex, egis ; a flock. 

egis ; l-ex, egis ; a law. 

ectilis ; supell-ex, ectilis ; fur- 
niture. 

icis ; J rut-ex, wis ; a shrub. 

lgis ; rem-ex, igis ; a rower. 

is ; sen-ex, is ; an old per- 
son. 

ills ; pug-il, His ; a boxer. 

inis; delph-in, inis; a dol- 
phin. 

ingis; sph-inx, ingis; a sphinx. 

irpis ; st-irps, irpis ; a root. 

ionis ; pug-io, ionis ; a dagger. 

ienis ; An-io, ienis ; the A mo. 

entis ; Simo-is, entis ; the Si- 
mois river. 

eris ; pulv-is, eris ; dust. 

idis ; lap-is, idis; a stone. 

Idis; glis, idis ; mouldiness 
in bread. 

inis ; Salam-is, inis ; Salamis. 

iris ; gl-is, iris ; a dormouse. 

Itis; Samn-is, itis ; a Sam- 
nite. 

is ; nav-is, is ; a ship. 

issis ; sem-is, issis ; half of 

an as. 
icis; filix, ids; fern, 
icis ; rad-ix, ids ; a root, 
igis ; str-ix, igis ; a screech- 
owl. 



Words Make 

in ix ivis ; n-ix, ivis ; snow. 

ol olis; s-ol, olis ; the sun. 

on onis; Chalced-on, onis ; Chal- 
cedon. 

— onis; Babyl-on, onis; Baby- 

lon. 

— ontis; Ctesiph-on,ontis ; Cte- 

siphon. 
ons ondis ; fr-ons, ondis ; a leaf. 

— ontis ; fr-ons, ontis ; a fore- 

head, 
ops opis; Pel-ops, opis ; Pelops. 

— opis ; Cyd-ops, opis ; Cy- 

clops, 
or ordis; c-or, ordisj the heart. 

— oris ; lab-or, oris ; labour. 

— oris ; marm-or, oris ; marble, 
ors ortis; m-ors, ortis ; death, 
os odis ; cust-os, odis ; a guard. 

— o'is ; her-os, ois ; a hero. 

— oris ; m-os, oris ; a manner. 

— otis i c-os, otis ; a whetstone. 

— ovis ; b-os, ovis ; an ox. 

— ossis ; os, ossis ; a bone. 

ox ocis ; Cappad-ox, ocis ; a 

Cappadocian. 
— * ocis ; v-ox, ocis ; a voice. 

— octis ; n-ox, octis, a night. . 
— - ogis; Allobr-ox, ogis; an 

Allobrogian. 
rbs rbis ; u-rbs, rbis ; a city, 
rx rcis ; a-rx, rcis ; a citadel, 
uis uinis; sang-uis,uinis ; blood, 
ul iilis ; cons-ul, ulis ; a consul, 
uls ultis ; p-uls, idtis ; pottage, 
ur oris ; rob-ur, oris ; an oak. 

— uris ; fulg-ur, uris ; light- 

ning. 

— uris ; f-ur, furis ; a thief, 
us eris ; op-us, eris ; a work. 

— odis ; trip-us, odis ; a tripod. 

— oris ; pec-us, oris ; cattle. 

— udis ; pec-us, itdis ; a sheep. 

— udis; pal-us, udis; a marsh. 

— uis ; s-us, uis ; a swine. 

— untis ; JPessi-nus, untis ; 

Pessinus. 

— uris; tell-us, uris ; the earth. 

— iitis ; virt-us, utis ; virtue, 
ut itis; cap«ut, Uis ; the head. 



212 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 8* 



Words Make 
in ux ucis ; cr-ux, iicis ; a cross. 

— ucis; l-ux, ucis; light. 

— ugis ; conj-ux, ugis; a 

spouse. 

— ugis ; fr-ux, ugis ; fruit, 
yn ynis ; Trach-yn, ynis ; 

Trachys. 
yns ynthis ; Tir-yns, ynthis ; 

a Tirynthian. 
ynx yncis ; l-ynx, yncis ; a lynx, 
yps yphis ; gr-yps, gryphis ; a 

griffin, 
yr yris; mart-yr, yris; a 

martyr. 



Words Make 

in ys ydis ; chlam-ys, ydis ; a 
cloak. 
ys yis ; chel-ys, yis ; a tortoise. 

— ynis ; Trach-yt, ynis ; Tra- 

chys. 

— yos ; Teth-ys, yds ; Tethys. 
yx ycis ; cal-yx, yds ; the cup 

of a flower. 

— ycis ; bomb-yx, yds ; a silk- 

worm. 

— ychis; sardon-yx, ychis; a 

sardonyx. 

— ygis ; Phr-yx, ygis ; a Phry- 

gian. 



a. Some nouns form the Accusative Singular in im only ; as 
amussis, a rule ; centussis, a hundred asses ; decussis, ten asses ; 
ravis, hoarseness ; sitis, thirst ; tussis, a cough ; vis, strength. 

The following take sometimes em, but more frequently im in the 
accusative singular ; febris, a fever ; pelvis, a basin ; puppis, the 
stern of a ship ; restis, a rope ; securis, an axe ; turris, a tower. 

The following take em generally, yet sometimes im ; aqudlis, a 
watering-pot ; clavis, a key ; messis, harvest ; navis, a ship ; torquis, 
a collar. So, also, bipennis, a two-edged axe ; buris, a plough-tail ; 
cucumis, a cucumber ; neptis, a grand- daughter ; sementis, sowing- 
time. 

Many names of rivers and towns form the accusative in im, as 
Albis, Hispdlis, Tiberis, make Albim, Hispdlim, Tiberim. 

b. The Ablative Singular regularly ends in e, as nube, lapide. 
But originally the dative and ablative singular appear to have 
had a common termination, which was e or i indifferently. In later 
times i was appropriated to the dative, e to the ablative. 

The termination i, however, is continued in the ablative case 
singular of such words as make im exclusively in the accusative ; 
as amussis, amussim, aniussi, &c. 

In those nouns which have both em and im the ablative ends in 
either e or i; yet febri, pelvi, securi, turri, are found more fre- 
quently than febre, pelve, secure, turre. JRestim has commonly 
reste ; and navem, navi, Clavis and sementis make indifferently 
clave and clavi, semente and sementi. Securis has always securi. 

The following nouns are also occasionally found with their 
ablative singular in i ; amnis, a stream ; avis, a bird ; civis, a citizen ; 
classis, a fleet ; fustis, a club ; ignis, fire ; orbis, a circle ; unguis, 
a nail, &c. ; supellex, furniture. 

Vesper, the evening, forms both vespere and vesperi ; and imber, 
a shower, imbre and imbri. 

Names of months ending in er and is form the ablative in i only ; 
as Aprllis, Aprili ; October, Octobri. 



§ 8.] THE THIRD DECLENSION. 213 

Neuter nouns in al, ar, and e, usually make the ablative singular 
in i ; as calcar, a spur, calcari ; mare, the sea, mari. The following, 
however, retain e in the ablative singular ; baccar, the herb baccar ; 
far, bread corn ; gausdpe, coarse cloth ; hepar, the liver ; jubar, a 
sun-beam ; nectar, nectar ; prcesepe, a stall. 

Also the proper names of towns in e make their ablative in e, as 
Ccere y Prceneste, Recite. So also the mountain, Soracte. 

Reti is the ablative of rete ; but rete of the form retis. 

Rus makes both ruri and rure ; but with this distinction, that ruri 
generally means " from the country ; " rure, " in the country,'* 

The Plural Number. 

c. Parisyllabic nouns (i. e. nouns which have an equal number 
of syllables in the nominative and genitive singular) make the 
genitive plural in turn; as nubes, nubis, nubium; amnis, amnis, 
amnium. 

Exc. But the following take um in the genitive plural ; ambdge 
(only found in ablative singular), a circuit ; apis, a bee ; canis, a 
dog ; juvenis, a young person ; panis, bread ; vates, a sooth-sayer ; 

»*/ 
volucris, a bird. To these add the irregular noun senex, senis, an 
old person ; and the plural noun opes, wealth ; which make their 
genitives in um, in order to distinguish them from senium, old age, 
and opium, opium. 

d. Imparisyllabic nouns (*. e, those which are unequal in the no- 
minative and genitive cases singular), form the genitive plural in 
um ; as lapis, lapidis, lapidum. 

Exc. Proper names of peoples ending in as generally take ium ; 
as Arplnas, a man of Arpinum, Arpinatium ; Fidenas, & man of 
Fidenae, Fidenatium. So, also, Penates, household Gods (as if 
from a singular Penas), Penatium ; and optimdtes, the aristocrats 
(as if from optimas), optimatium and optimatum. Civitatium is 
sometimes found as the genitive case plural of civitas. In like 
manner Quiritium and Samnitium, the genitives of Quiris and 
Samnis, sometimes occur, and are deviations from the general 
rule. 

e. Dissyllables and polysyllables in ns and rs make the genitive 
plural in ium and um ; as parens, a parent, parentium and parentum ; 
cohors, a cohort, cohortium and cohortum. In this class of words 
the termination um is more rare. 

/. Monosyllables ending in s or x, preceded by a consonant, take 
ium in the genitive plural ; as mons, a mountain, montium ; arx, 
a citadel, arcium. But such as end in s or x, preceded by a vowel, 
make um; slsJIos, a flower, florum ; lex, a law, legiim. 

Exc. The following, however, take ium , as, the Roman coin 
(as), assium ; faux (obsolete), a jaw, faucium ; glis, a cLormouge, 



214 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



C§8. 



glirium; lis, a law-suit, litium; mas, a male, marium; nix, snow, 
nivium ; nox, night, noctium ; os, a bone, ossium ; strix, a screech- 
owl, strigium ; vis, strength, virium. Also, fraus, deceit, and mus, 
a mouse, frequently make fraudium and murium. 

g. Those neuter nouns in al, ar, and e, which make the ablative 
singular in i, form the genitive plural in ium ; as animal, animali, 
animalium; calcar, calcdri, calcarium; mare, mari, marium. Prce- 
sepe, also, has prcesepium. They also form the nominative, accu- 
sative, and vocative plural in ia ; but far is found a plural only in 
nominative and accusative, farra. 

h. The names of festivals, which are found in the plural number 
only, sometimes form the genitive in drum, after the manner of the 
second declension; as Agonalia, a festival in honour of Janus, 
Viminalia, a festival in honour of Jupiter Viniinalis, make Ago- 
naliorum and Viminaliorum. Some take both um and orum; as 
Parentalia, a festival in honour of dead relatives, takes Parenta- 
lium and Parentaliorum. So Saturnalia, a festival in honour of 
Saturn, has Saturnalium and Saturnaliorum. In like manner, An- 
cile, a sacred shield, has both ancilium and anciliorum. 

i. The accusative case plural of masculine and feminine nouns, 
forming the genitive plural in mm, used, in the purer age of the 
language, to be written is, and eis diphthong : the termination es 
was, however, also in use, and was in time altogether adopted as 
the correct form. 



Irregular Nouns, 
k. BoS) an ox, &c. ; sus, a hog ; vis, strength, are thus declined :- 



Sing. 


Plural. 


N. Bos,^ 


N. Boves, 


G. Bovis, 


G. Bourn, 


D. Bovi, 


D. Bobus and Bubus, 


A. Bovem, 


A. Boves, 


V. Bos, 


Y. Boves, 


A. Bove. 


A. Bobus and Bubus. 



Sing. 
N. Yis, 
G. Vis, 
D. - — 
A. Vim, 
V. Vis, 
A. Vi. 



Sing. 
X. Sus, 
G. Suis, 
D. Sui, 
A. Suem, 
V. Sus, 
A. Sue, 

Plural. 
~N. Vires, 
G. Virium, 
D. Viribus, 
A. Vires, 
V, Vires, 
A. Viribus. 



Plural. 

K Sues, 

G. Suum, 

D. Suibus and Subus, 

A« Sues, 

V. Sues, 

A. Suibus and Subus. 



Jupiter is also an irregular word, and is declined as follows : 
N. Jupiter, G. Jovis, D. Jovi, A. Jovem, V. Jupiter, A. Jove. 



§8.] 



THE THIRD DECLENSION. 215 



Greek Nouns, 



I The Greek termination os (oc) is often adopted by the 
poets in the genitive in the place of the Latin is ; as, Daphnidos, 
Nereidos, Pallddos, Tethyos : in prose, the Latin termination is is 
generally employed. Yet Pan, the God Pan, usually has Panos, 
to distinguish it from the genitive, panis, bread. For the same 
reason it has the accusative Pana, not Panem. 

In words derived from the Greek contracted nouns in ic, eog, 
the Greek termination is found only in late and unclassical writers, 
the Latin form in is being preferred : thus basis is found, not 
baseos ; and poesis, not poeseos. 

m. Proper nouns belonging to the first declension of simple 
nouns form the accusative in en and em, as JEschines, JEschinen, 
and JEschinem ; Ulysses, Ulyssen, and Ulyssem. So also with some 
belonging to the first declension of contracted nouns, as Sophocles, 
Sophoclen, and Sophoclem. 

The poets commonly adopt the Greek termination of the accu- 
sative case of Greek simple nouns increasing in the genitive case, 
in preference to the Latin one ; as, Agamemnona rather than 
Agamemnonem; Cycldpa rather than Cyclopem. Amongst prose 
writers, however, of the purer age of Latinity, the converse holds 
good. Cicero, however, uses (Ether a and aera. Yet with those 
who followed him the Greek form is very common : thus we find 
Babylona, Lacedcemona, Marathona, Nabin, Tigrin. So also with 
nouns of the contracted form in ?iq, as Periclea, Stratoclea, &c. 

The Greek words in is forming the genitive in is take the termi- 
nations im and in : thus, poesis, poesis, poesim, and poesin. Those 
making the genitive in idis take im and in, and seldom idem ; as, 
Paris, Paridis, Parim, Parin, seldom Paridem. But those in otis 
have im, in, and idem ; as, Phthiotis, Phthiotim, Phtiotin, and 
Phthiotidem. Those which form only 18a in Greek, take idem, as 
tyrannis, tyrannidem. 

n. Greek neuters in os, as far as they belong to the third declen- 
sion, are found only in the nominative and accusative, and in the 
plural number these cases end in e ; as cetos, a whale, cete; melos, a 
song, mele. For their other cases they must be referred to a form 
falling under the second declension ; as, cetus, melum. Tempi, (a 
vale in Thessaly) is found only in the plural number. 

o. Proper names in as, antos, make the vocative in a ; as, Calchas, 
Calchantos, Calcha : those in es, or is, make it in either es or e ; as, 
Sophocles, Sophoclis, Sophocles or Sophocle : those in is and ys 
reject the final letter s; as, Daphnis, Daphni; Cotys, Coty. But 
of those which form the genitive singular in idos, the vocative is 
often made correspondent to the nominative ; as, Daphnis, Phyllis, 
Alexis, in both nominative and vocative. 

p. The nominative plural is sometimes written es (ec), instead of 



216 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 9. 

the Latin form es ; as, Arcades, &c. When Horace writes Sardis, 
it is in imitation of the Greek form in eTc, ^apMg. 

q. The termination on (W) sometimes attaches to the genitive 
plural in the titles of books ; as, Metamorphoseon, epigrammateon. 
Curtius uses Maleon for the Latin Maliensium, the people of Malea. 

r. Ovid has Lemnidsi and Trodsi, the datives, formed from Lem- 
niddes, Troddes. This imitation of the Greek occurs only in the 
writings of the poets, and even there but seldom. 

The dative and ablative cases of Greek words, whose nominative 
case singular ends in a, are more commonly made in is than ibus ; 
as poematis, rather than poematibus, from poema : so epigrammatis 
rather than epigrammatibus, from epigramma. So also with other 
kindred nouns. 

s. The plural accusative in as (ac^) is found in many writers, both 
in prose and poetry. With the former it is not so common. Yet 
Cicero uses aspidas, Arcddas, and one or two other words. Livy 
has Maceddnas. So Cassar uses this termination when writing of 
the barbarian nations ; as Allobrogas, &c. ; while Tacitus writes 
Vangionds. 

t. Proper names in es* etis, are thus inflected : N". Thales, G. 
Tkaletis and Thalis, D. Thaleti and Thali, A. Thaletem, Thalem, 
and Thalen, V. Tholes, A. Thalete and Thale. 

Feminine nouns in o, derived from the Greek contracted form 
in w, ooq ovc, are generally inflected after the Greek manner, the 
Latin terminations being of rare occurrence. Of this sort are 
Calypso, Dido, Id, Sappho, and also echo. They are thus in- 
flected: N. Calypso, G. Calypsus and Calypsonis, D. Calypso 
and Calypsoni, A. Calypso and Calypsonem, Y. Calypso, A. <7a- 
lypso and Calj/psdJie. 



The Fourth Declension. 

§ 9. The Fourth Declension, which is formed from the 
third by crasis or contraction, has two terminations, us and 
u ; words in us are either masculine or feminine, those in u 
are neuter. 

By some critics and writers it is said that the neuter nouns in u 
are not aptotes in the singular number, but that they form the 
genitive in us, and the dative in ui. This, however, is against the 
express testimony of Priscian (vi. 4.) ; who, instancing cornu, 
states distinctly that there was also used a masculine form, cornus, 
us. This is quite borne out by Lucretius (ii. 3881.), Lumen 
per cornum transit; and by Cicero (De Nat. Deor. ii. 59.), 
Nares similes cornibus Us, qui ad nervos resonant in cantibus ; and 
yet again by Gellius fxviii. 6.), Quern quum ederet, cornum esse 
eopice dicebat. 



§ 10, 11.] COMPOUND NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 217 

The ancient form of the genitive was ww, which was in time 
contracted into us : thus in Terence anuis is found for anus. In 
some old writers also tumulti, ornati, and senati, are found for 
tumultus, ornatus, senatus. 

The dative ui is sometimes contracted into u : thus, Virgil, con- 
cubitu for concubitui ; and Terence vestitu for vestitui. 

The genitive plural uum is sometimes contracted into um; as, 
currum for curruum. 

The following words commonly form the dative and ablative 
plural in ubus ; arcus, a bow ; acus, a needle ; artus, a limb ; lacus, 
a lake ; partus, a birth ; portus a harbour ; quercus, an oak ; specus, 
a cave ; tribus, a tribe ; cornu, a horn ; genu, a knee ; veru, a spit. 
Other words generally take thus ; as fructus, fruit ; manus, a hand. 
Yet here also the form ubus is sometimes employed. 

Jesus is thus declined : N. Jesus, G. Jesu, D. Jesw, A. Jesum, 
V. t/estt, A. Jesw. 



The Fifth Declension. 

§ 10. The Fifth Declension has only one termination : — 
es. 

When the genitive ei is preceded by a vowel the e is long ; as, 
diei; when by a consonant, it is short; w&,fidei. 

There was an old termination of the genitive singular in es : 
this remains in the word Diespiter — {Dies or diei pater). 

In poetry the genitive often ends in e ; as, die for diei, and some- 
times also in prose, as in Cicero, Csesar, Sallust. 

Horace and Livy use the dative in e; as, fide for fidei, pernicie 
for perniciei. Corn. Nepos uses i ; as, pernicii for perniciei. Livy 
also uses plebi for plebei, as the genitive of plebes, an old form of 
plebs. 

Only three nouns of this declension are complete in the plural 
number : these are dies, a day ; res, a thing ; and after Cicero's 
time, species, an appearance. Other words have only the nomina- 
tive, accusative, and vocative cases plural. 

Nouns of this declension are of the feminine gender, except dies, 
which is common in the singular, masculine in the plural ; and its 
compound meridies, which is masculine only. The use of dies in 
the feminine, however, is far more common than in the masculine. 



COMPOUND NOUNS SUBSTANTIVE. 

§ 11. Some substantives have a nominative formed from 
two unaltered words ; &s,jusjurandum, from jus, of the third 

L 



218 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 12. 

declension, jurandum of the second : respublica, from res of 
the fifth declension, publica of the first. When this is the 
case, both forms are declined, as jusjurandum> Gen. jurisju- 
randi, &c. ; respublica, Gen. reipublicce, &c. 



IRKEGULAK NOUN'S. 



§ 12. Irregular nouns are divided into I. Defective, II. 
Redundant. 

I. Defective nouns are divided into, 1. Those which are not 
inflected. 2. Those which have only certain cases. 3. Those 
which have only the singular number. 4. Those which have only 
the plural number. 

1. Nouns not inflected are called aptotes.* To those mentioned 
at page 87. Part I., may be added the letters of the Greek and 
Latin alphabets, alpha, beta, &c, a, b, c, &c. Also all Hebrew 
names as such, and which have not been modified either after the 
Greek or Latin languages; as, Joseph, Raphael; except Daniel, 
David, which form Danielis, Davldis. Also some foreign words ; 
as, git, or gith, or githi, fennel-flower; manna, manna. 

Obs. Sponte is used mostly in combination with a possessive 
pronoun. Jussu, and some other verbal substantives in u, formed 
from supines, are either joined to an adjective, or else are followed 
by a dependent genitive ; but natu depends on an adjective. 
Dicis depends on causa or gratia ; nauci attaches itself to some part 
of facio or sum; infitias follows ire; suppetias is joined to ferre 
expressed or to be supplied ; secus, sex, with the adjective virile 
or muliebre, is used in apposition to all cases. 

2. Nouns which have only certain cases are called diptotes |, 
triptotes, tetraptotes, pentaptotes, according to the number of cases 
attaching to them. See page 87. Part I. 

3. Nouns which have only the singular number are called Sin- 
gularia tantum. Such are 

a. Abstract nouns ; as, justitia, justice; superbia, pride ; dulcedo, 
sweetness ; aviditas, greediness ; juventus, youth ; senium, old age. 

Exc. Abstract nouns are, however, occasionally used in the 
plural to denote the frequent repetition of an action ; as, concursus 
fiebant, exitus bellorum: also qualities which attach to several 
objects; as, proceritates arborum, hominum industrias. So also 

* A, not; irrooais, a case. 

f dvo, two; rpels, three; r4rrapes, four ; tt4pt€, five ; irr&cns, a case. 



§ 12.] IRREGULAR NOUNS. 219 

amoves, ira, &c, are frequently used by the poets in the place of 
amor, ira, &c. 

b. The names of herbs, which when growing are not large enough 
to be considered apart ; as, apium, parsley. 

Exc. The poets, however, occasionally use the plural ; as thyma, 
thyme ; minthce, mint. 

c. The names of grain ; as, triticum, wheat. 

Exc. The plural number ; as, hordea, barley, is sometimes used 
by the poets, and by prose writers in imitation of them. 

d. The names of metals, and other mineral productions ; as, 
aurum, gold ; argentum, silver ; marmor, marble. 

Obs. When the plural of such words is used, it points out several 
individual objects made out of them ; as, (Era, bronze statues; or it 
is employed by poetic license ; as, marmor a for marmor, 

e. The names of liquids and of such things as may be melted ; 
as, aqua, water ; vinum, wine ; pix, pitch. 

Obs. Aqua, however, is used to signify mineral springs ; and 
both aquce and unda>, a large collection of water; so also vina 
wines of different kinds. 

/. Words which cannot have a plural, from their very nature : 
as nemo, nobody ; nihil, nothing. 

g. Collective nouns, in which the total is regarded, not the 
component parts ; as, vulgus, the mob ; plebs, the commons ; 
supellex, furniture. 

h. Words which have no plural from custom only. Such are, 



JEther, the sky. 
Barathrum, a pit. 
Diluculum, day-break. 
Ccelum*, heaven. 
Fama, fame. 
Hepar, the liver. 
Humus, the ground. 
Justitium, a vacation. 
Lethum, death. 
Lues, a plague. 



Meridies, noon- day. 
Penus, victuals. 
Pontus, the sea. 
Prolubium, desire. 
Pus, corrupted matter. 
Solum, the open sea. 
Tabes, a wasting disease. 
Venia, pardon. 
Vespera, the evening. 
Virus, poison. 



4. Nouns which have only the plural number, are called 
Pluralia tantum. See p. 88. Part I. These may be classified 
under the following divisions : — 

a. Collective nouns belonging to persons, in which the com- 
ponent parts are regarded, rather than the total ; as, major e?. 
ancestors ; liberi, children ; ccelicolai, the celestials. 

* Cceli is found only in Ecclesiastical writers, and once in Lucretius. 
l 2 



226 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 13. 

N. B. When an individual is to be pointed out from among a 
class thus expressed, it is done by unus, &c. ; as, unus majorurn, 
unus de liberis, &c. 

b. Parts of the body ; as, artus, limbs ; exta, the intestines ; 
prcecordia, the diaphragm, &c. 

c. Material compound objects, wherein the component parts that 
form the whole are regarded ; as bigce, a, carriage with two horses ; 
quadrigce, a carriage with four horses ; spolia, spoils ; vepres, a 
bramble bush, &c. 

d. Names of games and festivals ; as, Bacchanalia, Saturnalia, 
festivals in honour of Bacchus and Saturn, &c. So, also, natalitia, 
a birth-day entertainment ; repotia, a carousing on the day follow- 
ing an entertainment ; sponsalia, a betrothal feast. 



e. Names of days in the Roman calendar : calendce, the calends ; 
idus, the ides ; nonce, the nones. 

f. Names of certain towns ; as, Athence, Athens ; Bactra, Bactra. 
Those that end in i denote, for the most part, either the town or 
its inhabitants, as Delphi, Delphi, also the Delphians ; Leontini, 
Leontini, also the Leontines. But Veii, Yeii ; the people, Veientes. 

II. Redundant nouns are divided into, 1. Such as have more 
than one form ; 2. Such as have more than one gender. 

1. Those which have more than one form are called Hetero- 
clita* Such are barbaria and barbaries ; mollitia and mollifies. So 
also lawns, which makes the genitive in lauri and laurus, &c. &c. 

2. Nouns which, besides a different form, take in consequence 
a different gender, are called Heterogenea^ ; as, callus (masc.) 
and callum (neut), hard skin ; jugulus (masc.) and jugulum (neut.), 
the throat. So also Pergamus (fern, sing.) and Pergdma (neut. 
plur.) Troy ; rastrum (neut. sing.) and rastri (masc. plur.), a rake, 
&c. See also page 87. Part I. 



NOUNS WITH DIFFERENT MEANINGS IN 
SINGULAR AND PLURAL. 

§ 13. Some words which, in the singular, imply a single 
object, denote, in the plural, not merely a plurality of such 
objects, but are even used as plur alia tantum, denoting a 
complex object, bearing some affinity to the meaning of the 
word in the singular. Such are 

* ^Erepos, another ; kX'ktis, declension. 
•j* "Erepos, another ; yevos, gender. 



§14.] 



ADJECTIVES. 



221 



Singular, 
JEdes (an undivided edifice), a 

temple. 
Animus, mind. 
Aqua, water. 
Auxilium, help. 
Bonum, a, good, or blessing. 
Career, a prison. 

Castrum, a castle. 
Codicillus (rare), a log. 
Comitium, a place in the Roman 

Forum. 
Copia, plenty. 
Cupedia, daintiness. 
Facultas, power. 
Fortuna, fortune, chance. 
Gratia, favour. 
Hortus, a garden. 
Impedimentum, a hindrance. 
Litera, a letter (of the alphabet). 
Ludus, play. 
Naris a nostril. 
Natalis, a birth-day. 
Opts (nom. ops, obs.) help. 
Opera, labour. 
Pars, a part. 
Rostrum, a beak. 

Sal, salt. 
Spiritus, breath. 
Tabula, a board. 



Plural. 

JEdes (a divided edifice) a 
house. 

Animi, spirit, pride. 

Aquce, mineral springs. 

Auxilia, auxiliary troops. 

Bona, property. 

Carceres, the turning point in 
a race-course. 

Castra, a camp. 

Codicilli, tablets, hence writings. 

Comitia, assemblies of the Ro- 
man people. 

Copies, forces. 

Cupedice, dainties. 

Facultdtes, means. 

Fortunes, fortune, property. 

Gratice, thanks. 

Horti, pleasure-grounds. 

Impedimenta, baggage. 

Literce, a letter (an epistle). 

Ludi, public games. 

Nares, a nose. 

Natdles, lineage. 

Opes, resources, wealth. 

Operce, work-people. 

Partes, a party or faction. 

Rostra, the orator's platform in 
the Roman forum. 

Sales, wit. 

Spiritus, pride, courage. 

Tabula, an account-book. 



To these may be added 



Epulum, a solemn feast (neut.). 
Fastus, pride (4th dec). 
Forum, the forum (neut.). 



Epuloe, a banquet (fern.). 
Fasti, the calendar (2nd dec). 
Fori, (inasc) the gangways of a 
ship. 



ADJECTIVES. 

§ 14. Adjectives are inflected like substantives, as pointed 
out at pp. 11, 12, 13. The rules that influence the one, 
for the most part influence the other also. 

L 3 



222 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[§14- 



a. Adjectives that form the ablative singular in i only, form 
the neuter nominative, &c. plural in ia; as, tristis, tristi, tristia. 
Those that form the ablative in e or i also form the nominative 
plural in ia ; as, felix, felice or felici, felicia ; sapiens, sapiente 
or sapienti, sapientia. 

JExc. Comparatives, however, take only a; as melior, meliore 
or meliori; meliora. Veins also has Vetera, though it takes, in the 
ablative singular, both vetere and veteri. 

b. Plus has plura only, in good classical writers : pluria is un- 
classical. Yet the compound complures, which loses its compara- 
tive power, and is used merely to signify u several," has both 
a and ia. 

c. Plerusque is obsolete ; yet Sallust has pier 'ague juvenilis, and 
nobilitas ; pjlerceqae Africce (dative) ; plerumque exercitum. The 
genitive plural is not found ; plurimorum is used in its place. 

d. Made and macti supposed to be derived from the obsolete 
mactus, are found only in combination with the imperative of 
sum : necesse, neuter nominative with est, erat, fuit, &c. ; and 
accusative with some part of liabeo : necessum, in old writers, 
with some third person of sum. To these may be added damnas, 
with esto or sunto ; and potis, pote, in poetry, with some third 
person of sum. 

e. The superlative degree points out not only the highest state of 
a thing, but also something very great. 

Flumen Rhenus latissimus atque altissimus (Caes. B. G. 1, 2.), 
" Very broad, and very deep." 

f. The following adjectives have no comparative degree : 
Bellus, pretty, bellissimus, I Inclitus, famous, inclitissimus. 
Diversus, different, diversissimus. Novus, new, novissimus. 
Falsus*, false, falsissimus. Sacer, sacred, sacerrimus. 

Also the participial meritus has a superlative meritissimus. 

g. The following have no superlatives : 



Agilis, nimble, 
Agrestis, rustic, 
Aldcer, active, 
Ater, black, 
Ccecus, blind, 
Credibilis, credible, 
Docilis, teachable, 
Deses, slothful, 
Jejunus, fasting, 



agilior. 
agrestior. 
alacrior. 
atrior. 
cacior. 
credibilior. 
docilior. 
desidior. 
jejuni or. 



Opimus, fat opimior. 

Probabilis, probable, probabilior. 
Proclivis, inclined, proclivior. 
Propinquus, near, propinqiuor. 
Protervus, wanton, protervior. 
Salutaris, wholesome, salutarior. 
Satur, full, saturior. 

Surdus, deaf, surdior. 

Teres, smooth, teretior. 



Longinquus, distant, longinquior. 

h. Declivis, sloping, has neither comparative nor superlative 
decree. 



* Falsius is found once in Petronius. 



§ 15.] NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 223 

Anterior, preceding ; sequior, following ; have neither the posi- 
tive nor superlative degree. 

i. Adjectives formed in part from dico, I saj;facio, I do ; loouor, 
I speak ; volo, I wish ; form their comparative and superlative by 
changing us into entior and entissiraus : thus, 

Maledicus, abusive, maledicentior, maledicentissimus. 

Magnificus, magnificent, magnificentior, magnificentissimus. 

Magniloquus, boastful, magniloquentior, magniloquentissimus. 

JBenevolus, kind, benevolentior, benevolentissimus. 

But mirificus, wonderful, makes both mirificentissimus and 
mirificissimus. 

k. Dives, besides ditior, ditissimus, takes the forms divitior and 
divitissimus. 

I. The following irregular comparisons are found : 

Assiduus, attentive ; assiduior, assiduissimus. 

JEgregiuSy excellent ; egregiissimus, 

Exiguus, small; exiguior, exiguissimus. 

Perpetuus, continual; perpetuior, perpetuissimus. 

Pius, dutiful; piissimus. 

Streuuus, vigorous ; strenuior, strenuissimus. 
Moreover Plautus uses at Trin. iv. 2. 146. a superlative 
formed from ipse ; viz. ipsissimus, the very self-same. 



NUMERAL ADJECTIVES. 

§ 15. Numeral adjectives are divided into, 1. Cardinal, which 
point out the number ; as, unus, " one ; " duo, " two," &c. : 2. Or- 
dinal, which mark the order or succession ; as, primus, " first ; " 
secundus, " second," &c. : 3. Distributive, which signify so many 
each ; as, singuli, " one each ; " bini, " two each," &c. : 4. Multi- 
plicative, implying so many times over ; as, simplex, " once over ; " 
duplex, "twice over," or "two-fold," &c. : 5. Proportional, which 
indicate proportion ; as, duplus, " twice as much," or " many ; " 
triplus, " three times as much," or " many." 

N.B. These last are usually found only in the neuter gender. 

a. All cardinal adjectives from one to twenty, inclusive, are ex- 
pressed by some single word, except in the following instances, in 
which more than one mode of writing is employed : viz. thirteen, 
tredecim or decern et tres, occasionally tres et decern; sixteen, 
sedecim or sexdecim, decern et sex ; seventeen, septemdecim, better 
decern et septem ; eighteen, duodeviginti, sometimes decern et octo ; 
nineteen, undeviginti, sometimes decern et novem. From twenty- 
one to ninety-nine, both included, either the smaller number is 

l 4 



224 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 16. 

put first with et, or the larger without et. Above a hundred the 
larger number precedes either with or without et. All numbers 
above a thousand are expressed by a multiplication of mille ; as, 
bis mille, two thousand. 

b. From Distributives are formed adjectives in anus, which re- 
present a thing as having so many units ; as, nummus quinarius, a 
coin with five units, or asses; nummus denarius, a coin with ten 
units or asses : versus senarius, a verse with six units or feet. 

c. The date of a year is expressed by annus, and the requisite 
ordinal adjective or adjectives ; as, Annus millesimus octingentesi- 
mus quinquagesimus secundus, the year 1852. 



romax xumeral figures. 

§ 16. "With the exception of M. for mille, a thousand, the Romans 
represented numbers by arbitrary signs. A perpendicular line 
(represented by I) was used by them to denote One, Two lines 
crossing each other diagonally (whence was formed X) signified 
Ten ; while half of this figure (V) was their Five. A perpendi- 
cular line with another line at right angles with it at the lower end 
(L, whence came L) denoted Fifty; while another line added at 
right angles to the upper part of the last-named figure (C) denoted 
One hundred. C was soon deprived of its angles and represented 
by the more easy form of C. The perpendicular line with C 
inverted (0) made their Five hundred ; and from this was formed 
D, representing the same value. Each subsequent was equi- 
valent to our "cypher : thus 13 (or D) = 500 ; 100 = 5000 ; 
1000 = 50,000/ The number was doubled by putting C as often 
before the perpendicular line as after it ; thus CIO = 1000 ; 
CCIOO = 10,000; CCCI000 = 100,000. 

I. 1. VI. 6. XL 11. XVI. 16. XXX. SO. LXXX. 80. 

II. 2. VII. 7. XII. 12. XVII. 17. XL.-40. XC. 90. 

III. 3. VIII. 8. XIII. 13. XVIII. 18. L. 50. C. 100. 

IV. 4. IX. 9. XIV. 14. XIX. 19. LX. 60. CX. 110. 
V. 5. X. 10. XV. 15. XX. 20. LXX. 70. M. 1000. 

Hence it will be seen that a numeral sign (or a combination of 
numeral signs) placed to the right of the representative of an 
equal or larger amount must be added to it : to the left, must be 
subtracted from it: VI. = V+L = 6; XYI. = X +VI. = 16 ; 
XX. = X-f X. = 20; but IV. = V-I. = 4; IX. = X-L=9; 
XL. = L — X. = 40. 



§ 17, 18.] FRACTIONS, ETC. 225 

FRACTIONS. 

§ 17. Fractions are expressed in the following ways : — 

1. By an ordinal adjective with pars, either expressed or to be 
supplied : dimidia pars, \ ; tertia pars, or tertia, % ; quarta pars, 
or quarta, \. 

Obs. Pars is never omitted with dimidia in the best authors. 
Another way of expressing half is by putting dimidius in concord 
with its substantive, or by using dimidium substantively. Luna 
est major quam dimidia pars terra, Cic. de Nat Deor. ii. 40. ; 
Dimidia circuli forma, " a half circle," Plin. ii. 59. So in Cicero's 
pun upon his brothers bust : Frater meus dimidius major est quam 
totus, Macrob. Sat. ii. 8. Hibernia dimidio minor quam Britannia, 
Caes. B. G. v. 13. Instead of sexta is found dimidia tertia; and 
instead of octava, dimidia quarta. But here dimidia forms, at it 
were, a portion of the following word. 

2. When the fraction mentioned consists of one part less than 
the number of parts into which the whole is divided, the cardinal 
number denoting the lesser amount is used in combination with 
partes ; as duce partes, f ; tres partes, f , &c. 

3. Sometimes a mode corresponding wholly to the English is 
employed, viz. the cardinal and ordinal adjectives are used with 
an ellipse of partes ; as tres quintce, f ; sex septima, -§-, &c. 

4. Sometimes the fraction is broken up; as dimidia pars et 
tertia, i. e. J + i == 1 5 quinta pars et septima, i. e. \ + -f = £§. 
Thus Pliny, H. N. vi. 39., Horce quatuordecim atque dimidia cum 
trigesimd parte unius horce, i. e. 14 + \ + 3V = 14 T 8 ¥ ; i. e. 14 hours, 
32 minutes. 



PRONOUNS. 

§ 18. For Pronouns, see Part I. p. 17. 

It should be observed that, in order to give emphasis to the 
personal pronouns, the affix met is found added to them in all 
cases, except the genitive plural, and also the nominative and 
vocative singular of tu. This addition to them is about tanta- 
mount to the English word " self; " as egomet, " I myself," &c. Still 
greater emphasis is produced by the further use of ipse ; as egomet 
ipse, " I my own self," or u my very own self." When tu is to be 
made emphatic, te is added; as tute, "you yourself;" and to this 
met may also be joined : tutemet, " your very own self." Se is 
often doubled for emphasis, and also for euphony. 

Of the demonstrative pronouns, hie, ille, iste are called direct ; 
is indirect ; ipse and idem emphatic demonstratives. Is is also 
sometimes called the " adjunctive " pronoun. Instead of cujus and 
cui, the genitive and dative of the relative qui, the old writers 
employed quojus and quoi. 

l 5 



226 LATIN GEAMMAE. [§ 19. 



§ 19. Explanation of certain Grammatical Terms employed 
in the following Syntax. 

Adjective attributive. See § 27. 1. 

— predicative. See § 27. 2. 

Apodosis clause containing the consequence or re- 
sult. 

Clause a member of a proposition. 

— demonstrative . clause containing the demonstrative pro- 

noun, &c. 

— dependent clause depending on one preceding. 

— independent ... clause not depending on one preceding. 

— objectival clause used as the object of a verb. 

— relative clause containing the relative pronoun, 

— subjectival clause used as the subject of a verb. 

Genitive, objective See § 46. Obs. 1. a. 

— possessive ... genitive denoting property or possession. 

— subjective ... See § 46. Obs. 1. b. 

Infinitive, objectival ... infinitive used as the object of a verb. 

— subjectival... infinitive used as the subject of a verb. 

— substantival . infinitive used as a substantive. 

Object the accusative after transitive verbs to 

which the action of the subject as de- 
noted by the verb passes immediately on. 

Oratio obliqua the language employed by a writer in 

stating what another said, &c. 
" recta the very words of the writer, &c. himself. 

Predicate that which is stated of the subject. 

Predicated stated concerning. 

Proposition a combination of words, whereby some- 
thing is set forth, and afiirmed, denied, 
or inquired, respecting some person or 
thing. 

Protasis clause containing a supposition or limita- 
tion. 

S ubj ec t that of which something is stated. 



§ 20—22.] syntax. 227 

SYNTAX. 

The Nominative Case and the Verb. 
The Verb with Personal Subjects. 

§ 20. A verb preceded by two or more subjects of the 
singular number is put in the plural if one, at least, of them 
denotes a person. 

Consules declarantur P. Scipio Nasica, L. Calpurnius JBestia. 
Sail. Jug. 27. 

JEodem lecto Scipio atque Hasdrubal adcubuerunt. Liv. xxviii. 8. 

Nee dubitare, quin Syphax regnumque ejus jam in Romanorum 
essent potestate. Liv. xxviii. 18. 

Obs. 1. When Senatus and populus (Romanus, Sfc.) are united 
by et, a plural verb is used, if these two component parts of the 
state are to be regarded separately ; but a singular verb, if the 
idea of the whole state collectively, as one body, is to be pre- 
sented to the mind. 

Populus et Senatus Romanus placide inter se rempublicam trac- 
tdbant. Sail. Jug. 41. 

Senatus et Populus Romanus beneficii et injuries memor esse solet. 
Sail. Jug. 104. 

Obs. 2. With the expression, Senatus Populusque, a singular 
verb is employed. 

Senatus Populusque Romanus intelligit. Cic. Ep. ad Div. v. 8. 

Ubi Senatus Populusque Romanus esset. Hirt. Pell. Alex. 68. 

§ 21. But when a verb is preceded by two or more per- 
sonal subjects, and one is to be brought prominently forward 
as the principal, the verb is placed nearest to it, and con- 
forms to it in number. 

Homerusfuit et Hesiodus, ante Romam conditam. Cic. Tusc. i. 1. 

Obs. In an enumeration of persons in the singular, where each 
is to be presented separately to the mind, the verb is placed last, 
in the singular number, and in the person of the nearest subject. 

TJt enim tu nunc de Corioldno, sic Clitarchus, sic Stratocles de 
Themistocle finxit. Cic. Brut. 11, 

§ 22. The verb is in the plural when it is predicated of 
two or more persons of whom one is represented by a nomi- 
native case singular, the other or others by an ablative 
preceded by cum. 

x 6 



228 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 23—25. 

Demosthenes cum ceteris erant expulsi. Corn. Nep. Phoc. 2. 

Lentulus cum ceteris constituerant. Sail. Cat. 43. 

Obs. Yet the verb is in the singular, if the person represented 
by the nominative singular is to be especially and principally 
marked. 

Ipse cum expeditis coJiortibus inter primos erat. Sail. Jug. 46. 

Metellus cum exercitu conspicatur. Sail. Jug. 49. 

§ 23. When a verb is preceded by two or more subjects 
of different persons, it is put in the plural number and in 
the first person, if one of such subjects be of the first per- 
son ; but if they be of the second and third persons, then 
the verb is in the second person plural. 

Ego et suavissimus Cicero valemus : — si tu et Tullia, lux nostra, 
valetis. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 3. 

Obs. 1. The same rule holds good where one of the subjects is 
a person, the other a thing. 

Debemur morti nos nostraque. Hor. A. P. 63. 

Obs. 2. An exception, however, to the rule occurs, when one of 
the personal subjects is to be especially emphasized ; in which case 
the verb is placed nearest to it, and in its number and person. 

Ego et Cicero meus flagitabit. Cic. Ep. ad Att. iv. 17. 



The Verb with Subjects denoting " Things." 

§ 24. When two or more singular subjects denoting things 
precede a verb, it is put in the singular, if they are to be 
regarded as collectively denoting a simple idea ; but in the 
plural, if they represent separate and distinct ideas. 

Eas gloria, imperium, potentia sequebatur. Sail. Cat. 12. 
Ratio et constantia ducis copias trans vexit. Tac. Agr. 18. 
Metus atque mozror invasere civitatem. Sail. Jug. 39. 
Fortitudo et sapientia vix videntur posse sejungi. Cic. Phil. xiii. 3. 

§ 25. But when of any number of subjects denoting 
things one at least is in the plural, the verb is also in the 
plural, unless particular emphasis attaches to one of them in 
the singular number; in which case the verb is placed 
nearest to it in the singular number, and thus brings it 
prominently forward. 

Stipendium, alia, qua bello usuiforent, decernuntur. Sail. 

Gloria opesque inventce sunt. Sail. Jug. 70. 

Ubi plerique thesauri, filiorumque ejus multus pueritiai cultus erat. 
Sail. Jug. 74. 



§ 26, 27.] syntax. 229 

Miscellaneous Kules. 

§ 26. 1. When, in narrative, the writer employs the first person 
plural, he intends either to carry the reader along with him, as it 
were, or else to express what others heard, saw, felt, &c. in com- 
mon with himself. When he uses the first person singular, he 
restricts himself to the declaration of his own view, &c. 

Vidimus sub divo Vespasiano Veledam. Tac. Germ, 8. 
Metellum magnum virumfuisse comperior. Sail. Jug. 45. 

2. The subject is sometimes omitted before the third person 
plural in other cases than the unemphasized pronouns, and par- 
ticularly when a common saying or proverb is mentioned. Dicunt 
or aiunt, sc. homines. 

3. Sometimes dicit or ait is omitted before the quoted words of 
another person. 

De quo pr cedar e familiar is noster JSnnius, sc. ait. Cic. Cat. Maj. 4. 
Laniger contra timens, sc. dicit. Phaed. i. 1.6. 



The Substantive and Adjective, &c. 

§ 27. Adjectives and adjectival words may be divided 
into attributive and predicative. 

1. An attributive adjective is one joined to a substantive, 
pointing out some inherent or essential quality attaching to it : as 
amnis rapidus, " a rapid stream ; " puer bonus, " a good boy." 

2. A predicative adjective, &c. is one which is affirmed of its 
substantive, and points out some quality which does not necessarily 
belong to it, but which holds good of it, as represented by the 
writer, under particular circumstances, or at a particular time ; as 
amnis est rapidus, " the stream is rapid ; " puer est bonus, " the boy 
is good;" i.e. as above mentioned, either under particular cir- 
cumstances, or at a particular time. Beyond these circumstances, 
or this time, the quality will not extend, unless it be further 
stated that it will. 

Obs. Closely allied in meaning to this is the use of the adjective, 
&c. in what may be termed "apposition;" i.e. when it is em- 
ployed in the place of an adverb or an explanatory clause, and 
denotes the state of the substantive or pronoun during the time 
of the action, &c. denoted by the verb. 

Tollunt se celeres. Virg. 2En. vi. 202. Celeres= celeriter. 

Cyrus eo sermone, quern moriens habuit, negat, &c. Cic. Cat. Maj. 8. 
moriens = quum moreretur. 

QuumAgnppa eumflens atque osculans oraret. Corn. Nep. Att. 22. 
flens atque osculans = una cumfletu atque osculis. 



230 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 28 — 31. 

Attributive Adjective. 

§ 28. An attributive adjective, &c. belonging to two or 
more substantives is always in the gender of the nearest. 

Vigebat patrius mos et disciplina. Cic. Cat. Maj. 9. 

Metellum multi filii^ jUia>, nepotes, neptes in rogum imposuerunt. 
Cic. Tusc. i. 35. 

Obs. So also with an adjective, &c. in apposition : — 

Ccesaris omni et gratia et opibus sic fruor ut meis. Cic. Ep. ad 
Div. i. 9. 

Predicative Adjectives^ fyc. 

§ 29. Sometimes a neuter singular predicative adjective is 
used of a masculine or feminine substantive. 

Triste lupus stabulis, maturis frugibus imbres. Virg. Ec. iii. 80. 
Quum omnium rerum mors sit extremum. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vi. 21. 
Obs. In this case the adjective appears to be used substantively. 

§ 30. A neuter plural predicative adjective is used both of 
two or more things devoid of life, though they are of the 
masculine or feminine gender, and also of persons and things 
conjointly named ; provided that in either instance they are 
regarded merely as matters, and the idea of gender is not 
connected at all with the statement. 

Ni virtus fidesque vestra spectata mihi forent. Sail. Cat. 9. 

Transacta astas, sparsi numeric prcesumta quies (videbantur) tarda 
et contraria bellum inchoaturo. Tac. Agr. 18. 

Romani regem regnumque Macedonia sua futura (esse) sciunt. 
Liv. xl. 10. 

Obs. 1. Sometimes, however, the adjective is in the gender and 
number of the nearest substantive, if that is to be strongly marked. 

Salus, liberie fama, fortunes sunt carissimce. Cic. 

Obs. 2. If in the combination of persons and things the reader's 
attention is to be directed rather to the living subject, then the 
gender of such living subject is employed. 

Rex regiaque classis una profecti (sunt). Liv. xxi. 50. 

Compare §§ 20. 24. for verb. 

§ 31. When two or more subjects of the singular number, 
and denoting things, precede a verb of " being" or " calling " 
to which is joined a predicative adjective, &c, such predica- 
tive adjective, &c. will be in the gender of the nearest sub- 
ject, if all the subjects together form one compound idea. 



§ 32—35.] syntax. 231 

Animus et consilium et sententla civitatis posita est in legibus. Cic. 
pro Claent. 53. 

Parentes carissimos habere debemus, quod ab iis nobis vita, matri- 
monium, libertas, civitas tradita est Cic. post Red. 2. 

Compare § 24. for the verb. 

§ 32. If, however, the subjects designate persons the 
plural is used, and the adjective is in the masculine if one of 
the subjects be masculine. 

Qudm pridem pater mihi et mater mortui essent. Ter. iii. 3. 11. 

Compare § 20 for the verb. 

Obs. The rule holds good as to the gender when the subjects 
are of the plural number. 

Effigies sacrce Divum Phrygiique Penates visi ante oculos astare. 
Virg. 2En. iii. 148. 

§ 33. If the subjects be of the plural number and denote 
things, the predicative adjective, if placed after them, will be 
in the plural number and the neuter gender. 

Secundce res, honores, imperia, victoria? fortuita sunt. Cic. Off. 
ii. 16. 

Leges cultusque pleraque (sunt) Sidonica. Sail. Jug. 78. 

Obs. Occasionally there is a departure from this rule, and the 
predicative adjective, &c. is in concord with the nearest subject if 
it is to be strongly marked. 

Ut brachia atque humeri ad sustinenda arma liberi ab aqua esse 
possent. Ca3S. B. G. vii. 56. 

Donaque ac fruges super eum (ferunt) a multitudine congestas. 
Liv. vii. 6. 

§ 34. When, however, the predicative adjective is placed 
before the subjects, it is in concord with the nearest, if it be 
in the plural : otherwise the construction pointed out in the 
foregoing rules will hold good. 

Missa (sunt) eb cohortes et C. Annius prcefectus. Sail. Jug. 77. 
Naturd inimica sunt libera civitas et rex. Liv. xliv. 24. 

Miscellaneous Kules. 

§ 35. 1. An adjective &c. sometimes agrees with the gender im- 
plied in a noun, and not its grammatical gender, provided, however, 
such noun is used of persons. This is especially the case with millia. 

Capita conjurationis ejus, qucestione habita, virgis casi ac securi 
percussi (sunt). Liv. x. 1. 

Latium Capuaque agro multati. Liv. viii. 11. 



232 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 35. 

Millia sex sine timore perterriti, sine spe salutis inducti, ex castris 
egressi, ad Rhenum finesque (Germanorum) contenderunt. Cass. 
B. G. i. 27. 

2. Substantives are sometimes used as adjectives : — especially 
those in tor formed from transitive verbs. These last have commonly 
a feminine form in trie, which is also used adjectively. While 
further still, a neuter plural in tricia is likewise found in an ad- 
jectival force : Populum late regem, Virg. ; ' Regina pecunia, Hor. ; 
Contemptor animus, Sail. ; Raptores lupi, Yirg. ; Victor animus, 
Sail.; Victrices Athence, Cic. ; Victricia arma, Virg. ; Ultricia bella, 
Sil. Ital. 

Obs. The poets employ proper names derived from the Greek, 
and ending in as and is in the same way ; as, Pelias hasta; Sithonis 
unda. Ovid. 

3. When an adjective of the positive degree is coupled to multus, 
the conjunction is not rendered into English. 

In consule nostro multce bonceque artes erant (Sail. Jug. 28.), 
" Many good qualities." 

4. Adjectives derived from proper names, and sometimes also 
from appellative nouns, are found in the place of a dependent geni- 
tive. Labor Hercideus for Herculis, Hor. ; Sulldni milites for Sulla, 
Sail.; Regia utilitas for Regis, Tac. ; Herllis JUius for Heri, Ter. 

5. Primus (adjective) in all genders, joined with a subject of a 
verb, points out the person or thing of whom, &c. it is used, as 
being the first to do, or suffer, &c. the action or state denoted by 
the verb : i. e. before any other person, &c. But primiim (adverb) 
points out that the subject of the verb did or suffered the action 
or state denoted by the verb in the first place : i. e. before pro- 
ceeding to any thing else. 

(Duillius) qui Poenos classe primus devicerat. Cic. Cat.Maj. 13. 
Primus Romam elephantos (Curius) duxit. Eut. ii. 14. 
Primum /regit Corcyrceos. Corn. Xep. Them. ii. 3. 
Obs. The same distinction holds good between solus and solum. 
Solus ille aberat Athenis libenter. Corn. Xep. Chab. iii. 4. 
Soli omnium opes atque inopiam pari ad/ectu concupiscunt. Tac. 
Agr. 30. 

AitC tandem ? Una de re solum est dissensio f Cic. de Leg. i. 20. 

6 Infimus, imus, summits, primus, medius, ullimus, and some others, 
are at times used to point out where the substantive to which they 
are attached is lowest, highest, &c. : so that they represent (in its 
required case) injima, &c. pars ; and their substantive, a dependent 
genitive. 

Mittit homines ad infimos montes. Corn. Nep. Plum. ix. 6. 

Injimos monies = injimas partes montium. 
Amphoras summas operit auro etargento. Corn. Kep. Hann. ix. 3. 
Amphoras summas = summas partes amphorarum. 



§ 36—38.] syntax. 233 

Relative and Demonstrative Pronouns. 

§ 36. When a clause forms the antecedent id quod is at 
times used instead of quod alone. 

Existimans, id quod accidit, se (Aspim) imprudentem parvd manu 
oppressurum. Corn. Nep. Bat iv. 3. 

Catilina, id quod factu facillimum erat, omnium flagitiorum atque 
facinorum circum se catervas habebat. Sail. Cat 14. 

Obs. In this construction the clause beginning with id quod pre- 
cedes that to which it relates. In grammatical strictness id is in 
apposition to the clause referred to, while quod relates to id. 

§'37. When a word or sentence is explained by a substan- 
tive in connection with sum, dico or dicor, voco or vocor, and 
other similar verbs, the relative is usually in concord with 
such explanatory word. 

Tusculum se contulit, quce civitas non longe ab urbe est Eut. i. 11. 

Celebrant carminibus antiquis, quod unum apud illos memorice et 
annalium genus est Tuistonem deum. Tac. Germ. 2. 

Locus in car cere, quod Tullianum dicitur. Sail. Cat. 55. 

Obs. 1. When the noun to be explained is to be distinguished 
from another of the same kind, or from a foreign word, the general 
rule is followed. 

Flumen est Arar, quod in Rhoddnum inftuit Cass. B. G. i. 12. 

TJnus erat toto natures vultus in orbe, Quern dixere Chaos. Ovid. 
Met i. 6. 

Ad eum locum, qui appellatur Pharsdlus, applicuit Caes. B. C. 
iii. 6. 

Obs. 2. Closely connected with this is the use of the relative 
with gens and civitas to define a people. 

Volscos, quce gens est non longe ab urbe, vicit Eut. i. 8. 

Non longe a Tolosatiorum finibus absunt; qua civitas est in pro- 
vincial. Cses. B. G. i. 10. 

N.B. The foregoing construction occurs, however, at times in 
other combinations than with the verbs named in § 37 ; and with 
the demonstrative as well as the relative. 

Tribuni plebis, resistentibus collegis, continuare magistratum nite- 
bantur ; quce dissensio totius anni comitia impediebat Sail. Cat. 37. 

Philenon ara, quern finem imperii Carthaginienses habuere. Sail, 
Jug 10. 

Syphax Romam mittitur ; qua re audita, &c. Eut. iii. 20. 

Idem velle atque nolle ; eafirma amicitia est. Sail. Cat. 20. 

§ 38. When a relative refers to two or more antecedents 
of the singular number it is put in the plural. 



234 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 39 — 41. 

Quis est, qui C. Fabricii, M\ Curii non cum caritate aliqud 
memoriam usurpet, quos nunquam videritf Cic. Lad. 8. 

Obs. 1. If the antecedents be persons, and of different genders, 
the relative is put in the masculine in preference to the feminine. 

Mulieres etpueri, qui visum processerant, fugere. Sail. Jug. 85. 

Obs. 2. If the antecedents be things, even though some or all of 
them are of the masculine or feminine gender, jet the relative, &c. 
if the plural is used, is found in the neuter. 

Pro virtute audacia, largitio, avaritia vigebant. Quce tametsi 
animus aspernabatur, &c. Sail. Cat. 3. 

Subveniendum est menti atque animo. Nam nac quoque, &c. 
Cic. Cat. Maj. 11. 

Primb pecunia, deinde imperii cupido crevit : ea quasi mater ies 
omnium malorunifuere. Sail. Cat. 10. 

Obs. 3. Also, when things are denoted, the relative, &c. is 
generally in the number and gender of the nearest antecedent, if 
esjDecial reference is made to it. 

Neque flumen neque mons erat, qui fines discerneret. Sail. Jug. 79. 

Obs. 4. If the antecedents be persons and things conjointly, the 
relative, &c. will assume the masculine gender if one of the persons 
be of the male sex ; but if none be of the male sex, but the female 
sex alone is spoken of, then the feminine. 

Sensus nostros non parens, non nutrix, non magister, non poeta, non 
scena deprarant; non multitudinis consensus abducit a vera. Animis 
omnes tenduntur insidia> vel ab Us, quos modb enumeravi, &c. Cic. 
de Leg. i. 17. 

§ 39. The relative, &c. sometimes refers to the gender 
implied in a noun, and not its grammatical gender. 

Scepe enim interfui querelis, quce C. Scdinator, quce Sp. ATbinus 
deplorare solebant. Cic. Cat. Maj. 3. 

Vicit in senatu pars ilia, qui vero pretium aid gratiam ante- 
ferebant. Sail. Jug. 15. 

Fatale monstrum ; qua 3 generosiiis Perire quarens. Hor. Od. i. 
37. 21. 

§ 40. When a relative, &c. refers to a collective noun of 
the singular number, it is often put in the plural. 

Casar equitatum pramittit, qui videant, &c. Cass. B. G. i. 15. 

§ 41. The relative clause sometimes precedes the demon- 
strative, especially when any matter is to be brought pro- 
minently forward. 

Quocirca et absentes adsnnt; et, quod difficilius dictu est, mortui 
vivunt. Cic. Lad. 7. 

Ubi, qua Metellus agebat, ex nunciis accepit. Sail. Jug. 



§ 42 — 45.] syntax. 235 

§ 42. The relative sometimes attracts the substantive out 
of the demonstrative clause into its own, and has it in its 
own case. 

Ita ferebat duo, qua maxima putantur oner a. Cic. Cat.Maj. 5. 
Urbem quam statuo, vestra est. Virg. 2En. i. 573. 

§ 43. When a relative refers to a word to which a super- 
lative adjective naturally belongs, it attracts such superlative 
into its own clause. 

Coriolos civitatem, quam habebant optimam, perdiderunt. Eut. i. 8. 

§ 44. If a relative is strictly required twice in reference to 
the same antecedent ; and if the construction requires that 
the first time it should be in the nominative, and the second, 
in some other case, then, in the place of such other case 
a corresponding case of the demonstrative is sometimes 
used. 

Omnes turn fere, qui nee extra urbem hanc vixerant,nec eos aliqua 
barbaries domestica infuscaverat, recte loquebantur. Cic. Brut. 74. 

Nee eos, for nee quos. This construction is not uncommon in 
Cicero. 

Obs. Occasionally this construction obtains when the cases 
are the same, and when, therefore, the conjunction alone would 
suffice. 

Quern (i. e. Pythagoras) Phliuntem ferunt venisse ; eumque cum 
Leonte principe Phliasiorum docte et copiose qucedam disserere. Cic. 
Tusc. v. 3. 

Eumque for quemque, or even the conjunction alone. 

Miscellaneous Eules. 

§45. — 1. The demonstrative pronoun is often omitted before 
the relative, especially when it is in the same case with it. 

Accipere se, qua liberis inviolata reddat. Tac. Germ. 18. 

Ccesar cognovit Considium, quod non vidisset, pro viso sibi nunci- 
dsse. Cses. B. G. i. 22. 

In Ex. 1. qua = ea qua : in Ex. 2. quod = id quod. 

Obs. But when the demonstrative is emphatic, it is invariably 
expressed. 

Neque eos, qui fee ere, pcenitet aut pudet. Sail. Jug. 31. 

Constituerunt ea, qua ad projiciscendum pararent, comparare. 
Caes. B. G. i. 3. 

2. The relative is sometimes attracted into the case of the ante- 
cedent, after the Greek mode of expression. 



236 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 46. 

Quum scribas et aliquid agas eorum, quorum consuesti, gaudeo. 
Cic. Ep. ad Fam. v. 14. 

3. In order to avoid the frequent repetition of the conjunction, 
the relative is often used to connect propositions in the place 
of the demonstrative and et ; so that in this construction qui = 
et hie. 

In primis est senectus : quam ut adipiscantur omnes optant Cic. 
Cat. Maj. 2. 

Accidit ut Athenienses Chersonesum colonos vellent mittere. Cujus 
generis quum magnus numerus esset, Sue. Corn. Xep. Milt. i. 1, 2. 

4. Talis, tantus, tot, are followed in comparisons by qualis, quantus, 
quot. Of these tot and quot are not declined. The others assume 
the gender and number of the same substantive, if both have 
reference to it. 

Tale scilicet, quale cujusque studium in superior e vita fuit Cic. 
Cat. Maj. 8. 

Nullam concionem unquam vidi tantam, quanta nunc vestra est. 
Cic. Phil. vi. 7. 

Obs. 1. Sometimes two different persons or things are compared ; 
in which case the above adjectives attach themselves to their re- 
spective substantives. 

Amicum talem habere cupiunt, quales ipsi esse non possunt Cic. 
Lai. 22. 

Quale solet silvis brumali tempore viscum Fronde virere nova 
Talis erat species auri. Virg. 2En. vi. 205. 

Tantam eorum multitudinem nostri interfecerunt, quantum fuit diei 
spatium. Caes. B. G.'A. 11. 

Obs. 2. Talis, tantus, tot, are often omitted in the demonstrative 
clause. 

Aut mihi carmen, Quale meo Codro, concedite. Virg. Ec. vii. 21 

Parit ova, quanta anseres. Plin. H. N. viii. 25. 

Portis alii bipatentibus adsunt, Millia quot magnis nunquam venire 
Mycenis. Virg. JEn. ii. 330. 



SUBSTANTIVES. 
Genitive after the Substantive. 

§ 46. The genitive dependent on a substantive shows the 
relation in which it stands to that substantive. The two 
together express one simple idea. 

Obs. 1. This genitive is of two kinds : subjective and objective. 

a. The subjective genitive points out that (1.) which is made 



§ 47, 48.] syntax. 237 

done, &c. by the governing substantive, or (2.) which belongs to 
it : (1.) Signum Praxitelis, a statue of (i. e. made by) Praxiteles ; 
Promissa Dei, the promises of (i. e. made by) God ; Peccata homi- 
num, the sins of (t. e. committed by) men. (2.) Patris domus, 
the house of (i. e. belonging to) the father ; barba capellce, the 
beard of (i. e. belonging to) the goat ; juventce spatium, the space of 
(i. e. belonging to) youth. 

N.B. These divisions of the subjective genitive are sometimes 
also called (1.) genitivus conjunctivus, (2.) genitivus possessivus. 

b. The objective genitive — which usually follows substantives 
derived from transitive verbs, but sometimes from other verbs — 
denotes the object referred to by the governing substantive. P<e- 
titio consulatus, " a seeking of (or canvassing for) the consulship ; " 
{consulatum peter e, where consulatum is the object of peter e). Urbis 
obsidio, "the siege of the city;" (urbem obsidere, where urbem is 
the object of obsidere). Tcedium vitce, u weariness of life ;" (tcedet 
me vitce, where vitce is the remoter object dependent on tcedet), 

Obs. 2. After many words the context alone can decide whether 
it be the subjective or objective genitive that is employed ; timor 
hostium may be either " fear inspired in," or " caused by," " the 
enemies :" amor filii, " love shown to," or "by a son :" fuga exer- 
cituSy " the fleeing from," or " the flight of an army." 

N.B. In order to avoid this ambiguity, a preposition is often em- 
ployed, especially after words denoting a " feeling : " and this is 
particularly the case when the governing word is itself a genitive. 

Ab his initiis noster in te amor prof ectus auxit paternam solicitudi- 
nem. Cic. JEp. ad Fam. xiii. 29. 

Odium in hominum univer sum genus. Cic. Tusc. iv. 11. 

Si quid in te residet amoris erga me. Cic. JEp. ad Div. v. 5. 

§ 47. The poets, and those writers who are fond of poetical 
expressions, oftentimes employ a substantive, or a word used 
substantively, together with a dependent genitive instead of 
a substantive and an attributive adjective. 

Strata viarum, Virg. 2En. i. 422., for stratce vice. 
Insularum immensa spatia, Tac. Germ. 1., for insulce immense et 
spatiosce. 

Liter arum seer eta, Tac. Germ. 19., for liter ce secretce. 

§ 48. The more common words to be supplied before a 
genitive of a proper name put without a governing substan- 
tive, are uxor, jftlius, filia ; sometimes also cedes, or templum, 
as mentioned in Rule 17. Part I. 



238 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 49 — 52. 



Apposition. 

§ 49. The apposition of substantives is the putting of one 
substantive in the case of another in order to point out more 
clearly some character, condition, or description attaching 
to it. The word in apposition may differ from the word it 
defines, either in cumber or gender, or in both ; as, Veii 
urbs ; Tusculum civitas : but if it has two forms, it properly 
takes that gender which the other word has ; as, animus, 
contemptor periculi, not contemptrix. 

Obs. 1 . When the word in apposition is of a different number or 
gender from its substantive, the predicate, whether verb or adjective, 
is regulated for the most part by the latter. 

Tulliola, deliciolce nostra, tuum munusculum flagitat, et me, ut spon- 
sor em, appellat. Cic. Ep. ad Att. i. 8. 

Obs. 2. Sometimes, however, the predicate is influenced by the 
word in apposition. 

Ei cariora semper omnia, quam decus atque pudicitia fuit. Sail. 
Cat 25. 

niorum urbem, ut propugnaculum, opposition esse barbaris. Corn. 
Xep. Them. vii. 5. 

§ 50. When urbs, oppidum, insula, or civitas are used to 
describe a place, they are generally found in apposition; 
sometimes, though very rarely, they take the name of the 
city, &c. as a dependent genitive. 

Urbis Roma, Eut. ; Oppidum Sutlnd, Sail. ; Parum insulam, 
Corn. Nep. ; Coriolos civitatem, Eut. ; In oppido Antiochice, Cic. 

Obs. When urbs, &c. is in apposition with a plural name of a 
place, and a verb follows, such verb is usually in the singular 
number. 

Corioli oppidum captum (est). Liv. ii. 33. 

§ 51. With the genitive of the name of a place a peculiar 
apposition with the ablative of urbs or civitas sometimes 
occurs, arising out of the different usages of the first or 
second, and of the third declension. 

AntiocTiia natus est, celebri urbe. Cic. pro Bab. Post. 10. 

§ 52. Sometimes an apposition to a single word takes place, 
though logically there is a reference to the whole preceding 
statement. 



§ 53—55.] syntax. 239 

Admoneor ut aliquid etiam de humatione dicendum existimem ; rem 
non difficilem. Cic. Tusc. i. 43. 

§ 53. Sometimes dico is used with a word in apposition, 
merely in the explanatory force of " namely," or " I mean," 
without influencing the construction. 

Hcec duo, vocis dico moderationem et verborum conclusionem, a 
poeticd ad eloquentiam iraducenda duxerunt Cic. de Orat. iii. 44. 

Quam liesternus dies nobis, considaribus dico, turpis illuxit. Cic. 
Phil. viii. 7. 

Genitive and Ablative of the Quality. 

§ 54. When the genitive or ablative of the quality — or 
more correctly, the "descriptive" genitive or ablative — is 
employed, an adjective is necessarily attached to it, inasmuch 
as that is the word which expresses the quality or descrip- 
tion. 

Generally speaking, this genitive or ablative is attached to some 
appellative noun, as in the examples in Rule 19. Part I. The fol- 
lowing may be added : — 

Annorum trium et viginti consul est f actus. Eut. ii. 7. 

Obs. Yet this does not always take place. 

Quum (Agesilaus) annorum octoginta in 2Egyptum isset. Corn. 
Nep. Ages. viii. 2. 

X.B. The distinction between this genitive and ablative appears 
to be, that the genitive usually denotes inherent and permanent 
qualities, &c. ; the ablative those of a mere transitory nature. This 
may be seen in the following passage : — 

Thi/um, hominem maximi corporis terribilique facie, quod et niger 
et capillo longo barbaque erat promissd, optima veste contexit. Corn. 
Nep. Dat. iii. 1. 

The corpus would always be maximum : but the fades might 
cease to be terribilis, when the capillus was no more longus, nor the 
barba, promissa. 



ADJECTIVES. 

Genitive after the Adjective. 

§ 55. Amongst the adjectives denoting some mental feel- 
ing, which are followed by a genitive case, are principally 
found those implying desire, knowledge, memory, or the 



240 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 56, 57. 

reverse in each instance. Such, are avdrus, avidus, cupidus, 
fastidiosus, studiosus ; conscius, inscius, nescius, prascius ; 
diligens ; gnarus, igndrus ; peritus, imperitus; prudens, im- 
prudens; providus, improvidus ; insolens, insolitus, insuetus; 
rudis ; curiosus, incuriosus ; memor, immemor, tenax, fyc. 
See Part I. Rule 21. for examples. 

N.B. Prudens is constructed in Cicero with in only,- rudis 
besides the genitive, in all writers with in ; rarely with ad and 
accusative ; sometimes with simple ablative. 

Obs. 1 . The poets, and such prose writers as affect apoetical style 
of expression, are accustomed to place a genitive after any adjective 
implying a mental feeling. Such are ambiguus, anxins, atrox, bd- 
nignus, certus, incertus, callidus, cautus, incautus, doctus, indoctus, do- 
cilis, indocilis, dubius, ferox, formidolosus, piger, impxger, modicus, 
immodicus, nimius, pavidus, impavidus, pervicax, properus, securus, 
segnis, socors, territus, interritus, timidus, &c. 

Obs. 2. The genitive is also used after some adjectives, in imita- 
tion of the Greeks, where in strict Latinity the ablative would be 
employed. 

Integer vitce sceleris'que purus. Hor. Od. i. 22. 1. for vita, scelere. 

Obs. 3. The genitive animi is commonly used by later writers 
after all adjectives ; amongst which may be specified as of more 
common occurrence, ceger, anxius, ccecus, exiguus, incertus, ingens, 
nimius, saucius. 

§56. Adjectives denoting "power over," "participation 
in," " a guilty knowledge of," and the reverse, are followed 
by the genitive. Such are, compos, impos, potens, impotens, 
validus ; affinis, consors, exsors, expers ; innocens, insons, 
manifestus, particeps, reus ; to which last class may be added, 
amongst later writers, noxius and innoxius. 

§ 57. Genitives plural, signifying the whole of a class, 
often follow adjectives which denote a part of such class, 
whether one or more. Usually the adjective and its depen- 
dent genitive are of the same gender. Sometimes, however, 
the adjective is put in the neuter, but only in the nominative 
or accusative case ; in which construction it should be re- 
garded as used substantively. When comparative adjectives 
are employed, it is generally to point out one of two persons, 
&c. or of two classes ; the superlative, for the most part, 
distinguishes one from several. See Part I. Rule 23. for 
examples. To which add for neuter gender, dimidium pecu- 
niae, Cic. ; extremum cestalis ; ad uliimum inopia, Liv. 



§ 58, 59.] SYNTAX. 241 

Obs. 1. Instead of the partitive genitive the ablative is also used 
after adjectives with one of the following prepositions, a or ab, de, 
e or ex, inter, ante. 

Tertius ab JEned ; Solus de superis; Dens e vobis alter es, Ovid ; 
Primus inter omnes ; Primus ante omnes. 

Obs. 2. After a substantive denoting a part the genitive only is 
used, not an ablative with one of the foregoing prepositions. Thus, 
pars urbis, imperii, exercitus ; not de urbe, de imperio, de exercitu. 



Dative after the Abjective. 

§ 58. Under the head of adjectives denoting a " reference 
to" any thing, are included all those whose meaning is in- 
complete, unless the person or thing be added for, or in refer- 
ence to, whom &c. their quality obtains. Of these the principal 
are those signifying advantage or disadvantage ; usefulness 
or hindrance ; pleasantness or unpleasantness ; ease or diffi- 
culty ; likeness or unlikeness ; equality or inequality. Such 
are, amicus, inimlcus, benignus, gravis; infensus, infestus, 
propitius ; utilis, inutilis ; jucundus, injucundus ; facilis, 
diffidlis ; similis, dissimilis ; par, dispar, impar. See Part 
I. Rule 24. for examples. 

Obs. 1. Similis, par, and their compounds, when followed bv a 
genitive, denote, for the most part, an internal resemblance, &c. 
i. e. a resemblance of character. 

Dux ille Grcecice nusquam optat ut Ajacis similes habeat decern, at 
ut Nestor is. Cic. Cat. Maj. 10. 

Dispar sui atque dissimile. Cic. Cat. Maj. 21. 

Sectani dissimilis. Hor. Sat. i. 4. 112. 

Yet Horace has sometimes the dative. Ep. i. 18. 3. &c. 

Obs. 2. Intimus when used as an adjective is followed by a 
dative ; invidus by both a dative and genitive. Both these words 
are also used substantively and are then followed by a genitive. 

Intimus est eorum consiliis. Ter. And. iii. 3. 44. 

O Fortuna, viris invida fortibus. Sen. Here. Fur. 523. 

Laudis invidus. Cic. pro Flacc. 1. 

§ 59. Adjectives betokening affinity and nearness, are 
followed by a dative. Such are, affinis, cogndtus, conter- 
rninus, contiguus, JiniUmus, propinquus, propior, proximifs, 
vicinus. To these add secundus, signifying " next to." Hand 
ulli veterum virtute secundus. Virg. 2En. xi. 441. 

M 



242 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 60 — 63. 

Obs. 1. Propior and proximus are sometimes followed by an ac- 
cusative. Propior montem. Sail. Proximus finem. Liv. 

Obs. 2. Affinis and proprius are sometimes followed by a geni- 
tive ; so also are cequalis " contemporary," and vicinus, vicina, when 
used as substantives. Affinis alicujus culpce. Cic. Propria veri. 
Cic. JEqualis illorum temporum. Liv. Vicinus eorum temporum, 
Hieron. Fides vicina Jovis. Cic. 

§ 60. Adjectives denoting friendliness or hostility are 
sometimes followed by adversus, erga, or in, with an accu- 
sative, instead of by a dative. 

Erga te animo esse amico sensisti earn. Ter. Hec. iii. 3. 29. 
Quod cequum sit in Quintium. Cic. Quint. 14. 
Iniqui sunt patres in adolescentes judices. Ter. Heaut. ii. 1. 7. 
Ingratus in amicos, infestus in cognatos. Cic. Herenn. iv. 40. 
Adversus nos hostilia induerat. Tac. Ann. xii. 40. 

§ 61. Adjectives betokening fitness or usefulness are 
often followed by ad with an accusative, when a thing is to 
be pointed out. 

Calcei apti ad pedem. Cic. Orat. i. 54. 

Si quid ab homine ad nullam partem utili, tuce utilitatis causa, de~ 
traxeris, inhumane feceris. Cic. Off. iii. 6. 
Materia ad hoc habilis. Senec. Q. N. i. 7. 
Non essem ad ullam causam idoneus. Cic. Cluent. 6. 
Animo simus ad dimicandum parati. Caes. B. C. iii. 85. 
Naves ad navigandum inutiles. Caes. B. G. iv. 29. 
Minime sum ad te consolandum accommodates. Cic. Ep. ad 
Div. v. 16. 

§ 62. Alienus, immunis, when followed by an ablative, have 
it either alone, or dependent on the preposition a or ab: 
communis has always the preposition cum before its ablative. 

Neque hoc Dii alienum ducunt majestate sua. Cic. de Div. i. 38. 
Navigationis labor alienus ab atate nostra. Cic. Ep. adAtt. xvi. 3. 
Una centuria facta est immunis militia. Liv. i. 43. 
llienses ab omni onere immunes prcestitit. Suet. Claud. 25. 
Quod commune cum alio est, desinit esse proprium. Quint, vii. 3. 

§ 63. Adjectives formed from verbs governing a dative, 
are also sometimes followed by a dative. 

Non ego credulus illis. Yirg. Ec. 9. 34. 
Oppositis foribus minaces. Hor. Od. iii. 26. 8. 



§ 64, 65.] syntax. 243 

Accusative after the Adjective. 

§ 64. The accusative of the "measure of quantity" after an ad- 
jective is of the same nature as the accusative of the duration of 
time, and space of place, after a verb. In either case this accusa- 
tive is used from the general principles of the language, and not 
merely from the word with which it is joined in construction. 

The Greek accusative after adjectives is found in the place of the 
ablative of the manner. It is principally employed by the poets, 
yet is found in Tacitus frequently, as he is fond of the poetical 
mode of expression. (See Rules 28, 29. Part I.) 

In the same way magnam partem, and maximam partem,, are used 
for ex magna parte, ex maxima parte ; or for fere, maxime. 



Ablative after the Adjective. 

§ 65. The ablative after adjectives denoting plenty or 
want, shows in what way it is affected by them, and so is 
connected with the u ablative of the manner ;" on the other 
hand the genitive after such adjectives partakes of the nature 
of the objective genitive (§ 46. Obs. 1. b.), inasmuch as it 
represents the object in reference to which the quality denoted 
by the adjective obtains, (See Examples, Rule 30. Part I.) 

a. Creber, densus, closely covered with, abounding in, are 
followed by an ablative only. 

Creber rerum frequentid. Cic. de Orat ii. 13. 
Creber procellis Africus. Virg. JEn. i. 85. 
Loca sylvestribus sepibus densa. Cic. N. D. i. 42. 
Euripides densus sententiis. Quint, x. 1. 

b. Inops, destitute of; pauper, poor in; parous, niggardly of ; 
prodigus, profusus, lavish of ; have the genitive only. 

Orator em descripseras inopem humanitatis. Cic. de Orat. ii. 10. 
Horum Semper ego optdrim pauperrimus esse bonorum. Hor. Sat. 
i. 1. 79. 

Pecuniae parous. Suet. Tib. 46. 
Judicii sui prodigus. Gell. xi. 5. 
Sui profusus. Sail. Cat. 5. 

c. Egenus, indigus, needing ; sterilis, bare of ; plenus, full of ; are 
m general constructed with a genitive, sometimes with ablative. 

Otnnis spei egenam peremit. Tac. Ann. i. 53. 
Castellum commeatu egenum. Tac. Ann. xii. 46. 
Opis haud indiga nostra*. Virg. Georg. ii. 428. 
Indigus auxilio. Lucr. v. 224. 
Sterilis laurus baccarum. Plin. xv. 30. 
m 2 



241 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 66, 

Sterila corpora sonitu. Lucr. ii. 844. 

Domus plena ccelati argenti. Cic. Verr. ii. 2. 14. 

Plena domus ornamentis. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 57. 

05s. The ablative after sterilis is sometimes preceded by a or a&. 
Quando sterilis est amator a datis, improbus est Plaut. True. ii. 
1. 30. 

d. Liber, nudus, orbus, and vacuus, when followed by an ablative, 
either have it alone, or preceded by a or ab : purus is always pre- 
ceded by the preposition. 

Animus omni liber curd et angore. Cic. de Fin. i. 15. 

Mamertini liberi fuerunt ab omni sumptu. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 10. 

Urbs nuda prasidio. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xii. 13. 

Messdna ab his rebus nuda est. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 2. 

Plebs orba tribunis. Cic. de Legg. iii. 3. 

Orbafuit ab optimatibus ista concio. Cic. pro Flacc. 23. 

Animus per somnum sensibus et curis vacuus. Cic. de Div. ii. 11. 

Vacuum ab defensoribus esse audiebat. Cass. -B. G^. ii. 12. 

Ut puri aliquid ab humano cultu pateret soli. Liv. i. 44. 

§ 66. In a comparison the second member is compared 
with the first, either by means of an ablative case depending 
on a comparative word, or of a corresponding case and the 
conjunction quam — very rarely ac or atque. 

a. When the first member of the comparison is a nominative 
before a finite verb, or an accusative before an infinitive mood, i. e. 
the subjectival nominative or accusative, the ablative may be used 
after the comparative word instead of a corresponding nominative 
or accusative. 

Vilius argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. Hor. Ep. i. 1. 52. 

b. But when the first member of the comparison is in any other 
case than the (subjectival) nominative or accusative, quam and a 
corresponding case is for the most part employed ; yet not always. 

Nostri casus plus honoris habuerunt quam laboris, Cic. de Rep. i. 4. 

Confiteor eos plus quam sicarios. Cic. Phil. ii. 13. 

Obs. The ablative, instead of quam and its right case, is often, 
hovv T ever, used in poetry ; rarely so in prose, except when the ob- 
jectival accusative is a pronoun. 

Novistine locum potior em rure beato. Hor. Ep. i. 10. 14. 

Nisi eorum vitam sua salute habeat cariorem. Cass. B. G. vii. 19. 

Hoc mihi gratius facere nihil potes. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 44. 

c. When the comparative word does not belong to one of the 
members of the comparison, but to some other word, the ablative 
is not used, but quam with its right case. 

Nemini plura beneficia dedisti, quam mihi. 



§ 67 — 71.] syntax. 245 

d. In the construction with the relative quam is never employed ; 
and after a comparative adverb it is seldom used. 

Phidice simulacra, quibus nihil in illo genere perfectius vidimus. 
Cic. Orat. 8. 

Bellum, quo nullum majus Romani gessere. Liv. xxxviii. 53. 

Nullam, Vare, sacra vite prills severis arbor em. Hor. Od. i. 18- 1. 

Cave putes, plus me quemquam cruciari. Cic. Ep. ad Att. viii. 15. 

§ 67. When a comparison is drawn between two adjectives 
or adverbs, both are usually put in the same degree. 
Concio verior quam gratior. Liv. xxxii. 38. 
Bella fortius quamfeliciusgerere. Liv. v. 43. 

Obs. Tacitus often affords an exception to this rule. 
Vehementius quam caute. Agr. 4. 
Acriits quam considerate. Hist. i. 83. 

§ 68. Alius, from its signification, is sometimes constructed 
as a comparative word. 

Nos ab initio spectdsse otium, nee quidquam aliud communi libertate 
qucesisse, exitus declarat. Cic. Ep. ad JDiv. xi. 2. 

Neve putes alium sapiente bonoque beatum. Hor. Ep. i. 1 6. 20. 
Neque aliud scripserant, quam nomina. Corn. Nep. Paus. 1 . 

§ 69. The comparative degree of both adjectives and ad- 
verbs is used to point out the existence of a quality in a very 
great, or too great a degree. 

Siquidem ea, quum major esset atque longior, omne animi lumen ex- 
stingueret. Cic. Cat. Maj. 12. 

IUud item Cacilius vitiosius. Cic. Cat. Maj. 8. 

§ 70. Amplius, plus, minus (adverbs), either with or with- 
out qudm, are often joined to numerals and other words 
denoting a measure, &c. without influencing the construction. 

Amplius sunt sex menses. Cic. Ros. Com. 3. 

Nee amplius quam septem et viginti dies commoratus. Suet . Aug, 1 7. 

F err e plus dimidiati mensis cibaria. Cic. Tusc. ii. 16. 

Plus quam decern dies abesse. Cic. Phil. ii. 13. 

Ne minus dimidium ad Trebonium pervenerit. Cic. Verr. ii. 1 . 

Accidit ut equites minus triginta. Hirt. Bell. Afr. 6. 

Obs. Yet sometimes they are followed by an ablative. 
Milites amplius horis quatuor pugnaverant. Cses. B. G. iv. 37. 
Annos sexaginta natus es, out plus eo. Ter. i. 1. 10. 

§ 71. The neuter ablative singular of adjectives and pro- 

M 3 



246 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 72, 73. 

nouns, such as tanto, quanto, hoc, eo, quo, multo, paulo, &e. 
are used not only after comparative words to denote the 
measure whereby a thing is exceeded, but also after the ad- 
verbs aliter, ante, post, secus. Multo aliter, Corn. Nep. ; 
Paulo ante, Cic. ; Tanto ante, Cic. ; Paulo secus, Cic. ; 
Quanto ante, Cic. ; Aliquanto post, Cic. (See also Rule 35. 
Part I.) 

Obs. In later writers the neuter accusative singular is some- 
times used instead of the ablative. 

Aliquantum amplior. Liv. i. 7. Multum robustior. Juv. xix. 197. 
Marius quantum bello optimus, tantum pace pessimus. Veil. ii. 11. 1 . 



PRONOUNS. 



§ 72. The idea of property may be expressed either by a 
possessive genitive or a possessive pronoun : as mater mei 
and mater mea. Hence a possessive genitive may be used in 
conjunction with, or in apposition to, a possessive pronoun. 
The genitives thus employed are more commonly ipsius, so- 
lius, unius, 3?c. duorum, trium, fyc. ; omnium, plurium, pau- 
corum, cujusque ; together with the genitives of participles 
generally. 

Dixi mea unius opera rempublicam esse salvam. Cic. 

Meum solius peccatum co?^rigi non potest Cic. 

Cum mea nemo Scripta legat vulgb recitare timentis. Hor. 
Sat. i. 4. 22. 

De tuo ipsius studio conjecturam ceperis. Cic. 

In sua cujusque laude prcBstantior. 

Nostra omnium memoria. 

Vestris paucorum respondet laudibus. Cic. 

§ 73. Sui and suus are reflexive : i. e. they refer back their 
meaning to something that has preceded ; and this is usually 
the subject of the verb. 

Nicias tua sui memoria delectatur. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiii. 1. 
Ille suum natum cupit videre. Plaut. Capt. ii. 3. 39. 

Obs. 1. Yet sometimes they refer to some other word in the sen- 
tence which is usually the object of the verb. 

Suisflammis delete Fidenas. Liv. iv. 33. 

Diccearchum cum Aristoxeno, condiscipulo suo, omittamus. Cic. 
Tusc. i. 18. 



§ 74.] SYNTAX. 247 

Obs. 2. In subordinate propositions they refer not only to the 
subject of such propositions, but even to the subject of the leading 
or principal proposition, provided that they state the sentiments, 
&c. of such subject. 

(Dionysius) instituit ut (filise) barbam sibi adurerent. Cic. 
Tusc. v. 20. 

Obs. 3. Occasionally the reflexive pronoun is employed more 
than once in the same sentence to point out different persons. 

Patres conscripti legatos (ad Prusiam) miserunt, qui a rege pete- 
rent ne inimicissimum suum (i. e. P. C.) secum (i. e. Prusias) haberet, 
sibique (i. e. P. C.) dederet. Corn. Nep. Hann. xii. 2. 

§ 74. Of the demonstrative pronouns, hie, iste, Me. 

a. Hie points out the person, &c. nearest the speaker. Hence 
frequently hie or hie homo = ego. It is, therefore, sometimes called 
the pronoun of the first person. Iste points out the person, &c. 
to whom the speaker addresses himself; hence it is sometimes called 
the pronoun of the second person. Ille means the person, &c. of 
whom I am speaking to some one else. Hence it is called the pro- 
noun of the third person. 

N.B. The same distinction holds good in the adverbs derived 
from them ; hie, " here," where I am ; istic, " there," where you are ; 
iUie, " there," where he is. 

Obs. Iste is sometimes used in an objurgatory, or depreciating 
force, viz. " that fellow," &c. This is supposed to have arisen from 
the employment of it by advocates in a cause when referring to 
the opposite party. 

b. When hie and ille refer to two persons or things preceding, 
file sometimes refers to the first mentioned, hie to the last, while 
sometimes the order is inverted. 

Melius de quibusdam acerbos inimicos mereri, qudm eos amicos, 
qui dulces videantur : illos (inimicos) scepe verum dicere, hos (amicos) 
nunquam. Cic. Lcel. 24. 

Cave Catoni anteponas ne istum quidem ipsum, quern Apollo sapi- 
entissimum judicavit ; hujus (i. e. Catonis) enim facta, illius (i.e. So- 
cratis) dicta laudantur. Cic. Lai. 2. 

Retulit etferro Rhesumque Dolonaque c&sos, 
Utque sit hie somno proditus, ille dolo. Ov. Her. i. 39. 
Hie = Rhesus ; ille = Dolon. 

N.B. Hence it would seem that sometimes the order of writing, 
sometimes that of idea is followed. 

c. Ille not answering to hie is often used to point out some well- 
known person or thing. 

m 4 



248 LATIX GRAMMAR. [§ 75 — 78. 

Bene Tiitacus Hie inquit. Corn. Xep. Thras. iv. 2. 
Exigunt ilium hellatorem equum, Mam cruentam victricemque has- 
tarn. Tac. Germ. 14. 

d. TThen there is a reference to what follows hie is usually em- 
ployed ; yet sometimes Hie ; rarely is. 

Hcec dignitas, hm vires, magno semper electorum juvenum globo cir- 
eumdari. Tac. Germ. 11. 

Hoc quidem videre licet; eos qui antea commodis fuerunt moribus, 
fyc. Cic, Lcel. 15. 

Iliad ex libei^tate vitium, quod nan simul conveuiunt. Tac. Germ. 1 1 . 

Id nomen, ea gloria est, si numero ac virtute comitatus (princeps) 
emineat. Tac. Germ. 13. 

§ 75.. Is refers to something that has gone before, and is about 
equivalent to "the person" or "thing" just mentioned. The 
oblique cases of is (and not those of ille) are commonly used in 
all genders for the pronoun of the third person. When hie or ille 
are found they are emphatic. 

Non est igitur amici in eum (the person just mentioned) totem 
esse, cjualis ille in se est. Cic. Lcel. 16. 

Debere Mi res suas placere. Sail. Jug. 64. 

Obs. 1. Is is sometimes found in the place of the reflexive pro- 
noun. 

Hehetii persuadent Rauracis, ut una cum iis projiciscantur. Ca3S, 
B. G. i. 5. Cum iis for secum. 

Obs. 2. Sometimes is is equivalent to talis. 

Ed erat sagacitate, ut decipi non posset. Corn. Xep. Ale. v. 2. 

§ 76. Idem is sometimes used in the force of " also." 

Eum (cinimum) esse in hoc cor pore intelligebatis. Eundem esse 

igitur. creditote, etiam si nullum videbitis. Cic. Cat. Maj. 22. 

Contulit se ad Pharnabazum Satrapen Ionice et Lydice, eundemejue 

generum regis. Corn. Xep. Con. ii. 1. 

§ 77. Quis, in all its cases, preceded by nescio has come by long 
usage to be the representative of aliquis ; there is, however, an in- 
timation of ignorance, either real or assumed, connected with this 
expression. 

Lucus nescio quo easu incensus. Corn. Xep. Milt. vii. 3. 

§ 78. Quisque joined to superlative and ordinal adjectives de- 
notes u universality," and may be variously translated by M every," 
" each," " all." Doctissimus 'quisque ; every or each most learned 
man ; all most learned men. So that the expression is equivalent 
to doctissimi omnes— Quinlo quo que anno, every fifth year, or every 
five years. — Joined to primus it signifies, " first of all," " the very 
first" 



§ 79—81.] syntax. 249 



VERBS. 

Genitive after the Verb. 

§ 79. The genitive following sum is generally said to be 
dependent on some word to be supplied, such as res or ne- 
gotium, or on the repetition of the word which formed the 
subject of sum. 

This genitive appears, however, to be rather a possessive genitive, 
and to depend on the verb in right of its own inherent value, as spe- 
cifying that to which something belongs This appears to be espe- 
cially the case in such expressions as, est meijudicii, "it belongs to 
my judgment ;" i. e. it is for me to decide : esse ditionis, "to belong 
to, or, to be under, the sway of;" i. e. to be under the power of. So 
ego totus Pompeii sum (Cic. Ep. ad Div. ii. 13.), "I am altogether 
Pompey's." Negavit esse moris Grcecorum (Cic. Verr. L 26.), 
" He denied that it belonged to the custom of the Greeks." Mu- 
neris hoc tui est (Hor. Od. iv. 3. 21.), " This is of, or belonging to, 
your gift." This is often the case with the possessive genitive in 
Greek after etfii and yiyvo\xai. Trjs avrfis yva>fX7)s efoai (Thuc. i. 113.), 
" To be of the same opinion." 'Eavrov chat, " to be the property of 
himself;" i. e. his own master. So, r\v v/j.coi/ avrcov ideA-fio-Tire 
yevevdai (Dem. p. 42. 9, 10., Reiske's ed.) "If you shall wish to 
become your own property ; " i.e. to be your own masters and 
independent. See Jelf, § 521. 

§ 80. Instead of the possessive genitive the possessive 
neuter pronouns meum, tuum, suum, nostrum, vestrum, are 
used. So also are sometimes neuter adjectives denoting " a 
property," such as humanum, bellulnum, &c. 

Non est meum contra auctoritatem senatus dicer e. 

Quod spiro et placeo {si placed) tuum est. Hor. Od. iv. 3. 24. 

Humanum est irasci. Ter. Adelph. iii. 5. 25. 

Et facer e et patifortia JRomanum est. Liv. ii. 12. 

Obs. This construction can only be used in the third person, and 
when the subject is a substantival infinitive, or a sentence; so that 
these adjectives assume the nature of predicative adjectives. 

§ 81. The verbs of accusing, condemning, acquitting, specified 
in Rule 41. Part I. are followed by an accusative of the person 
and a genitive of the charge. This genitive is usually said to be 
dependent on nomine or crimine to be supplied, as those words are 
sometimes expressed (see Obs. below)/ But it is rather to be 
considered as the objective genitive, inasmuch as it is the object 
towards which the quality implied in the verb is directed. See 
examples in rule mentioned above. 

m 5 



250 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 82—85. 

Obs. When these verbs are followed by nomine or crimine ex- 
pressed, these ablatives are to be regarded as those of the " cause." 

§ 82. After verbs of condemning the genitive of the punish- 
ment is far more frequently used than the ablative. If, however, 
the punishment consists of a mulct in money the ablative is ge- 
nerally used. 

Qui capitis damnarent Cses. B. C. iii. 83. 

Sceleris condemnat generum suum. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 14. 

Qui pecunid mulctarent. Cses. B. C. iii. 83. 

Octuplo condemnari. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 13. 

§ 83. In the passive voice the genitive is retained after the verbs 
mentioned in Rule 41. Part I. 

Miltiades proditionis accusatus est. Corn. Nep. Milt, vii, 5. 
Damnati rei capitalis. Cic. Cat. Maj. 12. 

Obs. 1. Instead of this genitive the ablative with de is sometimes 
used. 

De majestate damnatus. Cic. Verr. i. 19. 

De pr&varicatione absolutus. Cic. Ep. ad Q. Frat. ii. 16. 

Obs. 2. Verbs of warning are also followed either by an accu- 
sative and de with an ablative ; or by two accusatives, of which the 
accusative of the thing is for the most part illud, istuc, quod, multa, 
res, and other like words. 

De cede telluris et de portion Catuli me admones. Cic. Ep. xa 
Q. F. iii. 1. 

Ridicuhim est te istuc me admonere. Tei\ Beaut, ii. 3. 112. 

Illud me prceclarum admones. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ix. 9. 

N.B. The construction remains in the passive voice. 

Putavi ed de re te esse admonendum. 

Illud te esse admonitum volo. Cic. pro Cosl. 3. 

Obs. 3. TJterque, nullus, neuter, alius, ambo, and superlative adjec- 
tives are put after them only in the ablative either with or without 
de, whether in the active or passive voice. 

Accusas furti an stupri ? Utroque or de utroque ; ambobus or de 
ambobus ; neutro or de neutro. 

De plurimis simul accusaris. 

§ 84. The genitive after misereor and miseresco is the objective 
genitive denoting the feeling. (See examples Rule 42. Part I.) 
Miseror and commiseror are real transitives. 

§ 85. Reminiscor, obliviseor, memini y rarely recordor, are fol- 
lowed by an objective genitive when they signify " to think of," or 
"about a thing;" but when they denote "to have," or "hold in 



§ 86—89.] syntax. 251 

mind," they become real transitives and are accordingly followed 
by an accusative case. (See examples Rule 43. Part I.) 

§ 86. The verbal expression venit in mentem is nearly allied in 
meaning to reminiscor and memini, and hence is followed by a 
genitive case. Sometimes, however, it is used personally. 

Non minus scepe ei venit in mentem potestatis, qudm cequitatis tuce. 
Cic. Quint. 2. 

Solet mihi venire in mentem illius temporis. Cic. ad Div. vii. 3. 
Miser ce ubi venit in mentem mortis metus. Plaut. Rud. iii. 3. 23. 

§ 87. In imitation of the Greek idiom the genitive is used by the 
poets after verbs of abstaining from, ceasing from, being freed 
from. 

Abstineto irarum calidceque rixce. Hor. Od. iii. 28. 69. 
Desine mollium Tandem querelarum. Hor. Od. ii. 9. 17. 
Cumfamulis operum solutis. Hor. Od. iii. 17. 6. 



Dative after the Verb. 

§ 88. The dative after a verb points out the person or 
thing "for" or "in reference to" whom, &c. the action of 
the verb holds good, or its quality exists. Do tibi librum. — 
Mihi nee obest nee prodest. 

Obs. The general name for this dative is dativus commodi or in- 
commodi, of advantage or disadvantage, as the case may be. 

N.B. " For" in the meaning of " in behalf of" is never expressed 
by the dative, but by an ablative with pro. " To speak for you " 
is dicere pro te, not dicere tibi. 

§ 89. Verbs denoting "to compare," such ascompdro, con- 
fero, are constructed not only with the dative, but also with 
the prepositions eum with an ablative, or ad and inter with 
an accusative ; compono with cum and the ablative. 

Hominem cum komine comparate. Cic. pro Dom. 51. 
Nee tantum inutilibus comparantur utilia, sed inter se quoque. 
Quint, iii. 83. 

Nee comparandus hie quidem ad ilium est. Ter. Eun. iv. 4. 14. 
Quern cum Democrito conferre possimus f Cic. Acad. ii. 23. 
Vitam inter se utriusque conferte. Cic. Ros. Com. vii. 20. 
Bos ad bovem colldtus. Varr. L. L. ix. 22. 
Componere dicta cumfactis. Sail. Jug. 48. 
sx 6 



252 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 90 — 93. 

Obs. Many other verbs compounded with cum usually repeat that 
preposition, or else some other equivalent to it. 

Conjunge earn epistolam cum hdc. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vii. 30. 

Conjungere inter se. Lucr. ill. 568. 

TJt ea communicent cum proximis. Cic. Lcel. 19. 

Quum de societate multa inter se communicarent. Cic. Quint. 4. 

!N\B. In one passage communico is found with the ablative alone. 
Communicabo te semper mensd med. Plaut. Mil. Glor. i. 1. 51. 

§ 90. Impero is often a real transitive, and so takes an ac- 
cusative. 

Faciendum nobis id, quod par entes imperant Plaut. Stick, i. 1. 53. 
Moram et solicitudinem impero. Quint, x. 3. 

!N\B. Impero is sometimes followed by both a dative and an ac- 
cusative. 

Sto exspectans, si quid mihi imperent. Ter. Eun. iii. 5. 46. 
Imperat ei nuptias. Quint, vii. 114. 

§ 91. Tempero and moderor mean with accusative, "to re- 
gulate, arrange, order ;" with dative, "to set bounds to." 
(See Examples Rule 52. Part I.) 

§ 92. Fido and confldo are sometimes followed by the 
ablative. 

Confidere alio duce, Liv. xxi. 4. ; Prudentid fidens, Cic. Off. i. 23. 

§ 93. Many verbs compounded with the prepositions ad, 
ante, con (cum), in, inter, ob, post, prce, re, sub, super, are 
followed by a dative (whether person or thing) of that to 
Avhich reference is made. But if the reference be local, i, e. 
if motion to or from a place or person, or continuance in a 
place, is intended, the preposition is usually repeated with its 
proper case : yet sometimes, for the purpose of a more dis- 
tinct and thorough definition, a different preposition is used. 

Intempestive qui occupato adluserit. Phaed. iii. 19. 12. 

Hoc conducit republics. Cic. Prov. Cons. 1. 

Poetce impendere saxum Tantalo faciunt. Cic. Tusc. iv. 16. 

Omnibus terror impendet. Cic. Tusc. iv. 16. 

Omnibus negotiis non solum interfuit sed etiam prcefuit. Cic. Ep. 
ad Div. i. 6. 

Ea quoniam nemini obtrudi potest, itur ad me. Ter. And. i. 5. 15. 

Subolet hoc jam uxori, quod ego maclnnor. Plaut. Cos. iii. 2. 64. 

Adibam ad istum fundum. Cic. Cac. 29. 

Accidere in Senatum. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vii. 4. 

Tecto assuetus coluber succedere et umbrce. Virg. Georg. iii. 418. 



§ 94—97.] syntax. 253 

Tempestas signa cum columnis, quibus superstabant, evertit. Liv. 
xl. 2, 

Olympias non diufiliis supervixit. Justin, xxviii. 3. 

Obs. 1. Such of the above verbs as are transitive are also followed, 
necessarily, by an accusative of the object in virtue of their own 
inherent power. 

Iniquissimam pacem justissimo bello antefero. Cic. Ep. ad Div. 
vi. 6. 

Scorto postponet honesium officium. Hor. Ep. i. 18. 34. 

Quam igitur relinquis popular i rei-publicce laudem ? Cic. Rep. 3. 

Obs. 2. Benedlco " to bless," is found only in ecclesiastical writers 
as a transitive. In classical writers it is intransitive, and means 
" to speak well of:" with them it is usually written as two words. 

Requievit die septimo, eumque benedixit. Lactant, vii. 14. 

Cui bene dixit unquam bono ? Cic. Sext. 52. 

§ 94. Invideo, " to envy," is usually followed by dative. 
Invident homines paribus. Cic. de Orat. ii. 52. 

a. But in the meaning of " to begrudge," and so " to deprive of," 
it takes an ablative, as well as a dative of person ; which latter is 
either expressed or understood. 

Invidere igne rogi miseris. Lucan. vii. 798. 

Ne hostes quidem sepulturd invident (sc. occisis). Tac. Ann. i. 22. 

b. With the poets it is sometimes constructed with a genitive. 
Neque ille Sepositi ciceris nee longoe invldit avence. Hor. Sat. ii. 

6.84. 

§ 95. Medeor is followed by a dative. 
Morbis corporis medemur. Sen. Clem. i. 16. 

§ 96. Suadeo and persuadeo have usually a dative of the 
person with an accusative of the thing, seldom an accusative 
of the person alone. 

Tu quod ipse tibi suaseris, idem mihi persuasum putato. Cic. Ep. 
ad Att. xiii. 38. 

t Ut te suadeam, Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 4. ; Quis te persuasit f En- 
nius in Serv. Virg. 2En. x. 10. 

§ 97. The verbs jaceo, labor, sedeo> sto, and also volvor, 
when compounded with ad take sometimes, instead of a 
dative, an accusative dependent on the ad. 

Adjacent mare, Corn. Nep. Tim. ii. 1.; Fama allabitur aures, 
Virg. jEn. ix. 474. ; Assidendo castellum, Tac. Ann. vi. 43. ; Quum 
Alexander ad Achillis tumulum adstitisset, Cic. pro Arch. x. 24. ; 
Genua patrum advolvuntur, Sail. Fragm. 



254 LATIN GRAMMAR. 

§ 98. So accedo when used as showing a hostile intent — 
(i I approach for an attack." 
Accedit muros Romana juventus. Gell. x. 29. 

§ 99. Verbs denoting "to differ from" are often followed 
by a dative case ; as well in prose as in poetry. 

Ipsi singuli sibi discrepantes. Cic. de Orat. iii. 50. 

Paulum sepultce distat inertia Celata virtus. Hor. Od. iv. 9. 29. 

Quod pede certo Differt sermoni sermo meras. Hor. Sat. i. 4. 48. 

§ 100. Some verbs of taking away are also followed by a 
dative. 

Cui non auferret fructum voluptatum solitudo ? Cic. Led. 23. 
Classe CcBsari ereptd. Cses. B. C. iii. 111. 
Hortari, ut se hostifugd eriperet. Curt. v. 13. 

§ 101. The dative of the personal pronouns is at times used 
superfluously as far as the strict construction of the passage ; 
yet it gives liveliness and an appearance of actuality to the 
language employed, conveying the idea that one hears the 
speaker using the words attributed to him. 

Quid enim mihi L. Paidli nepos qucerit ? Cic. Rep. i. 19. 

Sit mihi orator tinctus Uteris. Cic. de Orat. ii. 20. 

Alter tibi descendit de palatio et adibus suis. Cic. Rose. Am. 46. 

Suo sibi gladio huncjugulo. Ter. Ad. v. 8. 35. 

Quid ait tandem nobis Sannio f Ter. Ad. ii. 4. 12. 

Hac vobis ipsorum per biduum militia fuit. Liv. xxii. 60. 

Cochlea — Suo sibi succo vivunt. Plaut. Copt. i. 1. 13. 

U.B. This is termed dativus ethicus. 

§ 102. Instead of an accusative with ad to denote a direc- 
tion or motion towards a place, the poets sometimes use the 
simple dative. 

It coelo clamor — for ad cozlum. Yirg. JEn. xi. 192. 
Linquimus Ortygia portus pelagoque volamus for ad pelagus. Virg. 
iii. 124. 



Accusative after the Verb. 

§ 103. The accusative case does not, of itself, specify any 
particular relation ; but merely by its termination shows that 
it is not the nominative. It is the object of transitive verbs. 



§ 104—106.] syntax. 255 

§ 104. Some transitives occasionally lay aside their tran- 
sitive power, and are used like the Greek middle verbs, in 
a reflexive force. Such are accingo, agglomero > admoveo, 
averto, conficio, converto, declino, dedo, deformo, do, emergo, 
erumpo, facesso, fero, frango, habeo, insinuo, minuo, misceo, 
muto, penetro, prcebeo, pracipito, propdgo, proruo, refero, 
tendo, transmitto, turbo, verto. 

Quantum mores mutaverint (sc. se). Liv. xxxix. 51. 
Si ventus forte remisisset (sc. se). Cses. B. C. hi. 26. 
Quod iter Xerxes, anno vertente (sc. se) confecerat. Corn. Nep. 
Ages. iv. 3. 

N.B. These verbs are sometimes found with se expressed. 

§ 105. Some transitives occasionally lose the accusative of 
the object and are used intransitively. Such are, appello (sc. 
navem), duco (sc. exercitum), moveo (sc. castra). 

§ 106. Of intransitive verbs used in a transitive force the 
following classes are the more common : — 

1 . Those that denote a state of mental emotion or grief, or that 
betoken the results or effects of such emotion or grief. Such are, 
miror, video : also doleo, lugeo, horreo ; gemo,fleo, lacrimor, lamento, 
ploro, queror, &c. In the several cases of all which " at," " for," or 
" on account of," must be prefixed to the rendering of the accusa- 
tive of the object, according to the custom of the English language : 
as, " I wonder at," " I grieve for " or " on account of." 

Mirari satis hominis negligentiam non queo. Cic. Ep. ad Att. x. 5. 
Meum casum luctumque doluerunt Cic. pro Sest. 69. 

2. An accusative of the same root : as, 

Quorum majoi^um nemo servitutem servivit Cic. Top, 6. 
Vivere duram vitam. Ter. Ad. v. 4. 5. 

3. An accusative of cognate meaning. 

Similem insanire errorem. Hor. Sat. ii. 3. 63. (errorem = insa- 
niam.) 

X.B. The accusatives in 2. and 3. are usually, though not always, 
' accompanied by an adjectival word. 

4. Many verbs (at times) which denote " motion along" or 
" through," when compounded with circum, per, prceter, subter, 
super, trans. Such are, circumeo, circumfluo, circiunvado, circum' 
vehor, circumvenio ; percurro, pervddo, pervdgor ; prceter eo, prceter- 
fiuo, prcetergredior, prater vehor, prcetervolo ; subterfugio, subterlabor; 



256 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 106. 

supergredior, supervehor, super volo; transgredior,transilio, transmeo, 
transno or more commonly trano. 

Quinctilius circumire arcem ccepit. Cass. B. C. ii. 28. 

Percurrens luna fenestras. Propert. i. 3. 31. 

5. Some verbs of motion, also, compounded with ad, cum, in. 
Such are, adeo, I approach ; aggredior, I attack ; convenio, I meet ; 
coeo, I enter into ; ineo, I enter upon. 

Aliquot me adie?mnt. Ter. And. iii. 3. 2. 

Quum eum in itinere (Helvetii) convenissent. Cses. B. G. i. 27. 

6. Some verbs of "motion out of:" such are, eldbor, evddo, 
excedo. 

Obvium Petelium habuere custodias Vitellii elapsum. Tac. Hist. 
iii. 59. 

Ipse angustias evadit. Liv. xxi. 32. 

Facto senatusconsulto, ut urbem excederent Volsci. Liv. ii. 37. 

NJB. Eldbor, evado, are usually followed by ex with an ablative. 

Pauci ex prcelio elapsi. Cass. B. G. v. 37. 

Ex abditis sedibus evadere. Cic. N. D. ii. 37. 

7. Verbs denoting " subsidence in a plaoe," when compounded 
with circum. Such are, circumsedeo, circumsisto, circumsto. 

Mutinam circumsedent. Cic. Phil vii. 8. 
Plures paucos circumsistunt. Caes. B. G. iv. 26. 
Qui circumstant Senatum. Cic. Cat. i. 8. 

8. Verbs denoting a sound, when compounded with circum. Such 
are circumfremo, circumlatro, circumsono, circumstrepo. 

Nidos circumfremunt. Sen. Cons, ad Marc. 7. 
Canes circumlatrare hominem incipiunt. Sen. Cons, ad Marc. 22. 
Clamor hostes circumsonat Liv. iii. 28. 

Tot humanam vitam circumstrepentibus minis. Sen. de Vit. Beat. 
11. 

9. Lastly the following; — allatro, alloquor, expugno, impugno, 
obstdeo, oppugno ; so antecedo, antecello, anteeo, antevenio, as also 
prasto, are sometimes found as pure transitives, and as such having 
an accusative case after them. 

Cato aUatrare ejus magnitudinem solitus erat. Liv. xxxviii. 54. 

Quern nemo alloqui vellet. Cic. pro Cluent. 61. 

Ut castellum expugnarent. Cass. B. G. ii. 9. 

Cato Uticam obsidere instituit. Caes. B. C. ii. 36. 

Quce te impugnare auderet. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iii. 12. 

Nemo eum amicitid antecederet. Corn. Nep. Ale. ix. 3. 

Ne honore nullo regium genus peregrinam stirpem antecelleret. 
Tac. Ann. ii. 3. 

Semper vos cetatem meam honoribus vestris anteistis. Liv. xxxviii. 
51. 



§ 107, 108.] syntax. 257 

Homines novi per virtutem soliti erant nobilitatem antevenire. Sail. 
Jug. 4. 

Quantum Galli cceteros mortales virtute prcestarent. Liv. v. 36. 

§ 107. There are many transitive verbs which at times 
with their accusative of the object do not give a complete idea, 
To these therefore is commonly added a second accusative 
further developing their meaning, and which, in fact, forms a 
kind of predicate of the former accusative. Such are, appello, 
ascisco, decldro, designo, dico, duco, existimo, efficio, facto, in- 
scrtbo, habeo, instituo, judico, lego, nommo, numero, pr<£beo> 
prcesto, puto, reddo, renuncio, saluto, vocOj fyc. 

O ! Spartdce, quern enim te potius appellem? Cic. Phil. xiii. 10. 

Numam Pompilium regem sibi populus ascivit. Cic. de Rep. ii. 13. 

Victorem magna prceconis voce Cloanthum declarat Virg. JEn. 
v. 245. 

Quern alio loco ipse designarit deum. Cic. N D. i. 13. 

Latine dicimus elocutionem, quam Grceci (ppdaiv vocant. Quint, 
viii. 1. 

Id cegre pati, quod se Q. Fabius magistrum equitum duxerit. Liv. 
viii. 32. - 

Eum, qui hoc facit, avarum possumus existimare. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 82. 

Quce res confirmatiorem efficiebat exercitum. Caes. B. C. iii. 84. 

Ea testamento fecit hceredem jiliam. Cic. Verr. ii. 1. 43. 

Eosque (libellos) Rhetoricos inscribunt. Cic. de Orat. iii. 31. 

Nee verb habeo quemquam antiquiorem. Cic. Brut. 16. 

Qui me quum tutorem, turn etiam secundum hceredem instituerit. 
Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 61. 

Ipsum exsulem judicdrunt. Corn. Xep. Hann. vii. 7. 

Me augurem Cn. Pompeius et Q. Hortensius nominaverunt. Cic. 
Phil. ii. 2. 

Sulpicium accusatorem suum numerabat, non competitorem* Cic 
Mur. 24. 

Se in his malis hominem prcebuit. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xv. 17. 

Prcesta te eum. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 6. 

Omnes Cat? Unas, Acidinos, postea reddidit. Cic. Ep. ad Att. iv. 3. 

Quern quidem sui Ccesarem salutabant. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiv. 12. 

Non possidentem multa vocaveris Recti beatum. Hor. Od. iv. 9. 
45. 

Urbem ex Antiochi patris nomine Antiochiam vocavit. Just. xv. 4. 

Obs. This second accusative may not inaptly be termed the ac- 
cusative of further definition. 

§ 108. Cogo is followed at times by an accusative of the per- 
son compelled, and another of that which he is compelled to do. 
Quid non mortalia pectora cogis ? Yirg. 2En. iii. 56. 



258 LATIN GRAMMAR, [§ 109 — 112. 

§ 109. Traduco, trajicio, transporto take an accusative 
which belongs to them as transitives, and also another accu- 
sative dependent on the preposition trans, 

Ubi Ccesar certior f actus est tres jam copiarum partes Helveiios 
fiumen traduxisse. Caes. B. G. i. 12. 

Eodem die equitum magnam partem flumen transjecit. Cses. B. C. 
i. 55. 

Milites his navibus flumen transportat. Caes. B. C. i. 54. 

N.B. For the Greek accusative after verbs of " putting on," &c. 
see below § 117. Obs. 



Ablative after the Verb. 

§ 110. The ablative of the instrument usually stands alone 
without any preposition, yet the poets prefix at times a or ab. 

Naturam expellas furca, tamen usque recurret. Hor. Ep. i. 10. 24. 
Sidereo siccata sitim collegit ab cestu. Ov. Met. vi. 344. 

Obs. When any thing is to be represented as effected by a 
person, either opera is used with a dependent genitive or pos- 
sessive pronoun, or else per with the accusative. 

Sic populo erat persuasum res accedisse ejus opera. Corn. ISTep. 
Ale. vi. 

Opera med, Q. Fabi, Tarentum recepisti. Cic. Cat. Maj. 4. 

Quce domi gerenda sunt, ea per Cceciliam transiguntur. Cic. Rose. 
Am. 51. 

N. B. Per quos et a quibus ? Cic. Rose. Am. 29. "By whom (i. e. 
by whose instrumentality) ; and from whom " (i. e. at whose com- 
mand). 

§ 111. When the ablative of the agent is a "thing," it 
usually stands alone; when a "person," it is for the most 
part preceded by a or ab 

Periit morbo. Corn. Nep. Reges, iii. 3. 

Ab his initio Syracusce erant conditce. Corn. Nep. Timol. iii. 1. 

§ 112. The ablative of the cause is usually found after 
verbs intransitive, or passive, denoting some state of the 
mind. 

Invidus alterius macrescit rebus opimis. Hor. Ep. i. 2. 57. 
Animus remissione urgetur. Cic. Tusc. Quasi, ii. 23. 



§ 113.] SYNTAX. 259 

Obs. A preventing cause is expressed by prce. 
Solem prce jaculorum multitudine non videbitis. Cic. Tusc. Qucest 
i. 42. 

§ 113. The ablative of the manner, or way, strictly re- 
quires to be formed of an adjective and a substantive. 

Jam veniet tacito curva senecta pede. Ovid. A. Am. ii. 670. 
Mird celeritate rem peregit. 

Obs. 1. When a substantive in itself denotes the manner a de- 
pendent genitive may follow it instead of its being accompanied by 
an adjective. 

Ego apis Matinee more modoque Carmina Jingo. Hor. Carm. iv. 
2. 27. 

Obs. 2. When cum is prefixed to this construction, the adjective 
and substantive cease to be the ablative of the manner ; and 
something is pointed out as added to the action denoted by the 
verb, and not as indicating the way or manner in which such action 
operates. Compare 

Te memorid teneo summo studio didicisse. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iv. 3. 
with 

Quum tantam multitudinem cum tanto studio adesse videamus* 
Cic. Pro Leg. Man. 24. 

In the former case the mode of learning is pointed out ; in the 
other, that a great multitude was present, and further, were lis- 
tening, &c. with great earnestness, &c. 

N. B. Hence it will be seen that cum is used when it is intended 
to express what a person has with him. From this, however, is to 
be excepted the description of a person's dress. 

Obs. 2. Cum cannot be employed with words accompanied with an 
adjective, which, from their own inherent meaning, convey with 
them the idea of the way in which a thing is carried on or out ; 
thus we find a>quo animo not cum aequo animo ; hdc mente not cum 
Tide mente ; ed lege, not cum ed lege. The same observation holds 
good respecting any description of the parts of the body being in 
any particular state, &c. : thus, nudo capite not cum nudo capite. 

Obs. 3. But if an ablative of itself denotes manner, cum is prefixed 
to it, thus forming an adverbial expression ; thus, cum curd not 
curd ; cum benignitate not benignitate, &c. ; yet certain ablatives 
which occasionally supply the place of adverbs are not attended by 
cum; as jure, injuria, ird, fraude, &c. 

ET. B. Instead of cum, per is sometimes used with an accusative. 
Multa dolo, pier aque per vim audebantur. Liv. xxxix. 8. 



260 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 114, 115. 

§ 114. Verbs of buying, selling, valuing, and estimating, 
are followed by an ablative of the price if a fixed sum be 
named, or a substantive alone be employed. 

Teque sibi generam Tethys emat omnibus undis. Virg. Georg. i. 31. 
Talento inimicum mini emi, amicum vendidi. Plaut. Trin. iv. 3. 49. 
{Modium tritici) cestimant denariis tribus. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 92. 
Virtutem cestimat annis. Hor. Ep. ii. 1. 48. 

a. But when the price, &c. is expressed only in general terms, 
the genitives of the adjectives specified in Rule 68. Part I. are 
employed. To these may be added magni, permagni, majoris, 
parvi, plurimi, minimi, maximi. Multi and majoris are seldom 
found. 

Magni existimans interesse ad decus. Cic. N. D. i. 4. 
MuUo majoris alapa mecum veneunt. Phsed. ii. 5. 25. 

Obs. 1. Pretii is sometimes found expressed with pluris. 
Neque pluris pretii coquum, quam villicum habeo. Sail. Jug. 85. 

Obs. 2. To this head must be referred the idiomatic expressions 
cequi bonique facio, Ter. Heaut. iv. 5. 40. " To take a thing 
calmly and kindly : " cequi bonique dicere, Ter. " To propose a thing 
justly and properly," boni consulere, Quint, i. 6. 32. (and frequently 
elsewhere). " To interpret favourably," or, " to be satisfied with." 

b. Yet the following ablatives are found, vili, paulo, magno, per- 
magno, plurimo, parvo, minimo, duplo, nimio, dimidio, nihilo, non- 
nihilo. 

Instructam vili vendis, Amcene, domum. Mart. xii. 67. 10. 
Decumas permagno vendidi. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 39. 

§ 115. Intransitive verbs denoting plenty or want; i.e. 
those which signify to have an abundance of, or the reverse, 
take an ablative pointing out wherein the abundance, &c. 
consists : and transitive verbs, denoting to fill, to load, to 
endow, to deprive, take an ablative pointing out that where- 
with their object is filled, &c. 

Amore abundas, Antipho. Ter. Phorm. i. 3. 11. 

Communi sensu plane caret. Hor. Sat. i. 3. 66. 

Sylla omnes suos divitiis explevit. Sail. 

Vino et epulis onerati. Sail. Jug. 86. 

Sanguine Trojano dotabere. Virg. 2En. vii. 318. 

Apollonium omni argento spolidsti. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 17. 

Obs. Of those verbs of this kind which are mentioned at Eule 71. 
Part I., as being followed by a genitive case, the more common 
are compleo, impleo, egeo, indigeo. While in the poets others also 
are classed with them, such as obsaturor, satior, &c. 



§ 116—118.] SYNTAX. 261 

Completus mercatorum career. Cic. Verr. ii. 5. 37. 

Tuis oraculis Chrysippus totum volumen implevit. Cic. de 

Biv. ii. 56. 
Ne quis ex plebe auxilii egeret. Caes. B. G. vi. 11. 
Quum Lacedcemonii indigerent pecunid. Corn. Nep. Ages. vii. 2. 
Tfo 2s£ws obsaturabere. Ter. Heaut. iv. 7. 28. 
Qwzm satiata ferince Bextera ccedis erat. Ov. ilfe£. vii. 808. 

§ 116. Some verbs which signify to provide or supply a 
person with a thing have the same force if they are repre- 
sented as providing a thing for a person. Hence they have 
a twofold construction : viz. either an accusative of the per- 
son and an ablative of the thing ; or an accusative of the 
thing and a dative of the person. 

Hinc Me est annulus, quo tu istum in condone dondsti. Cic. 
Verr. ii. 3. 80. 

Prcedam militibus donat. Cic. B. G. vii. 11. 

Animum (deus) circufndedit corpore. Cic. Univ. 6. 

Concioni satellites armatos circumdedit. Liv. xxxiv. 27. 

Obs. To this construction must be referred Virg. 2En. vi. 229. 
Ter socios purd circumtulit undd. Where circumtulit is used in a 
middle or reflexive force, as if se were to be supplied. 

§ 117. Verbs denoting to clothe with, and to put on, 
have a peculiar construction. In the active voice they are 
followed either by an accusative of the person and an abla- 
tive of the thing ; or by a dative of the person with an ac- 
cusative of the thing : iii the passive they are followed by 
an accusative of the thing. 

Pomis se induit arbos. Virg. Georg. iv. 143. 

Cui quum Deianira tunicam induisset. Cic. Tusc. Qucest ii. 8. 

Induiturque atras vestes. Ov. Met. vi. 568. 

Obs. The accusative after the passive form is called the Greek 
accusative. Akin to this construction are the adverbial expres- 
sions magnam partem, maximam partem ; also, vicem with a de- 
pendent genitive or a possessive pronoun. We also find Cyclopa 
moveri, &c. 

§ 118. Fungor, fruor, utor, potior., vescor, are found in 
early Latin followed by an accusative. 

Militare munus fungens. Corn. Nep. Bat. i. 4. 

Hoccine me miserum, non licere meo modo ingenivm frui ? Ter. 

Heaut ii. 4. 21. 
Ne Silius quidem quicquam utitur. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xii. 22. 



262 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 119, 120. 

Semper habiti sunt fortissimi, qui summam imperii potirentur. 
, Corn. Nep. Eum. iii. 4. 
Ad extremum inopice venere, ut infirmissimos suorum vescerentur, 

Tac. Agr. 28. 

Obs. Utor, when it has another ablative, in apposition with its 
own, signifies, " to have." 

Hannibal Sosio usus est doctore. Corn. Nep. Hann. xvii. 3. 

§ 119. An ablative absolute is added to a proposition 
when a new subject is introduced, so that it stands in the 
place of an inserted clause or an accessory proposition. 

This ablative, as its name implies, is independent of the previous 
construction, and is influenced by nothing external to itself. It con- 
sists of an ablative, either of a substantive or pronoun, together with 
another ablative ; either, 1. of a participle in concord with it ; or 2. 
as there is no present participle of sum in use, of an adjective 
predicated of it ; or 3. an ablative of a substantive, usually ex- 
pressing the action of some verb, in apposition with it. According 
to circumstances, which vary of course with the construction, it 
may be rendered by " being," " having been," " as," " when," 
" after," " since that," " although," and the finite verb of the 
participle. 

Exercitu in hibernis composite*. Sail. Jug. 103. 

Vindice nullo. Ov. Met. i. 89. 

Nil desperandum Teucro duce et auspice Teucro. Hor. Od. i. 7. 27. 

Obs. A single ablative, when denoting the state of the weather, 
is sometimes used absolutely ; as, sereno, " the sky being calm ; " 
austro, " the wind being south ; " tranquillo, " the water being 
calm." 



Tenses, Periphrastic Conjugation, and the Succession 
op Tenses in dependent Clauses. 
Tenses. 
§ 120. The tenses are divided into three classes respec- 
tively denoting time, 1. Present; 2. Past; 3. Future. 

1. Present — time present, and action now going on. 
Perfect — time present, and action now completed. 

2. Imperfect — time past, and action then going on. 
Pluperfect — time past, and action then completed. 

3. Future — time to come, and action that will then take place. 
Future -perfect — time to come, and action that will then have 

taken place. 
N.B. In the case of intransitive and passive verbs, " condi- 
tion" or "state" must be substituted for "action." 



§ 121.] SYNTAX. 263 

§ 121. Peculiar use, &c, of some Tenses of the Indicative 
Mood. 

1 . The Present is sometimes used in animated narrative for the 
purpose of bringing the past more vividly before the mind, repre- 
senting it hereby as if it were actually now taking place. Thus 
used, it is called the " Historic Present." 

Domi creant decern prcetores. Corn. ISTep. Milt. iv. 4. 

a. When it is wished to denote the instantaneous arrival of 
something yet future, the present is occasionally used. 

Stantes plaudebant in rejictd : quid arbitramur in vera fuisse fac- 
turos? Cic. Lcel. 7. 

2. The Imperfect sometimes represents an action, &c. either as 
continued, or often repeated, or being begun. 

Vulpes appetebat uvam (Phsed. iv. 2. 2.) " Kept seeking, &c." 
Veniebat in theatrum (Corn. Nep. Timol. iv. 2.) " Used often, &c." 
Plebes novos extollebat (Sail. Jug. 65.) " Was beginning, &c." 

3. The Perfect Indicative (but not subjunctive) is used as the 
narrative tense, in the force of the Greek aorist, pointing out merely 
what is past without reference to the time of its occurrence. Thus 
used, it is called the " Historic Perfect." 

Subito febris decessit, leviorque morbus esse cozpit. Corn. Nep 
Att. xxii. 3. 

a. The perfect is also used by the poets and those who imitate 
their style in another force of the Greek aorist, viz. : — to express 
a customary action. 

Illius immensce ruperunt Tiorrea messes. Virg. Georg. i. 49. 

Rege incolumi, mens omnibus una est; 
Amisso, rupere fidem, constructaque mella 

Diripuere ipsce, et crates solvere favorum. Yirg. Georg. iv. 212. 
Clarorum virorum facta moresque posteris trader e, antiquitus usi~ 
tatum, ne nostris quidem temporibus cetas omisit. Tac. Agr. 1. 

4. The Future is used, and correctly, in Latin, where in English 
the present is employed. 

Naturam si sequemur ducem, nunquam aberrabimus. Cic. Off. i. 
28. 
" If we shall follow ;" whereas the English idiom is " if we follow." 

Quum legent. Corn. Nep. Pr&f. 1. 

5. The Future-Perfect points out something that will have 
taken place, when something else has taken place. 

De qua vereri non ante desinam,, quam illam excisam esse cogno- 
vero, Cic. Cat. Maj. 6. 



264 LATIN GEAMMAR. [§ 122, 123. 

a. Occasionally the future-perfect is used in the place of the 
simple future, involving however the idea that the action, &c. will 
be very soon past and completed. 

Clamor et primus impetus castra ceperit. Liv. xxv. 38. 

Quid faciam nunc, si Tresviri me in carcerem compegerint? Piaut. 
Amph. i. 1. 3. 

Alio loco de aratorum animo et injuriis rider o. Cic. Terr. ii. 61. 

§ 1 22. Employ ment of Tenses in Epistolary Correspondence. 

It is a peculiarity of the epistolary style in Latin that the writer 
carrying in his mind, as it were, the times when his letter will be 
read, uses those tenses which the reader would employ in reference 
to the things contained in it. When, therefore, the writer would 
represent something as taking place at the time of his writing he 
uses the imperfect ; something past with reference to such time, the 
pluperfect. For instance, he would say, Multa habebam, quce scri- 
berem. Namque audit ram, 8fc. : because the person who received 
the letter would thus express himself respecting the matters named 
by his correspondent : Turn, quum heme epistolam scribebat, multa 
habebat, quce scriberet. Namque audierat. frc. But when any thing 
is to be mentioned generally, without reference to the time at which 
the letter was being written, and merely as an action completed for 
the receiver of the letter, the perfect is used where in common con- 
versation the present would be employed. Hunc librum ad te de 
Senectute misimus, says Cicero (Cat. Maj. 1.) to Atticus ; because 
Atticus would say when he received it, Hunc librum ad me de Se- 
nectute misit Cicero. In all other cases the usual modes of expres- 
sion are followed. 



Periphrastic Conjugation. 

§ 123. In order to denote the future with reference to a 
certain given time the future participle is used in combin- 
ation with a tense of sum ; 

1. 1. TTith the present, sum, to denote the future action as now 
on the point of commencement. Sum moniturus, " I am about, or, 
now on the point of advising," or " I intend now," &c. 

2. TTith the imperfect, eram, to denote that the future action 
was about commencing at a certain period in time past. Eram 
moniturus, " I was about to advise, then," or " I intended then," 
&c. (when or if, &c. as specified in some dependent clause). 

3. With the perfect fui, to denote the future action as contem- 
plated at some indefinite past time. Fui moniturus, " I have been," 
or M was about to advise," or " I intended, &c." 



§ 124, 125.J syntax. 265 

4. With the pluperfect, fueram, to denote the future action as 
contemplated before a certain past time. Fueram moniturus, " I 
had been (i. e. before such a time) about to advise," or " I had 
intended, &c." Occasionally, especially in the poets, it is used with 
this tense in precisely the same force as with the imperfect. 

5. With the future, ero, to denote that the future action will be 
contemplated at some future period. JEro moniturus, " I shall be 
about (at such a time) to advise." 

6. With the future-perfect, fuero, in a somewhat stronger force 
than with the simple future. This combination is exceedingly rare. 

N.B. This formation corresponds to that of the Greek /xeaXw, 
with a dependent infinitive. 

Obs. In the passive, which has no corresponding future participle, 
the idea is differently expressed : viz. est in eo^ erat in eo, &c. ut 
with a dependent clause. 

II. In the same way the future passive participle in ndus is used 
to denote future necessity. This construction may be termed the 
Passive Periphrastic Conjugation. 



Use of the Tenses of the Subjunctive Mood. 

§ 124. The subjunctive mood has only the tenses men- 
tioned in 1. and 2. § 120. These have the same force with 
the indicative, as there explained. 

Obs. 1. The historical tense of the subjunctive is the imperfect. 

Obs. 2. The periphrastic future is also formed by the future 
participle and the four tenses of the subjunctive of sum. See § 125. 

N.B. The way in which the future tenses are made good in the 
subjunctive is explained below, § 126. 



Tenses in dependent Clauses. 

§ 125. As there must be a harmony of time between two 
actions, &c. having mutual reference to each other, those 
tenses only can follow each other in the way of dependence 
which belong to the same class ; hence by reference to the 
classification of the tenses § 120, it will be seen that where 
the subjunctive mood is required in a dependent clause, the 

N 



266 LATIN GRAMMAK. [§ 126. 

present and perfect indicative must be followed by the pre- 
sent or perfect subjunctive; the imperfect and pluperfect in- 
dicative by the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive. For 
instance, it may be said: Audio quid facias ; audio quid 
feceris : audivi quid facias; audivi quid feceris : audiebam 
quidfaceres; audiebam quid fecisses : audiveram quid facer es ; 
audiveram quid fecisses. 

a. The historic present and perfect being regarded as historic 
tenses are followed by the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive. 

Omnem sermonem tribuimus M. Catoni, quo majorem auctoritatem 
haberet oratio. Cic. Cat Maj. 1. 

Persuadet Castico, ut regnum occuparet. Ca?s. B. G. i. 3. 

Omnem aciem suam rliedis et carris circumdederunt, ne qua spes 
infuga relinqueretur. Caes. B. G. i. 16. 

PMlippidem Lacedcemonem miserunt, ut nunciaret qudm celeri opus 
esset auxilio. Corn. Nep. Milt. iv. 3. 

b. The two futures of the indicative mood are followed by either 
a present or perfect subjunctive as the case may be. Thus for in- 
stance it may be said, audiam quid facias or feceris; audivero quid 
facias or feceris. 

§ 126. From what is stated at § 124, it will be seen that 
the subjunctive mood has no future tenses of its own. This 
deficiency is supplied by the other tenses of the subjunctive ; 
the present and imperfect supplying the place of the simple 
future; the perfect and pluperfect that of the future perfect. 
Hence when future time is spoken of in the leading clause, 
one of the above tenses will be employed in the dependent 
clause ; but which of them, will be determined by the lead- 
ing verb of the proposition, and also by the consideration 
whether the future action is to be regarded as complete or 
not. For instance, it may be said, Audio (or audivi) te, si 
adveniat (or advenerii) Quintus, magnopere esse gavisurum ; 
but audiebam (or audiveram) le, si adveniret (or advenisset) 
Quintus, magnopere esse gavisurum. 

Nee metuam quid de me judicet hceres. 
Quod non plura datis invenerit. Hor. Ep< ii. 2. 191. 
Non ignarus, prout prima cessissent, terror em cceteris fore. Tac. 
Agr. 18. 

Qui nisi decedat atque exercitum deducat, sese ilium pro hoste habi- 
turum. Caes. B. G. i. 44. 

Obs. The four tenses of the conjugatio periphrastica, in the sub 
junctive mood, are also comprehended as futures under the abov< 
explanation. 



§ 127—129.] syntax. 267 

§ 127. The employment, in a dependent clause, of the per- 
fect subjunctive in the force of the historic tense is very rare, 
and quite an exception to the general rule of the language, 
Indeed when thus employed it seems to partake so far of the 
character of the perfect indicative, as to convey the in- 
timation that the circumstance is spoken of as a fact which 
came under the writer's own cognizance. (Compare § 135.) 

Diligentissimd conquisitione fecit, ne cujus alterius sacrilegium res- 
publico, quam Neronis senserit. Tac. Agr. 6. 



MOODS. 
The Indicative Mood. 



§ 128. The Indicative Mood is used to make an assertion, 
to state a fact, or to put a direct or independent question. 

It is the mood which a writer employs to give his own senti- 
ments, &c. (emtio recta). 



Imperative Mood. 

§ 129. The Imperative Mood denotes a command. A wish, 
entreaty, or exhortation is expressed by the subjunctive. 
See below, § 136. 

The imperative mood has two tenses : I. the present ; and 
II. the future. 

I. The present tense implies that the command is to be 
executed at once, and has no reference to any antecedent 
condition. 

Redite in suffragia, et cogitate helium Punicum in Italia et ducem 
esse Hannibalem. Liv. xxxvi. 22. 

Dona prcesentis cape Icetus horce et Linque severa. Hor. Od. iii. 
9.27. 

a. It also points out a command, obedience to which is to begin 
now, and to extend into future time. 

Vive memor quam sis cevi brevis. Hor. Sat. ii. 6. 97„ 

b. Dico, duco, facio, fero, make die, due, fac, fer. Scio has no 
present form, sci. Instead of it the future form scito is used. 

N2 



268 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 129. 

II. The future tense is employed when reference is made 
to time following, whether more or less remote : and denotes 
what is to be executed, &c, when something else, some pre- 
vious condition or action, has taken place. 

Ubi ad Diance veneris, ito ad dextram. Ter. Ad. iv. 2. 43. 

Qui si videbitur eruditiils disputare, attribuito Gratis Uteris. Cic. 
Cat. Maj. 1. 

Obs. 1. It is not necessary that the previous condition or action 
should be expressed in words : it is sufficient that it is implied by 
the context. 

Frater venit ex Salerno : ego Mi obviam pergam ; vos hue decumd 
venitote. Cic. ad Herenn. iv. 51. — i.e. Go now ; and come again 
by and bye, at dinner time. 

Obs. 2. The respective forces and values of the two tenses of 
the imperative are clearly brought out in the following passage : — 
Quapropter, Quirites, expectate legatorum reditum, et paucorum 
dierum molestiam devorate. Qui quum redierint, si pacem afferent, 
cupidum me — si bellum, providum — judicatote. Cic. Phil. vi. 6. 
Here expectate, devorate apply to present time irrespective of any 
thing there is to take place ; but judicatote points to what must 
be done when the legati shall have returned. 

Note. This view of the imperative mood, which is that of the 
ancient grammarians, was rejected by Vossius, Perizonius, and 
others, who substituted for it the theory that the second, i. e. as 
here called, the future form, was only a stronger mode of expres- 
sion, implying necessity rather than a mere command. But that 
idea probably had its origin in their not bearing in mind the re- 
lative value of the indicative and imperative moods ; for as the 
former makes an assertion, &c, its future points out what will 
certainly take place (see page 23. Part I.) ; but, as the latter gives 
a command, its future denotes that the thing commanded is to 
take place hereafter. The poets, indeed, are not always bound 
strictly by the above rules : they assume in this respect, as in 
others, a latitude of expression not needed nor claimed by writers 
in prose. 

a. The imperative future is especially used in legal instru- 
ments, such as wills, contracts, laws, &c, because that in 
them future time is implied. 

Filius mihi heres esto : si heres non erit, sive erit et intra puber- 
totem decesserit, tunc Caius heres esto. Modestinus de Testamentis. 

Quarta esto partis Ulysses hares. Hor. Sat. ii. 5. 100. 

Amicitia regi Antiocho cum populo Romano his legibus et conditi- 
onibus esto. Liv. xxxviii. 8. 



§ 130, 131.] SYNTAX. 269 

Impius ne audeto placare donis iram deum. Cic. de Legg. ii. 9. 

N.B. All the laws of the Twelve Tables have the obligatory part 
expressed by the future imperative. 

§ 130. A negative command is expressed by ne or neve, 
not non or neque. 

Semen nejacito. Plin. H. N. xviii. 77. 

Belli gerendi jus Antiocho ne esto. Liv. xxxviii. 8. 

Obs. 1. Yet non is sometimes used with an imperative by the 
poets. 

Vos quoque non caris aures onerate lapiUis. Ovid. A. Am. iii. 129. 

Obs. 2. Ne, with a present subjunctive, is used by the poets, 
unless something is to be strongly emphasized ; when it is, they 
employ ne with imperative. 

Ne post conferas culpam in me. Ter. Eun. ii. 3. 96. 

Ne parce arena particulam dare. Hor. Od. i. 28. 23. 

Ne queer e profecto Quern casum portenta ferunt. Virg. 2En. viii. 
532. 

§ 131. In the place of the imperative, the following modes 
of expression are sometimes adopted : 

1. A positive command is paraphrased by cura ut, fac ut, facito 
ut, or fac alone, (or their plurals) followed by a present or perfect 
subjunctive. 

Cura ut valeas, Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 5. 

Curate ut valeatis. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 6. 

Quidquid indagdris facito ut sciam. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ii. 4. 

Facite, judices, ut recordemini. Cic. pro Flacc. 24. 

Fac cogites in quanta calamitate sis. Sail. Cat. 44. 

Domi adsitis facite. Ter. Eun. iii. 2. 53. 

2. A prohibition or negative command is paraphrased either by 
noli, or nolite, and a dependent infinitive : or by fac ne, cave ne, or 
cave alone, sometimes vide ne (or their plurals), followed by a pre- 
sent or perfect subjunctive. 

Noli putare, mi Cicero, me hoc tuis auribus dare. Cic. Ep. ad 
Div. xii. 16. 

Nolite, judices, existimare. Cic. pro Flacc. 42. 

Si insidias fieri libertati vestrce intelligetis, nolitote dubitare, Sfe. 
Cic. de Leg. Agr. ii. 6. 

Fac ne quid aliud cures. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xvi. 11. 

Cave ne minuas. Hor. Sat. ii. 3. 178. 

Cave existimes. Cic. Ep. ad Div. ix. 29. 

Vide ne tu pejus consulas. Corn. Nep. Epam. x. 2. 
N 3 



270 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 132, 133. 

Subjective Mood. 

§ 132. The Subjunctive Mood is used to express not a 
fact, but a conception of the mind. 

Hypothetical and Conditional Clauses, and those containing 
an Inference or Conclusion, 

§ 133. 1. "When a supposition or condition is to be represented 
as something which does or may exist, &c, the present or perfect 
subjunctive, preceded by si, or one of its compounds, is employed 
in the limiting clause (protasis'). Si velit, " if he wishes," i. e. 
supposing he wishes, or if, under such circumstances, he wishes ; 
hence is supplied the inference that he does or may, at least, wish. 
Si voluerit, " if he wished," i. e. supposing he wished, or if, under 
such circumstances, he wished, — implies that he did, or, at any 
rate, might have wished. 

So, also, when an inference or conclusion is to be drawn, the 
subjunctive without si is employed in the leading or principal 
clause (apodosis). Faciat "he may do it," fecerit, "he may 
have done it," — intimate that he may do it, or actually does it ; 
he might have done it, or actually did it. 

JEquabilitatem vitce servare non possis, si aliorum virtutem imitans 
omittas tuam. Cic. de Off. i. 31. 

Obs. Hence, as in either instance the inference is in the affirma- 
ative, the indicative is sometimes used in the principal clause 
instead of the subjunctive. The distinction is, that more of 
actuality is" imparted to the expression by the use of the indi- 
cative ; inasmuch as any mental operation, although presumed to 
be about to be realised, cannot be stamped with the same positive 
value as what is given as a fact. 

Memoria minuitur, nisi earn exerceas, aut si sis naturd tardior. 
Cic. Cat. Maj. 7. 

2. But when a supposition or condition, or when an inference 
or conclusion is to be represented as something that does not or 
cannot exist, the imperfect or pluperfect subjunctive alone is used 
under the same conditions as in the former case. Moreover, here, 
the imperfect is used of time present ; the pluperfect of time past. 
Si vellet, if he wished, but he does not : si voluisset, if he had 
wished, out he did not. 

Si omnia incolumia manerent, tamen, si quid ex improviso acci- 
disset, vos implorarem. Sail. Jug- 14. 

Si Roscius has inimicitias cavere potuisset, viveret Cic. Rose. 
Am. 6. 

Xecassem jam te verberibus, nisi iratns essem. Cic. de Rep. i. 38. 



§ 134— 136. syntax. 271 



Independent Clauses. 

§ 134. The present subjunctive is used in independent 
clauses to modify an expression or assertion ; yet with a force 
very closely bordering upon that of the indicative. 

Perfectd quidem simus sapientid, si nihil habeat res vitii. Cic. 
Lcel. 11. 

Occldite inermem : Hoc cupiant patres Tarquiniusque pater. Ov. 
Fast. ii. 694. 

§ 135. In like manner the perfect subjunctive may be 
used as a modified perfect indicative ; yet more generally as 
a modified future indicative. 

Hoc pertinere vere ad illos dixerim. Phsed. i. 13. 18. 

Ipsos Germanos indigenas crediderim. Tac. Germ. 2. 

De Menandro loquor, nee tamen excluserim alios. Quint, i. 8. 

Nee ar are terr am facile per suaseris. Tac. Germ. 14. 

N.B. When used as in §§ 134, 135., it is called subjunctivus 
potentialis, 

§ 136. The subjunctive is used, like the Greek optative, 
to express a wish or desire. 

1. The second and third persons of the present, and the third 
person of the perfect, are used in positive clauses in this force. 

Placide quiescas. Tac. Agr. 46. 
Aspera Rubigo, parcas cerealibus herbis. 

Ft tremat in summd Iceve caciimen humo. Ov. Fast. iv. 911. 
Hcbc prima lex in Amicitid sanciatur. Cic. LceL 
Fictis jocari nos meminerit fabulis. Phaed. i. Prol. 7. 
Sibi habeant arma. Cic. Cat. Maj. 16. 
Di vortant bene. Ter. Fun. ii. 3. 98. 

2. In negative clauses the second person of the perfect is em- 
ployed when a definite person is addressed, but the second person 
of the present when an assumed or indefinite one : the third person 
of the present is also used in negative clauses, but rarely the third 
person of the perfect. 

Qui tamen dicat pro illo ne feceris, non feceris, in idem incidit 
vitium ; quia alter um negandi est, alter um vetandi. Quint, i. 5. 

Quid absit, ne requiras. Cic. Cat. Maj. 10. 

Ne terreat vanus aspectus. Tac. Agr. 32. 

Nemo contenderit. Tac. Ann. iv. 32. 

Obs. Though in the best classical prose writers ne is employed 
and not non, yet non is found in post-Augustan writers, and in 
the poets. 

n 4 



272 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 137 — I4L 

Non dubitaveris. Sen. Q. N. i. 3. 

Non etiam sileas. Hor. Sat. ii. 5. 91. 

Non audita tuumjecur ulcer et ulla. Hor. JEJp. i. 18. 72. 

N.B. When used as in 1, 2. it is called subjunctivus optativus. 

3. The first person plural of the present expresses a mutual ad- 
hortation, in which the speaker includes himself as well as the per- 
son addressed. 

Eamus gratulatum patri. Gell. xii. 1. 
N.B. This is called subjunctivus adhortativus. 

§ 137. The subjunctive is also employed to signify an ad- 
mission or concession. 

Non (senectus) faciat ea, quce juvenes (faciunt). Cic. Cat Maj. 6. 
N.B. This is called subjunctivus concessivus. 

§ 138. Moreover when it is assumed that something is or 
is not, does or does not exist, &c. but which nevertheless 
must be passed over and not made the ground of discussion 
or dispute, the subjunctive present is used. 

Sint sane (dii) ex atomis. Cic. Nat. Deor. i. 24. 

Ne sit sane summum malum dolor : malum certe est. Cic. Tusc. ii. 5. 

§ 139. In independent questions to which a negative reply 
is expected (those introduced by an indefinite relative pro- 
noun or adverb), the subjunctive is used. 

Quid dicam ? " What can I say ?" (Nothing). 
Quid non dicam? " What can I not say ?" (Not nothing or 
every thing.) 

Quid commemorem ? " Why should I relate ?" (I will not). 

§ 140. In questions relating to something not to be thought 
of, an elliptical mode of expression is employed in conjunc- 
tion with ut and the subjunctive mood. 

Egone ut, te inter pellem ? (Shall I interrupt you ? It must not 
be thought of! ) i. e. fierine potest ut ego, 8fc. 

§ 141. In oratio obliqua (i. e. in the reporting another's 
words) the subjunctive is used. 

Neve pralii unius aut alterius eventu pavescerent Tac. Agr. 15. 
Si quid vellent, ante diem Idus Aprilis reverterentur. Cses. B. G. 



§ 142.] SYNTAX. 273 

Dependent Clauses* 

§ 142. The subjunctive is used in dependent clauses which 
denote, 

1. The object or design of what has preceded. Such are 
introduced by ut, uti, that ; ne, utne, ut non, that not; quin, 
but that ; quominus, that not, &c. 

Memmius populo persuadet, ut L, Cassius ad Jugurtham mittere- 
tur. Sail. Jug. 32. 

Rutilum pr&misit, uti locum antecaperet. Sail. Jug. 50. 

Moneo hortorque, ne tantum scelus impunitum omittatis. Sail. Jug. 
31. 

Addendum est, ut ne criminibus inferendis delectetur. Cic. Lcel. 

Itafit, ut non item in oratione et versu numerus exstet. Cic. Or at. 60. 

Neque abest suspicio, quin ipse mortem consciverit. Caes. B. G. i. 31. 

Si te infirmitas valetudinis tenuit quominus ad ludos venires. Cic. 
Ep. ad Div. vii. 1. 

Obs. Sometimes ut is omitted. 

Huic Sp. Albinus persuadet, regnum Numidice ab Senatu petat. Sail. 
Jug. 35. 

Bomilcari imperat insidiatores Massivce paret. Sail. Jug. 35. 

2. A purpose or intention. Such are those introduced by 
ut, in order that ; ne, ut ne, in order that not ; quo, in order 
that ; quo ne, quomodo ne, in order that not, &c. 

Exploratores per castra Scipio circumduci jussit dimittique, ut re- 
nunciarent Hannibali quce vidissent. Eutrop. iii. 22. 

Considera, ne in alienissimum tempus cadat adventus tuus. Cic. Ep. 
ad Div. xv. 14. 

Equidem soleo dare operam, ut ne quis alius adsit. Cic. de Orat. 
ii. 24. 

Fraus mea quid petiit, nisi quo tibi jungerer uni. O v. Her. xx. 

JLo. 

Moxque ad aram, quo ne Jiostis dolum persentisceret, aversusque 
a duce adsistit. Diet Cret. iv. 11. 

Qumritis maximis sumpiibus faciendis, quomodo ne tributa confe- 
ratis. Rutil. Lup. i. 9. 

^ Obs. Metuo, timeo, vereor, are constructed as if they involved an 

44 intention." Ne, after them, is rendered " that ;" ut, " that not." 

, In the former instance is conveyed the idea that something will 

happen, which it is wished should not happen ; in the latter that 

something will not happen, which it is wished should happen. 

Metuebat ne indicarent. Cic. pro Mil. 21. 

N 5 



274 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 142. 

Ornamenta, qua loeavi, metuo ut possim recipere. Plaut. Cure, i\< 
1. 3. 

Non times ne locum perdas. Quint, vi. 3. 

Timeo ut sustineas labores. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 2. 

Veritus ne siti exercitus conjiceretur. Sail. Jug. 50. 

Ut ferula ccedas mentum majora subire Non vereor. Hor. Sat. i. 
3. 120. 

!N\B. The above verbs are sometimes followed by an infinitive. 
But this is only when they express a mere state of mind, irre- 
spective altogether of any intention, &c. or mental operation. 

3. A consequence, effect, or condition. Such are preceded 
by ut, that, so that, on condition that ; ut non, so that not, &c. 

Tarquinius sic Servium diligebat, ut is ejus vulgb liaberetur filius. 
Cic. de Rep. ii. 21. 

Aristoteles quidem ait omnes ingeniosos melancholicos esse ; at ego 
me tardiorem esse nonmoleste feram. Cic. Tnsc. i. 33. 

Quis est qui velit, ut neque diligat quemquam, circumfluere omnibus 
rebus f Cic. Lcel. 14. 

Neque leves sunt, qui se duo soles vidisse dicunt; ut non tarn fides 
non habenda, qudm ratio queer enda sit. Cic. de Hep. i. 10. 

4. An exception or limitation. Such are those preceded by 
ut, etsi, licet, quamquam, quamvis, although ; nedum, much 
less ; dum, dummodo, dam modo, modo, provided that, &c, 

Veriun, ut ita sit, tainen non potes. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 64. 

TJbi, etsi aliquid adjectum numero sit, magna certe ccedes fuit. Liv. 
iii. 8. 

Vita brevis est, licet supra mille annos exeat. Sen. de Brev. Vit.6. 

Quamquam ne id quidem suspicionem coitionis habuerii. Cic. pro 
Plane. 22. 

Homines, quamvis in turbidis rebus sint, tamen interdum animis re* 
laxantur. Cic. Phil. ii. 16. 

Optimis temporibus nee P. Popillius nee Q. Metellus vim tribmi- 
ciam sustinere potuerunt ; nedum his temporibus sine vestrd sapientid 
salvi esse possimus. Cic. pro Cluent. 35. 

Licet lascivire, dum nihil metuas. Cic. de Rejy. i. 40. 

Qui omnia recta et honesta negligunt, dummodo potentiam conse- 
quantur. Cic. de Off. iii. 21. 

Med nil refert, dum patiar modo. Ter. Eun. ii. 3. 38. 

Manent ingenia senibus, modo permaneat studium et industria. Cic. 
Cat. Maj. 7. 

Obs. Quanquam strictly takes the indicative^ yet is put by late 
writers for quamvis, and so governs the subjunctive : while quamvis 
is put for quanquam and has the indicative. 

Quamquam id est minimi probandum. Cic. de Rep. i. 26. 



§ 143. J SYNTAX. 275 

JErat inter eos dignitate regid, quamvis carebat nomine. Corn. 
Nep. Milt ii. 3. 

5. A wish. Such are introduced by si, utinam, " would 
that. ' 

O ! mihi prceteritos refer at si Jupiter annos. Virg. 2En. viii. 560. 
Utinam liberorum nostrorum mores non ipsos perderemus. Quint. 
i. 2. 

6. A cause or reason. Such are preceded by quia, quod, 
quoniam, " because : " when the writer states any thing as a 
mere conception, or as something he has heard from another. 

Prcecepit ut voluptatem ipsam per se, quia voluptas sit, optandam 
putet Cic. Tusc, v. 33. 
. Mirari Cato se aiebat, quod non rideret aruspex, aruspicem quum 
vidisset. Cic. de Div. ii. 25. 

Quoniam. ipse pro se dicer e non posset. Corn. aSTep. Them. vii. 5. 

N.B. When the writer introduces a clause with the above, de- 
signing at the same time to assign the reason as his own, the in- 
dicative is used. 

Urbs, quce quia postrema cedificata est, Neapolis nominatur. Cic. 
Verr. ii. 4. 53. 

Fecisti mihi pergratum, quod Serapionis librum mihi misisti. Cic. 
Ep. ad Att. ii. 4. 

Quoniam res in id discrimen adducta est. Cic. Phil. iii. 11. 

§ 143. The subjunctive is further used, 

1. In clauses following those constructed with the infinitive 
and accusative, provided that the subjunctive clause gives the 
thoughts or (in indirect narrative) the words of the person 
spoken of, or if it essentially belongs to the preceding state- 
ment. 

Mirari solitum C. Fabricium, quod audisset a Thessdlo Cined. 
Cic. Cat. Maj. 13. 

Diem se ad deliberandum sumpturum ; si quid vellent, ante diem 
Idus Apriles reverierentur. Cses. B. G.i.7. 

2, In clauses introduced into a proposition of which the 
verb is in the subjunctive, provided this subjunctive clause 
belongs essentially to the preceding one, defining some cir- 
cumstance, condition, &c, of the subject of it. 

Quoniam, qui primi Wxenum transgressi G alios expulerint, ut nunc 
Tungri tunc Germani vocati sint. Tac. Germ. 2. 

Xon dubitare, quin de obsidibus, qui apud eum sint, supplicium 
sumat. 

Quum id, quod antea deneg asset, ultrb polliceretur. Cses. B. G. i. 32. 
n 6 



276 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 144, 145. 

3. In clauses following the statement of a fact (which is of 
course in the indicative) provided that the subjunctive clause 
gives the idea not of the speaker, writer, &c, but of some one 
else from whom he heard it, &c. (indirect narrative.) 

Manno tres filios adsignant : e quorum nominibus proximi Oceano 
Ingcevones, medii Hermiones, ceteri Istcevones, vocentur. Tac. 
Germ. 2. 

Earum rerum exemplum ex similitudine capiebat ineuntis cetatis ; 
quod summi puerorum amores soepe una cum prcetextd ponerentur* 
Cic. Lcel. 10. 

Obs. If the speaker or writer would give the idea or statement 
as his own, the indicative is used. 

Quce quidem res Ccesari voluptatem attulit, quod hominem sibi 
restitutum videbat. Caes. B. G. i. 53. 

Indirect Questions. 

§ 144. An indirect question has its verb in the subjunctive, 
because it reports the language of another. 

Qucerit ex proximo vicino, num ferice qucedom piscatorum essent, 
Cic. Off. iii, 58. 

Quum ex cceteris captivis queer eret (Ccesar), quam oh rem Ario- 
vistus prcelio non decertaret. Cges. B. G. i. 50. 

Relative Clauses. 

§ 145. The subjunctive mood is used in the dependent 
clause in combination with the relative pronoun; 

I. When the principal clause contains one of the demon- 
strative pronouns, is, hie, &c. ; also talis, tantus, aliquis, ejus- 
modi, or an adjective preceded by tarn. In this construction 
the relative and the preceding word are equivalent to " such 
an one, &c. . . . as," " some one, &c. . . . who." 

Ea nolui scribere, quce nee indocti intelligere possent nee docti 
legere curarent. Cic. Acad. i. 12. 

Hcec habui, de amicitid quce dicer em. Cic. Lcel. 27. 

Talem te esse oportet, qui prbnum te ah impiorum civium societate 
sejungas. Cic. Ep. ad Div. x. 6. 

Nulla acies humani ingenii tanta est, quce penetrare in ccelum 
possit. Cic. Acad. ii. 39. 

Nunc dicis aliquid, quod ad rem pertineat Cic. Rose. Am. 18. _ 

Quce civitas tarn Jirma est^ quce non odiis possit everti f Cic. 
Lcel 7. 



§ 145.] SYNTAX. 277 

Obs. The same construction obtains when the demonstrative is 
not expressed, but is to be supplied. 

Dumnorigi custodes ponit, ut quce agat, quibuscum loquatur, scire 
possit. Caes. B. G. i. 20. 

2. After all indefinite and general expressions, in order to 
point out the person or thing indefinitely referred to. Such 
expressions are, est, sunt, fyc. qui; reperiuntur, fyc, qui; 
nemo, nullus est, qui ; nihil est, quod : also those containing 
the interrogative indefinite adjectives, quis, quotus, fyc. est 9 
qui ; together with est cur ; nihil, non, nullus est, cur, fyc. ; 
and also, est ubi, quatenus, fyc. 

Sunt qui non habeant, est qui non curat habere, Hor.Ep. ii. 2. 182. 

Fuere qui auro corrupti elephantos Jugurthce trader ent. Sail. 
Jug. 32. 

In omnibus seculis pauciores viri reperti sunt, qui suas cupiditates, 
quam qui hostium copias vincerent. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xv. 4. 

Nemo est qui non eo (equo), quo consuevit, libentius utatur. Cic. 
Lcel. 19. 

Nihil molestum est, quod non desideres. Cic. Cat Maj. 14. 

Quis est qui velit, ut neque diligat quemquam, circumfluere omnibus 
rebus? Cic. Lcel 14. 

Quotus enim quisque est, qui teneat artern numerorum et modorum t 
Cic. de Orat. iii. 50. 

Quid est, cur hoc loco sedeas 9 Cic. pro Cluent. 53. 

Duo causce sunt, cur tu in isto offico frequentior esse debeas. Cic. 
Ep. ad Div. xv. 20. 

Nonfuit causa, cur tantum labor em caper es. Cic. Rose. Com. 16* 

Nulla causa est, cur hunc miserum tantd calamitate affici velis. 
Cic. Rose. Am. 50. 

Est ubi id valeat. Cic. Tusc. v. 8. 

Est quatenus amicitice dari venia possit. Cic. Lcel. 17. 

Obs. After such of the above expressions as are affirmative, 
such as est, qui, &c. — but not after those that are negative, such 
as nemo est, qui, &c. — the relative is frequently used with the in- 
dicative in poetry. In prose, also, this is the case when the 
expression forms a periphrasis, characterising a particular class: 
for thus the expression ceases to be indefinite and general. 

Sunt quos curriculo pulverem Olympicum Collegisse juvat, Hon 
Od. i. 1. 3. 

Sunt quibus in Satird videor nimis acer. Hor. Sat. ii. 1. 1. 
Sunt qui, quod sentiunt, non audent dicere. Cic. Off. i. 24. 
Sunt qui spiritum non recipiuut, sed resorbent. Quint, xi. 3. 

S. A relative, with a subjunctive, is used to show the reason 



278 LATIN GUAMMAE, [_§ 145. 

of what is before mentioned. The relative is here equivalent 
to u because/' " since," — with a personal pronoun. 

Maluimus iter facere pedibus, qui incommodissime navigdssemus. 
Cic. Up. ad Att. v. 9. 

Ingrata es, ore quce caput nostro Incolumi abstuleris et mercedem 
postules. Phsed. i. 7. 11. 

JBellum indictum est Tarentinis, qui legatis injuriam fecissent. 
Eut. ii. 11. 

Obs. Quippe, utpote, or ut, are sometimes prefixed to the re- 
lative word to increase its force. 

Quippe cui ingredienti provinciam labor et periculum placuissent. 
Tac. Agr. 18. 

Utpote qui peregre depugndrit. Cic. Phil. v. 11. 

lnusitatce luxuries, sumptuumque {Nero fuit), ut qui calidis et 
frigidis lavaret unguentis, Eut. vii. 14. 

N.B. In the construction with quippe, &c, Sallust and Livy 
commonly use the indicative. 

Quippe qui in animo hceserat. Sail. Jug. 28. 
Quippe quibus cegre occursum est. Liv. v. 37. 

4. A relative and the subjunctive mood are also employed 
to point out the intention, design, or purpose of what pre- 
cedes. Here the relative is equivalent to " that," ** in order 
that," " to." 

Sordidi putandi, qui mercantur e mercatoribus, quod statim ven- 
dant. Cic. de Off. i. 42. 

Ccesar equitatum prcemisit, qui viderint. Cses. B. G. i. 15. 

Domi creant decern prcetores, qui exercitui prceessent. Corn. Nep. 
Milt iv. 4. 

Defixere aciem in his vestigiis, in quibus pulchram et spectabilem 
victoriam ederetis. Tac. Agr. 34. 

5. The relative is used with the subjunctive in limiting 
propositions. This is called its restrictive force ; and is 
equivalent to " as far as." 

Aristides unus post hominum memoriam, quod quidem nos audi- 
verimus, Justus est appellatus. Corn. Nep. Arist, i. 2. 

Nunquam ilium ne minima quidem re offendi, quod quidem 
senserim. Cic. Lcel. 27. 

6. The relative is also used with the subjunctive after 
dignuSy indignus, idoneus, aptus, to point out that whereof 
one is worthy, &c. 



§ 146—148.] syntax. 279 

Tu occurrebas dignus eo munere, quo uterque nostrum communiter 
uteretur. Cic. Cat. Maj. 1. 

line indigni erant, qui impetrarent ? Cic. Rose, Am. 41. 

Aptior, quce loqueretur. Cic. Led. 1. 

Fortasse idoneus nemofuit, quern imitarere. Cic. Verr. ii. 3. 16. 

§ 146. Necesse est is followed by the subjunctive, either 
with or without ut : but more commonly without it. 

Amor exoriatur necesse est. Cic. Led. 14. 

Eos necesse est ut veneficio petat. Cic. adHerenn. iv. 16. 

Obs. An accusative with infinitive is also found after necesse est. 
See below, § 160. 

* § 147. After verbs expressive of resistance or refusal, 
resisto, recuso, &e., the subjunctive preceded by ne is used. 

Quamdiu adfuit, ne qua sihi statua poneretur, restitit Corn. Nep. 
Att iii. 2. 

Prusias illud recusavit, ne id a se fieri postularent, quod adversus 
jus hospitii esset. Corn. £fep. Hann. xii. 3. 

Obs. In this construction ne does not cancel the negative con- 
tained in the verb, but rather augments it. 

a. Quin also is used commonly with the subjunctive mood, 
after non dubito, non dubium est. 

Nemo didntabat, quin voluntatem spectaret ejus. Cic. Verr, ii. 2. 13 
Dubitandum non existimavit, quin ad eum proficisceretur. Caes. 

B. G. ii. 2. 

Hocce non dubium est, quin Chremes tibi non det gnatum, Ter. 

And. ii. 3. 17. 

§ 148. Lastly, the second person of the subjunctive mood 
is used of some indefinite or assumed person, in the force of 
the English " one," and the French " on." 

Gargdnum mugire putes nemus aid mare Tuscum, 
Tanto cum strepitu ludi spectantur. Hor. Ep. ii. 1. 122. 
Eos modb Icetos, modb pavidos, animadvorteres. Sail. Jug. 60. 
Secretum et silentium ejus non timeres. Tac. Agr. 22. 

Obs. If a pronoun be used after such a subjunctive, it must 
be of the same person with the subject of the verb ; i. e. the second 
person, though an indefinite third person is meant. 

Ubi secordice te tradideris, nequidquam deos implores. Sail. 

Cat. 52. 
Tuis ipse moribus possis. Tac. Agr. 46. 



280 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§149, 150, 



Infinitive Mood. 

§ 149. The Infinitive Mood, with the exception of the 
historical infinitive, marks out the action or condition of a 
verb in a general or indefinite way ; i- e. without designating 
either number or person. Its subject when expressed is in 
the accusative, because that too is, like itself, indefinite in 
meaning. (See § 103.) The infinitive mood, moreover, is 
often used as a verbal substantive either of the nominative 
or accusative case, according to circumstances, and of the 
neuter gender. It must be borne in mind, however, that it 
takes after it the same mode of construction as any other 
part of its own form does. 

Its use as subject, is explained in § 150. I. a. After transitive 
verbs it becomes their direct object, if used alone ; if it be pre- 
ceded by an accusative the whole construction connected with it 
becomes an objectival clause depending on them. Its substantival 
force is apparent, too, from its being, though rarely, found depen- 
dent on a preposition. 

Inter valere et cegrotare. Cic. Fin. ii. 13. 
Prater amdsse. Ov. Her. vii. 164. 

§ 150. The use of the infinitive with verbs may be classed 
under two heads : — I. Without a subject expressed : II. 
With one expressed. 

I. The infinitive is used without a subject expressed; 

a. As the subject of a verb, whether finite or of the infinitive 
mood, when something is stated generally and indefinitely. In 
this construction something is usually predicated respecting it, 
and the verb employed is for the most part sum, though occa- 
sionally other verbs are employed. 

Peccare semper est turpe. Cic. de Off. iii. 15. 

Tutius (i. e. esse) rati volentibus, qudm coactis, imperitare. Sail. 

Jug. 10. 
Quos omnes eadem cupere, eadem odisse, eadem metuere in unum 

coegit. Sail. Jug. 31. 

b. When it is the object of a verb which has the same subject 
as itself, and is added to it in order to complete the idea, &c. Of 
this kind are those signifying to begin or proceed to do, to con- 
tinue, to cease, to neglect, to be wont or accustomed, to be able, 
to be unable, to resolve or determine, to intend or purpose, to 



§ 150.] SYNTAX. 281 

remember, to desire or wish, to be more desirous, to be unwilling, 
to endeavour, to seek, to dare, to fear, not to hesitate, to know 
how, to not know how, to learn, to be incumbent on, to hasten, to 
care, to not care, to desist from or avoid doing ; together with 
certain impersonal verbs, and the impersonal verbal expression 
fugit me, to escape my memory. 

Principes Gallia hortari ccepit Cass. B. G. v. 6. 

Coesarem pellere aggressi sunt. Tac. Or at. 17. 

Quum maturescere inciperent frumenta. Caes. B. G. vi. 29. 

Perge, igitur, ordine quatuor mihi istas partes explicare. Cic. 

Part. Or at. 8. 
Sin bello persequi perseveraret. Cass. B. G. i. 13. 
Illudjam mirari desino. Cic. de Orat. ii. 14. 
Mirabar quid esset, quod tu mihi literas mittere intermisisses. Cic. 

Ep. ad Div. vii. 12. 
Supersedissem loqui apud vos. Liv. xxi. 40. 
Omittamus lug ere. Cic. Brut. 76. 
Diem edicti obire neglexit. Cic. Phil. iii. 8. 
Qui mentiri solet, pejerare consuevit Cic. Rose. Com. 6. 
TJt fremitum assuesceret voce vincere. Cic. de Fin, v. 2. 
Potest fieri utfallar. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xvi. 73. 
Valet ima summis mutare deus. Hor. Od. i. 34. 12. 
Non queo cetera scribere. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiv. 1. 
Quod prcelio adesse nequibat. Sail. Cat 62. 
Pompeius quoque statuer at prcelio decertare. Cass. B. C. iii. 86. 
Desciscere a rege constituit. Corn. Nep. Dot. v. 5. 
Ccesar Rhenum transire decreverat. Cass. B. G. iv. 17. 
Hunc tu in mdes cogitas recipere posihac ? Ter. Eun. v. 2. 58. 
Omni Numidice imperare par at. Sail. Jug. 13. 
Quum animo meditaretur proficisci in Persas. Corn. Nep. 

Ag. iv. 1. 
Institui Topica conscribere. Cic. Ep. ad Div. vii. 19. 
Virginem forma bond memini videre. Ter. And. ii. 5. 17. 
Ego recordor longe omnibus anteferre Demosthenem. Cic. Orat 7. 
Quum pro se quisque operam navare cuperet. Caes. B. G. ii. 25. 
De quo studeo ex te audire quid sentias. Cic. Rep. i. 11. 
Idem Stoicus esse voluit Cic. Brut 56. 

Catojam servire, quam pugnare mavult. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vii. 15. 
Quis tarn crudeles optavit sumere pcenas ? Virg. 2En. vi. 501. 
Nolui deesse. Cic. Top. i. 

Helvetii id, quod constituerant, conantur facere. Cses. B. G. i. 5. 
Cirtam irrumpere nititur. Sail. Jug. 27. 
Hunc locum duabus ex partibus oppugnare contendit Caes. 

B.G.v. 21. 
Tentabo etiam de hoc dicer e. Quint, vi. 2. 

Aurumper medios ire satellites amat Hor. Od. iii. 16. 9. 

Tristitice causam si quis cognoscere queer it Ov. Trist v. 4. 7. 



282 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 150. 

Pulsi loco cedere ausi erant. Sail. Cat. 9. 

Non impositos supremis ignibus artus Sustinuit spectare parens. 

Ov. Met. xiii. 584. 
Quos in conspectu Gallia interficere vereretur. Caes. B. G. v. 6. 
Nil metuunt jurare. Catull. Epithal. Thet. 146. 
Cur timet flavum Tiberim tangere ? Hor. Od. i. 8. 8. 
Non dubitaverim me gravissimis tempestatibus obviumferre. Cic. 

Rep. i. 4. 
Si sci?*et re gibus uti. Hor. Ep. i. 17. 14. 
Stoici omnino irari nesciunt. Cic. de Or at. iii. 18. 
Latine apud Numantiam loqui didicerat. Sail. Jug. 101. 
Num ferre contra patriam arma illi cum Coriolano debuerunt? 

Cic. Led. 11. 
Exercitum transducere maturavit. Cass. B. G. ii. 5. 
Quod cures proprium fecisse. Hor. Ep. i. 17. 5. 
i£s£ am wow cz^raj 1 habere. Hor. Isj9. ii. 2. 182. 
Proinde parce, sis, fidem ac jura societatis jactare. Liv. xxxiv. 32. 
Quid sit futurum cras,fuge qu&rere. Hor. Od. i. 9. 13. 
Nunc decet caput impedire myrto. Hor. Od. i. 4. 9. 
Exemplis grandioribus decuii uti. Cic. de Div. i. 20, 
iVb7i libet mihi deplorare vitam. Cic. Cat. Maj. 23. 
Zzce£ 077Z ipsa cernere iratorum. Cic efe Off. i. 29. 
t7?2cfe habeas qucerit nemo, sed oportet habere. Juv. xiv. 207. 
Pudeat magis an pigeat disserere. Sail. Jug. 95. 
Cmi placet impares Formas atque animos sub juga mittere. Hor. 

Od. i. 33. 10. 
Tcedetjam audire eadem millies. Ter. Phor. iii. 2. 2. 
De (Dionysio) fugit me ad te antea scribere. Cic. Ep. ad Att. 

vii. 18. 

Obs. The infinitives after volo, nolo, malo, cupio, opto, studeo, 
have often before them an accusative case of a pronoun of the 
same person as that which volo, &c. take. 

Judicem esse me, non doctorem, volo. Cic. de Orat. 33. 

Quum se non nolle dixisset. Cic. de Orat. ii. 18. 

Principem se esse mavult, qucim videri. Cic. de Off. i. 19. 

Cupio me esse clementem. Cic. in Cat. i. 2. 

Quce sese inhoneste optamt parare hie divitias. Ter. Eun. iv. 5. 2. 

Si quisquam est, qui placer e se studeat bonis. Ter. Eun. Prol. 1. 

c. After arguo, doceo, insimulo, jubeo, sino, veto, when those verbs 
have also a personal accusative of the object. In this case the in- 
finitive mood represents that of which one accuses, that which 
one teaches, &c. 

Quce me arguit Hanc domo ab se surripuisse. Plant. Men. v. 2. 62. 

Invideo magistro tuo, qui te nihil sapere doceat. Cic. Phil. h.4. 

Insimulant hominem fraudandi causa discessisse. Cic. Verr. ii. 24. 

Herus me jussit Pamphilum observare. Ter. 



§ 150.] SYNTAX. 283 

Nbs Transalpinas genies oleam et vitem severe non sinimus. Cic. 

Rep. iii. 9. 
Ab opere legatos Ccesar discedere vetuerat Caes. B. G. ii. 20. 

d. After cogo, hortor, dehortor, impedio, moneo, prohibeo, when 
they have also a personal accusative of the object/ 

Plerasque (insulas) ad officium redire coegit. Corn. Nep. Milt 
xii. 1. 

Chariclem medicum remanere ac recumbere hortatus est Suet. 
Tib. 72. 

Plura de Jugurthd scribere dehortatur me fortuna mea. Sail. 
Jug. 24. 

Quid est igitur, quod me impediat ea, quce probabilia mihi vide" 
antur, sequi ; quce contra, improbare ? Cic. Off. ii. 2. 

Inter ea soror alma monet succurrere Lauso Turnum. Virg. 2En. 
x. 439. 

Qui Bibulum exire domo prohibuissent. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 9. 

Obs. The above verbs are sometimes constructed with the sub- 
junctive and ut in positive, and ne in negative, sentences. 

Ccepi cog ere ut rediret Ter. Hec. ii. 2. 26. 

Ego vos hortari tantitm possum, ut amicitiam omnibus rebus hu- 
manis anteponatis. Cic. Lcel. 5. 

Plura de Jugurthd scribere dehortatur me fortuna mea. Sail. 
Jug. 24. 

Casus quidam ne facer em impedivit. Cic. de Fat. 1. 

Monet, ut suspiciones vitet. Cges. B. G. i. 20. 

Quod potuisti prohib ere nefieret. Cic. Div. in Ccec. 10. 

II. The infinitive is used with a subject of its own ex- 
pressed, 

a. After verbs denoting any exertion or action of the mental 
faculties, &c, and which are commonly known by the term verba 
declarandi et sentiendi. 

Quidam plures Deo ortos (esse) affirmant. Tac. Germ. 2. 

Dico te venisse inter falcarios M. Lecca domum. Cic. in 
Cat i. 4. 

Mihi Fabius demonstravit te id cogitdsse facere. Cic. Ep. ad 
Div. iii. 3. 

Fateor earn esse importunam. Plaut. Asin. i. 1. 47. 

Mihi Philargyrus narravit te inter dum solicitum esse vehementius. 
Cic. Ep. ad Div. vi. 1 . 

Nego idlam picturam fuisse, quin abstulerit. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 1. 

Ostendit se cum rege colloqui velle. Corn. Nep. Con. 3. 

Ab hdc minatus sese abire. Plaut. Asin. iii. 3. 14. 

Cur ergo minitaris tibi te vitam esse amissurum ? Plaut. Asin. 
iii. 3. 21. 

Pollicita est ea se concessuram ex cedibus. Ter. Hec. iv. 4. 57. 



284 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 150. 

Promitto tibi, si valebit, tegidam ilium in Italia nullam relicturum. 
Cic. Ep. ad Att. ix. 7. 

Provocationem a regibus fuisse significant nostri augurales. Cic. 
Rep. ii. 31. 

Grceceius ad me scripsit C. Cassium sibi scripsisse homines com' 
parari, qui, fyc. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xv. 8. 

Ipsum regem tr admit se addidisse. Liv. i. 38. 

Ille se Tarentum projicisci quum simuldsset. Cic. pro Cluent. 9. 

Dissimulabam me harum sermoni operam dare. Plant. Epid. ii. 
2.54. 

Quum Numidas in omnes partes fugere vidissent. Caes. B. G. ii. 24. 

Scepe audivi a majoribus natu mirari solitum {esse) C. Fabricium. 
Cic. Cat. Maj. 13. 

Seutiet in hdc urbe esse consules vigilantes. Cic. in Cat. ii. 12. 

Qui non animadvertit innocentes illos natos (esse). Corn. Nep. 
Epam. vi. 3. 

Quas (leges) scitis exstare. Cic. Pep. v. 2. 

Nesciebam id dicer e illam. Ter. Eun. iv. 5,10. 

Intellexi ex tuis Uteris te audisse. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vi. 9. 

Ab Us Casar hcec dicta (esse) cognovit. Cass. B. G. iii. 18. 

Quid te futuimm (esse) censes? Ter. Beaut, iii. 1. 53. 

TJt omnia tua in te posita esse ducas. Cic. Lcel. 2. 

Judico neminem omnium tot et tanta habuisse dicendi ornamenta. 
Cic. de Orat. ii. 28. 

Placiturum tibi esse meum librum suspicabar. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. 
ii. 9. 

Deos didici securum agere cevum. Hor. Sat. i. 5. 101. 

Docui (I informed) id nee opus esse nee fieri posse. Cic. Ep. ad 
Att. xvi. 8. 

Volunt persuadere (to convince) non interire animas. Cass. B. G. 
vi. 13. 

Memini Catonem mecum disserere. Cic. Lcel. 3. 

Suscipiam partes, quas alienas esse arbitrabar. Cic. Verr. ii. 4. 37. 

Quum reliquum exercitum subsequi crederet. Cass. B. G. vi. 31. 

Bene colligit (infers) hcec pueris et mulierculis esse grata. Cic. de 
Off. ii. 16. 

Deinde concludebas summum malum esse dolor em. Cic. de Fin. 
ii. 19. 

Amicitice nostrce memoriam spero sempiternam fore. Cic. Lai. 4. 

Ego non despero fore aliquem aliquando. Cic. de Orat. l. 21. 

N.B. The accusative of the personal pronoun is not emphatic 
in the construction of verba declarandi et sentiendi with the in- 
finitive mood. 

Obs. The infinitive with accusative is also put after some im- 
personal verbs, and impersonal verbal expressions, which are allied 
in meaning to the verba sentiendi et declarandi* 



§ 150,] SYNTAX. 285 

Appdret servum hiinc esse domini pauperis. Ter. Eun. iii. 2. 23. 

Constat nihil eo fuisse excellentius. Corn. Nep. Alcib. i. 1. 

Haud convenit una ire cum arnica imperatorem in via. Ter. Eun. 
iii. 2. 41. 

Ilium ea quoque diligentissime percepisse credibile est Quint, 
ii. 3. 

Perspicuum est eas (utilitates) nos nullo modo sine hominum manu 
atque opera capere potuisse. Cic. Off. ii. 4. 

b. After verbs denoting a wish for something to take place, or 
the submitting to, or permitting, it. Also those signifying to com- 
mand, hinder, forbid that a thing be done. Such are termed verba 
voluntatis ; the principal of them are given below. 

Te tuafrui virtute cupimus. Cic. Brut. 97. 
Evanuisse mavultis id. Cic. de Div. ii. 57. 
Nolite, judices, hunc exstingui vulnere vestro. Cic. Cad. 32. 
Si vis meflere. Hor. A. P. 102. 

Ilia phalanx non par ere se ducibus, sed imperare, postulabat Corn. 
ISTep. Eum. viii. 2. 

Pern ad arma deduci studebat. Caes. B. C. i. 4. 

Nullum patiebatur esse diem, quin inforo dicer et. Cic. Brut 88. 

Vinum ad se importari non sinunt. Caes. B. G. iv. 2. 

Liviam ad se deduci imperavit. Suet. Cat. 25. 

lllos duci in career em jubent. Cic. Verr. ii. 5. 30. 

Nihil prohibet pecuniam solvi. Cic. Ep. ad Div. i. 9. 

N.B. Compare § 150. b. Obs. 

c. After verbs denoting pleasure, displeasure, grief, amazement, 
and others denoting some mental feeling. Such are called verba 
affectuum. 

Te accepisse meas litteras gaudeo. Cip. Ep. adAtt. vi. 9. 

Lcetor sine dolor e corporis te fuisse et animo valuisse. Cic. Ep. ad 
Div. vii. 1. 

Indignari ccepit regem ad dicendam causam evocari. Caes. B. C. 
i. 108. 

Siquis cegreferat se pauperem esse. Cic. Tusc. iv. 27. 

Quomodo ferant veterani exercitum Brutum habere. Cic. Phil. 
x. 7. 

Dolebant Romanos culmina Alpium occupare conari. Caes. B. G. 
iii. 2. 

Ne querantur se relictas esse. Cic. Tusc. v. 5. 

Si quis forte miratur me ad accusandum descender e. Cic. Div. in 
Ccec. 1. 

Maxime admiratus sum mentionem te h&reditatum ausum esse 
facer e. Cic. Phil. ii. 16. 

Seque alte? v um fore Sullam inter suos gloriatur. Caes. B. C. i. 4. 

Gratulor ingenium non latuisse tuum. Ov. Trist i. 9. 54. 



286 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 151, 152. 

Obs. Yet, after many of such verbs, quod 'is used with either 
the indicative or subjunctive mood, according as oratio recta or 
obliqua is employed. 

Gaude, quod spectant oculi te mille loquentem. Hor. Ep. i. 6. 19. 

Doluisse se, quod Populi JRomani beneficium sibi extorqueretur. 
Cjbs. B. C. i. 9. 

§ 151. If a substantive or adjective be added to an infi- 
nitive mood as a predicate or farther definition, its case is 
regulated by that of the subject. Hence, 

1. If an infinitive mood has the same subject as the finite verb, 
the substantive or adjective will be in the nominative. 

Antenor potuit ITlyricos penetrare sinus, atque intima tutus 
Regno, Liburnorum etfontem superare Timavi. Virg. 2En. i. 242. 

2. If an infinitive has its own subject in the accusative it will 
have the substantive or adjective also in the accusative. 

Turpilius quern, prcefectum oppidi, unum ex omnibus profugisse 
supra ostendimus, Sfc. Sail. Jug. 69. 

3. The poets sometimes use the Greek construction. 

Uxor invicti Jovis esse nescis 9 Hor. Od. iii. 27. 73. 
Retulit Ajax Esse Jovis pronepos. Ov. Met. xiii. 141. 

4. If an infinitive has a dative depending on licet, &c. before it, 
it will have the substantive or adjective in the dative. 

lUis timidis ei ignavis licet esse. Liv. xxi. 44. 

Sibi triumplianti urbem invehi liceret. Liv. xxxviii. 44. 

Obs. After licet, &c. with the dative, a following infinitive is 
sometimes found with the substantive or adjective in the accusa- 
tive ; in which case an accusative must be supplied as its subject. 

Si civi Romano licet esse Gaditanum. Cic. Balb. 12. (i. e. eum esse.) 

§ 152. When a person s language is indirectly reported, i.e. 
when the writer uses his own words to express what another 
said, then the leading verb, which would be in the indicative 
if the speaker's own words were used, is put in the infinitive. 

Nihil profici patientia : eripi domos, abstrahi liberos, injungi de- 
lectus. Tac. Agr. 15. 

Esse nonnullos, quorum auctoritas apud plebem plurimum valeat. 
Cses. B.G.I. 17. 

Jus esse belli, ut qui vicissent, lis, quos vicissent, quemadmodum 
wllent, imperarent. Cses. B. G. ii. 36. 

Obs. 1. From the last two of the foregoing examples it will be 



§ 153, 154.] syntax. 287 

seen that the verb of the dependent clause is in the subjunctive in 
this construction. The reason of which is that the subjunctive is 
the right mood wherewith to express what the writer gives as the 
statement of another, and not his own direct opinion, &c. 

0~bs. 2. This construction is akin to that after verbs declarandi 
et sentiendi, § 150. II. a. ; the verb dico, in its right tense &c, 
being either expressed or understood. 

Obs. 3. Moreover when the accusative of the personal pronouns 
is used in this mode of expression it is not emphatic. Compare 
above § 150. II. a. KB. 

§ 153. The historical infinitive is used in narrative to de- 
note the continuance of a state or action. Its force is almost 
identical with that of the imperfect indicative. This mode of 
expression is chiefly employed by historians ; yet others are 
not strangers to it, not even the poets. See Ex. Rule 78. 
Part I. 

Obs. 1. The similar forces of the historical infinitive and the im- 
perfect indicative may be gathered from their being mixed to- 
gether. 

Alii perfugas vendere, pars ex pacatis prcedas agebant. Sail. 
Jug. 32. Compare also Sail. Cat. 6. At Romania fyc. 

Obs. 2. The subject of the historical infinitive, when expressed, 
is in the nominative. 

Interim Jugurtha cum magna curd parare omnia. Sail. Jug. 66. 

Eoque initio erecta provincia parare bellum. Tac. Agr. 18. 

Obs. 3. Hence a predicative substantive or adjective will also be 
in the nominative. See § 151. 

Civitas, trepida anted et sollicita de belli eventu, loeta agere. Sail. 
Jug. 55. 

§ 154. Questions which in direct speech (oratio recta) were 
expressed by the indicative, are expressed in indirect speech 
(oratio obliqua) by the infinitive and accusative, if they be- 
long to the first or third person ; but by the subjunctive, if 
to the second person. In the latter case what was in the 
present or perfect in oratio recta is usually put in the imper- 
fect and pluperfect in oratio obliqua. 

Num etiam recentium injuriarum memoriam deponere posse. Cass. 
B. G. i. I4i.=7iiim possum, fyc. 

Quid de prcedd faciendum censerent. Liv. v. 20. — i. e. censetis ? 

An quicquam superbius esse quam ludificare sic omne nomen La- 
tinum ? Liv. i. 50.=an quicquam superbius est, Sfc. 

Obs. 1. Sometimes in questions belonging to the first person, se 



288 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 155. 

is prefixed to the infinitive in oratio obliqua. Yet more commonly 
it can only be known by the context whether the first or third 
person is meant. 

Quid se vivere. Liv. vii. 18. In oratio recta — Quid vivimus ? 

Obs. 2. Those inquiries to which a negative reply is expected 
(see § 139.) and which have the subjunctive in oratio recta, retain 
the subjunctive in oratio obliqua, yet have a change of tense. 

Quis tibi hoc persuaderet. Caes. B. G. v. 29.= quis tibi hoc per- 
suadeat. 

§ 155. Verbs constructed sometimes with an infinitive 
mood, sometimes with a dependent clause. Such are, 

1. Verbs implying to resolve, to endeavour to do, to hinder from 
being done. These are followed by the infinitive when both have 
a subject in common ; but when the subject is changed, the sub- 
junctive with ut is used in affirmative clauses, with ne in negative 
clauses. 

Statu it ab initio jus non dicer e. Cic. Prov. Cons. 5. 

Statuunt ut decern millia hominum in oppidum submittantur. Caes. 
B. G. vii. 21. 

Fixa est tabula, qua statuitur ne sit Creta provincia. Cic. Phil. ii. 
38. 

Bellum cum Germanis gerere constituit. Caes. B. G. iv. 6. 

Constitueram ut manerem. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xvi. 10. 

Tentabo etiam de hoc dicer e. Quint, vi. 2. 

Quum senatus tentaret ut ipse gereret rempublicam. Cic. Rep. ii. 
12. 

Omni Numidice imperare par at. Sail. Jug. 13. 

Animo virili ut sis para. Ter. Phorm. v. 7. 64. . 

JEquumfuit deos paravisse uno exemplo, ne omnes vitam viverent. 
Plaut, Mil iii. 1. 132. 

Quum animo meditaretur proficisci in Persas. Corn. Nep. Ages. 
iv. 1. 

Summa vi Cirtam irrumpere nititur. Sail. Jug. 27. 

Nitebatur ne graviils in eum consideretur. Sail. Cat. 13. 

Unus Miltiades maxime nitebatur ut castra fierent. Corn. Nep. 
Milt. iv. 5. 

Hunc locum duabus ex partibus expugnare contendit. Caes. B. G. 
v. 21. 

Voce contendam ut hoc populus Romanus audiat. Cic. Ligar. 3. 

Ut pater magnopere semper contenderit ne qua ei provincia vivo se 
committer etur. Suet. Vitell. 3. 

Obs. The same construction obtains with some verbal expres- 
sions. 

Consilium est itafacere, Plaut. Mil. Glor. ii. 3. 73.. 



§ 155.] SYNTAX. 289 

Consilium ccepi, ut antequam luceret exirem. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vii. 
1©. 

Ccesar in animum induxerat labor are. Sail. Cat. 54. 

Inducer e animum possum, ne agre potior. Plaut. Asin. v. 1. 5. 

Parens potuerit animum inducere, ut naturam ipsam vinceret. Cic. 
Rose. Am. 19. 

2. Verbs signifying to ask, to beg, to exhort, to advise, to per- 
suade, to urge, to command. These are commonly used with ut, 
either expressed or to be supplied, before an affirmative clause ; and 
with ne before a negative clause ; whether the subject be changed 
or not. The infinitive is employed after them only by way of ex- 
ception. 

Ut facias te etiam atque etiam rogo. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 44. 

Rogat finem orandi faciat. Cses. B. G. i. 20. 

Rogat f rater ne abeas longius Ter. Ad. v. 5. 1. 

Rogat oratque ut liceat vitam degere. Cic. Rose. Am. 49. 

Reddas judicium peto. Phced. iii. Prol. 63. 

Quod ne facias a te peto. Cic. Ep. ad Att. x. 8. 

Arma animosa petebat ferre. Stat. Ach. i. 3. 52. 

Ego vos hortari possum, ut amicitiam anteponatis. Cic. Lad. 5. 

Hortatur ad earn diem revertantur. Cass. B. G. vi. 33. 

Ambiorix hortatur, ne occasionem dimittant. Caas. B. G. v. 38. 

Dedit oscula nato hortaturque sequi. Ov. Met. viii. 2. 15. 

Monet, ut suspiciones vitet. Cass. B. G. i. 20. 

Moneo deserant furere. Cic. Cat. ii. 9. 

Macedonas monebat ne multitudine hostium morerentur. Just. xi. 1 3. 

Natura monet festinare. Plin. xviii. 25. 

Persuadent, uti ad hostes transeat. Caes. B. G. iii. 18. 

Persuadet regnum petat. Sail. Jug. 39. 

Plato tantum valuit eloquentid, ut ei persuaserit tyrannidis facere 
finem. Corn. Nep. Dion, iii. 3. 

Vetus nostra simultas stimulabat me, ut caver em. Cic. Ep. ad 
Div. iii. 12. 

Stimulabantur, ne clientulorum loco numerarentur. Tac. Or. 37. 

Stimulante metu fati pramoscere cursus. Luc. vi. 423. 

Apollo mihi imperat, ut ego illi ocidos exuram. Plaut. Men.v. 2.87. 

Letoque det imperat Argum. Ov. Met. i. 670. 

C&sar suos imperavit, ne telum in hostes rejicerent. Cses. B. G. i. 46. 

Jungere eqtios Titan velocibus imperat Horis. Ov. Met. ii. 118. 

Obs. 1. In like manner are constructed oro, joraw, admoneo, com- 
moneo, adhortor, cohortor, exhortor, suadeo, impello, perpello, excito, 
incito, exstimulo, &c. . (Compare § 150. 1. d.) 

Obs. 2. Moneo and admoneo followed by accusative and infinitive 
O 



290 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 156 — 157. 

mean to remind one that so and so is, &c. ; persuadeo to con- 
vince, &c. 

Res ipsa monebat tempus esse. Cic. Ep. ad Att. x. 8. 

Admonebant supplicium non victoriam peti. Liv. xxviii. 19. 

Mud tibi per suadeas velim, me omnia suscepturum (esse). Cic. Ep. 
ad Div. xi. 6 . 

Nemo mihi persuadebit multos prcestantes vivos tanta esse conatos. 
Cic. Cat Maj. 23. 

3. Patior and sino generally take an infinitive, seldom ut, &c. and 
a subjunctive. 

Periniquo patiebar animo te a me digredi. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xii. 18. 
Si in turpi reo patiendum non esset, ut quidquam isti minis profe- 
cisse arbitrarentur. Cic. Font. 12. 

Non possum pati, quin tibi caput demulceam. Ter. Heaut. iv. 5. 13. 
Obsequium prcecipitem amicumferri sinit Cic. Lcel. 23. 
Siviy animum ut expleret suum. Ter. And. i. 2. 17. 

4. Concedo, opto, permitto, are followed indifferently by an infi- 
nitive, or ut &c. with a subjunctive. 

Mediocribus esse poetis Non homines, non Di, non concessere co- 
lumnar. Hor. A. P. 372. 

Non concedo, ut sola sint. Quint, vi. 2. 

Hunc videre s@pe optabamus diem. Ter. Hec. iv. 4. 29. 

Optavit, ut in currum patris toller etur. Cic. Off. iii. 25. 

Tibi permitto respondere. Cic. N. D. ii. 1. 

Quis Antonio permisit, ut partes facer et. Cic. de Or at. ii. 9. 

5. Cogo, fiagito, posco, postulo seldom comparatively have an in- 
finitive : generally ut with a subjunctive. 

Vi cozpi cogere, ut rediret. Ter. Hec. ii. 2. 26. 

Neque cogi pugnare poterat. Liv. xlv. 41. 

Semper flagitavi ut convocaremur. Cic. Phil. v. 11. 

(Stomachus) perna Jlagitat refici. Hor. Sat. ii. 4. 61. 

Militibus, ut imperator pugna? adesset, poscentibus. Tac. Hist. ii. 39. 

Esse sacerdotes delubraque vestra tueri Poscimus. Ov. Met. viii. 
710. 

Nemo inventus est tarn impudens, qui postularet ut vendereL Cic. 
Terr. ii. 4. 20. 

Me ducere istis dictis postulas. Ter. And. iv. 1. 20. 

§ 156. An accusative with infinitive is sometimes used in- 
dependently to denote amazement. In some instances the 
interrogative ne is added ; and when this is the case there is 
an intimation of hesitation or inquiry. 

Te in tantas arumnas propter me incidisse ! Cic. Ep. ad Div. 
xv. 1. 

Mene Iliads occumbere campis Non potuisse ! Virg. JEn. I. 97. 



§ 157—161.] SYNTAX. 291 

§ 157. The infinitive is found dependent on certain verbal 
expressions : i. e. those which contain in them the power of 
a verb. 

Iniit consilia reges Lacedcemoniorum toller e. Corn. !N^ep. Lys. 
iii. 1. 

Qua neque confirmare argumentis neque refellere in animo est. 
Tac. Germ. 3. 

Silvano fama est veteres sacrdsse Pelasgos (i. e. lucum). Virg. 
Mn. viii. 600. 

§ 158. Ccepi, with dependent infinitive, is at times used 
for the finite verb of such dependent infinitive, yet still with 
the concomitant idea of some duration ; so that it may 
be regarded as very near in meaning to the imperfect in- 
dicative. 

Graculus redire ccepit ad proprium genus, Phaed. i. 3, 9. 

§ 159. Memini is used with the present infinitive in a 
narrative of events at which the speaker was himself present ; 
but when the statement of a result is intended, the infinitive 
perfect is employed after it. 

Memini te mihi Phamea coenam narrare. Cic. Ep. ad Div. ix. 16. 

Peto ut memineris te omnia mihi cumulate recepisse. Cic. JEp. ad 
Div. xiii. 72. 

§ 160. Necesse est and oportet, if used indefinitely, have 
an infinitive mood, otherwise a subjunctive alone. Yet ut 
is found after necesse est 

Homini necesse est mori. Cic. Fat. 9. 

Quce (Leuctrica pugnd) immortalis sit necesse est. Corn. Xep. 
Epam. x. 

TJnde habeas qucerit nemo, sed oportet habere. Juv. xiv. 207. 

Oportet vaces a negotiis. Phaed. iii. Prol. 2. 

Neque necesse est ut vos auferam. Gell. ii. 29. 

§ 161. Opus est is usually followed by infinitive; yet 
sometimes by ut with subjunctive. 

Quid opus est de Dionysio tarn valde affirmare ? Cic. JEp. ad Att. 
vii. 8. 

Opus nutrici autem, utrem ut habeat veteris vini. Plaut. Time. 
v. 11. 

Obs. In the place of the infinitive mood the perfect passive 
participle, alone, in the neuter gender, is sometimes used after 
opus est. 

Maturato opus est. Liv. viii. 13. 

Erat nihil cur properato opus esset. Cic. Mil. 19. 
o 2 



292 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 162. 

§ 162. Fore (or futurum esse) ut, with a dependent 
subjunctive, is sometimes employed in the place of a future 
infinitive active to denote both a simple or incomplete, and 
also a complete future. In the case of those verbs which 
have no future participle active, this periphrasis is necessary 
when the construction requires that a future infinitive be 
used. In the passive voice^ however, it is employed only in 
the case of a simple future, not in the case of a complete 
future. The laws regulating this mode of expression are 
identical with those for the succession of tenses, and of the 
employment of the tenses of the subjunctive mood as 
futures. (See §§ 120, 124.) 

Thus, — 

Credo fore ut scribas epistolam, denotes iny belief present in 
present time that at some future time you will write a letter : — 
an incomplete future action : but, 

Credo fore ut scripseris epistolam, that at some future time you 
will have written a letter ; — a complete future action. 

Credebam fore ut scriberes epistolam, denotes my belief present 
in past time that at some future time you would write a letter ; — 
an incomplete future action : but, 

Credebam fore ut scripsisses epistolam, that at some future time 
you would have written a letter ; — a complete future action. 

So again in the Passive Voice, — 

Credo fore ut epistola scribatur, denotes my belief present in 
present time that at some future time a letter will be written ; — 
an incomplete future state : and, 

Credebam fore ut epistola scriberetur, denotes my belief present 
in past time that at some future time a letter would be written ; — 
an incomplete future state. 

Obs. A completed future of this kind is expressed by the 
perfect participle with fore. Credo (and credebam) epistolam 
scriptam fore, denotes my belief present in present (and also in 
past) time that a letter will have (and also would have) been 
written. 

The participle of the future active (in rus) is used in con- 
junction with esse and fnisse to denote a present or past in- 
tention, in an infinitival form. 

Credo te scripturum esse epistolam, denotes my belief that you 
now intend writing a letter : but, 

Credo te scripturum fuisse epistolam, that you have in past time 
intended writing a letter. 



§ 163— 165.J syntax. 293 

The mode of expressing this intention in the Passive Voice is by 
futurum fuisse ut, followed by an imperfect subjunctive : 

Credo futurum fuisse ut epistola scriberetur, si, fyc, denotes my 
belief that, under such and such circumstances, a letter would 
have been written. 

§ 163. The following construction must be noticed: — 
When, in a proposition, the subject of a relative clause is 
compared with the subject of the preceding demonstrative 
clause — both of them having logically the same verb in 
common — and when the first of these subjects is in the 
accusative before an infinitive mood, then the second also, 
by attraction, is likewise put in the accusative, though 
grammatical strictness requires that it should be in the no- 
minative, and its verb supplied in a finite mood. 

JSt tamen te suspicor iisdem rebus, quibus meipsum, interdum 
gravius commoveri. Cic. Cat. Maj. 1. 

Thus, here, instead of meipsum, the strict application of the 
rules of grammar requires ipse commoveor. 

Obs. The same construction obtains with quam after a compara- 
tive word. 

Num putatis dixisse Antonium minaciiis quam facturum esse ? Cic. 
Phil. v. 8. — i. e. quam facturus sitf 

§ 164. The infinitive is sometimes used by the poets in the 
place of the supine in um. 

Omne quum Proteus pecus egii altos Visere montes. Hor. Od. 
i. 2. 7. 

N. B. For use of infinitive in place of gerund, see Rule 82. 
Part I. To which it may be added, that the infinitive is also used 
in the place of the gerundive and its substantive. 

Audax omnia perpeti gens humana = audax ad omnia perpetienda. 
Hor. Od. i. 3. 25. 

JDurus componere versus = in versibus componendis. Hor. Sat. 
i. 4. 8. 



Gerunds and Gerundives. 
§ 165. Gerunds in di formed from transitive verbs have 
sometimes a genitive plural joined with them, instead of 
their being followed by an accusative of the object. 

Permissa, immb exacta, jocandi licentia, diripiendique pomorum. 
Suet. Aug. 98. 

o3 



294 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 166. 

Agitur utrum M. Antonio facultas detur agrorum suis latronibus 
condonandi. Cic. Phil. xii. 13. 

Obs. 1. It is supposed that the above construction must be 
attributed to the two modes of expression, attaching respectively 
to the gerund and gerundive, having become blended together : 
for, under ordinary circumstances, we should expect either diri- 
piendi poma, or diripiendorum pomorum ; so condonandi agros, or 
condonandorum agrorum. 

a. The gerund in di is not found after verbs : neither is 
sine ever used before the gerund in do. 

b. Sometimes the gerund has a passive force. 

Spes restituendi nulla erat. Corn. Nep. Att. ix. 2. 
Jugurtha ad imperandum Tisidium vocabatur. Sail. Jug. 62. 
Comitiorum, ludorum, censendique causa. Cic. Verr. i. 18. 

§ 166. Strictly speaking, the gerundive is the future pas- 
sive participle used with a noun or pronoun in the same 
case, instead of such noun or pronoun following a gerund as 
its object. 

Spes capiendi urbem and spes capiendce urbis give the same idea, 
though in a different form. 

Obs. 1. Hence the gerundive can only be formed, in strictness, 
from transitive verbs and from fungor, fruor, potior, utor. In the 
case of intransitive verbs the gerundive is however used in the 
neuter in connection with some third person singular of sum, or its in- 
finitive mood, in the force of an impersonal verb. (See Eule 87. P. I.) 

Spes facta militice fungendce. Liv. xxiv. 21. 

Justitice fruendcB causa. Cic. de Off. ii. 12. 

Qui in spem potienaorum castrorum venerant. Caes. B. G. iii. 6. 

Ego hinc artoptam utendam pelo. Plaut. Aul. ii. 9. 4. 

Obs. 2. In the case of transitive verbs the gerundive is more 
commonly used than the gerund. 

Ne criminibus infer endis delectetur. Cic. Lcel. 18. 
In spem adducius aut conficiundi belli, aut pecunice capiundce. Sail. 
Jug. 37. 

Ne moras agitando aliud mallet. Sail. Jug. 81. 

Obs. 3. Tux, the feminine genitive singular of the personal pro- 
noun tu ; and also vestri and sui, the masculine genitives plural of 
the personal pronouns tu and sui ; are found with the genitive mas- 
culine singular of the gerundive ; and ejus, the genitive singular of 
is, even when relating to a feminine substantive. 

Quoniam tui videndi est copia. Plaut. True. ii. 4. 19. 

Vestri adhortandi causa. Liv. xxi. 42. 



§ 167—169.] syntax. 295 

Purgandi sui causa ad eum legatos mittunt. Caes. B. G. vi. 8. 

Ego ejus videndi cupidus. Ter. Hec. iii. 3. 12. 

Obs. 4. Sometimes the genitive of the gerundive — and also of 
the gerund — is apparently used absolutely, or else maybe con- 
sidered as dependent on causa or gratia to be supplied. 

Germanicus in JEgyptum prqficiscitur cognoscendce antiquitatis. 
Tac. Ann. ii. 59. 

Ne id assentandi magis existimes. Ter. Ad. ii. 4. 6. 

Obs. 5. After vix the gerundive and gerund take a modified 
meaning — " what may be done," &c. 

Ulud vix saltern prcecipiendum videtur. Quint, vi. 4. 

§ 167. By a comparison of § 149 with Rules 81, 83, 84, 
Part L, it will be seen, that the Infinitive and Gerunds con- 
jointly form a verbal substantive of the singular number. 
Thus, N. the inf., G. ger. in di, D. ger. in do, A. the inf. or 
ger. in dum, V. , Ab. ger. in do. 



Supines. 

§ 168. In the expression dare nuptum, do is attended with the 
concomitant idea of motion, arising from the bride's going to the 
bridegroom's house, and hence is followed by the supine in urn. 

Uxor, invita qua ad virum nuptum datur. Plaut. Stick, i. 2. 85. 

§ 169. The supine in u follows not only adjectives, but also fas, 
nefas, and opus. Very few supines in u are found in use ; they are 
for the most part confined to auditu, cognitu, dictu, factu, inventu, 
memoratu, scitu. 

Nil dictu foedum visuve hcec limina tangat, Intra quce puer est. Juv. 
xiv. 44. 

Si quid dignum cognitu. Suet. Aug. 43. 

Si hoc fas est dictu. Cic. Tusc. v. 13. 

Nefas dictu. Virg JEn. iii. 365. 

Opus est scitu. Cic. Inv. i. 20. 

Obs. 1 . A peculiar construction must here be noticed. Some- 
times the foregoing words are found followed by a supine in u, 
taking after it a dependent proposition ; whereas a substantival 
infinitive, followed by a dependent proposition, would have been 
expected to have formed the subject of the verb substantive, and 
one of the before-named substantives or adjectives to have been 
predicated of such substantival infinitive. 

Videtis nefas esse dictu, miseram fuisse talem senectutem. Cic. 
Cat Maj. 5., for Videtis (rb) dicer e miseram, 8fc. esse nefas. 

O 4 



296 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 170. 

Obs. 2. After facilis, difficilis, jucundus, the gerund with ad, " with 
regard to" is sometimes used instead of the supine inu ; and in the 
poets and late writers even an infinitive passive is thus employed. 

Facilis ad subigendum. Cic. Rep. ii. 41. 

Id positum est in tribus rebus difficilibus ad eloquendum. Cic. Off 
i. 35. 

Verba ad audiendum jucunda. Cic. de Or at. i. 49. 
C or rumpi facilis. Tac. Hist. iv. 39. 



Participles. 



§ 170. Participles express the action, &c. of a verb in an 
adjectival force, as the infinitive and gerund do in a substan- 
tival force. (See §167.) 

1. The Participles of the Present and Perfect are those also of the 
imperfect and pluperfect as well ; to which of these tenses they 
must be considered as belonging is decided by the leading verb, on 
the principle of the succession of tenses. (See § 120.) 

Hence if the leading verb be the historical perfect, the participle 
present assumes the force of the imperfect ; the participle perfect 
that of the pluperfect, &c. 

2. The Future Participle in rus (active voice), especially after 
verbs denoting " motion," represents at times a "design" or " pur- 
pose," like the future participle in Greek ; at times merely a simple 
future action. 

Perseus rediit, belli casum de integro tentaturus. Liv. xlii. 62. 
Sacra Jovi facturus. Ov. Met. iii. 26. 

O, mutis quoque piscibus Donatura eyeni, si libeat, sonum. Hor. 
OflL iv. 3. 19. 

3. The Future Participle in ndus (passive voice) does not denote 
a mere future state, &c. but has the meaning of " necessity" attach- 
ing to it ; when followed by a case it takes the dative. 

Habenda ratio valetudinis. Cic. Cat. Maj. 11. 

Quod ferendum est molliter sapienti. Cic. Cat. Maj. 2. 

Obs. Occasionally, the ablative dependent on a or ab is found 
instead of the dative after this participle. This, however, for the 
most part occurs when it is necessary to prevent any confusion of 
ideas arising from the construction, and to point out clearly which 
is the agent. 

Crassus a consulibus meam causam suscipiendam esse dicebat. Cic. 
Sext 18. 

Eos a se observandos putabat. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xiii. 16. 



§ 171—173.] syntax. 297 

N.B. In the former of the preceding examples a is prefixed to 
consulibus ; inasmuch as otherwise consulibus alone might be taken 
for the dative dependent on dicebat 

4. The Perfect Passive Participle in combination with a tense of 
habeo is often found in concord or apposition with the object of 
habeo, or is used absolutely, by itself, as its object, in the force of 
the perfect active of such participle ; yet at the same time with the 
superadded notion of some continuance in the time pointed out by 
that tense of habeo which is employed. 

Clodii animum perspectum habeo, cognitum, judicatum. Cic. Ep. 
ad Brut 1 . 

Vix me habet despicatam. Plaut. Cas. ii. 2. 15. 

Habeo absolutum suave epos ad Ccesarem. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. iii. 9. 

Inclusum in Curia Senatum hahuerunt. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vi. 2. 

Quce quum ita sint, de Ccesare satis hoc tempore dictum habebo. 
Cic. Phil. v. 18. 

5. Instead of an infinitive mood preceded by an accusative case, 
the poets occasionally take a participle in concord with the subject 
of the preceding finite verb, provided that both of them refer to 
the same subject. Sensit delapsus in hostes, Virg. JEn. ii. 377 ; 
for se delapsum esse. So Dignis ait esse paratus, Hor. Ep. i. 7. 22 ; 
for se paratum esse. 

N.B. For participle in explanations, &c. see § 27. 2. Obs. 

§ 171. Participles are sometimes used alone in a force cor- 
responding to that of the Greek participle preceded by the 
definite article ; i. e. in the place of a demonstrative pronoun 
followed by a relative proposition. This, however, is done 
only when no ambiguity can result. Pars territos con fir- 
mare, Sail. Jug. 38. territos, " those who were terrified;" 
quite in the same force as the Greek rove (jw^rjdirrag. 

§ 172. Participles are at times subjoined to the object of 
certain verbs denoting " to hear," " to see," " to perceive/' 
&c. in order to represent such object as being in a particular 
state. Audivi te loquentem, " I heard you when speaking ;" 
t. e. I myself heard you speak : but audivi te loqui, " I heard 
that you spoke : " L e. I heard so from another. 

§ 173. Natus, prognatus, satus, cretus, creatus, genitus, 
ortus, editus, &c. are usually followed by an ablative without 
a preposition, when the father or family is spoken of ; but 
when the mother is to be pointed out, then de or ex is for 
the most part prefixed to tKe ablative. Occasionally ab, de, 

o 5 



298 LATIN GRAMMAR. [_§' !? 4 — ^6, 

or ex stands before a father's name ; and ab is also used at 
times to point out lineage or ancestors. 

Apolline natus. Ov. Met. xv. 639. 

Amplissimd familid nati adolescentes. Caes. JB. G. vii. 37. 

De tigride natus. Cic. N. D. iii. 9. 

Ex nepte Julia editum infantem agnosci vetuit. Suet. Aug. 65. 

Galii ab Dite patre prognati. Caes. B. G.'i. 18. 

Edita de magno flumine nymphafui. Ov. Her. v. 10. 

Ex Pelope satus Atreus. Quint, ix. 3. 

Nasci a principibus. Tac. Hist. i. 16. 

§ 174. Lastly, sine is not admissible before a participle. 
" Without" is expressed by the use of some negative word 
prefixed to the participle, especially in the case of the abla- 
tive absolute. 

(Herbas) Quas tellus nulla sollicitante dabat. Ov. Fast. iv. 396. 



Impersonal Verbs. 



§ 175. Impersonal verbs are those which do not take any 
personal subject, but are used generally and indefinitely. 
They are found only in the third person singular, and in the 
infinitive mood. Yet they partake of the nature of ordinary 
verbs, in so far that such as are transitive in their meaning 
are followed by an accusative ; those that denote a relation 
to any thing by a dative. 

Juvit me tibi tuas liter as prof uisse. Cic. Ep. ad Div. v. 21. 
Omnibus bonis expedit rempublicam esse salvam. Cic. Phil. xiii. 8. 

§ 176. Interest "it is of importance'' is followed by a ge- 
nitive of the person to whom some particular thing is of im- 
portance, except in the case of the possessive pronouns, 
where the feminine ablative singular is used ; viz. med, tud, 
sua, nostra, vestrd. Refert "it is of importance" is usually 
accompanied by one of the foregoing ablatives ; yet a geni- 
tive is at times found after it. 

Interest omnium recte facer e. Cic. Fin. ii. 22. 

Tud et med maxime interest. Cic. Ep. ad Div, xvi. 4, 

Vestrd interest. Tac. Hist. i. 30. 

Tud refert nihil. Ter, Hec. v. 3. 12. 

Hlo?mm magis qudm sua retulisse. Sail. Jug. 111. 

Refert compositions. Quint, ix. 4. 



§177,178.] syntax. 299 

Obs. 1. These verbs are sometimes used personally ; that which 
is of importance being prefixed to them as their subject by means 
of either a neuter pronoun, or a substantival infinitive. 

Illud med interest Cic. Ep. ad Att. xi. 22. 

Cujus intersit istam legem manere. Cic. Phil. i. 9. 

Id med refert. Ter. Ad. v. 4. 27. 

Neque enim numero comprendere refert. Virg. Georg, ii. 104. 

Obs. 2, More frequently, however, that which is of importance 
is expressed by a dependent clause introduced by ut, &c. expressed 
or understood ; or by some interrogative word followed by the 
subjunctive. 

Illud med interest te ut videam. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xi. 22. 

Quid med refert, hce Athenis natce an Thebis stent? Plant. Mud. 
iii. 4. 41. 

Quid refert med cui serviam ? Phasdr. i. 14. 9. 

a. That to which something is of importance is usually- 
expressed by ad. 

Ad honor em nostrum interest. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xvi. 1. 

b. The amount of importance is expressed by such adverbs 
as magis, multum, valde, plurimum, tantum, quantum, nihil, 
magnopere, vehementer ; or else by the genitive of the value, 
magni, parvi, &c. 

Multum interest rei familiaris tuce. Cic. Ep. ad Div. iv. 10. 
Vehementer interfuit reipublicce. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. ii. 4. 
Parvi refert abs te ipso jus did cequabiliter . Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. 
i. 1. 

§ 177. Attinet and pertinet are followed by ad and an ac- 
cusative of that to whom or which something belongs. They 
are not strictly impersonals, though generally called so from 
being found only in the third person. 

Quod ad te attinet. Cic. Ep. ad Q. F. ii. 1. 

JSihil ad Sulpiciorum familiam Quirinus pertinuit. Tac. Ann. iii. 48 . 

Obs. Attinet and pertinet, and also decet, are sometimes used in 
the third person plural. 

Nee qua nihil attinent. Hor. Od. i. 19. 12. 

Quid ista ad vidulum pertinent. Plaut. Hud. iv. 4. 62. 

Nee velle experiri, qudrn se aliena deceant, Cic. Off. i. 31. 

§ 178. Tonat, "it thunders;" pluit, "it rains," &c. are 
called impersonals : yet in reality aer, ccelum or Jupiter is to 
be supplied as their subject. 

Si tonuerit. Cic. de Divin. ii. 72. 

(Fully : Tonat cesium omne fragore. Virg. Mn. ix. 51.) 
O 6 



300 LATIN GRAMMAR. |_§ 179— 181, 

§ 179. Opus est is usually an impersonal verbal expression, 
and is followed by an ablative of the thing needed. Yet at 
times it is employed personally ; in which case the thing 
needed is in the nominative. The substantive verb may under 
all circumstances be of any tense. Of course when the ex- 
pression is impersonal such verb must be restricted to the 
third person of the singular number ; but where it is personal 
the third person plural is also admissible. 

Magistratibus opus est. Cic. Legg. iii. 2. 

Priusqudm incipias consulto, et ubi consulueris mature facto opus 
est. Sail. Cat. 1. 

Dux nobis et auctor opus est Cic. JEp. ad Div. ii. 6. 
Matenem, et quce opus sunt, dominus prcebebit Cato, R. JR. 14. 
Maritimi milites opus sunt tibi. Plaut. Copt i. 2. 61. 

Obs. Sometimes, though very rarely, a genitive is dependent on 
opus est, and in old Latin even an accusative follows it. In the 
former instance it partakes of the nature of a verb of " wanting ; ,r 
in the latter of a transitive verb. 

Ad consilium pensandum temporis opus esse ait Liv. xxii. 5 1 . 

Quanti argenti opus fait. Liv. xxiii. 31. 

Puero opus est cibum. Plaut. True. v. 10. 

Opus est modium unum. Cato, R. R. 15. 



TIME. 
§ 180. Ante and post are used with the ablative to point 
out the time before and after a thing has occurred, &c. In 
this construction they are used sometimes as prepositions, 
sometimes as adverbs. When an adjective is employed it 
may here be either cardinal or ordinal. 

Fecit idem, quod viginti annis ante apud nos fecerat Coriolanus. 
Cic. Loel. 12. 

Quinto anno post miles profectus sum ad Tarentum. Cic. Cat. 
Maj. 4 

Biennio post Cic. Brut. 91. 

Anno ante me censorem mortuus est. Cic. Cat Maj. 6. 

N.B. The number of years, months, &c, pointed out by the 
adjective, is not to be necessarily considered as time complete : 
it may be time current ; i. e. time, in the course of that division of 
it pointed out by the numeral word. 

§ 181. In is often prefixed to an ablative, either with or 
without an adjective, to point out the time in the course of 



§ 182—185.] SYNTAX. 301 

which an event occurs. Sometimes a numeral adverb is 
also found in this construction, denoting how often the event 
takes place. 

In paucis diebus. Ter. And. i. 1. 77. In hoc tempore. Tac. 
Ann. xiii. 47. In qua cetate. Cic. Brut. 43. Bis in die. Cic. 
Tusc. v. 35. 

Obs. 1. Yet in is sometimes omitted: Bis die. Hor, Od. iv. 1. 
25. Bis anno. Plin. ii. 73. 

Obs. 2. When a relative clause follows, the relative is also in the 
ablative. 

Diebus circiter quindecim, quibus in hiberna ventum est, initium 
tumultus ortum est ab Ambwrige. Caes. B. G. v. 26. 

§ 182. In is also used to express a particular time of life : 

Feci ego istcec itidem in adolescentia. Plaut. Bac. iii. 3. 6. 

Obs. If any one point of that period is to be expressed, an ad- 
jective is used, but without in. 

Ex his igitur, hora octavd quae mortua est, provecta cetate mortua 
est. Cic. Tusc. i. 39. 

§ 183. A specified time before the present is usually ex- 
pressed by abhinc, or by ante with the demonstrative hie : 
previous time without reference to the present by ante alone. 

Qucestor fuisti abhinc annos quatuordecim. Cic. Verr. ii. 1. 12. 
Comitiis jam abhinc triginta diebus habitis. Cic. Verr. ii. 2. 52. 
Ante hos sex menses. Phaedr. i. 1. 10. 

Perpaucis ante diebus dederam Q. Mucio literas ad te. Cic. Ep. 
ad Div. iv. 9. 

Ante quadriennium amissus est. Tac. Agr. 45. 

§ 184. A person's age is expressed by natus with annos 
and its required numeral adjective. 

Cato annos quinque et octoginta natus excessit e vita. Cic. Brut. 
20. 



SPACE OF PLACE. 

§ 185. Distance of place, when motion through space 
is meant, is correctly put in the accusative : when the ablative 
is employed it must be regarded as an exception to the rule. 
(See Rule 101. Parti.) 



302 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 186 — 190. 

Obs. Hence when such expressions as abest bidui are found, 
spatium, or iter, should be supplied, rather than spatio, or itinere. 

§ 186. When the distance of one place from another is to 
be pointed out without the idea of motion through space, 
the ablative is commonly used, though sometimes the accu- 
sative. (See Rule 101. Part I.) 

Quumfilius TeanL quod abest a Larino octodecim millia passuum, 
educaretur. Cic. Cluent. 9. 

§ 1 87. When distance is mentioned, but the place from 
which it is calculated is not definitively named, a or ab com- 
monly precedes the ablative, just as if that case were de- 
pendent upon it. 

A millibus passuum minus duobus castra posuerunt. Cass. B. G. 
ii. 7. 



NAMES OF PLACES. 

§ 188. The names of smaller islands follow the construc- 
tion of the names of towns. 

Idem hoc Lentulo Rhodi acciderat. Cass. B. C. iii. 102. 
Rhodum veni. Cic. Brut. 91. Ccesar Rhodo classem accersit 
Hirt. Bell Alex. 1. 

§ 189. The names of countries and of larger islands are 
usually preceded by a preposition. 

In Lemno (uxor em duxit). Ter. Phorm. v. 8. 15. 

Si quando in Eplrum venerit. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiii. 25. 

Ex Asia transis in Europam. Curt. vii. 8. 13. 

Obs. 1 . The exceptions to this rule are very rare. Where they 
are found they must be attributed to an irregularity of construction 
which should not be imitated. 

Obs. 2. Cyprus is found both with and without a preposition. 
This probably results from the different estimate formed of its size 
by different writers. 

Pausaniam Cuprum miserunt. Corn. Nep. Paus. ii. 1. 

Itaque statim dedi literas, ut ex Cypro equites ante certam diem 
decederent. Cic. Ep. ad Att. vi. 2. 

§ 190. The names of Greek islands, and also the Greek 



§ 191—193.] SYNTAX. 303 

names of countries, are sometimes used in the genitive to 
specify "where." 

Conon Cypri vixit. Corn. ISTep. Chab. iii. 4. 

Se autem domum Chersonesi habere. Corn. Nep. Milt. ii. 4. 

§ 191. The poets and late writers, even in the case of 
appellative nouns, use an accusative without a preposition 
to denote motion towards a place. 

Speluncam Dido dux et Trojanus eandem Deveniunt. Virg. JEn. 
i. 365. 

Verba refers aures non pervenientia nostras. Ov. Met. iii. 462. 
Begionem, quce castra Cyri appellator, pervenerat Curt. iii. 4. 1. 

§ 192. When the preposition ad is prefixed to the names 
of towns, their neighbourhood is intended, not the towns 
themselves. 

Adolescentulus miles profectus sum ad Capuam. Cic. Cat 
Maj. 4. 



ADVERBS. 



§ 193. Numeral adverbs are sometimes added to a sub- 
stantive to express the repetition of the state of the substan- 
tive so many times as the adverb points out : — Quartum 
Consul : * Consul for the fourth time." Cic. Cat Maj. 4. 

Obs. In other cases of apparent combination of an adverb with 
substantive, the construction is but a concise mode of expressing 
what would otherwise be rendered by a relative clause. 

Multarum circa civitatum irritatis animis. Liv. i. 17. Circa 
civitatum = civitatum, quce circa erant 

N.B. The meaning of the adverbs generally must be sought in 
the Dictionary. Some few matters, however, requiring especial 
notice are here pointed out. 

a. Amplius, plus, and minus, are sometimes used as adjuncts 
(See § 70.), which do not influence the construction. 

b. Causa and gratia used adverbially, and also ergo, take a 
genitive case which usually precedes them. Fidei causa. Sail. 
Jug. 29. Exempli gratia. Corn. Nep. Lys. ii. 1. Illius ergo 
Venimus. Virg. JEn. vi. 670. 



304 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 193, 

c. Minus is often used in the place and meaning of an emphatic 
non. Nonnunquam ea, qace prcedicta sunt, ?ninus eveniunt. Cic. de 
Div. i. 14. 

d. Nescio an, has by long nsage become the representative of 
fortasse, "perhaps;" and nescio quis (in all cases), of aliquis. 

Nescio an melius patientiam possim dicere. Cic. de Leg. 9. 
Nisi me forte Paconii nescio cuius querelis admoverL Cic. Ep. 
ad Q. F. i. 1. 

e. Nihil is sometimes used in an adverbial force. Nihil vi, nihil 
secessions opus [est.~\ Sail. Jug. 31. 

f. Non when prefixed to words in order to qualify them often 
gives them a simple meaning, exactly the reverse to that which 
they before had. Non dubito, " I am assured ; " non perdo, " I 
spare ; " non aptissimus, " most unfit ; " non diu, " a little while ; " 
non ignarus, " well aware." 

g. If non is to qualify a single word of a proposition, it is placed 
immediately before that word. But if its force is to be thrown 
on the whole proposition, it generally stands immediately before 
the verb, especially before the finite verb when it is followed by 
the infinitive mood. 

Mihi videbantur non id accusare. Cic. Cat. Maj. 3. 
TJt nihil ad te dem literarum, facere non possum. Cic. Ep. ad 
Att. viii. 14. 

h. Non prefixed to a negative, cancels the negation, and pro- 
duces a slight affirmation : — non nemo, " some one ; " non nihil, 
" something ; " non nullus, " some ; " but affixed to such a word it 
makes a very strong affirmative : nemo non, " every one ; " nihil 
non, " every thing ; " nullus non, " every " or " all." 

i. Partim is usually constructed with a genitive, or with an 
ablative preceded by de or ex. Sometimes it has the force of 
quosdam, as if it were partem. Partim .... partim = alii .... 
alii. 

Partim illorum scepe ad eundem morem erat. Gell. x. 13. 

Ex quibus partim tecum fuerunt. Cic. Vatin. 7. 

Partim Samnitium defecisse ad Pcenos. Liv. xxiii. 11. 

Partim ambitione, partim inscientid. Quint, xii. 11. 

Obs. The corresponding clause is often introduced by alius, 
quidam, &c. 

Bestiarum terrena sunt alia>, partim aquatiles, alia* ancipites. Cic. 
N. D. i. 37. 









§ 194.] SYNTAX. 305 

Multa inusitata partim e ccelo, alia ex terra oriebantur. Cic. de 
Div. i. 42. 

Semisomnos partim, alios arrna sumentes invadunt Sail. Jug. 21. 

k. Turn . . . turn, " both . . . and," denote an equality between 
two things. 

Disserens in utramque partem turn Greece turn Latine. Cic Ep. 
ad Att. ix. 9. 

I. Quum . . . turn ; " both . . . and, especially ; " or, " not only 
. . . but more particularly ; " denote a transition from the general 
to the particular, and point out the second clause as the more im- 
portant. To turn is sometimes added, for emphasis, certe, etiam, 
maxime, pracipue, quoque, verb, &c. 

Quum naturd loci, turn dolo, obscurati. Sail. Jug. 49. 

Quum propter bonas artes, turn maxime quod adversum divitias 
animum invictum gerebat. Sail. Jug. 43. 

m. Unde is often equivalent to a relative and a preposition. 

Ut eo restituereniur Galli, unde dejecti essent. Cic. Ccecin. 30. 
Fore unde dicerem neminem. Cic. Cat. Maj. 4. 
Latobriges in fines suos, unde erant profecti, reverti jussit. Cass. 
B. G. i. 28. 

n. Among the peculiar adverbs followed by a genitive case 
should be named postridie, pridie, turn, tunc. 

Postridie ejus diei eddem perfidid usi Germani. Cass. B. G. 
iv. 13. 

Bridie insidiarum testamentum absignavit. Tac. Ann. xv. 54. 

Civitas Hannibalem turn temporis consulem in foro expectabat 
Just. xxxi. 2. 

De gente obscurd tunc temporis. Just. i. 4. 

Obs. Postridie and pridie are also followed by an accusative, 
which in good writers is that either of the name of the Eoman 
divisions of the month, or of festivals. 

Postridie Idas . . . postridie Kalendas ac Nonas. Liv. vi. 6. 
Postridie ludos Apollinares. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xvi. 4. 
Nam ego Romam pridie Idus. Cic. Ep. ad Att. xiii. 25. 
Tu pridie Compitalia memento. Cic. Ep. ad Att. ii. 3. 



PARTICLES OF TIME. 

§ 194. a. Donee, dum, quoad, " as long as," " while," " during the 
time that," " until," are joined to the indicative, if a thing is men- 
tioned as a fact : but the subjunctive, if a conception is expressed, 
or if an intention is to be pointed out. 

Donee virenti canities abest Morosa. Hor. Od. i. 9. 17. 



306 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 194. 

Dum de his singulis dispute judiciis. Cic. pro Cluent. 32. 

Quoad renunciatum est vicisse Boeotios. Corn. Nep. Epam. ix. 3. 

Donee Altervtrum velox victoria fronde coronet Hor. Ep. i. 18. 
63. 

Dixisti, dum Planci in me meritum verbis extollerem, &c. Cic. 
Plane. 40 

Hactenus existimo consolationem recte adhibitam esse, donee certior 
fieres lis de rebus, quibus levari possent molestia tua. Cic. Ep. ad 
Div. iv. 3. 

Obs. Yet this distinction is not always observed ; the subjunc- 
tive being sometimes used where a fact is evidently stated. 

Me scito, dum tu absis, scribere audacius. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xii. 
17. 

Donee Oceano misceatur. Tac. Ann. ii. 6. 

Ilia quidem, dum te fugeret per flumina prceceps, &c. Virg. 
Georg. iv. 457. 

b. Dum is used with the present indicative even when past events 
are recorded. 

Dum hcec geruntur, Casari nunciatum est. Cass. B. G. i. 46. 
Dum Intemelium hostiliter populatur, matrem Agricola? interfeeit. 
Tac. Agr. 7. 

c. Jam marks time relatively present ; nunc time actually pre- 
sent. 

Jam per fines Sequanorum copias transducer ant. Caes. B. G. 
i. 11. 

Erat tunc excusatio oppressis, nunc nulla est. Cic. Phil. vii. 5. 

Obs. Nunc, as in the last example, is the word used in antithesis 
to tunc. 

d. In historical narrative ubi, postquam, simul ac, and others, 
signifying "when," "as soon as," are joined to the perfect indicative 
where the pluperfect would have been expected. Yet this perfect 
must be rendered as if it were a pluperfect. 

Ubijustitid atque labore respublica crevit. Sail. Cat. 10. 
Postqudm divitics honori coepere esse. tSall. Cat. 12. 
Simul ac mihi collibitum est. Cic. N. D. i. 38. 

e. Quum may be followed, as a general rule, under all circum- 
stances by the imperfect and pluperfect subjunctive. With other 
tenses quum, temporal (adverb) takes the indicative ; quum, causal 
(conjunction), the subjunctive. 

Quum de senectute aliquid scribere vellem. Cic. Cat. Ma]. 1. 
Zenonem, quum Athenis essem, audiebam frequenter. Cic. N. D, 
i.21. 



§ 195.] SYNTAX. 307 

Qui non defendit injuriam a suis quum potest, injustefacit Cic. 
Off. iii. 18. 

Quum iidem homines sic ament inertiam et oderint quietem. Tac. 
Germ. 15. 

Dixerat hoc ille, quum puer nuntiavit, &c. Cic. Rep. i. 12. 

/. Yet quum, signifying " at the time when," may be used with 
the imperfect and pluperfect indicative ; and again with the im- 
perfect indicative, to point out some action as simultaneous with 
another, in which use it may be rendered "while." 

Res, quum hcec scribebam, erat in extremum deducta discrimen. 
Cic. Ep. ad Div. xii. 6. 

Quum illi pugnabant maxime, ego tumfugiebam maxime. Plant. 
Amph. i. 1. 44. 

Ceteri senes, quum rempublicam defendebant, nihil agebant ? Cic. 
Cat. Maj. 6. 

g. Moreover, when the frequent repetition of an action is to be 
pointed out, quum may be employed with the pluperfect indicative, 
and in this construction the clause denoting the result takes its 
verb in the imperfect indicative. 

Quum ver esse cceperat, Verves dabat se labori. Cic. Verr. v. 10. 

Obs. Yet here the pluperfect subjunctive is also sometimes 
used. 

Quum in jus duci debitor em vidissent, undique convolabant Liv. 
ii. 27. 



INTERROGATIVE PARTICLES. 

§ 195. a. An, with the writers of the golden age, is only used in 
a second or opposite question. When, therefore, it occurs without 
a previous question, one must be mentally supplied. After a pre- 
ceding question a negative force attaches to it, and the inference 
is, that the answer cannot be a matter of doubt. In such a case 
it is best rendered " is it not," " was it not," &c, according to 
the tense of the verb. 

Demjen. Credam istuc, si esse te hilarum video. Argyr. An tu 
esse me tristem putasf Plaut. Asin. v. 1. 10. (Here before the 
question An tu, &c. the question Nonne me hilarum esse vides ? 
must be supplied.) 

A rebus gerendis abstrahit senectus. Quibus ? An Us, fyc. Cic. 
Cat. Maj. 6. 

b. Ne strictly points out merely a question. Yet however, when 
it is affixed to the principal verb (unless of past time) in a direct 
question, an affirmative answer is generally expected, though not 



308 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 195. 

always ; but when attached to another word, or when occurring 
in a question relating to past time, a negative answer is expected, 
coupled in the last case with the idea of amazement or doubt : 
when used in an indirect question, it simply means " whether." 

Videtisne ut apud Homerum, Src. Cic. Cat. Maj. 10. (Yes.) 
Novistine locum potior em rure beato f Hor. Ep. i. 10, 14. (No ; 

you do not.) 

Jamne vides, belua, jamne sentis, quae sit hominum querela? Cic. 

Pis. 1. (No.) 

Tune milxi dominus, rerum imperils hominumque 

Tot tantisque minor f Hor. Sat ii. 7. 7o. (No.) 

Apollinemne tu Delium spoliare ausus es f Cic. Verr. ii. 1. 18. 

(No, surely!) 

Qucesivit utereturne rebus, Sfc. Cic. Cat, Maj. 14. (Whether or 

not.) 

c. Nonne introduces a question to which an affirmative answer 
is expected. 

Nonne animadvertis ? Cic. N. D. iii. 37. 

Quum esset ex eo qucesitum, Archelaum nonne beatum putaret 
Cic. Tusc. v. 12. 

d. Num, in direct questions, implies that a negative answer is 
expected : but, in dependent propositions, including indirect 
questions, it means merely " whether," the matter being left open 
and undecided. 

Num igitur hunc coegit obmutescere senectus f Cic. Cat. Maj. 7. 
Senex dicitur qu&sisse, num Mud carmen desipientis videretur. 
Cic. Cat. Maj. 7. 

e. Utrum, as its derivation implies, can only be used in a double 
question, and in the former clause of it. 

Utrum igitur has corporis, an Pythagoras, malis vires ingenii dart. 
Cic. Cat. Maj. 10. 

Obs. 1. Ne is sometimes added to it, especially in the poets; 
and sometimes this ne, instead of being added to utrum, is joined 
to some word which is to be strongly marked. 

Utrumne Divitiis homines, an sint virtute beati. Hor. Sat. ii. 6. 73. 
Utrum ego istoc jocon assimulem, an serib. Plaut. Bac. i. 1. 42. 

Obs. 2. Utrum is often omitted in the first clause. 
Postremb fugere an manere tutius foret in incerto erat. Sail. 
Jug. 38. — fugere, i.e. utrum fugere. 



§ 196.] SYNTAX. 309 



CONJUNCTIONS. 

§ 196. a. Et couples words, &c, denoting things of a different 
kind, putting them on an equality. Que (which, when used with- 
out a previous conjunction, always follows the second of the words 
connected) adds something as supplementary. Atque (for which 
ac is also used but not before a vowel) assigns a peculiar pro- 
minence to that which it introduces ; as may be seen from its 
derivation, ad, in addition ; que " and." 

Socius et administer sociorum assumitur Scaurus. Sail. Jug. 29. 

Domi militiceque respublica venalis fuit. Sail. Jug 31. 

Nox atque prceda castrorum hostes remorata sunt Sail. Jug. 38. 

Obs. After comparative words and those denoting a similarity 
or difference atque and ac are often used in the place of quam. 

Amicior mihi nullus vivit atque is est. Plaut. Merc. v. 2. 56. 
Non tuus hoc capiet venter plus ac meus. Hor. Sat. i. 1. 46. 
Miltiades cum totidem navibus atque profectus erat Aihenas rediit 
Corn. Nep. Milt. vii. 4. 

Haud secus atque in mari. Sail. Jug. 79. 

b. Affirmative clauses are connected by et . . . et; et . . . que ; 
and in the poets by que . . . que. Sallust, too, sometimes uses 
que . . . que ; but with him the first que is, for the most part, affixed 
to a personal pronoun. Que . . . et unite only single words. 

Penes eosdem et summam gloriam et maximas divitias esse. Sail. 
Jug. 31. 

Id et singulis universisque semper honori fuisse. Liv. iv. 2. 
Palantesque vident socios hostemque receptum. Virg. JEn. ix. 780. 
TJti seque regnumque defendant. Sail. Jug. 49. 
Uti seque et oppidum tradat. Sail. Jug. 26. 

c. Negative clauses are connected by neque . . . neque ; nee . . . 
1 nee : sometimes by neque . . . nee ; rarely by nee . . . neque. 

Quod neque capi neque obsideri poterat. Sail. Jug. 37. 
Nee meliores nee beatiores. Cic. Rep. i. 19. 
Id neque feci adhuc, nee mihi tamen inter dictum puto. Cic. Fin, 
i.3. 

Nee nihil, neque omnia hac sunt, quae dicit. Ter. Ad. i. 2. 61 

d. Affirmative and negative clauses are connected by et . . . 
neque; et . . . nee. 

Et exspectabo, neque exigam. Cic. Brut 4. 
Et in senatu dicebat, nee amicis deliberantibus deerat Cic. Tusc, 
v. 38. 



310 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 196. 

e. Negative and affirmative clauses are connected by neque . . . 
et; nee . . . et Nee . . . que ; neque . . . que, seldom occur. 

Quod neque natum unquam sit, et semper sitfuturum. Cic. N. D. 
iii. 13. 

Nee miror, et gaudeo. Cic. Ep. ad Div. x. 1. 

Nee ilia exstincta sunt, alunturque, 8fc. Cic. Lcel. 27. 

Perficiam, ut neque bonus quisquam intereat, paucorumque poena 
vos omnesjam salvi esse possitis. Cic. Cat. ii. 13. 

f. Aut and ve are sometimes used in a second clause after a 
negative in a preceding clause, to continue the negation; i. e. 
"nor," not "or." 

Nee conjugis unquam Pr&tendi tcedas, aut Jicec in fozdera veni. 
Virg. J2n. iv. 339. 

Non Hydra firmior crevit in Herculem, Monstrumve submisere 
Colchi Majus, Echioniceve Thebce. Hor. Od. iv. 4. 61. 

g. Et and vel are sometimes used in an adverbial force ; et sig- 
nifying " too," " also," " even ; " vel " even." 

Salvus sis. Et tu salve. Plaut. Stick, ii. 1. 44. 

Calamitosus Deiotarus, qui et ab eo . . . accusetur. Cic. Diot. 10. 

Vel Priamo miseranda manus. Virg. 2En. xi. 259. 

h. Ne, " that not," is often used after verbs expressive of " re- 
sistance " or " refusal," without cancelling their force ; indeed, 
rather increasing it. 

In Tide disputatione casus quidam, ne facerem, impedivit Cic. 
Fat. 1. 

Sententiam ne diceret, recusavit. Cic. Off. ii. 37. 

N.B. For ne with imperative, see § 130. : as final conjunction 
with subjunctive, see § 142. 1, 2. 

i. Nee, at the beginning of a sentence, has frequently the force 
of non. 

Nee enim labore contendunt. Tac. Germ. 26. 

k. Nisi has the force of prceterquam, " except," after negative 
statements, and in questions. 

Nisi in bonis amicitiam (sentio) esse non posse. Cic L&1. 5. 

Quid reliquum, nisi ut illis, qui ea fecere, obedientes vivamus ? 
Sail. Jug. 31. 

I. Nisi and nisi forte, limiting a preceding statement, are fol- 
lowed by the indicative. 

Qui dolor profectb cadit in mentem sapientis, nisi ex ejus animo 
exstirpatam humanitatem arbitramur. Cic. L<eI. 13. 



§ 197.] SYNTAX. 311 

Nisi forte nondum etiam vos dominationis eorum satietas tenet 
Sail. Jug. 31. 

m. Before qudm, standing in the second clause of a comparison, 
the adverbs magis or potius are often to be supplied in the first 
clause. 

Erit ejus ortus a naturd, qudm ab imbecillitate. Cic. Lcel. 9. 

Miseratio, qudm invidia. Tac. Ann. iii. 17. 

n. Qudm is often joined to superlative words to increase their 
force : in this construction a tense of possum is sometimes added. 

Eos qudm infirmissimos esse volebat. Corn. J^ep. Them. vii. 3. 

Dico igitur, et qudm possum maxima voce dico. Cic. pro Dom. 36. 

Conquirit ex agris qudm plurimum potest domiti pectoris. Sail. 
Jug. 75. 

Obs. For qudm, quantus is often used. 

Quanta maxima esse potest morum distantia. Cic. Lai. 20. 

o. Qudm is also joined to adjectives generally, in the force of 
the English " how." 

Forsitan et narres, qudm rustica sit tibi conjux. Ov. Her. i. 77. 

p. Quamvis is often joined to adjectives, in order to impart to 
them an indefinite force. 

Quamvis magno exercitu. Corn. Nep. Dat. iv. 3. 

q. Quasi is often prefixed to substantives to qualify them, by 
taking away their actuality, and assigning to them something only 
approaching the natural force of the words thus qualified. 

In deo quid sit quasi corpus, aut quasi sanguis, intelligere non 
possum. Cic. N. D. i. 26. 

Ex eo medio quasi collis oriebatur. Sail. Jug. 48. 

r. Sed, at the beginning of a sentence, often means " moreover," 
and merely marks transition, without being either discretive or 
adversative in its nature. 

Sed nee equi in nostrum morem docentur. Tac. Germ. 6. 

§ 197. a. Conjunctions used with the subjunctive: such are 
those that denote — 

1. An object or design. See § 142. 1. 

2. A purpose or intention. See § 142. 2. 

3. A consequence &c. See § 142. 3. 

4. An exception or limitation. See § 142. 4. 

5. A wish. See § 142. 5. 

6. A cause or reason See § 142, 6. 



312 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 198. 

b. Quasi, prefixed to verbs, requires a subjunctive mcod, as it 
always denotes a conception of the mind. 

Quasi divinarem, Cic. Cat. Maj. 4. 
Quasi nunc exeam. Ter. Eun. iii. 2. 8. 



PREPOSITIONS. 



§ 198. a. Verbs compounded with a, ah, ad, con, de, e, ex, in 
sometimes repeat their preposition before the case dependent upon 
them. 

Senectus avocat a rebus gerendis. Cic. Cat. Maj. 5. 

A quibus ne tu quidemjam te abstines. Cic. Acad. iv. 17. 

Quum ad forum advenero. Plaut. Capt. iv. 2. 6. 

Cum his (pratoribus) philosophi consentiunt. Quint, ii. 17. 

Consul concionari conantem de rostins deduxit. Cass. B.C. i. 21. 

Ex planis locis evehebant aquas. Liv. i. 38. 

Ex Italia ad bellum civile exiturus. Cic. Ep. ad Div. ii. 16. 

Commeatus importari in oppidum prohibebat. Caes. B. C. iii. 40. 

b. Contra, when it governs a relative pronoun, is often written 
after it. 

Quod contra decuit. Cic. Cat. Maj. 23. 

c. In is often used with gerunds and gerundives to indicate the 
time in the course of which something takes place. 

Ut distrahatur in deliberando animus. Cic. Off. i. 3. 

In agris vastandis incendiisque faciendis. Caes. B. G. ii. 21. 

d. Super, " beyond," is followed by an accusative case ; " con- 
cerning," by an ablative ; " during " or " at," by both an accusa- 
tive and ablative. 

Super Numidiam G&tulos accepimus. Sail. Jug. 19. 

Super et Garamantas et Indos Proferet imperium. Virg. 2En. 
vi. 795. 

Multa super Priamo rogitans, super Hectore multa. Virg. ^En. 
i.750. 

De hujus nequitid omnes super comam loquebantur. Plin. Ep. 
iv. 22. 6. 

Node super media. Virg. 2En. ix. 61. 

e. Tenus, which is always written after its case, governs an 
ablative singular, and a genitive or ablative plural. 

Pube tenus. Virg. 2En. iii. 427. 
Crurum tenus. Virg. Georg. iii. 53. 
Pectoribus tenus. Ov. Met. xv. 512. 



§ 199,] SYNTAX. 313 



INTERJECTIONS. 

§ 199. a. O is sometimes used by the poets with the nominative ; 
and when they employ it with the vocative, it is for the most part 
a mere expletive devoid of all power or meaning. 

O virfortis atque amicus. Ter. Phorm. ii. 2. 10. 

O ego Icevus. Hor. A. P. 302. 

Vos, O Calliope, precor adspirate canenti. Virg. JEn. ix. 52o. 

Te (sequitur) Cory don, O Alexi. Virg. Ec. ii. 65. 

b. In the poets and the older writers, the nominative alone, 
without 0, is found in the place of the vocative. 

Alma filius Maice. Hor. Od. i. 2. 43. 
Audi tu, populus Albanus. Liv. i. 24. 

Semper celebrabere donis, Corniger Hesperidum fluvius regnator 
aquarum. Virg. JEn. viii. 76\ 

c. Occasionally in the poets a nominative is found in apposition 
with the vocative when used without O ; and, conversely, a voca- 
tive is found in apposition with the nominative employed as the 
subject of a verb. 

Hoc tu, succinctus patrid quondam, Crispine, papyro f Juv. 
iv. 24. 

Heu terra ignotd, canibus date prteda Latinis Alitibusque, jaces. 
Virg. JEn. ix. 485. 

d. Further, with the poets O is sometimes placed after its case. 

O lux Dardanice, spes O fidissima Teucrum. Virg. JEn. ii. 281. 
Quid O, tuafulmina cessantf Ov. Met. ii. 279. 

e. In exclamations of surprise or regret, and also in ironical 
exclamations, O is generally followed by an accusative. 

O fallacem hominum spent. Cic. de Or at. iii. 3. 

O hominem nequam. Cic. Ep. ad Att. iv. 13. 

O me perditum ; O me afflictum. Cic. Ep. ad Div. xxv. 4. 

O praclarum custodem ovium, ut aiunt, lupum. Cic. Phil. iii. 11. 



314 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 200. 



§200. EXPLANATION" OF THE PRINCIPAL GKAM- 
MATICAL AND RHETORICAL FIGURES. 

Anacoluthon (avaKo\ov6uv, "not following") ; the latter part of a 
sentence not agreeing grammatically with what precedes. 

Nam nos omnes, quibus est alicunde aliquis objectus labos, omne 
quod est inter e a tempus, prius qudm id rescitum est, lucro est. 
Ter. Hec. iii. 1. 6. — Nos omnes does not agree with the following 
construction. 



Ajsastrophe (ava(TTpo(p7i, "a turning back "), called also Reversio; 
inverting the usual allocation of words : viz. placing a case before 
the preposition that governs it, &c. 

Italiam contra (Yirg. 2En. i. 13.) for contra Italiam. Mecum, 
tecum, &c. for cum me, cum te, &c. 

Obs. But anastrophe, in Greek, is throwing back the accent ; as 

&tto for air 6. 

Anttstrophe (avr L(rrpo(jyfi, " turning round "), called also Con- 
versio ; repeating the same word at the close of two or more 
clauses. 

Pcenos populus Rom anus justitid vicit, armis vicit, liberalitate vicit 
Cic. Herenn. iv. 13. 

Antithesis (<Wt'0€(ns, " a putting in the place of") ; changing one 
letter for another. 

Olli certamine summo Procumbunt. Virg. 2En. v. 196. — Olli 
for Mi. 

Ajstithetox (avriQerov, "put over against,"also "opposed") ; em- 
ploying words of directly contrary meaning in close connection. 

Frigida pugnabant calidis, liumentia siccis. Ov. Met. i. 19. 

Ex hdc parte pudor pugnat, Mine petulantia ; hinc pudicitia, 
Mine stuprum; hinc fides, Mine fraudatio ; hinc pietas, Mine scelm; 
hinc constantia, Mine furor, fyc. ; hinc honestas, Mine turpitudo ,* 
hinc continentia, Mine libido. Cic. Catil. ii. 11. 

Aphjeresis (a(pa(pe(TLs, " a taking away") : taking away a letter or 
syllable from the beginning of a word : ruit for emit, temnit for 

contemnit. 

Apocope (airoKoirfi, " a cutting off") : taking away a letter or 
syllable from the end of a word. 

Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. Hor. Od. iii. 4. 65. — Consili 

for consilii. 






§ 200.] SYNTAX. 315 

Aposiopesis (airoffdinifTis — "a becoming silent"), called alsoi?e- 
ticentia : breaking off the language from any sudden feeling or 
tumultuous passion. 

Quos ego — sed motos prcestat componere fuctus. Virg. 2En. i. 
135. 

Apostrophe (airoarpo^-fi, " a turning away ") : turning away from 
the subject-matter in hand, and addressing oneself to something 
that presents itself to the mind. 

Polydorum obtruncat et auro Vi potitur. Quid non mortalia pec- 
torn cogis, Auri sacra fames. Virg. 2En. iii. 56. 

Asyndeton (ao-vvferos, not bound together) : omitting the con- 
junction between words or clauses. 

Qui indicabantur, eos vocari, custodiri, adduci ad Senatum jussi 
Cic. apud Quint, ix. 3. 

Gere morem parenti, parce cognatis, obsequere amicis, obtempera 
legibus. Cic. Herenn. iv. 3. 

Catachresis (KaTaxpwsj " misuse ") : called also Abusio, using a 
word in an improper force. 

Equum oedificant, Virg. 2En. ii. 16. — for formant or f admit. 
Ut quum minutum dicimus animum pro parvo. Cic. Orat. 27. 

Climax (/cA?/zo|, " a ladder ") : called also Gradatio, i. e. " grada- 
tion : " ascending gradually from something less to something 
greater, repeating at the same time the preceding word in some of 
its forms. 

Africano industria virtutem, virtus gloriam, gloria cemulos com- 
paravit. Cic Herenn. iv. 25. 

Complexio : i. e. combination or connection ; — when several 
clauses are used beginning with the same words, and concluding 
with the same words — and when further, at the close, a conclusion 
is drawn from them. 

Qui sunt, qui fcedera scepe rupemnt f Carthaginienses . Qui 
sunt, qui crudele bellum in Italia gesserunt ? Carthaginienses. Qui 
sunt qui Italiam deformaverunt f Carthaginienses. Qui sunt qui sibi 
postulant ignosci ? Carthaginienses. Videte, ergo, quid conveniat eos 
impetrari. Cic. Herenn. iv. 14. 

Diastole (Siao-Tox-f}, " a drawing asunder," hence " lengthening ") : 
called also Ectasis (e/<Ta<ns, " stretching out ") : making a short 
syllable long. 

Italiam fato prof ugus, Lavinaque venit Littora. Virg. JEn. i. 6. 
— Italiam for Italiam. 

P 2 



316 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 200. 

Ellipsis — ellipse — (eAAe^s, "a leaving behind" or "out)": 
omitting a word or words. (See § 26. 2, 3.) 

Besides these the following may be mentioned as more common : 

1. The omission of the verb substantive with the infinitive mood 
formed by its combination with a participle : with the third person 
singular and plural of tenses formed from the participle passive : 
before a predicative adjective or even clause. 

Illud verb recens ; Ccesarem meo consilio interfectum. Cic. Phil. 
ii. 11. 

Valerius Horatiusque consules sortiti. Liv. ii. 8. 
Omnia pr cedar a, rara. Cic. Lai. 21. 
Angor, agritudo premens. Cic. Tusc. iv. 8. 

2. The possessive pronouns when they can be readily supplied 
from the subject of the verb. 

Tusculanis negotium datum (est), " adverterent animos ; " i. e. suos. 
Liv. iv. 45. 

3. The demonstrative is if in an oblique case, and that case the 
same as that of the noun to which it refers. 

Sol cuncta sua luce illustret, et compleat, i. e. ea. Cic. Rep. 6. 

4. A preceding substantive, where in English we should use 
" these," " those," &c. 

Quum Atheniensium opes senescere, contra Lacedcemonionorum 
(i. e. opes) crescere videret Corn. Nep. Alcib. v. 3. 

Obs. Late writers sometimes here employ ille. 

5. Dicam in quid plura, quid multa, SfC 

6. Dicam de eo, in Quid? quod? 

7. Ais or censes or censetis, with quid ? quid igitur ? quid verb ? 
quid enim ? quid ergo ? Sfc. 

8. Some part of pertineo or attineo in nihil ad me, 8fc. 

9. Some part offacio in referring to a person's actions. 
Quid puer Ascanius? i. e.facit. Virg. JEn. iii. 339. 

10. Some verb of entreaty, &c. after the preposition per, in ad- 
jurations : viz. oro, precor, rogo, fyc. 

Per fortunas miseras nosfras, i. e. oro te. Cic. Ep. ad Div. 
xiv. 1. 

11. A verb employed in a preceding clause is left to be supplied 



§ 200.] SYNTAX. 317 

in the following clause. This is especially the case in answer to 
questions. 

Quarum rerum nulla est satietas ? Divitiarum : i. e. nulla est 
satietas divitiarum. 

Furtine accusas an homicidii ? Utroque, i. e. accuso utroque. 

Obs. Hence it is said that the interrogative and its redditive will 
be of the same case, unless a word requiring a different con- 
struction, as in the last of the above two examples, is employed to 
give the answer. 

Ep anaphora (iiravatyopT], " bringing back to "), called also Repe- 
titio : repeating the same word at the beginning of two or more 
successive clauses. 

Vobis istud attribuendum est, vobis gratia habenda, vobis res ista 
est honori. Cic. Herenn. iv. 13. 

Epenthesis (eTreVeecis, " adding in the middle" or " insertion" ) : 
inserting a letter or syllable in the middle of a word. 

Troas relliquias Danaum atque intimitis Achilli. Yirg. u3Zn. i. 30. 
— Relliquias for reliquias. 

Epiphonema (eTTHpwvmxa, "a thing uttered besides") : hence using 
a reflection or moral at the close of a statement, &c. 

Tantce molis erat Romanam condere gentem, (Yirg. 2En. i. 33.) 
says Virgil, after having mentioned the wandering of iEneas and 
the Trojans, together with the cause that led to it. 

Hellenism (eWrivur^s, "imitating the Greeks"), called also Gra- 
cism : introducing into the Latin language some construction be- 
longing to the Greek. See §§ 64. 87, &c. 

Hendiadts (eV 5ta 5iw, " one thing by means of two " ), using 
two substantives instead of a substantive and an adjective. 

Pateris libamus et auro. Virg. Georg. ii. 192 — for pateris aureis. 
Hunc sertis redimirijubebis etrosd. Cic. Tusc. iii. 18. — for sertis 
roseis. 

Homceoteleuton (6fjLoioT€\€VTov, "ending alike") : employing 
words that have a similar or rhiming termination. 

Plorantes, lacrymantes, obtestantes. Cic. Herenn. ix. 12. 

Homceopropheron (ofioia, " like things ; " irpofyepwv, " bringing 
forward ") : using words commencing with the same letter — allitera- 
tion. 

O Tite, tute, Tati, tibi tanta, tyranne^ tulistu Ennius in Cic 
Herenn. iv. 12. 

P 3 



318 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 200. 

Hypaleage (JmaWayt), " an interchange ") : when the cases of 
words in construction are mutually changed. 

Dare classibus Austros. Yirg. 2En. iii. 61. — for dare classes 
Austris. 

Hyperbole (yirepgoXri, " a throwing beyond ;" hence "excess) ;" 
called also superlatio and superjectio (carrying above, and throwing 
above, i. e. exaggeration) ; representing a thing in an exaggerated 
point of view. 

Tardus erat in armis splendor, ut solis fulgor obscurior videretur. 
Cic. Herenn, iv. 33. 

Hysterologia (iHTTepoXoyia, a "telling last")); or Hysteron proteron 
(ptrrepov irporepov) ; " latter," " before." 

Moriamur, et in media arma ruamus. Yirg. ^En. ii. 353. — for 
Ruamus, fyc. — et moriamur. 

Metaphor a (/jLtracpopa, " transferring "), called also Translation 
" transferring ; " applying figuratively to a word a term or de- 
scription, which strictly belongs to another. 

Hie Italiam tumultus expergefecit subito tumultu. Cic. Herenn. 
iv. 34. 

Ridet domus argento. Hor. Od. iv. 11. 6. Duo fulmina belli 
Scipiadas. Virg. 2En. vi. 842. 

Metathesis QxeraQtcris, " transposition or change ") : changing the 
place of a letter in a word. 

Nam tibi, Thymbre, caput Evandrius abstulit ensis. Yirg. 2En. 
x. 394. — Thymbre for Thymber. 

Metonymia (jjL€Twvv{iia, " change of name"), called also Immutatio, 
i. e. changing ; and Denomination i. e. denominating. 

Non tarn facilis ex Italia materis Transalpina depulsa est Cic. 
Herenn. iv. 32. i.e. Galli Transalpini : for the materis was the 
name of a Gallic spear. 

Effudistis in me carcerem. Cic. Pis. 7. i. e. the prisoners in the 
career. 

Paragoge (napcuyuyr), " a leading past, or to the front ") ; also 
Parelcon (pvapeXKov " dragging beside," and so making redundant) ; 
adding a letter or syllable to the end of a word. 

At pulchrum est digito monstrari, et dicier, Hie est! Pers. i. 28. 
dicier for dici. 

Egomet, tute, hujusce ; quisnam, SfC. ; for Ego, Sfc. 

Parenthesis (irapepdecis, " a putting in besides ; " " insertion ") : 
inserting some words in a clause or sentence, which are not gram- 
matically connected with it, and which refer to another matter. 

Tityre,dum redeo (brevis est via) pasce capellas. Virg. Ec. ix. 23. 



§ 200. J SYNTAX. 319 

Paronomasia (irapovofiao-la, " a slight change in the name ") ; 
called also Annominatio : employing words possessing a near simi- 
larity of sound ; or where a word is spelt the same as another, but 
has a different meaning : — very much like the English u pun." 

Hie veniit ante qudm Romam venit Cic. Herenn. iv. 21. 
Si lenones vitdsset tamquam leones, vitas, se tradidisset. Ibid, 
Hunc avium dulcedo ducit ad avium. Ibid. 

PoLYSiGMA(7roAi/,much : (rfy/ua, the letter s) ; frequently repeating 
the letter s. 

Sosia a solario soleas sarciebat suas. Mart. Cap. 5. 

Polysyndeton (iroXva-vvderos, " much bound together"); using 
many times the same conjunctions. 

Armentarius Afer agit tectumque, Laremque, 

Armaque Amyclozumque canem, Cressamque pharetram. Virg. 
Georg. iii. 344. 

Ulustris oratio est, si et verba gravitate delecta ponuntur, et trans- 
lata, et superlata, et, ad nomen adjuncta, et duplicata, et idem signifi- 
cantia ; atque db ipsa actione atque imitatione rerum non abhorrentia. 
Cic. Or. Part. 6. 

Periphrasis (irepi^pacris, " circumlocution " ) ; expressing by 
several words what might be expressed by a smaller number. 

Invitusfeci ut S. Manilium e Senatu ejicerem. Cic. Cat. Maj. 12. 
i. e. invitus ejeci, 8fc. 

Proeepsis (jrpox-ntyis, " a taking before ; " " anticipation ") : 

1 . Calling a thing by a name it subsequently received. 
Lavinaque littora venit (Virg. 2En. i. 2.) ; whereas Lavinium 

was not built till after the arrival of iEneas in Italy. 

2. Speaking briefly of matters which it is said by the speaker are 
not to be mentioned. 

De pueritid quidem tud, quam tu omni intemperantice addixisti, 
dicerem, si hoc tempus idoneum putarem. Nunc consultb relinquo. 
Et illud prcetereo, quod te tribuni rei militaris infrequentem tra- 
diderunt: deinde, quod injuriarum satisfecisti L. Labeoni, nihil ad 
rem pertinere puto. Horum nihil dico ; revertor ad illud de quo 
judicium est. Cic. Herenn. iv. 27. 

N.B. In this last force it is also called occupatio. 

Prosopopoeia (irpoo-aTroTroia, " personification ") ; representing in- 
animate things as persons. 

Qua (i.e. Patria), tecum, Catilina, sic agit, et quodammodo tacita 
P 4 



320 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 200. 

loquitur: "Nullum aliquot jam annis f acinus exstitit, nisi per fe," 8fc. 
Cic. Catil. i. 7. 

Prosthesis andPROTHEsis (irpoaOecLs, a " putting- to," or " adding ;" 
irpodeo-iS) a " putting before," or " prefixing " ) : adding a letter or 
syllable to the beginning of a word. 

Gnatus for natus ; tetuli for tuli. 

Syllepsis ((tvKXtj^is, " a taking together ") : referring a word to a 
clause to which it does not grammatically belong. 

Hie illius arma, Hie currus fuit Virg. 2En* i. 20.— fuit belongs 
to arma, yet not grammatically. 

Syncope (crvyKowT], " a cutting short ") ; taking away a letter or 
syllable from any part of a word except the first or last syllable. 

Memor Acta non alio rege puertice. Hor. Od. i. 36. 7. for 
pueritice. 

Quce me surpuerat mihi. Hor. Od. iv. 13. 20. for surripuerat. 

Synecdoche (owe/coox?/, a a joining in receiving " ; hence, under- 
standing one thing with another) : 

1. Putting a whole for a part. 

Aut Ararim Partlius libit, aut Germania Tigrim. Virg. Ec. i. 63. 

2. A part for a whole. 

Hie tertius December^ L e» annus, Hor. Epod. xi. 5. 

3. A general name for a particular. 

Pradamque ex unguibus ales Projecit ponto. Yirg. xii. 25 6. 
Ales for Aquila. 

4. A particular name for a general. 

Tristitiam et metus Tradam protervis in mare Creticum Portare 
ventis. Hor. Od. i. 26. 1. Mare Creticum, to designate any sea. 

Synthesis and Synesis (o-vvdeais, " a putting together " ; <nW<ns, 
" understanding") ; referring a word to the gender involved in its 
meaning, and not its grammatical gender. 

Ilium dii deceque senium perdant. Ter. Eun. ii 3.10. where senium 
is used for an old man (senem), and so the pronoun is put in the 
masculine gender, ilium. 

Systole (owtoA?? ," a drawing together " ; hence " shortening ") ; 
making a long syllable short. 

Obstupui, sleteruntque coma, et vox faucibus hcesit. Yirg. 2Eu* ii. 
774. Steterunt for steterunt. 



§ 200.] SYNTAX. 321 

Tmesis (two-is, "cutting") ; dividing a compound word into two 
parts, and placing a word or words between such parts. 

Et multo nebula circum dea fudit amictu. Virg. JEn. i. 41 2. circum 
deafudit for dea circumfudit. 

Quod judicium cumque. Cic. Sext. 1. for quodcumque judicium. 

Traductio, " a leading along " : hence " a repetition " : repeating 
a word several times. 

Qui nihil habet in vita jucundius vita, is cum virtute vitam non po- 
test colere. Cic. Herenn. vi. 14. 

Zeugma (£evy/*a, " a band " ) ; employing a verb or participle for 
two or more objects, to one only of which it belongs in strictness 
of expression. 

Pacem ac bellum gerens. Sail. Jug. 46. The expression with 
pacem ought to be agens ; so that here gerens represents it. 



2 5 



322 



PROSODY. 



§ 201. Prosody is .divided into three parts : Tone, Breathing, 
Time. 

1. Tone. 

Tone, or accentuation, is either acute ( / ), grave ('), or circum- 
flex ( A ). 

a. Monosyllables, short by nature, or long by position, receive 
the acute accent: met, vir; mo?is\ pons: such as are long by 
nature, the circumflex ; mos, flos, crus, sol. 

b. Dissyllables which have their penultima (or last syllable but 
one) long by nature, and their ultima (or last syllable) short, cir- 
cumflex the penultima : floris, solis, liina, musa : but in all other 
cases they take the acute on the penultima ; regnum, lapis, grddu. 

c. Polysyllables which have their penultima long, receive the 
acute upon it ; but those which have the penultima short, receive 
the acute on the ante-penultima (or last syllable but two) : libertas, 
penates, conjungunt ; dominus, pontifex. 

Exc. 1. If the penultima be long by nature, and the ultima short, 
the penultima is circumflexed. Horn anus, amator, virtutis. 

Exc. 2. The compounds of facio receive the acute on the penul- 
tima ; the compounds oi Jit on the ultima: bene/dcis, malefdcit ; 
benefit, male/it 

N. B. The accent is never thrown back beyond the antepenultima. 

Obs. From what is stated above in b and c, it will be seen that using 
the circumflex over the ablative case of the first declension in order to 
distinguish it from the nominative, is prosodially incorrect. 

2. Breathing. 

Breathing is either hard or aspirated — asper; causing h to be 
sounded; as, homo: or else soft — lenis ; where h is not sounded; 
as, ovum. 

3. Time. 

Time is either long or short. A long time contains two morm 
or pauses ; a short time one mora or pause. 



§ 201.] PKOSODY. 323 



Feet. 

1. \j * Pyrrhichius; lege, pater. 

2. Spondeus ; virtus, regnant 

3. w - Iambus ; potest, viros. 

4. - v Trochaeus or Choreus ; musa, turget. 

5. ^ v w Tribrachys ; regere, laterd. 

6 Molossus ; surgentes, vixerunt. 

7. - w Dactylus ; scribere, sanguine. 

8. ^ o - Anapsestus ; facer ent, lapides. 

9. ^ - v Amphibrachys ; mdnere, putantur, 

10. — v - Amphimacrus or Creticus ; conderent, glorm. 

11. \j — Bacchlus ; jdcerent, dmdntes. 

12. — v Antibacchius or Palim-bacchius ; evenit, audire. 

13. v v yj yj Proceleusmaticus ; segetibus, dperuit. 

J4. Dispondeiis or Double spondee; converterunt, delectari. 

15. w v/ — Ionicus a minori ; miserarum, retmerent. 

16. — v »-» Ionicus a majori; consurgitis, navalia 

17. v> - v - Diiambus or Double Iambus; meridies 9 propinquitds. 

18. - w - ^ Ditrochaeus, Dichoreiis, or Double Trochee; gloriatiis, 

longiore. 

19. ^ — ^ Antispastus ; repHgndmus, sopor atd. 

20. - w ^ - Choriambus ; Melpomene, curriculo. 

21. - vy w w Paeon primus ; auxilid, pilrpureus. 

22. w - vy ^ „ secundus ; dmdvimus, pecunid. 

23. o v - «-» „ tertius ; mdnuere, meliord. 

24. ^ ^ v - „ quartus ; recipiunt, misericors. 

25. v^ Epitritus primus ; puellarum, motor es. 

26. - v „ secundus ; audiendos, perferendi. 

27. v - „ tertius ; circumvdlant, spectaculis. 

28. v^ „ quartus ; acceplstis, tentavisse. 

1. Trvppixo ; "a pyrrhic dance; " i. e. a martial dance in which a very 

rapid step was used. 

2. 0-7iw5e?o9 ; " relating to a truce : " because at the sacrifices used at 

the time of making a truce, slow, solemn strains were used in 
which a foot of two long syllables predominated. 

3. Idwroi) ; " to attack : " because the early satirical poets especially 

used this foot in their lampoons. Yet others refer it to other 
sources. See Iambein Class. Diet. 

4. rpoxcuos ; " relating to running ; " because this foot runs on quickly 

and smoothly — Or 
Xopslos ; '« belonging to the chorus : " because adapted to the move- 
ments of the chorus in dancing. 

5. Tpeis, Ppaxvs; "three short : " as it consists of three short syllables. 

P 6 



324 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 20L 

6. fioXocraos ; "a Molossian : " because the Molossi, a people of Thes- 

saly, were accustomed to make great use of this foot in their war- 
songs which they chanted as they went to battle. 

7. ScZktvAos ; "a finger : " which has three joints — one long, two short. 

8. dvdTTai(TTQs ; " struck back : " the preceding foot struck back or re- 

versed. 

9. dfx(p\ (Spaxvs ; " on both sides short : " a long syllable between two 

short ones. 

10. a/xcpl, fxaKpos; "on both sides long: " a short syllable between two 

long ones — Called alsc 
KpT]Tix6s ; " Cretic, i. e. Cretan : " because used especially in the 
metres employed by the inhabitants of Crete. 

1 1 . fiaKXtios ; " relating to Bacchus : " because used frequently in hymns 

to Bacc us. 

* ' I " opposite to a bacchius : " "a bacchius back 

,^ r I again : " i. e. a bacchius reversed. 

Tta\LU, paKx^ios; J ° 

13. TrpoKeXevafiarLKos ; "adapted to exhortation:" because the rapid 

utterance attending this foot is suitable for animated exhorta- 
tion. 

14. 5iS, o-7iw5e?os ; "twice, a spondee : " i. e. a double spondee. 

1 5. \wvik6s ; " Ionic : " as having its origin in Ionia. The further de- 

scription, a minori, points out the foot beginning with two short 
syllables ; a mqjori with two long syllables. 

17. 5ts, la/nfios ; "twice, an iambus : " i. e. an iambus repeated. 

18. dls 9 rpox^os', " twice, a trochee : " i. e. a trochee repeated — Or 
diXooeios; " twice a choreiis ; " i. e. a choreiis repeated. 

19. duTiairaaros ; "drawn in a contrary direction:" hence the name 

applied to the syzygy or union of an iambus and a trochee ; 
the iambus preceding. 

20. x°p' ia ^ os > tne junction of a choreiis or trochee with an iambus. 

21. iraioop or irai&v. By some considered to have its name from Paeon 

the inventor of these feet ; b) others, from Paean, a hymn in 
honour of Apollo, in which they are said to have been much 
used. According to the position of the long syllable they are 
called, first, second, &c. 

25. iirirptros; " a third in addition: " i.e. !+} = $; hence in the ratio 
of 4 to 3. Epitrit is the name given to a combination of a spon- 
dee with an iambus or a trochee ; for a spondee has 2 riorce; the 
others, respectively, 1 ± ; (2 to li = 4 to 3). According to the posi- 
tion of the short syllable the foot is named as above. 

A combination of syllables of like quantity does not form a 
proper metrical foot; i. e^a foot from a given number of which a 



§ 202, 203.] prosody. 325 

verse may be formed. Hence the spondee, tribrach, and niolossus 
are called spurious feet. Under certain rules they may be em- 
ployed in the place of feet of equal time : a spondee for a dactyl or 
anapaest ; a tribrach for an iambus or trochee ; and a molossus for 
a choriambus, &c. A pyrrhic, also, is a spurious foot, and may in 
like manner be used as the representative of a long syllable. 



ARSIS AND THESIS. 

§ 202. To all genuine feet belong, 1. arsis (&p<ris, or "raising"); 
2. thesis (0eW, or "lowering"). By some these terms are said to have 
reference to the elevating and depressing the tones of the voice ; 
by others, to be borrowed from the way in which the leader of a 
choir beats time for the performers. Be this, however, as it may, 
the arsis falls on a long syllable in genuine feet, the thesis on a short 
one. 

Obs. When, therefore, a spondee represents a dactyl, the arsis will be 
on the former syllable ; but when an anapaest, on the latter. So, alsOj 
when a tribrach is put for a trochee, it will have the arsis on the first 
syllable ; when for an iambus, on the last. 



METRE, 



§203. The term "metre" (ixerpov, "measure") is sometimes 
applied to the series of feet forming a verse ; sometimes to a com- 
bination of different kinds of verses. Thus iambic metre points 
out a verse formed of iambic feet, or their representatives : alcaic 
metre, a stanza formed by a continuation of those particular kinds 
of verses which compose it. In iambic, trochaic, and anapaestic 
verses, two feet — dipodia (pnrodla, "double-foot") — form a metre. 

a. A verse written in dipodia (except the anapaestic dipodia), or 
in feet formed of four syllables, is called acatalectic {aKaraXrjKrLKSs, 
" not leaving off") when nothing is wanting to its metre or feet ; 
«. e. when it is complete. Catalectic (KaraA^/m/cos,. " leaving off"), 
when it is short of one syllable. Br achy catalectic (fipa%vKot.TaXi]KTLK6Q, 
" leaving off short "), when two syllables are wanting. Hypercata- 
lectic (vTrepKaraXTiKTiKos, " leaving off excessively "), when three syl- 
lables are deficient, or when one syllable only is over and above the 
preceding metre. 

b. But verses formed from trisyllabic feet — dactyls and ana- 
paests — are called catalectici in syllabam, when they retain only one 
syllable of a deficient foot : catalectici in dissyllabum, when they 
have two syllables of such a foot. 

c. Trochaic and iambic feet (not metres) can be only catalectici 
in syllabam. 



326 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 204—207. 



PROSODIAL FIGURES. 

§ 204. Synalcepha, or Crasis, occurs not only at the end of a word, 
but also sometimes in the middle : thus, dii, diis, iidem, iisdem, 
delude, deinceps, semianimis, semihomo, &c, are sometimes written 
and pronounced di, dis, &c, 

Obs. This mode of pronunciation is not to be employed in prose. 

§. 205. Sometimes Synalceplia and Ecthlipsis occur at the close of 
a line, if the next line begins with a vowel, &c. 

Omnia \ Mercuri\6 simifis vo\cemque cd\ldrem\que 
Et cri [ nesfld\vos, &c. Virg. 2En. iv. 558. 
Aut dul\cis mus\tl Vul\cdno \ decoquit \ humoWem 
Etfoli\is, &c. Yirg. Georg. i. 295. 

Obs. Wherever in the examples throughout this Prosody, the quantity 
of a syllable is not marked, it is to be elided. 

§ 206. Sometimes Synalcepha does not take place, more Grceco. 
This is, however, generally when the syllable is long ; yet some- 
times, though rarely, when short. 

Ter sunt \ cond\ti im\pb~nere \ Pelio \ Ossam. Virg. Georg. i. 
281. 

Et ve\ra lnces\su patu\it dea. | I lie, uM \ mdtrem.\ Virg. 2En. 
i. 495. 

Obs. 1, This is called Hiatus. Observe also that the o in Pelio is 
naturally long ; but is shortened before the following vowel, more Grceco. 

Obs. 2. Moreover, it should be especially observed, as having reference 
to the metres of the earlier poets, that words in m were not merely not 
elided, but even short. This is in accordance with the view, that all words 
ending in a liquid are short naturally. 

Insig\nita fere turn, millia \ mllitum \ octo. Ennius. 

Even Juvenal uses circum in a compound word as short before 
a vowel. 

Circuma\gdt madi\das a \ tempes\tate co\hortes. Juv. vii. 164. 

§ 207. In ancient Latin poetry there was a peculiar elision of 
the final s of words ending in us, and that even before a consonant* 
the preceding u still remaining short. 

Ille vir | haud mdg\nd cum \ re, sed \ plenus fi\dei. Ennius apud 
Cic. Cat. Maj. 1. Here plenus jidei is pronounced plenufidei. 

Obs. Closely allied to this appears to be the use of a word ending in 
m with a vowel preceding, and having the final syllable short ; as, if m 
were elided in pronunciation, and the vowel before it remained short. 
Compare above, § 206. Obs. 2. ; and see last example but one in § 217., 
where the last syllable of hominum is short. The origin of the elision 



§ 208—210.] prosody. 327 

of the final syllable of words in m preceded by a vowel, may probably 
be traced to the m being suppressed in pronunciation, which left as it 
were an open vowel, and consequently a sound unpleasant to the ear of 
a more refined and cultivated class of writers : and hence these treated 
such words as if they really ended in a vowel. 

§ 208. Incision, which must be distinguished from Ccesura, 
points out the termination of a foot simultaneously with the close 
of a word. In some forms of metre — the pentameter and alcaic 
for instance — this is absolutely requisite. (See Descriptions of 
the various Metres which are presently given.) 

Obs. The proper place for the Ccesura, and also for Incision, will be 
pointed out with each kind of verse, according as it requires either or 
both. 

N. B. In the examples given with each kind of verse, ccBsura is indicated 
by a line drawn in the line itself: Carbasus et crines — umbrosa, &c. I?i- 
cision by two perpendicular lines || after a word: Pkaretrceque leves \\. 
Also the several feet are indicated by a short line between them : as, 
Carbasus \ et crl\nes um\brdsa, &c. 

§ 209. A short syllable at the end of a word is sometimes made 
long if it is in arsis, and begins a foot. The enclitics are considered 
to form a part of the word to which they are affixed. 

Pectdrilbus inhidns spi\rantid\ consulU \ extd. Virg. JEn. iv. 64. 

Limina \ que laic rusque de ,z, Sfc. Virg. JEn. iii. 91. 

Quum mu\ros dr\cemque pro\cul, dc \ rdrd dd\morum. Virg. 
JEn. viii. 98. 

Here pectoribus, que and procul have each their final 'syllable 
lengthened in arsis. 



DACTYLIC VEESES. 

Hexameter Verse. 



§ 210. The Hexameter belongs to Dactylic Verse, and is formed 
as explained in Part I. The last foot may be either a spondee or 
a trochee. 

The Casura is required (1.), either at the first syllable of the 
third foot (semiquinaria or masculine ccesura) ; or (2.), it may be 
after the second syllable of the third foot, if a dactyl (trochaic or 
feminine ccesura); or after the first syllable of the fourth foot 
(ccesura semiseptenaria). 

(1.) Carbasus \ et cri\nes um\brosd te\gebdt a\rundo. Virg. 

JEn. viii. 34. 

(2.) Alter enim turn \ Tiphys et \ altera \ qucsvehat \ Argo. 

Virg. Eel. iv. 34. 



328 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§211. 

(3.) Mird\tur nemits | insue\tum, — ful\gentid \ longe.\ Viro>. 
JEn. viii. 92. 

Obs. 1 . When the caesura semiseptenaria is used, there is generally also 
found a quasi ccesura at the commencement of the second foot. 

Toller e hu\mo, — vic\torque vi\rum — voli\tare per \ ord.\ Virg. 
Georg. iii. 9. 

Inde do\mum, — si \ forte pe\dem, — si \ forte, tii\lisset. Virg. 
JEn. iii. 756. 

Obs. 2. The ccesura is, to a certain extent, influenced by the sense. 
Hence in the following line the ccesura must be regarded as semiseptenaria, 
not semiquinaria. 

Ocyus | adver\tunt prb~\ras — ur\bique propinqudnt. Virg. JEn. 
viii. 101. 

Obs. 3. There is also a spurious kind of Ccesura, called Ccesura 
Bucolica, found at times at the close of the fourth foot, after one of the 
before-mentioned Ccesurce. As, however, the word ends there, the term 
Incision, as explained § 208., is more applicable to it. It tends to give 
a sudden check to the current of the verse, and is considered to impart the 
appearance of natural or rustic simplicity to the poet's words. The 
Greek Bucolic poets used it greatly, and, following them, Virgil 
makes frequent employment of it in his Eclogues and Georgics. 

Nymphce\, nosier a\mor, — Li\bethrides, \\ aut mihi \ carmen, 
Quale me\o Cod\ro, — con\cedite |j proximo, \ Phcebi 
Verstbiis | ille fa\cit, — aut \ si non || possumus \ omnes 
Hie ar\guta sa\crd — pen\debit \ | fistula \ pinu. Virg. Eel. vii. 21. 
Nee sum ani\mi dubi\us — ver\bis ed || vincere \ magnum \ 
Quam sit, et \ angus\tis — hunc j adder e \\ rebus ho\norem. \ 
Sed me \ Pamas\si — de\serta per \\ ardud \ dulcis \ 
Haptdt d\mor. Jilvdt \ ire — ju\gis, qua \\ nulla pri\orum \ 
Cdstdli\am mol\li — di\vertitur || orbitd j clivo. Virg. Georg. iii. 
289. 

§ 211. A monosyllabic word is, for the most part, preceded by 
another monosyllabic word. Occasionally, there is a deviation from 
this rule, but it is only when the poet intends to produce some ab- 
ruptness in the verse, and to point out something vast, terrible, or 
uncouth. 

Pallddis | auxUi\o — sem ] \per stetit. \ Impius | ex quo. \ Virg. 
ZEn. ii. 163. 

Ddtldtus: \ insequi\tur cumu\lo — pr&\ruptus d\quce mons. Virg. 
JEn. i. 105. 

Spes Ddnd\um; frac\t<B vi\res — a\versd de\<z mens. \ Virg. JEn. 
ii. 170. 



§ 211.] PROSODY, 329 

Llttdre\is in\gens — in\ventd sub \ ilici\bus sits. | Virg. 2En. viii. 
43. 

Obs. 1. Horace, in his Satires and Epistles, deviates from this. Indeed, 
as far as the language is concerned, he there studies nervousness of ex- 
pression rather than poetical diction ; and what he says of comedy 
may be applied to this class of his own writings : Nisi qudd pede certo 
Differt sermoni, sermo merds. Sat. i. 4. 47. 

Obs. 2. But when the last word, being a monosyllable, suffers elision, 
the preceding word is not necessarily a monosyllable : the two by 
elision becoming, as it were, one. 

Quo fes\sum rdpi\tls, Fabi\i? — Tu \ maximus \ ille es. | Virg. 
JEn. vi. 845. 

Ad quce h&c \ Pridmi\des. — Nihil \ 6 tibi, a\mice re\lictum est \ 
Virg. u%Jn. vi. 509. 

N.B. The nature of the feet is often accommodated to the subject. 
Thus, in describing the Cyclops, toiling heavily at their task ; in intro- 
ducing the calm mode of an old man's conversation ; in referring to 
the delays adopted by Fabius in his tactics towards Hannibal; Virgil 
uses repeated spondees (a) to express in words the slowness pertaining 
to the circumstances. And again, on the other hand, in order that 
language and idea may go together, he uses aactyls (6) when telling of 
the impetuous charge of the war-horse, and the rapid flight of doves, 
and the speed with which Turnus fled from iEneas. Even the sound (c) 
is made subservient and conducive to the nature of what is treated of, as 
may be seen in the description of a storm. 

a. Illi in\ter se\se mag\na vi \ bracMa \ tollunt] Virg. G&org, iv. 

174. 

Olll | seda\to res\pondet \ corde Ld\tinus. Virg.JEn. xii. 18. 

TJnus | qui no\bls cunc\tando \ restitu\ls rem. Virg. JEn. vi. 
846. 

b. Quadrilpe ] ddnte puUrem sonitu qudtit \ unguld \ campum\ 

Virg. Mn. viii. 596. 

Mox | aere \ lapsa qui\eto \ 
It adit i\ter liqui\dum, cele\res neque | commovet \ alds.\ Virg. 
JEn.Y. 216. 

Tollunt | se cele\res liqut\dum que per \ aerd \ lapsa \ 
Sedibus | opta\tis gemi\iw super \ arbor e \ sidicnt. Virg. 2En. 
vi. 202. 

Nifugd | subsidi\o sube\dt: fugit\ ocydr \ JEuro.\ Virg. JEn. 
xii. 733. 

c. Luctan\tes ven\tos tem\pesta\tesque sd\ndras.\ Virg. 2En. i. 53. 

Here the frequent use of the liter a sibilans gives an idea of 
the whistling and howling of the winds. 



330 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 212, 213. 

Insequi tur cla \ morque vi rum, strl ' dor que ru \ dentum. I Yirg. 
ffin. i. 85. 

Here the constant recurrence of r tends to heighten the notion 
of the straining of the ropes and the rattling of the oars, joined to 
the clamorous cries of the sailors. 



Pentameter Verse. 



§ 212. The Pentameter also belongs to dactylic verse, and con- 
tains the equivalent to five feet, whence its name (7reVre, " five ; " 
fierpop, " a metre"). Its construction is explained in Part I. The 
last syllable may be either long or short. The term Penthemimer, 
which is applied to each division of the verse, points out that it 
consists of 2| feet (Wi/re, "five;" iifiifiepns, "halved"). There must 
be incision at the close of the first Fenthemimer. 

Itdld ] nam tellus [| Grctcid \ major e\rat. Ov. Fast. iv. 64. 

Obs. 1. The verse almost invariably ends with a dissyllable. A tri- 
syllable rarely occurs at the close from the unpleasantness with which 
it falls upon the ear. A word of four syllables, also, but seldom occurs. 

Non bene | celestes \\ impia \ dextrd co\lit. Ov. Her. vii. 130. 
Cultor o ddrattf ]| dives A robs segetis. Ov. Eleg. iv. 2. 18. 
Pomdque \ non nofiis \\ legit ab \ drbdribus. Ov. Eleg. i. 7. 33. 

Obs. 2. A monosyllabic word beginning with a vowel is sometimes 
found at the close of the line, if the preceding word ends in a vowel ; 
inasmuch as here, as before remarked in the case of the Hexameter, the 
two words, by elision, become one. 

Qu£ sterills sol a \\ conspici endd co ma est. \ Ov. Nux. 30. 

Obs. 3. The pentameter is not found in systems (crvcrrrifjiaTa), i. e. in a 
series of its o<vn kind. In combination with an hexameter it forms what 
is called elegiac verse. The term " distich " (pLcrnxia, " a double line "), 
is applied to a single hexameter followed by a single pentameter. • 



Other Dactylic Metres. 

§ 213. Versus dactylicus catalecticus in disyllabum, called also 
Versus Alcmanicus, from the Spartan poet Alcman, who invented it. 
The first and second dactyls may be commuted for spondees ; the 
third remains unchanged except in the case of a proper name. 



Exiti o est dvi dum mare \ nalitis. Hor. Od. i. 28. 18. 
Injec to ter \ pulvere \ curras. Hor. Od. i. 28. 36. 
Menso\rem cohi\bent Ar\chyta. Hor. Od. i. 28. 2. 






§ 214—216.] prosody. 331 

§ 214. Dactylicus trimeter catalecticus in syllabam, called also 
versus Archilochius minor from Archilochus a Greek poet of Paros. 



-w ~ 



Pulvis et | umbra sulmus. Hor. Od. iv. 7. 16. 
Tempord \ Dl supe\ri. Hor. Od. iv. 7. 18. 

§ 215. Dactylicus dimeter catalecticus in syllabam, or versus Ado- 
nius. 

Terruxt \ urbem. Hor. Od. i. 2. 4. 
Stella relfulsit. Hor. Od. i. 5. 28. 



ANAP^STIC VERSE. 

§ 216. The ordinary form assumed by the anapaestic verse is di- 
meter, i. e. a line containing four anapaests. It takes incision at the 
close of the first metre. 

(1.) Pure anapaestic lines are not often found. 

(2.) In the place of the anapaest a spondee may be used in any 
foot of the verse ; a dactyl in the first or third places. Occasionally 
a proceleusmatic is used. 

(1.) yvH— I — ! — 

Phdretrce\que leves ; || date s<B\vafero. | Senec. Here, Fur. 1116. 
Penetra\re ddmos, \ \ populis\que madens. Senec. Here. (Et 1868. 

(2.) _^[_ 

Inter \ vita? \\ mortis\que vias. Sen. Med. 307. 
Candida \ mundo \ \ slderd \ currunt. Senec. Hipp. 332. 
Nee pr&\cipitem || vdluerit \ amnem. Senec. Here. (Et. 590. 

Obs, 1. There are two places in Seneca where a dactyl is found in the 
second foot ; and one where it occurs in the fourth : but this last passage 
is supposed to be corrupt. 

Qui vul\tus Ache\rb~ntis \ atri. Senec. Agam. 602. 
Aitt quid \ pectdre \ \ ported dn\helo. Senec. Octav. 772. 
Non erdt \ usus, |[ nondum \ Pleiddds. Sen. Med. 311. 

N.B. In the first of these examples the closing syllable of Acherontis 
is lengthened in arsis (see below, Obs. 3.); and in the third example 
pluvias has been conjectured as the right reading instead of Pleiadas. 

Obs. 2. Hiatus often takes place at the incision closing the first dipodia. 






332 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§217. 

Phaethon\te tuli || habeo \ medice 

Dona Chim&rct: \\ habeo \flammas, Sfc. Senec. Med. 827, 8. 

Nocte si\lentl \\ Amphi\dni6s. Senec. CEdip. 178. 

Obs. 3. A short syllable is at times made long in arsis. See § 202. Obs. 

Causa mi\nistrat : \\ ite ad \ pldnctus. Senec. Troas. 78. 

a. The last syllable of each line is not considered common (anceps) 
but is in position ; i. e. it is influenced bj the commencing letter of 
the word which opens the following line. In other words an ana- 
paestic system may be regarded as a continuous line of anapaests y or 
their representatives, divided subsequently into dimeters. 

Audax | nimium 1 1 qui fr eta \ primus 

Rate tarn \ fdcill \ \ perfidd \ ruplt 

Terrds\que, fyc. Senec. Med. 301. 

Here the last syllable of each line is long by position. 

b. In the Greek poets the system usually closes with a monometer, 
followed by a dimeter catalecticus in syllabam. Of these the former 
consists of pure anapaests, not their representatives, and is termed 
basis anapcestica ; the latter is called versus parwmiacus. This, 
however, is not observed by the Latin writers. 

c. Among the Latins, Seneca is the chief employer of anapcestic 
systems. Yet, Plautus has them but with many licenses and in 
different combinations : he uses anapcestic tetrameters, sometimes 
(1.) acatalectic, sometimes (2.) catalectici in dissyllabum, Incision 
is neglected at the close of the first metre, yet usually occurs at 
the close of the second. 

(1.) Quid dls | tu f tibi | credere \ certum est: j | nam esse bo num, 
e vul\tu cog\nosco\. Plaut. Aulul. iv. 9. 7. 

(2.) Frustror ; \ pater e, at\que cestu \ ; tibi ego hanc \\ do operdm\ 
proper dn\do excruci\dr. Plaut. Mil. Glor. iv. 2. 31. 



CRETIC VERSE. 



§ 217. The Cretic verse occurs only in the Comic poets, and is 
usually found in tetrameters. Either of the long syllables may be 
resolved, so that five short syllables may come together. At the 
close of a verse, however, only the former long syllable can be 
resolved. A molossus is sometimes found in the place of the 
regular foot. 

Tantd ve\cordia ln\nata cui\quam ut siet Ter. And. iv. 1. 2. 



§ 218, 219.] prosody. 333 

Turn codc\ti, neces\sdrio \ se opermnt\, it timent. Ter. And. 
iv. 1. 8. 

Idne est verumf \ immo id est | genus hominum \ pessimum in\. 
Ter. And. iv. 1. 5. 

Aut solu\tos sindt], quos drgen\to emerit. Plaut. Capt. ii. 1. 11. 



BACCHIAC VERSE. 

§ 218. The Bacchiac verse is also confined to the Comic poets. 
It is found sometimes in systems, sometimes intermixed with other 
verses. Like anapsestic verse it has the last syllable of each line 
influenced by the commencement of the word which opens the 
following line. It is usually found in tetrameters. The resolution 
of either long syllable is allowable in any foot but the last ; in that 
only the former long syllable can be resolved. Moreover, a mo- 
lossus which may have its first syllable resolved is found at times 
in the place of the regular foot* Even elision occurs at the close 
of a line with a vowel of the word which opens the following line. 

Age i tit | secundum. \ Sequor, sub\sequor te. 

Quia id quod \ neque est, neque \ fu% neque \ futurum est, 

Scelestam, \ scelus, lln\guam abscinddm. \ Tuits sum : 

Proinde ut cb~m\modum est et \ lubet, quid\que facias. Plaut. 
Amph. ii. 1. 1, 3, 7, 8. 

Qudnquam haud fdl\sa sum, nos \ odiosds ] Tiaberl. Plaut. Aulul. 
ii. 1. 4. 

Sdtirt pdr\vd res est \ voluptd\tum in vita dt\que 

In fyc, Plaut. Amph. ii. 2. 1. 



IAMBIC VERSE. 



§ 219. The usual form of Iambic verse, which is written in 
dipodiae, is that of trimeter acatalecticus. This kind of it is also 
termed versus senarius from its containing six feet. The ccesura 
takes place at the first syllable of either the third or fourth foot. 
The former is called penthemimeral, the latter hephthemimeral 
ccesura — from their respective places at the fifth and seventh half- 
feet. 

Bed\tus il\le, — qui | procul j nego\tiis. Hor. Epod. ii. 1. 
Quid is\te fert \ tumul\tus ? — aut \ quid 6m\nium. Hor. Epod. 
v. 3. 

Obs. Yet in combination with verses of a different kind various 



334 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§219. 

shorter forms of the Iambic metre are frequently found. (See 
below b, c, d.) 

a. The Lyric poets sometimes place, 1. a spondee in the uneven 
feet 1, 3, 5 ; 2. a tribrach in any foot but the last, which is always 
a pure iambus ; 3. a dactyl is also found in the first and third feet ; 
and 4. an anapaest in the first and fifth ; but this use of the anapaest 
is seldom recurred to. 

1. Formi\ddlo\sis — dum \ latent | sylvis \ ferce. ] Hor. Epod. 
v. 55. 

2. Sed ali\ us dr \ dor — aut \ pixel | Ice can | didce \ . Hor. Epod. xi. 27. 
Vectd\bor hume\ris — tunc \ ego intimitis \ eques\. Hor. Epod. 

xvi. 74. 

Quod si | pudi\ca — muli\er in \ partem | juvet\. Hor. Epod. 

ii. 39. 
Poet\ce non \ qui — fur\tum fdce\re studu\erit. Ter. Eun. 

Prol. 28. 

3. Sed dubi\us un\de — rum\peret \ silen\tium\. Hor. Epod. 

v. 85. 

Quo, quo | sceles\ti — ruit\ts, aut, \ cur dex\teris\. Hor. Epod. 
vii. 1. 

4. Pavidum\que lepo\rem et ad\venam \ laqueo \gruem. Hor. 

Epod. ii. 5. 

b. Horace uses an iambic trimeter catalecticus, which takes the 
Caesura, in combination with another line. 

Trahunt\que sic\cas — ma\cMncs \ cdri\nas. 

Junct(e\que Nym\phis — Gra\tice | decen\tes\. Hor. Od. i. 4.2, 4. 

c. Horace also uses an iambic dimeter, in combination with other 
verses, in which Caesura is not regarded. 

Ami | ce pro \pugnd j culd. \ 
Subi\re M<z\cends \ tuo.\ 
Jucun\dd si \ contra | gravis]. Hor. Epod. i. 2, 4, 6, 

d. An iambic dimeter catalecticus, called Alcaicus enneasyllabus, 
(e^ea, nine ; crvWagrj, a syllable) is used in the construction of the 
Alcaic strophe. Strictly the first foot should be a spondee ; caesura 
occurs at the third half foot, and incision at the close of the third 
foot. 

6rnd\re — pu\lvindr \\ deo\rum. Hor. Od. i. 27. 3. 
Obs. There are deviations from the above divisions, yet they 
are rare. 

w ft" 

Ab in\solen\ti temper a\tdm. 

Festos | recli\natum \ bea\ris. Hor. Od. ii. 3. 3, 7. 






§219.] peosody. 335 

e. In the comic poets, and in Phsedrus, great irregularities 
occur : (1.) a spondee is found even in the second and fourth feet ; 
while (2.) dactyls, and (3.) anapaests are placed in all feet except 
the last. 

1. Scis fe\ci e ser\vo ut — es\ses li\bertus \ mihl\. Ter. And. i. 

i. io. 

. Compren\sus ndm\que — poe\nds per\solvit \ cruce. Phasd. iii. 
5. 10. 

2. He% vere\or, ne\quid — And\ria dp\portet \ mall. Ter. And. 

i. 1. 46. 
JSso \po qui | dam petu \ lans — ldpi\ dem impe\gerat. Phaed. iii. 

5.2. 
Units et \ item al\ter — ita ut \ ingeni\um est om\nium. Ter. 

And. i. 1. 50. 

4. Quid agat,\ quid cum il\lo con\silii \ captet\. Sat est\. Ter. 

And. 
Si prop\ter dmor\em uxor\em no\lit du\cere. Ter. And. i. 

1. 128. 
Stude\bdt et \ tdmen om\nia Mc \ medw\criter. Ter, And. i. 

1.31. 

f. The comedians use frequently, and with very numerous 
licenses, a tetrameter catalecticus (which is also called septenarius 
iambicus, from the number of complete feet in it ; and also comicus 
quadratus), with (1.) incision at the close of the second metre; 
though (2.) this division of the line is not always observed. More- 
over, (3.) where the incision takes place hiatus sometimes is found, 
and a short syllable is made long in arsis. 

1. Rogat un\de sit\; ndrro om\nia; Mc \\ inde est \ cogniti\d 

fac\td. 
Incdm\mode\ mihinup\tiis \\ eve\nit ; fur\tum pdti\or. 

2. Hcec tot | propter \ me gau\dia il\li con\tigis\se M\tor. Ter. 

Hec. v. 3. 33, 35, 110. 

3. Sed si | tibi vi\ginti \ mince \\ drgen\ti pro\feren\tur. 

Quo nos | vdcd\bis no\mine \\ liber \tos non j pdtro\nos. Plaut. 
Asin. iii. 3. 61. 

g. The comedians further use a tetrameter acatalecticus, called 
also octonarius iambicus, from the number of complete feet in it, 
with most numerous licenses. 1. One of the ccesurce is commonly, 
though, 2. not always, used ; 3. and incision often occurs at the 



336 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§220, 

close of the second metre in Plautus, though, 4. not in Terence. 
The hiatus, 5. occurs not only at incision, but elsewhere, and also, 
6. the lengthening of a short syllable in arsis. The last foot is 
always a pure iambus. 

1. Conce\dite atlque — absce\dXte, 6m\nes de | via \ dece\dite\. 

Ut f ilium | bonum | pdtri — es\se dpor\tet iti\dem ego sum \ 

patri\. 
Aman\ti sup^pdrdsi\tor — hor\tor; as\to, admdne\d, gau\deo. 

Plaut. Amph. iii. 4. 1, 9, 10. 

2. De supe\ro quum hue \ dcces\sent \ fdciam ut \ sit mddidus 

so\brium. Plaut. Amph. iii. 4. 18. 

3. Nam mihi j quidem hercle qui | minus || liceat \ dec j minita\- 

rier. Plaut. Amph. iii. 4. 3. 
Non sunt \ tabell\& sed equus quern \ \ mise\re Achl\m Llg\neum. 

Plaut. Bacch. iv. 9. 112. 
Atrl d& duo \f retires j cluent \\ feels' se fdcX niis mdx\imum. 

4. Qua si | non as\tu pro\viden\tur me aut \ herum \ pessum\da~ 

bunt. Ter. And. i. 3. 3. 

5. Sine clas\se, sine que exer\citu \\ et tan\tb~ numeWo militum. 

O Tro\ja! o pdtria! o Per ] gdmum! \\ o Prid\me! peri\isti \ 

senex. Plaut. Bacch. iv. 9. 6, 9. 
Cdpiam j cor b nam mihi \ in caput j] assimu\ldbo \ me esse 

e brium. Plaut. Amph. iii. 4. 16. 

6. Amat \ ! sdpit\, recti \fdcit \\ dnimo \ quando ob\sequitur \ suo. 

Plaut. Amph. iii. 4. 12. 



CHOLIAMBUS, OR SCAZON. 

§ 220. A choliambus (x«o\iajuL§os, i. e. x<»\ds Ufx€os, " lame iambus ") 
called also Scazon ((TKafav, i. e. " halting " or " limping " iambus) ; 
and which is still further denominated Hipponacton, from Hip- 
ponax, a satirical writer who invented this metre, is an iambus 
trimeter acatalecticus, subject to the same laws as the ordinary 
iambus except that the fifth foot is always an iambus, the sixth 
always a spondee or trochee. 

Miser | Cdtujle, — delsinds \ ine ptire, 

Et quod | vides \ peri sse — per\ditum \ ducas. Catull. viii. 1, 2. 



§ 221—223.] prosody. 337 



TROCHAIC VERSE. 

§ 2*21. The most usual form of this verse is tetrameter catalecticus, 
called sometimes septenarius trochaicus, from the number of com- 
plete feet in it. It requires incision at the close of the second 
dipodia. The comic writers, however, do not always observe this 
division of the verse. They also use a tribrach, a spondee, a dactyl, 
or an anapgest, in any foot but the last, which is always a trochee. 
The hiatus also occurs. 

Opti\me, optiyme, 6pti\mam operdm || das da\tdm pilVchre Io\cds, 
Neque ego hdc \ node \ longiorem \\ me vi\disse j cense p, 
Nisi item \ undm \ verbe\rdtus || qudm pependi \ perpetlm. 
Plaut. Amph. i. 1. 122. 

Obs. The comic writers use a tetrameter acatalecticus, called also oc- 
tonarius trochaicus, from the number of its complete feet, subject to the 
same laws as the septenarius. The hiatus occurs here also, especially 
where the incision takes place. 

Sine mo\do et mdldesti a sum \\ sine bo\no jure dtque ho nor e. 
Petuldns, | proterlvo, lrd\cundo \\ animo, inldomito, incogitdtd. 
Incre dibilis, \ impos que ammi \\ inamdbilis, il\lepidus 1 \ vied. 
Plaut. Bacc. iv. 3. 3. 1,2. 

Obs. Horace uses a dimeter catalecticus, in combination with another 
line. 

Non e\bur ne que dure um. Hor. Od. ii. 18. 1. 



io:n t ic a majori. 

§ 222. The ordinary form of this verse is tetrameter brachy- 
catalecticus ; called also Sotadicus, from Sotades, who used it. In 
the place of the regular foot a double trochee, (dichoreus) may be 
employed. 

Noctesque di esque dssidu 6 satis siCperque est]. Plaut. Amph. i. 
1. 14. 



IONIC A MIXORI. 



§ 223. Into a line of Ionic a minori verse, pure feet are alone 
admissible. 

Miserdrum est j neque amorl \ dare ludum j neque dulcl. Hor. 
Od. iii. 12. 1. 

Q 



338 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 224, 225. 

Obs. Two Ionic a minori feet uu _> | W u _-, are called an Ana- 
creontic foot. 

If from this the first two short syllables be removed, there 

remain an Ionic a majore, and a spondee ; u w | ; and for 

these may be substituted their equivalents in time ; i e. a double 
iambus and a spondee ; for which last a trochee may be used ; 
_ V, - \j | - *. 

Prefixing to the feet just named the two short syllables ori- 
ginally taken away, or their representative, the following is ob- 
tained. 

N.B. This forms the base of the Galliambus mentioned below, § 23 . 



CHORIAMBIC VEESE. 

§ 224. When the lyric poets use the Choriambic feet, they 
preserve them pure, yet always subjoin them to a base. 

In the comic writers parts occur which, according to the view 
taken by some editors, are to be regarded as Choriambic lines 
combined with lines of a different metre. Yet other editors take 
a different view of the matter by placing all in one line, forming 
thus what are called asynartete verses (aowa pT^ros, " not united ") ; 
from their being formed of heterogeneous feet. Such is the pas- 
sage in Ter. Ad. iv. 4. 4. 

Membra metu | debilia 

Sunt animus timore 
Obstipuit | pectore nil 

Sistere consili quit. 

These are sometimes placed thus : 

Membra metu debilia sunt : animus timore obstipuit. 
Pectore consistere nihil consili quit. Vah ! 



COMPOUND VERSES. 

§ 225. These are verses subjoined to others of a different kind, 
which latter form what is called their " base." 

N. B. In the following examples the base is indicated by + affixed to 
it. 



§ 226.] prosody. 339 

§ 226. Verses with a Dactylic Base. 

1 . Versus Aristophamcus ; " Aristophanic verse : " a trochaic 
monometer with a dactyl as its base. 

Lydid | + die per \ omnes. \ 
Cur neque | + mili\tdris.\ Hor. Od. i. 8. 1, 5. 
Obs. Some consider this to be either ah iambic monometer catalectic or a 
bacchiac affixed to a choriambic base. 



Cur neque mi | + Maris. 
Lydid die | + per omnes. 
N.B. Verses formed from trochees after a dactylic base are called 
Logacedic (Koyos prose, doibrj a song) ; because they are supposed to com- 
bine poetry and prose. 

2. Alcaicus decasyllabus ; "Alcaic decasyllable : " so called from 
its use in the Alcaic metre, and the number of syllables (10) 
which it contains : a trochaic monometer, with a dactylic dimeter 
as its base. 

— \j \j \ — ^j v-/ I -j- — \j 1 — CJ 

Si gemilndnt Cory \ + bdntes \ cera.\ 

Jupiter | ipse ru \ -j- ens tu\multu.\ Hor. Od. i. 16. 8, 12. 

3. Elegiambus ; "Elegiambus : " an iambic dimeter with a base 
consisting of a dactylic trimeter catalecticus in dissyllabum. The 
last syllable of the base is sometimes long in arsis. Incision coin- 
cides with the termination of the base. 

Scribere \ versicu\lds\\ + amo\re per\cussum \ grdvi. 

Inachi\d fure\re \\ + silvis \ hono\rem de\cutit. Hor. JEpod. xi. 
2. 6. 

Obs. The first and third feet of the iambic dimeter may be spondees. 

4. Versus Archilochius major ; " greater Archilochian verse : " a 
trochaic dimeter brachycatalecticus, added to a dactylic tetrameter 
as its base. 

— W — WW — w \ — \j \j -\- — \J \ — \J \ — V 

Solvitur | dcris M\ems gra\ta vice + veris \ et Fd\voni. 
Obs. The first three feet of the base admit spondees. 
Alter \no ter\rdm quati unt pede \ -\- dum grd\vis Cy\cldpiim. 
Ac neque \ jam stabufis gdu\det pecus \ -j- aut d\rator \ igni. Hor. 
Od. i. 4. 7, 3. 

Q 2 



340 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 227. 



§ 227. Verses with a Spondaic Base. 

1. Versus Pherecrateils, " Pherecratean Verse:" formed from 
a Logacedic verse (see § 226. 1. JST.B.), consisting of a dactyl and 
a trochee, added to a spondee as the base. 

Portum | -j- nonne vildes ut. 

Vixdu | + rare carina. Hor. Od. i. 14. 3, 7. 

2. Versus Phalcecius ; " Phaloecian verse : " a Logaoedic verse 
(see § 226. 1. N~.B.), consisting of a dactyl and a trochaic dimeter 
brachycatalectic, with a spondee as the base. 

— — j -J- — \j \j j — v-* ] — «w» J — y j 

Passer | + delict d? me\(e pu\ elM \ 

Quicum] + ludere | quemln si\nu te\nere.\ Catull. ii. 1, 2. 

06s. In the place of the spondee, a trochee or an iambus or a tribrach 
is sometimes found. 

Ari\ + da modo j pumi\ce expd\litum. 

Meas + esse alt quid piitdre \ nugas.\ 
Obs. At Catullus, xlv. 21. the line begins either with a pyrrbic or a 
dactyl : which of the two it is must be decided by the position of est. If 
est is considered as belonging to line 20 , line 21. begins with a pyrrhic; 
if to line 21., then the first foot is a dactyl. 

Ne po-\-nas Neme\sis re jponat \ Ate \ (est) or 
(Est) ve?ie-\-mens Dea; | l<sde\re hanc cd\veto. 

3. Ve?*sus Glyconicus ; " Gly conic verse : " is a choriambus and 
an iambus, added to a spondee as the base. 

--|+-^-N-| 
Sic te | + Diva potens \ Cypri. 
Vento + rumque regat \ pater. Hor. Od. i. 3. 1, 3. 
Obs. Catullus sometimes uses an iambus, sometimes a trochee in the 
first foot. 

Puel j + Ice et pueri in\tegri. Catull. Carm. Scec- 3. 
Coll is \+'&! Helico'nei. Catull. 61. 1. 

4. Versus Asclepiadeus minor ; or the " less Asclepiad verse : " 
has two choriambi and an iambus affixed to a spondee as the base. 
Incision takes place at the close of the first choriambus. 

--|+-^v,-||-^^-|v^ 

Mace | + nas atams \ \ edite re gibus. 

et I -+- presidium et \\ dulce decus | meum. Hor. Od. i. 1. 1, 3. 



§ 228, 229.] prosody. 341 

5. Versus Asclepiadeus major ; the " greater Asclepiad verse ; " is 
formed by the addition of three ehoriambi and an iambus to a 
spondee as the base. Incision takes place at the close of the first 
and second ehoriambi. 

|+-wJ-f[-"ww- || - v/ v/ - I w i* 

Nulldm | + V are sacra || vite prius || sevens dr\borem. 
Siccis | + omnia nam \ \ dura deus \ \ proposult ; \ neque. Hor. 
Od. i. 18. 1, 3. 

§ 228. Verses with an Iambic Base. 

1. Versus Alcaicus hendecasyllabus ; the "Alcaic hendecasyl- 
lable ; " so called from its having eleven syllables : is formed of 
a choriambus and an iambus, superadded to a base consisting of 
an iambic dimeter hypercatalectic. Incision takes place at the 
close of the base. 

c -!^-|-|| + -^-|^- 

Dlsso\lve frl\gus || + ligna super \foco. Hor. Od. i. 9. 5. 

Amo\re pec\cds.\\ + Quicquid habes, \ age. Hor. Od. i. 27. 17. 
Obs. Although from the base being iambic, an iambus might be ex- 
pected to be at least frequent in the first foot, yet it is but rarely used ; 
the spondee is generally employed. 

2. Versus iambelegus is a dactylic trimeter catalecticus in dis- 
syllabum, preceded by an iambic dimeter acatalectic ; with incision 
after the base. The last syllable of the base is sometimes long in 
arsis. 

KJ — [<-»"" J ^ "" [ V-» — [ ] -J \J \J ]— \J \J S 

Nwes\que de\ducunt \ Jovem || + nunc mare | nunc silu\m. 
6ccd\sid\nem de | die \ \ + dumqiie virent genu\a. 
Leva\re dlc\tls pec\tora \\ + sdllici\tudini\bus. 

§ 229. Verses with a Trochaic Base. 

1. Versus Sapphicus hendecasyllabus; the "Sapphic hendeca- 
syllable ; " so called from its being used by the poetess Sappho, and 
containing eleven syllables, consists of a Logaoedic verse (see 
§ 226. 1. N.B.) formed of a dactyl and two trochees, following a 
base composed of a trochaic monometer, of which the second foot 
is always a spondee. Caesura occurs at the first foot of the dactyl. 

_v,| |_j v^ w I - v I - C I 

Jam sa\tis ter\+ rls — nwis \ dtque \ dir& 
Grdndi\nls mi\+sit — pater \ et ru\bente. Hor. Od. i. 2. 1, 2. 
Q 3 



342 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 230, 231. 

Obs. The caesura is occasionally, yet rarely, placed after the first short 
syllable of the dactyl. 

Mercu \rlfd\ citnde — nepos At] lantis. 

Nunti\um cur\v&que — ly\r& pa \rentem. Hor. Od. i. 10. 1, 6. 

2. Versus Sapphicus major ; the "greater Sappjiic verse" adds 
to the base mentioned in the foregoing rule (viz. a trochaic mo- 
nometer), two chorianibi, and an iambic monometer catalectic. The 
caesura is at the first syllable of the first choriambus. 

— v-» I — — j -f- uu-|-v;w-|w-|G 

Tede)os 6r\-\-o — Sybdrin \ cur prop eras \ dman\do. 
Oderlt cam\-\-pum — pdtiens \ pulveris at\que so\lis. Hor. Od. 
i. 8.2,4. 

§ 230. Verse with an Ionic a minori Base. 

Versus Galliambicus ; the "Galliambic verse" is an Ionic a minori 
dimeter catalectic, superadded to an Ionic a minori dimeter base, 
as explained at § 223. obs. Incision follows the base. 

The latter part of the verse is ^ v-» — | w w - |, for which may- 
be substituted, as explained at § 223. obs. 

vj^/ 1 WVJ ^ \J\J yj i \J 

so that the whole runs thus : — 

— | UUyUUy j || ^-^U | uu W wu w | w 

Super | altd vectus \ Atys || + celert rate mart a 
A di it que opdcd j slims || -f- redi ' mitd Idea de &. 
Stimulatus ubifu\renti || -f rdbie vagus ani 'mi. 
Et \ jam recente \ terra, |] + sola \ sanguine mdculdns. 
Ego | viridis algi da Ida \ | -f- neve dmictd Idea co\ldm. 

Obs. A pure Ionic dimeter occurs as the base ; and also an epitri- 
tus quartus in the base in the room of the double trochee. 

Et eorum omnia adirem \\ furi bundd latibu la. 
De volvit lenta acuta \\ sibi \ ponder e sili.ee. Catull. Ixix. 1, 3, 
4, 7, 54 5 70, 5. 



HORATIAX METRES. 

N.B. The Roman numerals denote the Books ; the Arabic, the Ode. 

§ 231. 1. Alcaic Strophe: two Alcaic hendecasyllables, an Alcaic 
enneasyllable, and an Alcaic decasyllable. (See §§ 228. 1. ; 219. 
d; 226. 2.) 






§ 231.] prosody. 343 

1. 9. 16. 17. 26, 27. 29. 31. 34. 35. 37. — II. 1. 3. 5. 7. 9. 11. 
13. 14. 15. 17. 19. 20. —III. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 17. 21. 23. 26. 29. 
— IV. 4. 9. 14. 15. 

2. Alcmanic Metre: alternate lines of Hexameters and Alcmanic 
verses. (See §§ 210.213.) 

I. 7. 28. — Epod. 12. 

3. First Arcliilochian Metre : alternate lines of Hexameters and 
lesser Archilochian lines. (See §§ 210. 214.) 

IV. 7. 

4. Second Archilochian Metre : an Hexameter and a Versus 
Iambelegus, alternately. (See §§ 210. 228. 2.) 

Epod. 13. 

5. Third Archilochian Metre : an Iambic senarius, with pen- 
theinimeral caesura, and an Elegiambus, alternately. (See §§ 219. 
226. 3.) 

Epod. 11. 

6. Fourth Archilochian Metre: a greater Arcliilochian verse, 
and an Iambic trimeter catalectic, with penthemimeral caesura. 
(See §§226.4.; 219.5.) 

1.4. 

7. First Asclepiadean Metre, formed by a continuous use of the 
less Asclepiad in a system. (See § 227. 4.). 

I. 1.— III. 30. — IV. 8. 

8. Second Asclepiadean Metre : — A Gly conic verse and the lesser 
Asclepiad, alternately. (See § 227. 3, 4.) 

I. 3. 13. 19. 36. — III. 9. 15. 19. 24. 25. 28. — IV. 1. 3. 

9. The Greater Asclepiadean Metre : a continuous series of the 
greater Asclepiad verse. (See § 227. 5.) 

I. 11. 18. — IV. 10. 

10. First Asclepiadean Strophe : — three less Asclepiadean lines 
followed by a Glyconic. (See § 227. 4. 3.) 

I. 6. 15. 24. 33. — II. 12. —III. 10. 16. — IV. 5. 12. 

1 1 . Second Asclepiadean Strophe : two less Asclepiadean lines, 
a Pherecratean line, and a Glyconic. (See § 227. 4. 1. 3.) 

I. 5. 14. 21. 23.— III. 7. 13. — IV. 13. 

12. Hexameter : usually with caesura semiquinaria. (See § 210.) 
Epistles and Satires. 

Q 4 



344 LATIN GRAMMAR. [§ 231. 

13. First Iambic Metre: a continuous system of Iambic senarii, 
with the penthemimeral csesura. (See § 219.) 

Epod. 17. 

14. Second Iambic Metre : an Iambic senarius, with penthemi- 
meral csesura, and an Iambic dimeter, alternately. (See § 219. 
219. c.) 

Epod. 1 to 10. 

15. Ionic a Minori : a system of Ionic a Minori verses. (See 
§ 223.) 

III. 12. 

16. First Tythiambic Metre : Hexameter, with caesura semiqui- 
naria, and an Iambic dimeter, alternately. (See §§ 210. 219. c.) 

Epod. 14, 15. 

Obs. At line 9. Epod. 15., Horace uses the trochaic caesura. 

17. Second Pythiambic Metre : Hexameter, with csesura semi- 
quinaria, and Iambic senarius, alternately. (See §§ 210. 219.) 

Epod. 16. 

Obs. At line 21. Epod. 16., Horace uses the trochaic caesura. 

18. Sapphic Strophe: three Sapphic hendecasyllables followed 
by an Adonius. (See §§ 229. 1. ; 215.) 

I. 2. 10. 12. 20. 22. 25. 30. 32. 38. — H. 2. 4. 6. 8. 10. 16.— III. 
8. 11. 14. 18. 20. 22. 27.— IV. 2. 6. 11. 

19. Greater Sapphic Metre : an Aristophanic verse, and a greater 
Sapphic verse, alternately. (See §§ 226. 1.; 229. 2.) 

1.8. 

20. Trochaic Metre : a Trochaic dimeter catalectic and Iambic 
trimeter catalectic. (See §§221. obs. 219. b.) 

II. 18. 



§ 231.] TABLE OF HORATIAN MEASURES. 



345 



Table of Reference to the Horatian Metres. 



Book 


I. 


Book 


II 




Book 


III. 


Book 


IV. 


Epodes. 


Ode. 
i. 


Metre. 
- 7 


Ode.^ 
i. 


Metre. 
- 1 


Ode. 
i. 


Metre. 


Ode. # 
i. 


Metre. 
- 8 


Ode.^ 
i. 


Metre. 
- 14 


ii. 


- 18 


ii. 


- 


18 


ii. 




ii. 


- 18 


ii. 


- 14 


iii. 


- 8 


iii. 


- 


I 


iii. 


- 1 


iii. 


- 8 


iii. 


- 14 


iv. 


- 6 


iv. 


- 


18 


iv. 


- 1 


iv. 


- 1 


iv. 


- 14 


v. 


- 11 


v. 


- 


1 


v. 


- 1 


v. 


- 10 


v. 


- 14 


vi. 


- 10 


vi. 


- 


18 


vi. 


- 1 


vi. 


- 18 


vi. 


- 14 


vii. 


- 2 


vii. 


- 


1 


vii. 


- 11 


vii. 


- 3 


vii. 


- 14 


viii. 


- 19 


viii. 


- 


18 


viii. 


- 18 


viii. 


- 7 


viii. 


- 14 


ix. 


- 1 


ix. 


- 


1 


ix. 


- 8 


ix. 


- 1 


ix. 


- 14 


x. 


- 18 


X. 


- 


IS 


x. 


- 10 


x. 


- 19 


X. 


- 14 


xi. 


- 9 


xi. 


- 


1 


xi. 


- 18 


xi. 


- 18 


xi. 


- 5 


xii. 


- 18 


xii. 


- 


10 


xii. 


- 15 


xii. 


- 10 


xii. 


- 2 


xiii. 


- 8 


xiii. 


- 


1 


xiii. 


- 11 


xiii. 


- 11 


xiii. 


- 4 


xiv. 


- 11 


xiv. 


- 


1 


xiv. 


- 18 


xiv. 


- 1 


xiv. 


- 16 


1 XV. 


- 10 


XV. 


- 


1 


XV. 


- 8 


XV. 


- 1 


XV. 


- 16 


xvi. 


- 1 


xvi. 


- 


18 


xvi. 


- 10 






xvi. 


- 17 


xvii. 


- 1 


xvii. 


- 


1 


xvii. 


- 1 






xvii. 


- 13 


xviii. 


- 9 


xviii 


- 


20 


xviii. 


- 18 










xix. 


- 8 


xix. 


- 


1 


xix. 


- 8 










XX. 


- 18 


XX. 


r. 


1 


XX. 


- 18 










xxi. 
xxii. 

xxiii. 
xxiv. 


- 11 

- 18 

- 11 

- 10 








xxi. 
xxii. 
xxiii. 
xxiv. 


- 1 

- 18 

- 1 

- 8 






Carm.Ssec. 18 
Epistles - 12 
Satires - 12 


XXV. 


- 18 








XXV. 


- 8 










xxvi. 


- 1 








xxvi. 


- 1 










xxvii. 


- 1 








xxvii. 


- 18 










xxviii. 


- 2 








xxviii. 


- 8 










xxix. 


- 1 








xxix. 


- 1 










XXX. 

xxxi. 


- 18 

- 1 








XXX. 


- 7 










xxxii. 


- 18 




















xxxiii. 


- 10 




















xxxiv. 


- 1 




















XXXV. 


- 1 




















xxxvi. 


- 8 




















xxxvii. 


- 1 




















xxxviii. 


- 18 





















346 



LATIN GRAM 31 AR. 



[§ 232. 



232. Table or the Romas Calendar, 



5 t^\ 

= X ° 


March. 
May. 
July. 
October. 


January. ' T " 
. • 'June. 
August „ . , 

-r^ ° , 'September. 
December. X7 r , 

, .November. 


February 
has 28 days, 
in Leap Year, 


Mode 
tnti 

of 1, 


have 31 days. 


have 31 days. 


have :^0 days. 


29 days, 


1 


Calendce. 


Calendce. 


Calendce. 


Calendar. 


9 


VI. | 


iv. ") Ante 


iv. \ Ante 


iv. | Ante. 


3 


v. ! Ante 


in. J Xonas. 


in. J Xonas. 


in. j Xonas. 


4 


iv. f Xonas. 


Pridie Xonas. 


Pridie Xonas. 


Pridie Xonas. 


5 


in. J 


Nonce. 


Nonce. 


Nonce. 


6 


Pridie Xonas. 


VIII. 1 




VIII. ~ 




VIII. " 




7 


Nonce. 


vn. 1 




VII. 




vn* 




8 


V1IT. 1 




VI. 1 


Ante 


VI. 


Ante 


VI. 


^ Ante 


9 


VII. 




> 
v. 


Idus. 


> 

V. 


Idus. 


V. 


" Idus. 


10 


VI. 


< Ante 


IV. 




IV. 




IV. 




11 


V. 


Idus. 


III. J 




III. J 




hi. j 




12 


IV. 




Pridie Idus. 


Pridie Idus. 


Pridie Idus. 


13 


in. . 




Idus. 


Idus. 


Idus. 


14 


Pridie Idus. 


XIX." 




xvin. 




XVI." 




15 


Idas. 


xvin. 




XVII. 




XV. 




16 


XVII. " 




xvn. 




XVI. 




XIV. 


o 


17 


XVI. 




XVI. 




XV. 




xin. 


"3 «| 


18 


XV. 




XV. 


o 


XIV. 


o 


XII. 




19 
20 


XIV. 

xui. 


~+3 « 


XIV. 
XIII. 


+3 J 


XIII. 
XII. 


+3 J^ 


XI. 
X. 


jl 


21 
22 


XII. 
XI. 




X1T. 
XI. 


u 

MS* 


XI. 
X. 


-it 


IX. 

vin. 




23 


X. 


C § ir - 


X. 




IX. 


II 


vn. 


^ -^ 


24 


IX. 


IS z 


IX. 


o.'| 


VIII. 


VI. 


+a Sa 


25 


VIII. 


" J J 


VIII. 


~ — 


VII. 


f 2 


v. 


<~ 


26 


VII. 


•+2 2 


VII. 


<~ 


VI. 


«J 


IV. 




27 


VI. 


< 


VI. 




V. 




nt- 




28 


V. 




V. 




IV. 




Pridie Cal. 


29 


IV. 




IV. 




in. 




of fol. Month. 


30 


III. 




III. 


j 


Pridie Cal. 




31 


Pridie Cal. 
offoL Month. 


Pridie Cal. 
of fol. Month. 


of fol. Month. 





§ 233.] MODE OF RECKONING. 347 



Mode or Reckoning the Days of the Month. 

The Roman month had in it three principal days, — the 
Calends, the Nones, the Ides. From each of these the days 
were reckoned on to the following principal division : for instance, 
the day after the Calends was reckoned so many days before the 
Nones ; the day after the Nones was so many days before the 
Ides ; the day after the Ides was so many days before the Calends 
of the month next in succession. It should also be noticed, that 
each of these principal days was included in the calculation : so 
that the second day before them was styled die tertio ante Calen- 
das, or Nonas, or Idus, as the case might be. Further, as the 
names of the months are strictly adjectives, having mensis' to be 
supplied with them, they are used in concord with Calendar, Nonas, 
Idus, according to the case. 

Hence it will be seen that the Roman mode of computing the 
days of the month differed entirely from that in use amongst us. 
Thus, 23rd December would be die decimo ante Calendas Janu- 
arias ; 8th August, die sexto ante Idus Augustas ; 20th July, die 
decimo tertio ante Calendas Augustas; 15th May, Idibus Maiis; 
14th December, die undevigesimo ante Calendas Januarias ; 3rd 
December, die tertio ante Nonas Decembres. 

In expressing the days as above given, die and ante are some- 
times omitted ; so that we find such expressions as decimo Ca- 
lendas Januarias; sexto Idus Augustas ; decimo tertio Calendas Au- 
gustas ; undevigesimo Calendas Januarias; tertio Nonas Decembres. 

Further, we sometimes find yet another mode of reckoning, — 
ante diem decimum Calendas Januarias. This is only to be ex- 
plained on the supposition, that originally ante was thrown back 
from its right place, and prefixed to die ; and that subsequently 
the ablative case became changed into the accusative, thus ap- 
pearing as if it depended on the preposition. 

In leap year both the 24th and 25th of February were termed 
sexto ante Calendas Martias : the 25th was sometimes called bi- 
sextus, also bisextum. Hence the year was denominated bissextilis. 



Computation of Monet. 



§ 233. The most usual way of computing money among the 
Romans was by the Sestertius, sometimes called Sestertius Nummus 
and sometimes Nummus alone ; which was worth, of English money, 
rather more than twopence, viz., 2d. '5 farth. It was often ex- 
pressed by the abbreviation L.L.S., as representing either Libellce 
et Semis, or IIS. (i. e. duo et semis). In the course of time these 



348 



LATIN GRAMMAR. 



[§ 233, 234. 



marks were placed together, and from them was formed H., — so 
that the abbreviated description of a sestertius in ordinary use is 
H.S. The word sestertium (which is a mere term for a sum, not the 
name of a coin) was used to express 1000 sestertii. Strictly speak- 
ing, it is the contracted form of sestertiorum, the genitive plural of 
sestertius, and is dependent on millia, to be supplied. In course 
of time, however, it came to be regarded and treated as a neuter 
noun of the second declension. When, then, a numeral adjective 
is joined with this word, so many thousand sesterces are signified : 
octo sestertia, 8000 sesterces ; but octo seste?*tii, 8 sesterces. Capit 
ille ex suis prcediis sexcenta sestertia, ego centena ex meis. Cic. 
Parad. 6. i. e. 600,000, 100,000. 

Moreover, sestertium joined to a numeral adverb is considered 
and constructed as a noun of the singular number only ; and the 
two together denote so many hundred thousand sesterces, as if 
centena millia were to be supplied. 

Quum ei testamento sestertium millies relinquatur. Cic. Off. iii. 24. 

Ad summam sestertii decies in cerarium retulit. Liv. xlv. 4. 

Sexagies sestertio margaritam mercatus est. Suet. Cass. 50. 
i,e. 100,000,000; 1,000,000; 6,000,000, sesterces, respectively. 



§ 234. Abbreviations in more Common Use. 



A. Aulus. 
2E. ASdilis. 
Ap. Appius. 

C. Caius* 

Cal. Calendce, according to its 

case. 
Cn. Cnceus. 
Cos. Consul, according to its 

case. 
Coss. Consules, in its proper case. 

D. Decimus. 

F. Filius. 

G. Gains. 
Gn. Gnceus. 

Id. Idus, according to its case. 
Imp. Imperator, according to its 
case. 



K. Kceso. 

L. Lucius. 

M. Marcus. 

M\ Manius. 

Mam. Mamercus. 

1ST. Nepos. 

N". Numerius. 

Non. Nonce, according to its case. 

O. M. or Opt. Max. Optimus 

Maximus. 
P. Publius. 

P. C. Patres Conscripti. 
PL Plebis. 

Pont. Max. Pontifex Maximus. 
Pop. Populus. 
P. R. Populus Romanus. 
Pr. Prator. 



§ 234.] 



TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 



349 



Prsef. Prcefectus. 

Proc. Proconsul. 

Q. or Qu. Quintus. 

Q. B. F. F. Q. S. Quod bonum, 

felix, faustum que sit. 
Q. D. B. V. Quod Deus bene 

vertat 
Q. F. F. Q. S. Quod felix 

faustumque sit. 
Quir. Quirites. 
B>esp. Respublica. 
S. Senatus. 
S. Sextus. 



S. (in letters). Salutem. 

S. C. Senatus Consultum. 

S. D. P. Salutem dicit plurimam. 

Ser. Servius. 

S. P. Q. R. Senatus Populus que 

Homanus. 
Sp. Spurius. 
S. V. B. E. E. V. St oaZe* fcne 

es£, ego vafeo. 
T. Tzte. 

Ti. or Tib. Tiberius. 
Tr. Tribunus. 
Tr. PL Tribunus Plebis* 



THE END. 






London : 

Spottiswoodes and Shaw, 

New-street- Square. 



i 






?$ 



